CEYLON ELECTRICITY BOARD SRI LANKA CLEAN ENERGY AND ACCESS IMPROVEMENT PROJECT

(ADB Loan No. 2518-SRI)

PART 1: SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE MODERNISATION PROJECT
PACKAGE A – CONSTRUCTION OF NATIONAL SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE AND INSTALLATION OF SCADA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Procurement of Plant
Design, Supply and Install
Single-Stage, Two-Envelope Bidding Procedure BIDDING DOCUMENT for
Establishment of: National System Control Centre and SCADA System

VOLUME 5 of 8
Part II- REQUIREMENTS
Section 6-Employer’s Requirements Part B-Technical Specification

Issued on: February 2011 Invitation for Bids No: CEB/AGM/TR/2010/IFB/010 ICB No.: CEB/AGM/TR/2010/ICB/010 Employer: Ceylon Electricity Board Country: Sri Lanka © Transmission Design Branch, CEB

Transmission Division Ceylon Electricity Board, P.O. Box 540, Colombo 2 Sri Lanka February 2011 Document-Revision 1

Contents - Summary Description
VOLUME 1 of 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders (ITB) ------------------------------------------------ 1-1
This section specifies the course of actions to be taken by Bidders in the preparation and submission of their Bids following a Single-Stage, Two-envelop bidding procedure. Information is also provided on the submission, opening, and evaluation of bids and on the award of contract.

Section 2 - Bid Data Sheet (BDS) --------------------------------------------------------- 2-1
This section consists of provisions that are specific to each procurement and supplement the information or requirements included in Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders.

Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC) -------------------------- 3-1
This section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and qualify Bidders. In accordance with section 1-E (ITB 28-41), no other factors, methods or criteria shall be used. The Bidder shall provide all the information requested in the forms included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms).

VOLUME 2 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF) -------------------------------------------------------- 4A-1
Part A-Price Bid This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.

VOLUME 3 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF) -------------------------------------------------------- 4B-1
Part B-Technical Bid This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.

Section 5 - Eligible Countries (ELC) ----------------------------------------------------- 5-1
This section contains the list of eligible countries.

VOLUME 4 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) ---------------------------------------- 6A-1
Part A-Scope of Works

VOLUME 5 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6B-1
Part B-Technical Specification

VOLUME 6 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6C-1
Part C-Drawings

VOLUME 7 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6D-1
Part D-Supplementary Information,

Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6E-1
Part E-Bank Guarantees, Certificates and Change Orders

VOLUME 8 OF 8 PART III CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
Section 7 - General Conditions of Contract (GCC) ---------------------------------- 7-1
This Section contains the general clauses to be applied in all contracts. These Conditions are subject to the variations and additions set out in Section 8 (Special Conditions of Contract).

Section 8 - Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) ----------------------------------- 8-1
This Section supplements the General Conditions of Contract (GCC). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GCC. The clause number of the SCC is the corresponding clause number of the GCC.

Section 9 - Contract Forms (COF) --------------------------------------------------------- 9-1
This Section contains the Letter of Acceptance, the Contract Agreement and Appendices to the Contract Agreement which, once completed, will form part of the Contract.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

PART B – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – SCADA/EMS, TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, OUTSTATIONS, POWER SUPPLY AND NSCC BUILDING

CONTENTS CHAPTER No. 1. TITLE PAGE No.

INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................... 24 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 SCADA/EMS MASTER STATION .................................................................................. 24 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE ........................................................... 25 OUTSTATIONS AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS ....................................... 26 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM ........................................................ 30 NSCC BUILDING ............................................................................................................ 31 CONTRACTUAL AND PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF SUPPLY ................................... 31 1.6.1 SCADA/EMS System ...................................................................................... 31 1.6.2 Telecommunication System ............................................................................ 32 1.6.3 Outstation and Substation Adaptation Works ................................................. 32 1.6.4 Colombo City Distribution Control Centre ....................................................... 33 1.6.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply System ............................................................. 33 1.6.6 NSCC Building................................................................................................. 33 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURES OF PRODUCTS ...................... 34

1.7 2.

NSCC SCADA/EMS ................................................................................................................. 35 2.1 2.2 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 35 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 35 2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................ 35 2.2.2 System Architecture ........................................................................................ 35 2.2.3 Initial and Ultimate Sizing ................................................................................ 36 2.2.4 Reliability and Availability ................................................................................ 36 2.2.5 Risks ................................................................................................................ 36 SCADA APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 37 2.3.1 Communication................................................................................................ 37 2.3.1.1 Data Acquisition........................................................................................ 37 2.3.1.2 ICCP Data Links ....................................................................................... 37 2.3.2 Data Processing .............................................................................................. 37 2.3.2.1 Measured Values...................................................................................... 38 2.3.2.2 Status Indications - Digital Points ............................................................. 39 2.3.2.3 Derived Data ............................................................................................. 40 2.3.2.4 Meter Values ............................................................................................ 41 2.3.2.5 Tap Position .............................................................................................. 41 2.3.2.6 Data Quality Attributes ............................................................................. 41 2.3.2.7 Controls .................................................................................................... 42 2.3.3 Alarm and Event Processing ........................................................................... 43 2.3.3.1 Definition ................................................................................................... 43 2.3.3.2 Event Handling ......................................................................................... 43 2.3.3.3 Alarm Management .................................................................................. 44 2.3.3.4 Printing of Alarm & Event Lists ................................................................. 46 2.3.3.5 Sequence of Events Processing .............................................................. 46 2.3.3.6 Disturbance Monitoring ............................................................................ 46

2.3

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 1 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

2.3.4 Graphic User Interface (GUI) .......................................................................... 46 2.3.4.1 General ..................................................................................................... 46 2.3.4.2 Access Control ......................................................................................... 46 2.3.4.3 Displays .................................................................................................... 47 2.3.4.4 Supervisory Control .................................................................................. 49 2.3.4.5 Sequence Control ..................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.6 Set Point Control ...................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.7 Manual Dressing....................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.8 Trending ................................................................................................... 52 2.3.4.9 Diagram Tagging ...................................................................................... 52 2.3.4.10 Printing ..................................................................................................... 53 2.4 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .............................................................................. 54 2.4.1 General Introduction ........................................................................................ 54 2.4.2 Transmission/Generation Network .................................................................. 54 2.4.3 EMS Database ................................................................................................ 55 2.4.4 Real-Time Network Analysis ........................................................................... 55 2.4.4.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 55 2.4.4.2 Network Topology..................................................................................... 56 2.4.4.3 State Estimation ....................................................................................... 57 2.4.4.4 External Network Modelling and State Calculation .................................. 58 2.4.4.5 Security Assessment ................................................................................ 58 2.4.4.6 Bus Load Forecast ................................................................................... 59 2.4.4.7 Loss Penalty Factors ................................................................................ 59 2.4.4.8 Optimal Power Flow ................................................................................. 59 2.4.4.9 Save cases ............................................................................................... 60 2.4.5 Real-Time Short Circuit Calculation ................................................................ 60 2.4.6 Study Mode Network Analysis ......................................................................... 60 2.4.7 Generating Plant Scheduling ........................................................................... 61 2.4.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 61 2.4.7.2 Plant Scheduling Input Data ..................................................................... 62 2.4.7.3 Plant Scheduling Outputs ......................................................................... 63 2.4.7.4 Generation Scheduling Operating Modes ................................................ 63 2.4.7.5 Reserve and Plant Monitoring .................................................................. 63 2.4.8 Demand Forecasting ....................................................................................... 64 2.4.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 64 2.4.8.2 Long-Term Demand Forecasts ................................................................ 64 2.4.8.3 Short-Term Demand Prediction Facility ................................................... 64 2.4.9 Economic Load Dispatching ............................................................................ 65 2.4.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 65 2.4.9.2 Computer Aided On-Line Load Dispatching ............................................. 65 2.4.9.3 Study Mode Load Dispatching ................................................................. 66 2.4.10 Reactive Power Scheduling ............................................................................ 66 2.4.10.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 66 2.4.10.2 Reactive Scheduler Input Data ................................................................. 66 2.4.10.3 Reactive Power Calculation ..................................................................... 67 2.4.10.4 Reactive Scheduler Outputs ..................................................................... 67 2.4.11 Automatic Control of Generating Plant ............................................................ 67 2.4.11.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 67 2.4.11.2 Automatic Generation Control .................................................................. 67 2.4.12 SCADA/EMS System Interfaces with Power Stations ..................................... 68 2.4.12.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 68 2.4.12.2 Active and Reactive Power Dispatch Schedules ..................................... 68 2.4.12.3 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Displays ........................................ 68 2.4.12.4 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Control .......................................... 69 2.4.12.5 Embedded Generation Data ..................................................................... 69 OTHER APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 69 2.5.1 Switching Schedules ....................................................................................... 69 2.5.2 Job Management ............................................................................................. 69 2.5.3 Fault Detection, Location and Load Restoration (Option) ............................... 70 2.5.4 Expert System Assistance (Option) ................................................................. 70

2.5

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 2 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

2.5.5 2.5.6 2.6 2.7

Under Frequency Load Shedding ................................................................... 70 Load Shedding Schedules .............................................................................. 70

HISTORICAL DATA ........................................................................................................ 70 REPORT GENERATION ................................................................................................ 71 2.7.1 Routine Reports............................................................................................... 71 2.7.2 Energy Reports ................................................................................................ 71 DATABASE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................... 72 2.8.1 General ............................................................................................................ 72 2.8.2 Data Entry........................................................................................................ 73 2.8.3 Data Manipulation Function ............................................................................. 73 2.8.4 Graphic Display Construction .......................................................................... 73 2.8.4.1 Configuration Responsibilities .................................................................. 74 2.8.5 Changes to Configuration Data ....................................................................... 75 2.8.6 Change Control ............................................................................................... 75 DATA EXCHANGE FACILITIES ..................................................................................... 75

2.8

2.9

2.10 OPERATOR TRAINING SIMULATOR ........................................................................... 75 2.10.1 Objectives ........................................................................................................ 75 2.10.2 Simulation Functions ....................................................................................... 76 2.10.3 Relay modelling ............................................................................................... 77 2.11 MASTER STATION HARDWARE .................................................................................. 78 2.11.1 Operating Systems .......................................................................................... 78 2.11.2 Antivirus Software............................................................................................ 78 2.11.3 Servers ............................................................................................................ 78 2.11.4 Data Acquisition Servers ................................................................................. 78 2.11.5 Operator Workstations .................................................................................... 79 2.11.6 Local Area Network (LAN) ............................................................................... 79 2.11.6.1 Ethernet switches ..................................................................................... 79 2.11.6.2 Routers ..................................................................................................... 79 2.11.6.3 LAN Management..................................................................................... 80 2.11.7 Printers ............................................................................................................ 80 2.11.7.1 General ..................................................................................................... 80 2.11.7.2 Laser Printers ........................................................................................... 80 2.11.7.3 Colour Printers .......................................................................................... 80 2.11.8 Video Wall ....................................................................................................... 80 2.11.8.1 Display Units ............................................................................................. 81 2.11.8.2 Controllers ................................................................................................ 81 2.11.8.3 Video Wall Construction ........................................................................... 81 2.11.8.4 Software ................................................................................................... 81 2.11.8.5 Management............................................................................................. 82 2.11.9 System Time.................................................................................................... 82 2.11.10 System Displays .............................................................................................. 82 2.12 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................ 82 2.12.1 Normal Activity Conditions .............................................................................. 82 2.12.2 High Activity Conditions ................................................................................... 83 2.12.3 Computer Start Up........................................................................................... 83 2.12.4 Transfer of Operation ...................................................................................... 83 2.12.5 System Response Times ................................................................................ 83 2.13 CONTROL CENTRE FURNITURE................................................................................. 84 2.13.1 Operator Desks ............................................................................................... 84 2.13.2 Operator Chairs ............................................................................................... 85 2.13.3 Equipment Stands ........................................................................................... 85 2.13.4 Office Furniture ................................................................................................ 85

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 3 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

3.

TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 86 3.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 86 3.1.1 Specification and Design Criteria .................................................................... 86 3.1.2 Reference Documents and Standards ............................................................ 86 3.1.3 Site and Environmental Conditions ................................................................. 87 3.1.4 Existing Control and Telecommunication Facilities ......................................... 87 3.1.5 Implementation Programme ............................................................................ 88 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.................................................. 88 3.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 88 3.2.2 Design and Operational Philosophy ................................................................ 89 3.2.3 Expansion and Upgrade Capability ................................................................. 90 3.2.4 Telecommunication Network ........................................................................... 90 3.2.4.1 Configuration and Topology ..................................................................... 90 3.2.4.2 Network Design ........................................................................................ 91 3.2.4.3 Network Protection ................................................................................... 91 3.2.4.4 Fibre Optic Links....................................................................................... 92 3.2.4.5 Upgrading of Existing PLC Links .............................................................. 97 3.2.4.6 Communication Facilities ......................................................................... 97 3.2.4.7 ICCP links between NSCC and Colombo City DCC ................................ 99 3.2.4.8 Communication Requirements at Power Stations / Substations .............. 99 3.2.5 Telecommunication Management System .................................................... 100 3.2.5.1 TMS Control Centre Equipment ............................................................. 101 3.2.5.2 Time Synchronisation ............................................................................. 101 3.2.6 Teleprotection Signalling Equipment ............................................................. 101 3.2.7 Telephone Network ....................................................................................... 102 3.2.7.1 Telephone Exchange Equipment ........................................................... 102 3.2.7.2 Voice Recording Equipment ................................................................... 102 3.2.8 Power Supply Requirements ......................................................................... 103 3.2.8.1 At NSCC ................................................................................................. 103 3.2.8.2 At Existing Substations and Power Stations .......................................... 103 3.2.8.3 At Employer‘s HQ Building ..................................................................... 103 3.2.9 Equipment Locations ..................................................................................... 103 3.2.10 Transition from Old to the New Telecommunication System ........................ 104 3.2.11 Interfaces with Other Systems/Equipment .................................................... 104 3.2.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................................ 104 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ............................................................... 106 3.3.1 General Requirements .................................................................................. 106 3.3.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 106 3.3.2 Loss Budget Calculations .............................................................................. 106 3.3.3 Safety ............................................................................................................ 107 3.3.4 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 107 3.3.4.1 General ................................................................................................... 107 3.3.4.2 System Capacity and Performance ........................................................ 107 3.3.4.3 Service Channels ................................................................................... 108 3.3.5 SDH Equipment ............................................................................................. 108 3.3.5.1 General ................................................................................................... 108 3.3.5.2 Optical Line Interface ............................................................................. 109 3.3.5.3 Electrical Line Interface .......................................................................... 109 3.3.5.4 Tributary Module..................................................................................... 110 3.3.5.5 Switching Unit ......................................................................................... 110 3.3.5.6 Control and Alarm Functions .................................................................. 110 3.3.5.7 Engineer Order Wire............................................................................... 111 3.3.5.8 Service Data Interface ............................................................................ 111 3.3.5.9 Power Supply Unit .................................................................................. 111 3.3.5.10 Centralized Function............................................................................... 111 3.3.6 Primary Access Multiplexing Equipment ....................................................... 111 3.3.6.1 General ................................................................................................... 111 3.3.6.2 Multiplexer .............................................................................................. 111 3.3.6.3 Alarm Indications .................................................................................... 112

3.2

3.3

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 4 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

...................................6..........................1 General ................ 129 3.........................................................3........5................................6........ 126 3...............................................3..............................................................3 Digital PLC Equipment .... 126 3..... 124 3...7 Cross Connection Equipment ......................... 116 3....4 Interfaces ......3...............................4.........4 User Interfaces .......................................4 TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ............................9 Power Supplies Requirements .................................................................................7....2 Functional Requirements ....................8.....................................4 Analogue and Digital Interfaces .................................4 Automatic Gain Control .....................1 Introduction ....5........................................1 General .... 130 3..... 124 3...........5.........5 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope 3.................................2 Alarm indications .... 130 3..3............3...................2 System Architecture and Design Concept ........................ 121 3.........................................2............................2....................................6.............................2 Chairs 123 3................................... 116 3..6............................5................................................................................................2 Central Computer System ......................... 126 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT .................. 130 3.............................4........................5....... 116 3..............................................4.......................................................................... 125 3..3.........3 System Performance ............. 117 3..... 115 3...7 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant ....7...........2....................................................2 Safety 124 3......... 119 3......................2........................3...1 Introduction .............................1 Introduction ...........................................3.......................7...4..............9 Alarms ........................................................3................... 128 3..10 Optical Fibre Distribution Frames / Patch Panels ..................1 General ......................... 124 3.....2 Functional requirements .......................................................................4.....................3 Network Management Facilities ...................5................................. 129 TELEPHONE SYSTEM ......... 119 3..............4 System Functions .............................. 124 3.................5.................................................3.3........................ 125 3..4......... 131 3..............5 Interface with Other Systems/Equipment ..................6 Test Facilities ................ 132 Page 6B...........................1 Control Desk ..... 130 3......................................5..........5...... 115 3.........5.......... 122 3.2.....................................2........6...2 Functional Requirements ..........3 Carrier Oscillators .2 Functional Requirements .. 112 3..............................................................1 General Requirements .....................................2 Carrier Frequency Allocation ................. 128 3...6.................................................5..................................... 129 3................5 Alarms indications ..........................6 3...6 Power Supplies Requirements ...4...3.................................................................2................... 130 3.............................6..................................2 System Capacity................ 125 3..........................5.....................6............................4.. 126 3.................... 124 3........................ 114 3.............3...........................................................................3 Stands ... 124 3.............................................................. 124 3. 119 3.......4.....7 User Interfaces ............... 129 3.4 Management Functions ..................... 126 3....4 Telecommunication Management Centre Furniture ...........8 Optical Regenerative Repeaters ...7................. 116 3.................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3........................2...............3........ 128 3.....4.........2..................1.....5..............................4.........................................................................................................................................5..............................................................................................2 System Performance .................8....................4......... 117 3.............................................................................4..... 124 3.............................7..3.................2............. 114 3.................................. 123 DIGITAL POWER LINE CARRIER SYSTEM .3 Software .........3.. 123 3.......................... 114 3.................................2.............................................. 130 3...3............3...................8 Monitoring .............1.................................................................5............................................................................ 123 3................................2 Design Characteristics ..................................... 117 3.4.......................................................4.........................3......4................5 Service Telephone. 129 3..............................4...........1 General ........2.................7......7......................................3 Telecommunication Management System ............5 3............2.....3 System Performance ................................... 126 3.....4.........1 General .................................1 General .....................2.................................6....3...............................5.............2.................2..........2..............10 Power Supplies Requirements ........................5.................Section 6 ......... 128 3.......................1 Introduction .3........................... 114 3.............................................1 General ..............

.....4 Extension Facilities ...................................... 145 4.......................... 150 4.......7.......5 Command Outputs ........................7 Software ... 147 4.....7 Analogue Outputs .... 137 3........................................3...........................................................6 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .........7............1 General ..7... 150 4........................5 Switching Capacity ............8 Telephone System Management Console .......................6..... 149 4....2 4.............................3 Maintenance and Diagnostics Facilities .................... 135 3................Section 6 ........................................................... 146 4........3..............................................................................2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) ...........3............... 150 4....................................6.......................................... 145 4..........2 Time Synchronisation ............7... 139 4.....................5.....6.......................5.....................3............................6 Digital Outputs ..........3.............................................................................................7.. 134 3.........2 Digital Inputs ..........................3.........7............................................................. 150 4................................................................................... 137 3....6 Power supply .............................................4 Control Security .................4 Output .......................... 148 4............10 Main Distribution Frame .................................................................. 147 4.............3....... 148 4.......... 133 3..........3.............2 Expansion and Upgrade Capability ....3 INTRODUCTION .....3 Communication Protocols ..................................................................................3...................................................7 Power supplies .....3 System Facilities........................3 Burden . 148 4.....................3 SPC Telephone Exchange Equipment ..11 Voice Recording Equipment ..3.....3.... 136 3..... 134 3..........1 4. 146 4............................8...................................................................3...............................6 External Communications Interfaces............................................................3...........1 General .......................4 4.................................5 Hardware Requirements .................... 137 3....................................... 136 3.....................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3...............................................................6 Transmission Performance ...........3. 137 3........... 138 4..........3........7..5..........................................3........... 132 3...............3................................................7....... 136 3............................................ 145 4..............1 Initial Equipping of Outstations .............. 149 POWER SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS ........ 144 4..........7............... 144 4...................................3 Configuration and Maintenance .............................................................3..3...................................... 147 4.........3.........................................................................5....2 Database Management System ....................................2 Overloads ........... 133 3.........8...................................7...........3.....3..................................................................................................................................... 139 DESIGN OBJECTIVES ....................1 Master Stations ............................ 146 4..........5.....7.....5.......................5 Response time.........................................7...................................... 150 4.....6 Telephone Signalling ..................3..............3 Functional requirements ........3........................5.....................3....7.....5..........................................3...........................1 General ....................... 144 4.......................................................9 Hardware ............... 147 4............3.............1 Configuration Tools ..........7 Status Reporting and Call Detail Recording Facilities ....2 Switching Facilities ......3......7......................................7... 136 3................................. 139 OUTSTATIONS ..........3........................ 146 4... 132 3..............4 Pulse Counting .......................................1 General ........................................................3....................................7......................................7................................................... 133 3.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................3.......5...3.. 148 4...5....................... 147 4.... 147 4............................................... 139 4........9 Telephone Handsets ..............5 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B....................................................................................................... OUTSTATION AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS ................................................................. 148 4..................................................3............... 149 4......7...................... 149 SCADA INTERFACE PANEL ......................8.................................................... 148 4.............................5.3......................................3................3 Analogue Inputs..................... 135 3..................................................................................8 Configuration and Maintenance ...5..............5........................................... 139 4...........................................8 Maintenance ........................................3...............................................4 Synchronisation ................................5 Telephone Numbering Plan ......

...............................9 Fuel Oil Piping .............................................. 151 4...............................................................2....... 158 5....................................................................1 General . 152 5....................12 Crankshaft ........................ 155 5......3 Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions .......................................................................3.........................................3....2...... 150 4................ 153 5....................................................................................4 Controls and Instrumentation ................. 152 5................5.....11 Set Mountings ................................................................................3..................................3............... 157 5...............................5 Bulk Fuel Storage ..........................7 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ................................................6.......................3.............20..........2.................................................2..................................................................1 Alarms Annunciator ...... 155 5................................................................................. 160 5............................. 160 5....2.............................................6 Daily Service Tank.............................2 Emergency Shut-down Relay ....................3.................................2 Main Supply Failure ....................... 162 5.................... POWER SUPPLIES ....................3.......4 Static by-pass switch ....3................................. 157 5.......3.......................3 Inverter ................................................................3...................................3 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B................ 158 5........................................................................................................................3........18 Silencers ......5 Noise limits ...19 Air Filters .... 157 5.....1 Enclosures .............2 Control interposing relays .....................................3...... 151 4.......Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 4.........16 Cooling System ..................... 150 4.................2.........................3.................2. 161 5........................ 163 5...........5 Construction Requirements .............. 164 5..............4 Engine/Generator Instrumentation ...................................1 Functional Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................2 Battery and DC Circuit ................................................. 158 DIESEL GENERATOR .........................................................................2.......................................................................... 153 5....... 164 5............8 Fuel boost Pump .......................................................2..................................2...... 153 5.....2 GENERAL ......... 163 5....2........................3. 156 5.............................1........7 Fuel transfer Pump ............................................4 Fuel ..... 151 SAS GATEWAYS ................................ 162 5.................................2...3 Status indication repeat relays .....6.....................................5....2........................3 Battery cells and containers .........................................................23 Rotor .......2.....3...................... 161 5.............2.....................................2........................... 160 5...........................20............................................................................................... 163 5..2..Section 6 .................................1 General ....1 5................................................................................................................... 153 5...................3..................... 160 5...... 165 5..........2 UPS Configuration ...............3..................................................................2..........................10 Engine Lubrication ....................3..................................................................................1 Normal ........................... 153 5......................................3.....................2 Design Requirements .. 160 5.............................................................1 Rectifier .............................3.....2.............. 158 5..2....3................. 153 5......................................................................................................................................................................... 152 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES .................. 157 5.5......................20.. 162 5..................................................................................................................3 Performance ................................... 152 5...................................2............3.............................................................3.................................................................3 Engine/Generator Controls ................................20 Engine/Generator Control Panel .17 Safety Guards ...............................7 5........................... 160 5..................................................... 162 5.......2..........3..............................3.......13 Governor ..........................................................................................22 Stator ...6 RELAYS ........1.......... 159 5. 156 5.............21 Generator .....2 Modes of Operation ....4 Static Bypass .....................1 General Requirements .............................3 Overload ..........3..................... 162 5.......................................... 160 5..............................................................20.......3..... 161 5..................... 161 5................3........3. 152 5.............................. 152 5............................................................................ 164 5.....................5.....................................6....................2...............3....................................................... 156 5.......... 161 5.....................................14 Engine Protection ............................................2 Converter components ......................................... 153 5...................................................3........2..........................................4 Distribution Board ........15 Starting System .......................3.............

...................................................... 174 6..1 Drawings ...................................2............................ 166 5............. 173 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP FACILITIES ................................................................................................................................................ 167 5..............2 6....5 LV Distribution Panels ......................................................... 175 6.... 170 6..............................................................................................3.................. 165 5....2 Instruction Manuals ..................................................................... 167 5...............................................................5 48V DC Distribution Board ......6 6......................................................................4....................................................................29 Parallel Running . 171 ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS ...... 175 6.................................. 167 5.......8 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant ........................25 Ventilation ....................10 VISITORS' VIEWING AREA ...............4.................................. 166 5.....3....14 POWER SUPPLIES ............................................................................................3.....1 General Requirements ........................................................................................ 173 6........... 175 6..................... CONTROL CENTRE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS ...............14....2 Battery Chargers ...................... 166 5....................3.......................................................4...................................................32 Inspection and Testing ............................. 165 5........................................................3.3 Diesel Generator Room/Enclosure.......................................................... 172 OFFICES FOR CONTROL CENTRE STAFF ..........................................................................31 Documentation ..................... 172 EQUIPMENT ROOM ..................................................................................3...14...................................................27 Pulley Block ....... 176 6.....................2 Battery and Charger Equipment ....... 176 6...............Section 6 ...........30 Tools and Spare Parts ... 166 5.......... 175 6................................. 175 6.................. 168 5........................................ 168 5........................ 167 5..... 165 5.28 Alternative Generators .2.................................5 INTRODUCTION .2..........1............................................................................................. 175 6.......8 6......1 6..................13 DOMESTIC QUARTERS .............1...................................................1 Functional Requirements ......... 170 5...................................14............................3..14..................3........................................................4 Construction ........ 175 6.........................................................4..............................4 48 V DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ................7 DC Supplies ....3 Alarm Indications .................2 System Capacity and Performance ..........................................................................4 6.31.................................4...................... 169 5..........................................3 6........Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 5. 174 6.......4........................................................ 166 5................................................................................2.................14.......................................1 Batteries .........4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies .4............................................................24 Exciters ..................... 166 5.....................3...............4.. 174 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND TRAINING SIMULATOR ROOM ............................................................................11 CONFERENCE ROOM ............................. 166 5..................26 Voltage Regulation .......... 167 5..........................................14............................. 171 CONTROL ROOM .................................................2 Control Centre LV In-feeds ....................................12 MEETING ROOM ....3.................7 6................................................................14............................................................................2... 171 6..................................4............ 174 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ROOM ........................... 176 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B..................................................... 166 5......... 168 5......1.................... 176 6..........3 Control and Instrumentation ............................................9 6..........................................................31.................................4........6 UPS Battery Room ..............................5..................1 General ..............................................3............................................................ 174 DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY..1 General ...................................

................... 186 8................................................................................................2.................................................3...............5 Notice & Witnessing of Tests ......................... 176 6................................................................. 186 8.............................................................4.........................1.................3......................................... 194 8................. 182 8......................1................................................ 176 6................................................................4 Telecommunication ........................................1 Subsystem FAT ............. 181 8.... 183 8........3.................. 183 8............................... 186 8..................................... 185 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS .............................15 ACCESS CONTROL............2. 178 7........1 Master Stations ........1 SCADA/EMS Availability ................................................................8 Conduct of the Tests ..........................................13 Hardware Failure Reports ................4 8..........................2 Outstations ................................ 184 8............................................... 181 8. 179 AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS...........2 Responsibilities ........................... 182 8........... 190 8..................................................... 184 8........... 177 6.....................19 LIGHTING ................... 184 TYPE TESTS ......Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 6........................20 MATERIALS ..................10 Fault Categories ......................................1... 181 8...................................................................................................18 HVAC .....................................................................................................................1.............................................................2..................1................................................. 176 6............................................................4 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B..............1 7...............................................................................Section 6 .......... 179 7...................1 General SAT Requirements .... 190 8.............................................................................12 Fault Log .. 189 8................................................1..... 181 8.17 LAN ...............................1 GENERAL .....................................................2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS........................................1............ 193 8.. 184 8......................................................................1.........................................................................................4.......................... 176 6.....1...........................3..................................................... RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY ..........................3 General FAT Requirements ........................................................................................................5 Power Supplies ..3 Outstation Availability .......... 177 7......................2 System FAT ............ 189 8........9 Failures ....................................................................................................................................................................3..................... 184 8.....4 Testing Stages ..... 183 8..........3.................... 177 6..................................................................3..................................11 Repeat Tests ..1............3 7.....................................................................6 Test Procedures and Result Sheets......................................................................................................................................... 186 8....................................................................................................1.................... 178 7........4 Specific Test Requirements ............................................................. 189 8......16 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM ...............2 8..2 Communication System Availability .....................................................................1...............................................9 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .........4...1...............................................4...................................................................................................................... 179 VERIFICATION ..................................3...................................1....................3................................................ 193 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING..7 Contractor's Prior Tests ...................................................3 Test Equipment and Facilities ..............4............................1 Approach to Testing ....... 183 8..... INSPECTION AND TESTING PHILOSOPHY .................... 178 7........3 8.............................................4.......................21 MAINTAINABILITY ................. 179 7........................ 183 8.........................3 Energy Management Software ..14 Software Failure Reports ...... 178 AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS .................................................

..............................4.......4........... 199 SPARE PARTS ..........................................................5 TESTS ON COMPLETION ..........6 9.............2 Period of the Maintenance Agreement ................................................................................................3 9.......5 Replacement Parts ...................5............................................................................ 195 8.......................................................... 200 9.................................................. 200 9..........1 Telephone Support ......10...................9....... 195 8........................4.............. 202 CONSUMABLES ............................................... 200 9.3 Site Update Period ...................................... 202 PRODUCT CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS ........ 198 8..........4 Access ............................................................................................................3.............................3 Quality Control .... 195 8..................................................2 9.................. 201 9............................................................................................................................................... 199 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY ..............4...................................................4............................................................................................................................................................................7 Readiness to Commence Tests on Completion ..EMS ............2 Point To Point Testing ...........................10....................................................................................................................4....... 198 NON-CONFORMANCE ...5......6 Acceptance Tests ... 204 9.................SCADA ...................................................................1 General ................................................................................... 201 9.......................4 New Software Releases ....10........5 Termination of the Agreement ... 204 9...................................................................... 204 9..1 SCADA/EMS Database .....3 Charges for the Maintenance Agreement .............................................5 Site Acceptance Tests ......................................... 199 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT ......... 197 8......................... 204 9....................Section 6 ...1 System Acceptance ............ 203 9.. 195 8....................................................................4 9.................................... 204 9..............................9....5......................................................................................... 204 9................... 202 TOOLS AND TEST APPARATUS .............................3............................ 196 8..............10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ........................................1 GENERAL ..9 9..1 SDH/PDH tester ..........................................................................5.................................... 198 8..............................7 9............................. 201 9.............................................2 Remote Access Support .........10................4.......................4............... 205 10.......................................5........3 Fault Rectification ...........................4......8 9........ 202 COMMISSIONING PERIODS ....... 197 8...........................................................................................................................4 Signal generator ...4........................2 Datacom tester ...................................................9.................5....................................... 199 DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE ........ 206 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B...................5 Maintenance laptop computer . 206 10............................ 202 9...............................Telecommunications ....................... 201 9...................................................................5.........9.................. 203 9................................ 197 8..................................1 9...........4 Maintenance Services ..................................................2 Partial & Operational Acceptance ..................... 201 9..........................................................3 Digital multimeter .....6 9...........5 GENERAL .5........5.............................................10...... TRAINING ...............2 Attendance ............................................2 Site Installation Tests .................................... 203 9....................................................................9..................................................... 196 8................ 199 9.................................................................................4................ 201 9....1 Scope of Agreements .....................................................10 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .........Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 8....4.5........................................5......4 System Site Acceptance Tests ...................... 202 9..... SPARES AND MAINTENANCE ..

........ 219 11.................6........................................3.......................................................................5....................7 Programmer's Manual ..6.............. 207 10................................................3....................................................3....................................................................1 Course Duration .....................3 System Engineer's Manual ..2 Specific Requirements for NSCC Building ......... 214 11..................2 Operators' Manual ...............6...............................3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM COURSES ..........3.... 224 SITE SURVEYS ............... 209 10............................................11 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ............ 209 10.............Section 6 ................................................................................6..........3............................................... 221 11............ 218 11................. 219 11...........................................4 TELECOMMUNICATION COURSES .........................6 COURSE ATTENDEES .. 220 11...........Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 10...............2 Specific Requirements for Communication Documentation ......................................................................... 216 11.................. 208 10........... 220 11............................................1 System Manual .... 218 11....... 222 11...................................... 210 10................................ 13... DOCUMENTATION ........................................... 217 11............................................5 Monthly Progress Report ....................................3............. 213 11.............................5 System Administration Courses ..................1 GENERAL .................................................8 Communication Documentation ................................3 Database and Display Maintenance Courses ..............................................................................................................................6 Equipment Manual................6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ...............5 DOCUMENTATION FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS ........................6...............5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COURSES ......................1 General ...............4.... 219 11... 225 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B............................................................ 214 11.........4........................................................ 221 11........ 222 11................................................................................................................ 220 11................................. DRAWINGS .........................3.. 207 10............................................................................3...........3..3 Schedule of Contractor's Documents and Drawings ..............................................................................2 System Operation Courses .....................1 Test Plan and Schedule ...4 Hardware Manual .................................1 Overview Course .................................2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE BID ...... 218 11................................................................................3....................................................... 221 11............. 210 10.............................5..............6................................................................... 222 11...........4 Design Control Document .....................................................6............................ 223 12.......................................................2 Applications Software ...................................................3 Software Design Documentation ...... 207 10..................4...3 Test Reports .............. 221 11..................................4 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION .......................... 221 11...................................................1 Functional Design Specification ................... 220 11................................ 208 10...8 ‗AS BUILT‘ DOCUMENTATION ..............................................3.................................................5 Maintenance Manual ...............................................................4 Programme of Work .............................2 CONTENT ..........4..... 213 11.......... 212 11....................5...................................................6................................................................ 223 11............................... 209 10....... 213 11...........3 DOCUMENTATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING THE CONTRACT ..........................7 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL ..............4. 221 11............. 220 11.........3....................... 221 11...1 Standard Operating Software ..............................................................6..................................................................................................................4 EMS Applications Courses ...............................4............................................... 216 11..............2 Test Procedures ...........................

.................................... 225 13..................................7 DC BATTERIES AND CHARGERS....................................................................10 ANCILLARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .......................... QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT .... 234 14.......... 234 14........................ 234 14............................................................... METERING AND CONTROL .........5 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED ................................ 238 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B......................................2 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE ................ 237 16.................................................12 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant .................................................................................................... 233 14............................. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS ................1 GENERAL ..............................2 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS ............................................................................................... 225 13...............4 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ..................... 238 17..................................................8 EARTHING SYSTEMS ......................................................................3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SIGNAL LISTS FOR OUTSTATIONS .... 237 16..................................9 INSPECTION AND TESTING.......................... 227 14............................ 227 14.............................3 PRODUCTION OF RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ........................................... 234 14................6 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ........................................................................ 236 15...... 227 14.........................Section 6 .............. 226 14.................................................2 PRELIMINARY SURVEYS .......... ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ....................................... 236 15..................................................... 237 16.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 13............................................................2 GENERAL STANDARDS ......4 SCADA/EMS AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT .................................................................7 EMC STANDARDS ............1 INDOOR INSTALLATIONS ..................1 GENERAL REQUIREMEMNTS........ ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY.......... 234 15.......6 LVAC SWITCHFUSE BOARDS ................................................................................................................... 228 14..........................1 GENERAL ..........................5 PRODUCTION OF CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................................................................................................................5 AUXILIARY POWER AND CONTROL CABLES .................................. 225 13......................................................... 238 17............ 225 13.........3 PROTECTION.1 GENERAL ................................................................................... 237 16.....................4 EXISTING PLC SYSTEM ............... 237 16.....................................2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ................. 237 16... 237 16....... 227 14..................................................................................... 236 16.................... 237 17.....

.................................................................................. 248 18.............. 247 18.....................................................................1 Fuses and Links .......1 General ...................................8........................................ 245 18............................ CABINETS............ 249 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B..........................................3 Indicating Lamps ... 245 18..................5 AUDITS .....................7................Section 6 .....8 CUBICLES.............................. 245 18...... 243 18.................................................. 239 17.... 242 18.........................................................................8..................................................................................................... 245 18............................ Components and Terminal Identification .............................................1 Keys and Push Buttons ..................................................................7 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS ...................6 QUALITY RECORDS.................................9..8........................................ 239 17............................................13 ACCOMMODATION AND ASSISTANCE ............6 Painting and Finishing .............................................................................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 17....................6 RELIABILITY. 244 18..................................................9 REVIEWS .......................... 244 18..................... 245 18......................................................................................................................4 Plug-in Cards .........10 TESTING ............................................................................. 238 17.......... STANDARDIZATION AND INTERCHANGEABILITY .....................................................................3 SUB-CONTRACTORS .............1 Terminal Blocks ......................9..........2 Connectors .................................................4............................... DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ..........................................8 PLANNING ..7 ORGANIZATION...........................................................3.....................4 Protection .........................................................................12 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT ........7........1 GENERAL ...... 240 17.............................................11 CORRECTIVE ACTION ..................................................... 238 17........................................................................................7............7...8......................................2 Indicating Instruments ............................ 240 17............................................................................................................4 QUALITY PLAN ................................................................................... 241 18..............7.......................... 239 17................... 246 18............ 247 18................... 248 18.......................................................2 SYSTEM OF UNITS .......................................................................... 242 18................................................3..................1 Alternating Current (ac) ........... 243 18..... 248 18............................................................................................ 248 18.......9 CONTROL AND INDICATING DEVICES .............................................4.........13 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ..........8........................................................ 247 18.. 244 18.....3 Power Supply Units (PSUs) ..... 248 18............. 239 17....................................2 Cubicle Wiring ......................................8.................................................. 240 17............................................. 248 18......... 242 18.....................................3 DESIGN.....................8................................ 242 18..............2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers ..........7.. RACKS AND CONTROL PANELS .....................5 EQUIPMENT LIFE ... 243 18................................4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP .................................4 Equipment............................................................... 245 18.................... 239 17....................... 246 18............................................................................9.3 Marshalling Cubicles Including SCADA Interface Panels .........................8......................5 Degrees of Protection .......9....................2 Direct Current (dc) ..........................................

...............................................5 Functional Design Specification .............................................................3 CODE AND DATA STANDARDS . 253 19.................. 254 19....................................................................................1 General .................. 256 19.......... 249 18...................3 Backup Copies of Software .....................................................................10................................................................. 253 19......5...............................................3 Cable Screens and Armouring ...................7 PATENT AND COPYRIGHT ......................... 254 19......................................5 Change and Issue Control ....1 General ......................................3 Cable Laying...... 254 19..........................................3 Configuration Data.............................................. 254 19.......................6................................. 253 19........4 Text Editor ........................................................................................6...............................2 Error Detection and Reporting .................. 254 19...............................................................................................................................................6 Detailed Design ...............5............................................. 253 19................................2 Database Structure..... Termination and Identification ......................................5............................................................................. 251 18...............................................1 General .............4 Software Validation....4 APPLICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE ..... 257 19....................8 LICENCES .................... 260 19..................................4..................................................................................................7............6 OPERATING SYSTEMS ...................................................... 260 20........... 260 19...............6.....5 Software Maintenance ......................4 Telemetry Communications Statistics ..................................7........4............................... 252 19..............................................2 Safety Earthing .......1 Patent Rights ......................14 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .........................................................2 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE ............. 252 19..... 254 19...................................................... 257 19................................................................................... 254 19....................................... 260 19........ 256 19.............................................................4 Right To Modify .....................................7.3......................5 SCADA/EMS SOFTWARE ...............................................................1 Diagnostics and Fault Monitoring ...... 253 19................................................5................ CIVIL WORKS .....................5.................11.................................... Verification and Testing ......1 General ................................................................................... 256 19.......11 EARTHING .....6............................................ 249 18.................... 252 19......6.3 System Utilities ...............3 Online Performance Measurement .......................2 Security ...2 Cable Types ......... 250 18........10.....................................5................ 249 18.............................6......................... 253 19..................10............................................................................6... 261 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B......................3.................................... 255 19.................................4..........................2 Software Life Cycle.................6.......3......................................5 Software Configuration and Maintenance Facilities . 255 19...............................................................................................................2 Existing Software ..........................................................................................................11................................................................. 259 19..............6................. 261 20....1 GENERAL ...............................................................3 Program and Data Security ................. 256 19.....................1 Programming Languages ............1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................6..........2 Claims in Respect of Patent Rights .............5..4.......3 System Development Methodology...... 255 19.....10 SECONDARY WIRING AND CABLES ........................................................................................ 253 19.......................5................. 253 19.................................................5................................................................... SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ....... 254 19.................. 257 19........................................4 Documentation ..... 251 18........Section 6 ..... 259 19................. 253 19............Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 18.. 251 19.........................................7........ 255 19......................................... 251 18.......................1 New Software ..5............................................4....................5...................11.........................

........................6................................ Foundations & Piling Work . 288 20......................... 288 20...... 288 20..............4........1 Cutting and removing trees & shrubs ....2.........2 Water Pipes ..................................................2 Concrete Beds and Casings ...............................................3.......6...............................................................2.........4...2...............................2..........2................1 Site Survey ...........................4.................3......1 Control and power cable trenches & ducts .................6.......6......5................5............................. 266 20........24 Foundations and Piling Work ...... 280 20................2........2..................6............. 266 20........................................6 Surface chipping ..........................2...................................................1 Drain Pipes ............2................4 Anti Termite soil treatment ................. 267 20.............................4................4 Aggregates ........................1 Water supply system .... 288 20...... 263 20..................6............................................................................................................................2 PRELIMINARY WORKS ........3 Site Clearance .........................4 Waste Water Sewerage System ..................6 Concrete Work..............2............ 268 20....... 289 20.............................1 Concrete Work................................2..................................................................4.................3 Sanitary Fittings ...............2....2...................... 272 20....................3................ 266 20....2.................................................................................................................................................................. 266 20..15 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing ................. 271 20......................2.......................1 Civil Engineering...........6..................3 Test Certificates and Samples .... 271 20........2............................................ 279 20..............6...........................................4...2........4..............................6...4....................23 Grout under Base Plates ..........2.............1 Cutting and filling earth ............2.........2................18 Formwork ..................2.........4.....Section 6 .3..8 Concrete Strength Requirements ...2................ 291 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B........................................... 263 20.......... 263 20............................4...................................6..........5...........................2.................................6......................14 Construction Bays ...........................6...............6......................................................22 Grouting of structural steel works and plant ..............3............... 263 20.....................................6.....................5 Surface water drainage system .....................6............2 Materials .........................................................19 Reinforcement ..............2................................................................. 288 20... Building works and Services Standards and Codes of Practice 261 20. 289 20...............................4................. dismantling steel structures .........2 Removing existing equipment............... 266 20.............. 267 20.........................4.......................................................2........................12 Compaction ......21 Prevention of Corrosion below Ground ................1 Copper .......2..3 Earth retaining structures ...........................................2............6.................6....... 266 20..........................6 Admixtures .......3 Septic Tank & soakage pit .6.......... 271 20..................2................. 271 20... 263 20..................... 263 20..........2..........5 Land escaping & tree planting .............. 280 20................3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ...2.........10 Workability ........2...................................................2..............4......... 289 20.............................. 273 20..........6................ 274 20....................................9 Mixing .1 Lightning Protection for Buildings ....... 287 20...........................6.............2..6....... ..................................4 Site formation and up keeping............................................... 271 20.......................................................4.........3 Demolishing & removing of existing masonry/concrete structures ...3 Cable Pits ..................5 Cable Trenches & Ducts ............................. 287 20............... 265 20...4..................................4.......2....... 277 20...........................2.............1.............6...........2...................... 288 20...................................7 Plant .................................... 266 20.......................2................... 280 20........2............................3...............16 Curing ... 274 20.. 280 20............................. 273 20.............17 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather ...................................2...................................... 269 20..........4 Sewerage Treatment Plant .................................4 WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE SYSTEM ...................... 263 20............4......................... 272 20...... 262 20.........................5 Water ...........................2 Materials.........2..... 274 20.....................................13 Construction Joints ................................20 Foundation Bolts.................. 274 20.......................................................... 269 20................ 262 20.............................................................................................. 281 20..............4.... 287 20..................................................................2............................2 Explosives ..............................................................................2....... 287 20..................................................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20.2 Soil Investigations.4........................2 Manholes ........................................................................... 266 20....2.........15 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ................6............................................11 Transportation ..................6..............

..................................................................................................1 General ...........4....................16 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant ............................................................ 292 20..5.........1 Indoor cable trenches .............. 292 20...19 Roof and ceiling .11 Aluminium Patent Glazing .....................................................................................................................................................................................................14........................................16........................14..................2 General .................................. 293 20............ 292 20........7 MISCELLANEOUS WORK ...................................2 Raised Modular Floors .................. 298 20................14.......................8............................ 298 20.......18 Floor Finishes ..... 292 20..................................................4 Bituminous Surface ............................... 298 20..................................8.......8............................................................. 295 20...........................2 Workmanship............2 Sub-Base ...........................................8.....2...........................8.....................14...................6 Lintels ....................................... 291 20..................8..........8.................................................. 303 20......................................................3..................................................8........................5............................................. 299 20............................................. 295 20......8..................5.............5....................8................................8...................................................5 CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE OF ROADS .............................18.......................... 303 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B..................................8....... 301 20.............. 297 20..................... 293 b) Gates .....................................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20...............................10 Aluminium Windows and Doors .........3 Approach road ..........1......16 Trenches ............................ 292 20.......................5...............................................8......9......................................................... 296 20...................5................................2 Fire criteria ...........8............... 297 20............................. 298 20..............................................................9...........................................2 Access road and structures .....................5........... ............................ 294 20.........................3 Prime Coat ....... 298 20....................5.................. 296 20...............................................1 Wall and ceiling finishes ......19. 299 20..................5....................1 Structures for approach roads.. 294 20....................6 FENCE AND GATE ......................1 Screeded Beds ................9 FINISHES AND FITTINGS ......1........................................................... 299 20...................................... 294 20........................... 296 20.........8 Locking System ...................................... 292 20.............................................................. 297 20....................................................2 Road carriage way.................... 293 20............. 299 20.............7 Building in Frames . 299 20...........................4...... 297 20..............................................5..............................................8.........1 Chain link fence and Gate ..............5 Pin Tumbler Cylinders .......................................2 Workmanship............ 293 20................2.8...................................8...................................................... Brick work and Plaster ...1 20.....8..................8................ 291 20............................................................................................................... 291 Gradient .. 298 20............................................. 299 20............................ 297 20.....9..............8 CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDINGS .............8............ 297 20................14 Timber ..........................14...................................................................................................17................... 303 20...... 291 20...........................................6 Door Closures ...............................................3.......................2.......3 Timber Doors and windows ......................................8......4 Builder‘s Ironmongery . 295 20....1 General ...........................5 Lime ...................................................................2.......17 Damp Proof Course (DPC) .... 301 20. 292 20....................14..................................6......................... 303 20..........................1 Zinc Aluminium Coated Profiled Steel Sheet Roofing ....................8.............................. 296 20..........13 Fire Resisting Steel Doors ........................8 Cement......................8.................2 Galvanized Barbed wire fence & Gate ....................... 296 20.....................................8..5 Roadsides .....................................3 Super structure (Structural frame & walls) .............1 Preservative ............................................................. 295 20........ 300 20.............. 292 20.......8.....................16.........General .......... 303 20......................................Section 6 .....8..................................................8..........................................4 Brick work ............9 Doors and Windows ................1 Damp-Proof Membrane ...........2 Checker Plate ...................8.....................8.......6.................................................................8...................14............8......................................................................2..........................................1 Preparation of Formation ................14...........................................1 Generally ...8.... 297 20.....18.........................8.......8.......................................12 Other Materials .................. 299 20..5.........................................7 Door Fittings ........................................ 292 20......2 Gypsum board Ceiling ...15 Glazing .............................19.................................5.........................................

............... 323 21... 316 20....3 Design and liaison of work ...............9..............................9................... 312 20........................................................4 Iron and Steel works (Except Structural Steelworks) ..................6.............................3.....6.................1 Site office ....1.10............................6.............................3......................14 PVC Adhesion Test........................... 318 20.............6 Internal Finishes .........6......................9........3 Materials .............9...........................................2.................2.......................................................2 Description of work ........................................................................................................................... 323 21...... 304 20.............. 306 20.....1.......13 PVC Coating Thickness: ..6... 321 20..... 319 20. 312 20... 315 20..............................6..4 Waterproofing of water retaining Structures ...........................................................9................................ 319 20..................................4....9.........9................. 323 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B..................................................3 Materials ............ BUILDING SERVICES..........................2 Description of Work ..........4...10...............................................6.................2..9..............9..........5 Bitumastic Painted Surfaces and Coated Pipes ...9......................................11 LABELLING ............................................. 322 21............................................ 313 20........................................................................................................................ 308 20.........................6........ 309 20.................5.....2 Project requirement ...................................5.......................................6...........2 Referenced Documents .............................................................10........... 323 21..........3...................... 308 20............................2 Temporary Works ... 318 20................ 318 20.........................................................6...3...........................2........................9..........3 Terminology ..............................15 Weld Shear Strength of Fabric: ........................ 307 20.................9......10................................ 312 20.................................................................................................................................10.....................................1 Contractors responsibilities . 304 20.................10......................................................4 Hand railing ....... 308 20....... 314 20.................. 323 21........9......10 Sampling ..........4 Execution ......................10................................6 Gabion Wall ...............................9.2 Paints and Other Materials ...................................4 Classification .......................................6...............4 Car parking ...............9..6........9........................... 306 20.........................................3...9....................................6...............3 Materials ...................................... 306 20.............................. 313 20... 321 20......................7 Physical Properties ..5 Guard House .......1 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SERVICES.5.................................................1.....................6.....6..........10........ 306 20.....10.............6 Mechanical Properties ............................................................................................9................. 319 20........... 313 20......................6 Copper Surfaces.................4.......9 Workmanship............................................10.......10.....2..................17 Certification .....................................16 Inspection .....1.... 307 20.................................................5 Material Manufacture ........... 308 20...............................3 Waterproofing of Concrete Slabs & Masonry Walls in Toilet Areas ............. ... 306 20.............1 Painting on Metal Surfaces .............................................................. 307 20.... 309 20...................................................................... 315 20..............5 Certificate Warranty .......................................5 Waterproofing of Concrete Roofs ..............10........Section 6 .... 312 20.....................9......9..................................... 305 20...................................9.........................................................................4 Execution ...............................................................10..............................................................1 General .............2 Description of work .................................... 319 20.......................9.............10...........................................10...10....................... 305 20.......................................................17 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ..Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20.................................9..............................1 General .......9.......... 306 20.......................................................................1 General ...........9......................8 Dimensions and Tolerances .....................4.. 308 20.......................3 Materials .............. 312 20........................................................................ 308 20.......................................................... 314 20...1..............5 Certificate Warranty ......9...................... 307 20............................................... 305 20...........9.......................................................................10 OTHER STRUCTURES ............................10....12 Test Methods ...............................................................1 General .6................10................................................. 306 20.................................4 Certificate Warranty ..................... 306 20.5.... 319 20......................10........................6..................................................10...........11 Number of Tests .......................2 Painting ............... 307 20.........10............................................................3 House for Diesel Generator ..........2.............3 Woodwork ............................................ 312 20..........10...............10............. 307 20..........................4...........

................. 325 21. 326 21........................................................... 331 21.....................1...2.......5 Supplying and installation of service ......3.......2.2..................................3......................................................... 338 21..............1...................3..........3..7 Socket Outlets and Fused Spur Outlets ........................2.............4......1......................................................................................................................8 Conduit and Fittings...............2 Bulk Heads for Cables and Pipes ..6 Electrical Control ................ 328 21...4 Switches and Push buttons .............................. 324 21...............1..................3...... 328 21.................................1 External design conditions ....11.10 Cabling ..........3.................1................3..3 Internal Sound Levels .................3....3................................................................... 327 21..............1............................................................................6 Lighting Fittings ........................ 334 21.........12 Earthing and Bonding ..................... 327 21.... 334 21..1.......................................2 Mobile trolley extinguishers ..................................... 331 21........................................2 Internal design conditions ..........1 AC Distribution boards ......................................................................................................... 338 21............... 326 21.........................3................. 330 21.........................................2....3 Project Requirement ........................5 Control Equipment ....3...................................................2.......................................1.. 329 21.................................................4..5.................................................1 General ........8 Audible Alarms ........4..2 Cables .....................................................................Section 6 ........4 Fire Detection and Fire Alarm System .................................4................ 335 21............................5 Fire Alarm Panel ................................ 332 21..........15 Clocks ............11.3 Fire Protection Coating for Cables ......... 324 21................................. 323 21....................................3............3.......... 330 21....... 327 21...........3............ 324 21.... 335 21.............................. 336 21................................................................................1 Portable wall mounted extinguishers ............4 Vibration .............................................................................3.......................................................................................................................1..............11 Fire Protection Equipment ..............7 Automatic Fire Detectors ......9 Visible Alarms ............................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 21.....4......................................4 Design and liaison of work .................... 332 21...... 331 21.......1 Coding System ..........5 Standards ......................4 Mechanical Ventilation ....................................................1 Lamps 335 21... 325 21. 323 21...................................................3............................1 Fire Alarms .............................................................1.......... 337 21...............7 Electrical Connections ..................................................................................................... 337 21...............4....... 329 21...1.......... 328 21.......................... 324 21..................................... 326 21...................................................5 Bifurcated fans ....3............................................................... 329 21.7 Ceiling fans ....................5......3....................................................... 324 21..5.......................................3........................................................ 325 21.....................6 Manual Fire Alarm Stations .....................1.................................................................3 Contactors ......... 326 21........................... 336 21...........1...........................4......................................... 333 21..........3.......................3 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER SUPPLY WORK ..1 Manufacturers ...............................2 Contractors Responsibilities ......................................9 Poles .1..........................2............. 330 21........................................16 Maintenance .........................................................................................3....................2................................................2.................5.............................................................................................. 338 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.......3........8 Maintenance ..2 Split System Air Conditioning Units .......6 Design Calculations ........................3.................4 Supplying and installation of services ......................................2.............. 325 21...............................6.14 Schedule of Lighting Fittings and Sockets Outlets . 325 21......11 Exterior Installation ...............4 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................................................................................1.............................12 Signs ................................................................................................................. 324 21.............2 FIRE PROTECTION AND DETECTION FACILITIES ..................................................................................4..............................1............. 330 21................2.......3.............. 326 21.....1...........................2 Schedule of Design Requirements .....................................3...... 329 21...............................................................................................4.......................................................................18 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ..................6 Axial flow fans .1 General .....13 Emergency Lighting ................. 335 21.........2..3......2..........4................................................................... 324 21.........................2........ 330 21.............................. 338 21........3.................... 335 21...3..10 Interior Installations ........... 330 21.......................3...................................... 329 21.................................... 323 21....................... 334 21.....3 Thermal Insulation ...................1....................

........ 350 22....................................................................... 340 21...............3 Distributed Amplifier Unit (DAU) ......5 Man Machine Interface Unit (MMI) ....................................................... 339 Assistance Alarms ......................................................................3 Guarantee and Maintenance ............................................. 342 21............19 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ..................................................6................6.................... 340 Induction Loop Systems ......6 21.4.............................................. 341 21.............................5 Car Control ............4 21.........6 Entertainment Rack ...................4...... 350 22............................................ 346 21..........Section 6 ......................6............... 340 Intruder Alarm System ............................................................................................................ 345 21.................................4 Drawings ..............................4...4 Linked Audio Processor ......................................................................................................5..........................................................................................2 21......................... 344 21.......6.............1 TRANSPORT ............5............................2 EMPLOYER‘S REPRESENTATIVE‘S OFFICE ..................................5........... 340 21..........................................................................5 21.................................................2 Erection .......... 339 Refuge Alarms .........................3 21.......................... 341 21................1 Capacity .......................1 General ............................................................................... 340 21........................................................ 340 Window Actuator Control Panel ........ 347 21........................ 348 22.............................7 21..4...... 342 21........6...........................4............4.. 342 21............................... 350 22................. 341 21.........................................6 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEM ........ OTHER SERVICES ..................................................................................................................5...............1 Main Project Office for Employer‘s Representatives .........................................................................................7 Pendant Full Range Speakers .......5 LIFT .........2 System Description.........................2........................................................8 CCTV System .....6.........6..........4.....Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 21........ 341 21.................................... 339 Panic Alarms .......................................................5.............................. 350 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.............................................................................

20 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Mb.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AC or ac ACE AGC ASCII AVR B BER b CAPC CCTV CEPT CFDS CPU CRC CRT CT DC or dc DDE DLP DPI DPLC DVI EAPROM EBU EEPROM E/F EFI ELV EMC Alternating Current Area Control Error Automatic Generation Control American Standard Code for Interchange of Information Automatic Voltage Regulator Bytes (kB. GB) Bit Error Rate Bits (kb. Gb) Cabinet Appointed Procurement Committee Closed Circuit Television Conférence Européen de Poste et Télécommunication Communication Functional Design Specification Central Processor Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check Cathode Ray Tube Current Transformer Direct Current Dynamic Data Exchange Digital Light Processing Dots Per Inch Digital Power Line Carrier Digital Video Interface Electrically Alterable Programmable Read Only Memory European Broadcasting Union Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Earth Fault Earth Fault Indicator Extra Low Voltage Electro Magnetic Compatibility Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. MB.

Section 6 . Ventilation And Air Conditioning Internal Acceptance Tests Inter Control Centre Protocol Identification Intelligent Electronic Device International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Institute of Engineering and Technology Variation on MODBUS Input/Output International Standardisation Organisation International Telecommunication Union Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low Voltage Meter Bus Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.21 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications EMI EMS ESD FAT FDS FEP GPS GSM GUI HMI HD HFDS HIS HRC HVAC IAT ICCP ID IED IEC IEEE IET JBUS I/O ISO ITU LAN LCD LED LV MBUS Electro Magnetic Interference Energy Management System Electrostatic Discharge Factory Acceptance Tests Functional Design Specification Front End Processor Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile (communication) Graphic User Interface Human Machine Interface High Definition Functional Hardware Design Specification Historic Information System High Rupturing Capacity Heating.

22 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications MCB MDB MDI MTBF MTTR MV NERC NCC O/C ODBC OPGW PCB PDH PLC PMC PMR PSU PTW PVC Q QA QAR QC QMS RAL RAM RFI RTU SAT SCADA SDH Miniature Circuit Breakers Main Distribution Panel Maximum Demand Indicator Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair Medium Voltage National Electric Regulatory Committee National Control Centre Over Current Open Data Base Connectivity OPtical Ground Wire Printed Circuit Board Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Power Line Carrier Protection Monitoring Computer Post Mortem Revision Power Supply Unit Permit To Work Poli Vinyl Chloride Reactive Power Quality Assurance Quality Assurance Representative Quality Control Quality Management System Reichs-Ausschuss für Lieferbedingungen (German Colour Standards) Random Access Memory Radio Frequency Interference Remote Terminal Unit Site Acceptance Tests Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications SDM SFDS SIP SOE SQL SQP STT SXGA+ TASE.23 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2 TCP/IP U/G UI UPS UTC VGA VDU VRLA VT WAN XLPE 4GL Software Development Methodology Software Functional Design Specification SCADA Interface Panel Sequence Of Events Structured Query Language Software Quality Plan Sanction To Test Super Extended Graphics Adapter + Telecontrol Application Service Element 2 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Under Ground User Interface Uninterruptible Power Supplies Universal Time Coordinate Video Graphics Adaptor Visual Display Unit Valve Regulated Lead Acid Voltage Transformer Wide Area Network Cross Linked PolyEthylene Forth Generation Language Other abbreviations used in this document generally conform with the System International (SI .metric system) but are not listed here. The SI units and recommendations are defined in ISO 1000. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

The works for the new SCADA systems include but shall not be limited to the design. and inspection and testing. The Bidder shall also complete the detailed Price Schedules that will determine the quantities of equipment that will be required to meet the full requirements of the project. The works required to achieve these objectives shall include establishing the NSCC in a building also to be provided under this Contract. 1 Maintenance. installation and setting to work of following principal subsystems/facilities and services: A SCADA Master Station Hardware and System Software a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) SCADA Hardware (Fault tolerant redundant Master Station Computer System with servers for. spare parts. and establishing a country wide telecommunications network linking each substation and power plant to the control centre. SCADA/EMS Master Station – specified in Chapter 2 Telecommunications Infrastructure – specified in Chapter 3 Outstation and Substation Works Adaptation Works – specified in Chapter 4 Uninterruptible Power Supply System specified in Chapter 5 NSCC Building – specified in Chapter 6 In addition there are further requirements relating to the delivery of the works including requirements covering general engineering standards and environmental conditions. Master Clock System Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2. 1 NSCC Manager.1 SCADA/EMS MASTER STATION The Contractor shall supply a new SCADA/EMS master station and supporting equipment and services for the new Control Centre being established in Sri Jayewardenepura in the outskirts of Colombo. Work requiring access to sites and plant requiring Permits to Work (PTW) or access permission shall be coordinated with the Employer. In particular the existing System Control facilities must remain in operation until such time as they are replaced by the new facilities after they have been tested and accepted.24 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . SCADA. 3. 4. training. drawings and documentation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1. completing plant interface works in substations and power plants throughout the country. Applications. The five main elements of the outline design comprise 1. characteristics and types of equipment that the Contractor guarantees to supply. This functionality and performance specification defines an outline design and user requirements in terms of five major elements that will deliver the contract objectives.Section 6 . The installation of all equipment and interfacing to existing equipment shall be organised and executed such that the least disruption is caused to existing plant and equipment. 5. INTRODUCTION The principle objectives of this contract are to provide the Employer with a National System Control Centre (NSCC) for managing the electricity transmission/generation system in Sri Lanka. special tools and test equipment. 1. Bidders may propose alternate design solutions so long as these match or exceed the specified functionality and performance. manufacture. The following Chapters specify the overall scope of work for each of the foregoing sections of work and must be read in conjunction with the General and Particular Technical Specifications that form part of this Bid Document. 1 Remote) Operator Training Simulator hardware (Including Trainee and Trainer Workstations) Rear projection video wall displays to be located in the NSCC control room. Additionally the Bidder is required to complete a set of Technical Schedules that state the standards. Outstation Data Acquisition Servers (Fault tolerant duplicated system) Duplicated ICCP link Interfaces to other DCCs Duplicated Operational LAN Printers. Historical Information) Operating Systems and Antivirus software for all servers and workstations Workstations (3 Operator.

all multiplexing and supporting equipment to provide a fully integrated telecommunication network for the transmission of SCADA telemetry. The design shall accommodate the changing network configuration anticipated during the course of the Contract and the Contractor should expect to reconfigure the SDH network a number of times during the course of the Contract. The works shall include but are not limited to: a) A full survey of all proposed sites for communications equipment shall be undertaken by the Contractor to obtain the necessary data to carry out the detailed design for the work required in substations.Section 6 . Control Centre and any intermediary locations. Installing and interfacing. generating stations. Alternatively integration of the new SDH network components into the existing TMS provided by ABB. 1.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications B SCADA/EMS Master Station Applications k) l) SCADA Software Data Archiving and Report Generation Software m) Network Analysis Applications n) o) p) q) C Energy Management Applications Remote Access (ICCP) Software Operator training simulator software Database and Display Configuration. Implementation of a new telecommunication management system to monitor and supervise the SDH network as well as alarm monitoring of other telecommunication equipment. digital telecommunication fibre optic network backbone based on SDH technology. The optical fibres are available from OPGW on the 220kV and 132 kV overhead lines and it is expected that SDH nodes will mainly be located in the 220kV and 132 kV stations. as well as supporting the growing telecommunication services required for the expansion of the power network to be built during the planned expansion projects. There shall also be summary indication and alarm outputs to the SCADA system. location of equipments. data and speech. To achieve this may include the provision of dual porting at outstations or via a data connection between the existing master station and the new one. cable routes. condition and operability of existing equipment associated with the works and availability of power supplies. protection signalling. This works shall establish interface points. Population and Testing Services and other contractual requirements r) s) t) u) v) w) x) Training Inspection and tests Documentation Specialised tools and test equipment Spares Consumables Post Warranty Maintenance Support The existing System Control Centre (SCC) uses an ABB Micro SCADA system which is at present able to communicate with the existing RTUs and Substation Automation System Gateways. c) d) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. b) Design and implementation of a resilient. The Contractor shall plan the implementation work such that all monitoring facilities currently available in the existing SCC continue to function until the new facilities are put into service. the existing telecommunication facilities are to be upgraded and expanded.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE In order to accommodate the additional telecommunication facilities required for the new NSCC SCADA system.25 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . high bandwidth.

The scope of work at these locations will be to establish the communication links with these outstations via their respective Gateways and to integrate the signals into the new SCADA/EMS database. Post warranty maintenance support.3 OUTSTATIONS AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS The Contractor shall supply and install new Remote Terminal Units (RTUs) to enable control and monitoring of the (400kV in the future). relays Page 6B. Consumables. The works shall include adaptation works at some substations to provide monitoring and control facilities not yet available. into the new system. etc. 132 kV substations and all generation stations shall be undertaken by the Contractor to obtain the necessary data to carry out the detailed design for the substation works. Where the survey establishes that the existing cabling. Special tools and test equipment. 132kV generating and transmission substations including the 33kV sections of those stations. The manufacturer and model of each is indicated in the Table 1. The Contractor may at his option adapt the devices to use the IEC 60870 – 5 . Inspection and tests. They all communicate with the existing Master Station using the IEC 60870 – 5 .104 protocol. Stations equipped with ABB INDACTIC 33 outstations (there are 18 of these) shall be equipped with replacement RTUs and the existing RTUs removed from the site and delivered to the Employer‘s Stores in Colombo.26 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope c) d) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant . 220kV.Section 6 . the Contractor shall integrate existing RTUs. The installation of the additional RTU modules. PMC(Protection Monitoring Computer) Interface and Substation Automation Systems with Gateways . Implementation of new digital teleprotection signalling equipment for electrical protection. This works shall establish interface points. f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) 1. The scope of work at these locations will be to establish the communication links to the new NSCC with the respective outstations and to integrate the signals into the new SCADA/EMS database.101 protocol. Documentation. For example they do not include controls. They all communicate with the existing Master Station using the IEC 60870 – 5 . Additionally. Spares. At present these Outstations communicate with the existing SCADA Master Station but the data subset is not as comprehensive as that required for the new NSCC. Monitoring signals at present used by the existing SCC are wired to Marshalling Cubicles adjacent to the RTUs along with the required interposing relays and mA transducers. Where additional signals are required the additional interfacing devices and cables shall be provided under this Contract. New digital power line carrier (DPLC) links for 132 kV substations and their integration with other communications systems and equipment.101 protocol. Telephone exchanges for the new telephone network. Consequently the scope of work shall include the modifications necessary to invoke the additional signals required for the new NSCC. location of equipment. transducers and cabling required for the full monitoring and control requirements at these sites will be carried out by the Employer. cable routes.. There are 9 outstations that are equipped with ABB RTU 560 devices. The works shall include but not be limited to: a) A full survey of all 220kV. Training. b) There are 27 Outstations Substation Automation Systems with which communication with the new NSCC will be via a Gateway. interposing relays.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications e) The Contractor shall plan the work so that the initial SDH network configuration is in place ahead of the requirement to establish links between the remote sites and the NSCC.

it shall only be necessary to connect the new Outstation device and carry out the point to point testing to put these Outstations into service f) g) h) i) j) k) There are 4 generating stations that shall be equipped for operating with AGC on a total of 10 generators Set Point displays are to be provided at defined stations to facilitate the despatch of MW and MVAr values. Alternatively a link between the existing and new SCADA Master Stations shall be provided.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications and transducers are not in good condition or are otherwise unsuitable the replacement shall be part of this Contract. Where no signals or Marshalling are provided the Contractor shall provide all the cabling. e) In stations with no existing outstation equipment (there are 17 of these) a new RTU shall be provided and a new Marshalling Cubicle (or SCADA Interface Panel) except in cases where there is an existing Marshalling Cubicle. SDH. For Stations that will be implemented under other projects by 2012 the Contractor shall establish the communication links between the new outstation and the new NSCC. In the locations where Marshalling Cubicles are already installed the Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of any additional signals that are required. There are 7 IPP stations the data for which will be available at marshalling points within the substation to which the generation is injected.g. Where appropriate these RTUs may be of a distributed design. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. For those stations to be implemented between 2012 and 2016 (SP11-SP20) the Contractor shall ensure that all necessary equipment. They shall be connected to the new NSCC Master Station via the communication links established under this Contract. PLC). The communication protocol shall be IEC 60870 – 5 . These signals shall be connected to the new RTU in the respective location with the exception of Heladhanavi whose data will be accommodated at the Puttlam SAS. interfaces and capacity is available at the Master Station and within the Telecommunication System to support these new stations. In locations where no secure 48Vdc or 110Vdc supply exists or the existing equipment is unsuitable because of condition. l) m) Training n) o) p) q) r) Inspection and tests Documentation Post Warranty Support Specialised tools and equipment Spares The details of RTUs and SASs that are already installed in transmission substations and generation stations are contained in Table 1. age or capacity the Contractor shall provide secure 48Vdc Charger and Battery system to support the SCADA and Communication facilities being implemented as well as those that may exist (e.101 or 104.Section 6 .27 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . interposing relays and transducers that are required. Details of the operating settings for the protocol at the respective outstation will be made available to the Contractor early in the Contract. Duplicated communication ports may be provided to permit communication with the existing Control Centre and the new NSCC such that parallel running is possible during the transition of control from the present SCADA master to the new NSCC SCADA master station. Where +/-5mA transducers are used these shall be changed for 4-20mA type. Following provision of a new SDH node at the substation and identification of the new substation in the SCADA/EMS database. The existing RTUs and SASs utilise the 1EC 60870–5-101 protocol.

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 NSCC Station Name Ampara GSS Anuradhapura New GSS Anuradhapura Old GSS Balangoda GSS Biyagama GSS Bowatenna PS Canyon PS Embilipitiya GSS Habarana GSS Hambantota GSS Kelanitissa PS (Export) 33kV Kelaniya GSS Kiribathkumbura GSS Kosgama GSS Kothmale PS Kotudoga – 132kV GSS Kurunegala GSS Laxapana PS (Old) Matara GSS Nuwara Eliya GSS Panadura GSS Pannipitiya GSS 132 kV Polpitiya PS GSS Randenigala PS Rantambe PS Ratmalana GSS Samanalawewa PS Sapugaskanda GSS Sapugaskanda PS Seethawaka GSS Trincomalee GSS Ukuwela Valachcheni GSS Veyangoda 132 kV Victoria PS NSCC Building Total Data Points (New RTUs) IC1 IC2 S1 S2 S3 Fort (Substation F) Kolupittiya (Substation E) Total Data Points (DCC) ACE Power Matara .IPP Data Points 468 538 553 612 975 91 126 476 543 340 398 530 533 353 737 457 470 488 474 404 403 511 446 157 593 442 262 581 451 393 290 96 370 296 266 176 15299 260 260 520 232 384 90 Data at SIP in Matara GSS Data at SIP in Kelaniya GSS Data at SIP in Kelanitissa GIS DCC Colombo Project DCC Colombo Project Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU One of each type supplied under this contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.IPP Asia Power PS (KHD) .Section 6 .Outstation List No.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Table 1.28 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .IPP Barge Power Colombo .

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications No.Section 6 .IPP Heladhanavi PS .IPP Embilipitiya ACE Power PS .IPP Total Data Points (IPP) Athurugiriya GSS Chilaw (Madampe) GSS KCCP / AES PS Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kerawalapitiya PS Kotugoda 33kV GSS Puttalam GSS Ratnapura GSS Thulhiriya GSS Total Data Points (RTU 560) Colombo Substation C Dehiwala GSS Havelock Town (Sub A) Horana Kelanatissa 132kV GSS Maradana GSS (Sub I) Sri Jayawardhanapura GSS Vavuniya GSS Kolonnawa GIS Pannipitiya 220/33kV GSS Puttalam PS(Coal Power) Veyangoda 220kV GSS Ambalangoda GSS Aniyakanda GSS Bolawatta GSS Deniyaya GSS Katunayaka GSS Kerawalapitiya GSS Kotugoda 220kV GSS Pannala GSS Laxapana PS (New) Wimalasurendra PS Wimalasurendra GSS Ukuwela GSS Badulla GSS Data Points 232 337 336 118 1729 533 387 122 429 249 338 514 320 425 3317 202 332 498 416 329 463 302 361 1024 586 147 455 330 318 363 271 414 377 385 376 356 103 292 595 468 Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations Data at SIP Chunnakam GSS Data at SIP in Embilipitiya GSS Data at SIP in Puttlam GSS Data at SIP in Sapugaskanda GSS Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 . S4 S5 S6 S7 560-1 560-2 560-3 560-4 560-5 560-6 560-7 560-8 560-9 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 Station Name Chunnakam PS .TH1 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB SCS 500 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.29 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .IPP Lakdhanavi PS .

HVAC.2016 The Scope of Work shall include the provision of 1 of each type of RTU supplied under the Contract to be installed in the NSCC building.2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 . Dual Uninterruptible Power Supply with batteries capable of providing 3 hours of standby capacity b.2016 Under station project 2012 . UPS.2016 Under station project 2012 .4 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM An Uninterruptible Power Supply System is to be installed at the new NSCC building to provide secure electrical supplies to the Control Centre complex.Section 6 . diesel generator.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications No. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2016 Under station project 2012 .30 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . V1 V2 Station Name Kukule PS Matugama GSS Total Data Points (SAS Gateway) Chunnakam GSS Galle New GSS Kilinochchi GSS Maho GSS Mahiyangana GSS Naula GSS Pallekele GSS Polonnaruwa GSS Vavunativu GSS Upper Kotmale PS Beliatte GSS Colombo B Colombo K Kadawatha GSS Kappalthurai GSS Kegalle GSS Monaragala GSS Piliyandala Weligama GSS Total Data Points (Under Station Projects) Grand Total Data Points 263 548 10574 339 639 362 300 369 248 319 209 300 184 300 300 300 300 300 300 244 300 300 6213 37652 Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations Interface to VATech Stat. They will be used to gather data associated with the building services and ancillary equipment that is important for the functioning of the control centre such as Equipment Room.2016 Under station project 2012 . temperature and humidity. c.2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 . 1. They will also be used to test spares and replacement modules. intruder detection etc. The system shall comprise but not be limited to: a. d.. A diesel generator capable of supply the complete NSCC building demand including the UPS when charging its batteries Automatic change over panel and distribution boards configured to provide segregation of duplicated or alternative supplies and allow maintenance without disruption to essential supplies A duplicated 48V charger/battery system for the supply to telecommunication equipment and RTUs with a standby capacity of 10 hours. Computer SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19 Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project 2012 . Computer Interface to VATech Stat.

foundations. The complete structural system for the building shall include but not be limited to. d. c. The results of the Soil Investigation and Land Survey will be provided with the Tender Documents to the Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete works including but not limited to: a. framing and connection of any architectural features. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing utilities and structures affecting the work. The Contractor shall coordinate all trades and verify dimensions and interfaces in the field. roof framing. Control Room furniture and fittings. Conceptual Design b.5 NSCC BUILDING A new building shall be provided at the designated location in Sri Jayewardenepura on the outskirts of Colombo. The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Power Supply System: UPS Distribution Boards provided within the UPS part of Works Communication System: Interconnection between the Master Station communication servers/interface and the Communication System(s) including all cabling and participation in testing and commissioning. 1. coordination of floor slabs to slope to floor drains shown on other drawings and support and bracing of mechanical and electrical related structures as well as all minor structures and any other work to complete the building(s). and supervision to execute the works Construction including piling. Processing and obtaining all national and local construction permits and/or clearances Satisfying all planning and building regulation requirements Detailed Design Provision of all necessary equipment. labour. testing and Commissioning of all building services Landscaping of site around building and reinstatement of surrounding boundary. lateral load stability. materials. f.1 SCADA/EMS System The complete System including the Master Station Equipment.6 CONTRACTUAL AND PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF SUPPLY The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and putting into service of all equipment within his scope of supply and interfacing to existing facilities or equipment supplied under separate contracts.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1. walls. e.31 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . floor and roof diaphragms. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. i. It is a requirement of this Contract that the Contractor actively coordinates all interface requirements with other Contractors and with the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all safety precautions and the methods. The Contractor‘s Structural Engineer of Record shall be responsible for the design of the complete structural system for the building. g.Section 6 . ground works. supplies. The Contractor shall provide temporary bracing and shoring required for installation of all components of the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible in conjunction with those other Contractors or the Employer for the resolution of any technical issues that may be required to successfully complete the works. drainage Complete fitting out Installation. any auxiliary or miscellaneous items or connections are required to complete the working system.6. h. The limits of supply for the respective Sections of Work are as follows: 1. superstructure. The Contractor is required to carry out the design and construction of the new building. The design shall be appropriately prestigious that reflects the importance of the System Control Function. techniques and sequences of procedures required to perform the work.

connections to channel equipment from Outstations. teleprotection signalling equipment. DPLC/PLC links: Existing line coupling equipment and connections to terminal equipment.2 Telecommunication System The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and putting into service the complete Telecommunication system including the SDH backbone network. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. mounting frames cable racks. This would be from the Marshalling Cubicle to either the substation control rooms or the respective bays. ventilation devices etc. Protection signals via OF:Input point on SDH or PDH channel cards NSCC Building: As for the SCADA Master Station Miscellaneous: The Contractor shall provide or carry out any minor civil works. PLC links.32 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and associated interfaces or connections required to complete the working system. 1. Outstations: Outstation communication ports. The contractor shall provide or carry out any minor civil works. the environmental conditions are as required for the Master Station equipment. connectors. Substation equipment: Interfaces to Distance Fault Recorders and frequency measurement devices.Section 6 . OPGW:Optical terminal box provided by others at each outstation and location and the NSCC building. Protection etc. The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Power Supplies: Primary Distribution Boards provided at the Control Centre building and Distribution Boards in Substations and other required locations that are provided by the Employer.6.6. connections and participation in testing and commissioning. cabling. Stations equipped with ABB RTU 560 Outstations .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications OPGW: NSCC Building: - Miscellaneous: - Optical terminal box provided by others at each outstation and location and the NSCC building. ventilation devices etc.3 Outstation and Substation Adaptation Works The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Stations equipped with Gateway devices – SDH or PLC communication channel inputs and the communication ports of the SAS devices define the hardware interface boundaries. the telecommunication network management system. 1. However. required to complete the installation. Communication Systems: Interconnection between the Master Station communication servers/interface and the Communication System(s) including all cabling. Where replacement or new dc supplies are required the 415Vac distribution boards shall be the interface point. required to complete the installation. where additional signals are required (and this may include controls) or where replacement materials are required the boundary shall be at the points of connection of the required materials. telephone system. Where suitable power supplies exist the interface point shall be the dc distribution boards.SDH or PLC communication channel inputs and the communication ports of the RTU devices define the hardware interface boundaries Stations equipped with INDATIC 33 RTUs – The existing marshalling cubicles shall define the contractual boundary for the implementation of the new RTUs. mounting frames cable racks. connectors. access for equipment is feasible and that the Control and Equipment Room designs have been correctly implemented. cabling. The Contractor shall ensure that the Master Station equipment can be located where required. all cable routes that are required are defined and implemented.

building services and all other associated works and services to complete the design.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Stations that are not equipped with Outstations – In cases where no marshalling cubicles are provided the Contractor shall provide all wiring. earthwork. In the cases where there are existing marshalling cubicles these shall define the contractual boundary for the implementation of the new RTUs. Similarly. In the case of the electricity services two independent and segregated routes shall be provided by the Contractor that are protected from mechanical damage. cable trays. construction and fitting out of the NSCC building. mechanical. The Contractor shall provide suitable routes from the boundary of the construction site to enable the electricity. interfaces that are required to implement the full monitoring and control requirements detailed in the station signal lists. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. travel.6. This would be from the Marshalling Cubicle to either the substation control rooms or the respective bays. architectural. structural. Connection for IPP stations – The marshalling point in the respective GSS shall be the defined boundary.33 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor shall include all work required including reinstatement of disturbed areas within and surrounding the site of construction including areas where the Contractor‘s work force.6. telephone.6. 1. accessories and other materials required to complete the installation and setting to work shall be included in the scope of work. civil and building services works associated the provision of the NSCC building. equipment. ducting. switch rooms and battery room in the new NSCC building. protected and segregated routes up to the boundary of the construction site for the communications cables to enter the building. design. 2 Coordination with the supplier of the DCC system to set up the required exchange of data. The Contractor shall provide all required management. However. All cables.4 Colombo City Distribution Control Centre The Works involved with the Distribution Control Centre will require the following considerations: 1 Installation of necessary telecommunication equipment for the implementation of an ICCP links between the DCC and the new NSCC. The Contractor shall also provide suitable termination points for these services. Diesel Generator and associated control panels and distribution boards and their termination in the primary intake. labour. The service cables shall be provided by the Employer who will terminate them on Distribution Boards provided by the Contractor.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply System The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the complete UPS. The Contractor shall coordinate with the parties responsible within the Employer‘s organisation to ensure that all required data is defined and made available and that all activities required to complete and put into service these facilities for data exchange are carried out. electrical. connectors. civil. the Contractor shall provide independent. Where suitable power supplies exist the interface point shall be the dc distribution boards.6 NSCC Building The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete architectural. storage and other related activities have occurred.Section 6 . cubicles. In addition to the coordination required with the other sections of work under this Contract the Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of access and routes for services. where additional signals are required (and this may include controls) or where replacement materials are required the boundary shall be at the points of connection of the required materials. 1. administration. Where replacement or new dc supplies are required the 415Vac distribution boards shall be the interface point. 1. water and drainage services to be connected.

UPS. that each main product (listed below) offered under this contract. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the bidder shall ensure that identical products in design have been in service for a minimum period of five (5) years. The bidders also shall take into consideration the relevant costs that will be incurred. In respect of design of products offered under this bid. If the offered products are manufactured under license.34 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .8 THE ENVIRONMENT AND ADHERENCE TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL ACTS. to the products offered under the contract. for the strict adherence to the environmental safeguard measures stipulated in the environmental approvals and the relevant documents forming part of such approvals obtained under the above acts/regulations/guidelines with respect to this project. is designed/manufactured/produced by a manufacturer with a minimum of fifteen (15) years successful experience in designing/manufacturing/producing comparable products. regulations and/or guidelines with respect to the execution of this project   National Environmental Act No. 47 of 1980 including all the amendments Relevant Environmental safeguard requirements and reports under ADB‘s safeguard policy statement.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1. Main Product List: SCADA Application Soft ware EMS Application Software SCADA Hardware Rear Projection Video Wall RTUs Outstation interfacing equipment Fibre Optic terminal equipment Communication interfaces Power line Carrier Equipment Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems (including Diesel Generator. REGULATIONS AND / OR GUIDELINES The selected contractor is responsible for the full compliance with the following acts. The Bidder shall provide adequate evidence of compliance to the above requirements to the satisfaction of the CAPC. Bids that do not comply with the above requirements or with incomplete evidence of compliance may be rejected. Building Services M&E equipment 1.Section 6 .7 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURES OF PRODUCTS The bidder shall ensure. the service experience of products manufactured by the parent company shall not be counted as service experience of the licensee's products. In the case of Computer Based and other electronic equipment the general system shall comply with this requirement whereas the devices used and architecture shall follow the latest models and standards. Batteries & 48Vdc Chargers).

The control rooms will be the only common point of failure with respect to external hazards. 2. the Contractor shall develop new software to provide all specified functionality that cannot be achieved using the Contractor‘s standard products. it is important that the objectives of the requirements are met even though the solution may not entirely comply with the Specification. Due to its pivotal role in the operational management of the power network the SCADA master station at the Control Centre must be secure against internal failures and external hazards. The system and applications to be supplied shall be based on proven products that shall. the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying.Section 6 . as far as is possible. However.2 2.2 System Architecture The System design and architecture shall have followed industry standard open systems concepts with regard to interconnections with other equipment conforming to open standards and system upgradeability. such as fire. This Chapter of the specification details the requirement for the Master Station and supporting equipment to be provided at each location. In this respect. potentially common mode hazards. The design shall be such that no single failure shall cause the loss or disruption to essential facilities. certain subsystems shall be replicated such that no single failure shall cause loss of functionality and that the availability of the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. NSCC SCADA/EMS 2. 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. without operator intervention.2. As a defence against this it shall be possible to utilise any of the workstations located outside the control room as operational workstations including those associated with the maintenance and training facilities. all software. The Contractor shall endeavour to meet the specified requirements using their standard software products. hardware. As defence against internal equipment failures the Master Station shall comprise a set of redundant hardware and software facilities as required to meet the availability requirements of this specification. and without causing a degradation of functionality or performance. Communication and power cabling shall be physically segregated to support the segregation of redundant hardware and software facilities. Further to this. The Bidder shall include details in their offer how each of the specified requirements will be met by naming the standard product/module that provides the specified functionality or by stating the extent of software development required to implement the functionality.2. In this context it is recognised that such a system will have standard functional features not specified herein but nevertheless important or essential for the implementation of a fully operational system.1 INTRODUCTION A new NSCC is to be established to facilitate control and monitoring of the 220/132kV network and the primary feeds to the 33kV networks. The Bidder shall identify whether the offered solution is a deviation from the specified requirement or an alternative that meets the objectives of the specified requirement. be configured to meet these functional requirements. as well as for data management.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS General This specification document details the functional requirements of the SCADA/EMS Master Station software to be supplied under this Contract. redundant elements of the master station (principally servers) shall be capable of being located in physically segregated rooms within the Control Centre building(s). A new SCADA/EMS Master Station is to be supplied and installed in the newly constructed Control Centre building to provide the control and monitoring facilities. However. System to be supplied shall be based on mature products that have evolved and been proven in comparable projects. within the Contract price. To provide a first level of defence against external. for hardware and software. For example cabling to workstations outside the control room should not run through the control room and cabling to each workstation within the control room should be segregated. documentation and miscellaneous items required to implement a fully operational system whether or not those items are explicitly specified or requested. In normal operation all subsystems and functions shall be available. The design is required to ensure that failures of components or sub-systems are detected promptly and that previously redundant components are brought into operational use.35 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

g. 400kV). The Master Station software including SCADA and applications databases and display facilities shall be dimensioned to accommodate a four fold increase in size of the power network elements (nodes. This is estimated to be some 50. In addition. indications and alarms from the previously successful scan shall continue to be displayed. The Contractor shall demonstrate in the Factory Tests that these expansion requirements can be achieved without such degradation. operator workstations to be located elsewhere via a remote connection. Facilities shall be incorporated to indicate automatically to the operators that the relevant data has not been updated. switches etc. The design shall be such as to avoid interruption of data acquisition because of faults. In the event of detection of a data transmission error or failure. 2. The Contractor shall identify where subsystems need to be replicated to meet the specified requirements: The SCADA Master Station workstations need not be replicated provided the functionality previously available at a failed workstation is automatically available at a pre-defined workstation and by suitable access codes at other operator workstations. Indicative outline design for the SCADA system is shown in Drawing TD/CE/1/82/D/SCA-001. Under no circumstances shall it be possible for the system to lose data and be in an indeterminate state with respect to data validity. d) The above expansion shall be achieved without degradation to the availability or performance of the master station. transformers. 2.Section 6 . other than the workstations themselves.2. the Master Station shall be capable of expansion to support 2 additional operator workstations within the control room and a further 2. 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications functions meets the specified reliability requirements. then duplication is not required.3 Initial and Ultimate Sizing The initial sizing of SCADA Master Station shall meet the requirements of the Outstation telemetered data and non telemetered data.5 Risks The construction of equipment and its installation shall be such that common mode risks from external hazards are minimised. generators. The delivered systems shall be dimensioned according to the following: a) b) c) A four-fold increase in the number of all database points both telemetered and nontelemetered.2. The expansion capability of SCADA Master Station system is required to match power system developments over its service life of some 15 years. for example Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. The system must be designed to allow a faulty item to be removed from service and to be replaced without the functionality of the system being affected. etc shall be accounted for separately by the Contractor.4 Reliability and Availability It is a fundamental requirement that each system (and individual items of equipment within them) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and standard existing software used within the systems shall have been proven in service.36 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . No additional hardware or software shall be required to accommodate the expansion defined above for the Master Station.).000 data points. if suitable diversity of printers on servers is provided and automatic reassignment. A two-fold increase in the number of Outstations. The Bidder shall demonstrate in the sizing calculation to be provided with the offer that these expansion requirements are provided for and can be achieved without such degradation.2. The introduction of an additional voltage level (e. Redundant items shall not be vulnerable to the same events. would be required in order to ensure that the performance of the system is not compromised by such an expansion in the number of workstations. The Bidder shall indicate if any additional hardware or software or licences. Similarly for Master Station printers. Any additional capacity required for internal management.

The data acquisition software shall continue to operate on the alternate communication channel until instructed to switch-over to the main link by the Operator.1. Segregation shall be used where possible and/or suitable means of protection. 2. calculated and data from other systems accessible at the NSCC. It shall only be possible to ―switch‖ Outstations by manual command from an appropriate display. manually entered. Where a report by exception technique is used the data acquisition software shall initiate a full scan of an RTU to retrieve the actual state of the RTU under the following circumstances: a) b) c) d) e) Master Station cold start RTU or SAS reset Restoration of communications Cyclically every 24 hours On request by the operator The facility to ―switch‖ Outstations into or out-of-scan for maintenance or commissioning purposes shall be provided. All operator actions required to enable and disable data acquisition in the manner outlined above shall be recorded in the events list. 2.1 SCADA APPLICATIONS Communication 2. indications and alarms from the previously successful scan shall continue to be displayed on the workstations. 2.3.1.2 Data Processing The SCADA system shall provide a comprehensive and flexible set of facilities for processing telemetered. In the event of detection of a data transmission error or failure. Where an alternate communication channel to the Outstation is available communication shall be switched automatically by the data acquisition software.3. The system shall also maintain a separate list of all data points which have been manually taken 'off scan'. Statistics on the performance of each communication channel shall be available for display. For each communication channel the data acquisition software shall detect loss of communication with an Outstation and raise an alarm.2 ICCP Data Links Duplicated ICCP Data Links are required between the NSCC and the Colombo City Distribution Control to support the exchange of operational and commercial data including real time data acquired or calculated by the respective SCADA systems. The IEC 60870 – 6 TASE 2 protocol shall be adopted for these links. All existing Outstations that are to remain in service operate using the IEC 60870-5101 protocol new Outstations shall communicate with the master stations using the IEC 60870-5-101 or 104 protocols.Section 6 .37 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The data acquisition system shall send out polling requests for data in accordance with a preprogrammed routine so as to maintain the database updated with the latest data from all Outstations. The installation plan shall include the measures to be taken to prevent such contingencies and will be subject to approval. The following requirements relate to specific types of data.1 Data Acquisition The data acquisition software shall be capable of supporting multiple telecontrol protocols for the monitoring and control of substation plant via RTUs and Substation Automation Systems (SAS) with Gateway access. The status of all Outstation communication shall be available for display at any of the Master Station Workstations.3 2.3. The data acquisition system shall monitor the performance of each communication channel.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications damage in a location shall not affect both parts of the duplicated/redundant equipment/component or cabling. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Facilities shall be incorporated however to indicate automatically to the operators that the relevant data has not been updated.3.

The following conversion types shall therefore be provided for measured value scaling: a) b) No conversion .38 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . For monopolar measured values.1 Measured Values Scaling Measured values shall be converted. Suppressed zero . at database construction.Section 6 . and shall be amendable on-line by the Operator. It shall be possible to specify for each voltage.A and B are constants that provide the scaling and offset for the analogue value X. Where conversion of raw data to engineering units is required this shall be configurable on an individual point basis. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. For bipolar measured values alarm supervision shall be between four adjustable alarm limits. an event shall be recorded in the event list. All active and reactive power flowing out of a busbar shall be negative. the system shall not consider a value to have returned within a set of limits until it has done so by a predefined and operator adjustable margin. An A*X conversion is provided by setting the B constant (offset) to zero. This period shall be a system wide parameter. scaled and presented dependent upon the form in which the data is collected from the Outstation.For each value of this conversion type a database value is specified below which the converted value will be set to zero. alarm supervision shall be between two adjustable alarm limits. c) Each measured value shall have an associated 'value out of range' raw data value threshold. a value in engineering units. Unique pairs of A and B are provided for each analogue point requiring this conversion. All limit violations shall be annunciated as an alarm to the operator and recorded on the event list. A*X+B conversion .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.3. When enabled the scanned measured value shall be continuously checked against assigned limit values.The value in raw counts is stored directly in the database unchanged. below which the voltage shall be stored as zero. based on the number (1 or more) of consecutive scans for which the transgression is true. A time-delay filter shall be provided to ensure that any transient limit-transgressions do not result in transient changes to the displayed or annunciated alarm state. It shall be possible for the alarm limits to be amended on-line by the Operator. Whenever a measurement returns within limits from a limit violation. Amendments to the active limits shall generate a message indicating the changes made to the limit values within the event list. When disabled no limit checking shall apply to the selected measured value. The following sign conventions for real and reactive power flow shall be used universally throughout the SCADA system: a) All active and reactive power flowing into a busbar shall be positive b) Limits All limit values shall be in engineering units. To avoid annunciation of certain transitory conditions it shall also be possible to delay the annunciation of an alarm for a defined period. To ensure that items whose values are varying just above and just below alarm limits do not generate a constant stream of alarms.2. If this value is exceeded the last valid value shall be displayed and an out-of-range attribute shall mark the data item.

On removal of an override the value shall be marked suspect until the value has been updated from the telemetered source or recalculated.2. The appearance of values on displays shall be different when an override has been applied. and ‗unauthorised‘ changes such as occur from other actions. . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. Overridden values shall not be updated by values telemetered from Outstations or calculated by the system for values which are scan inhibited. such as occur due to commands initiated by the operator.Section 6 . The System shall only permit the application of overrides for measured values by users with the appropriate area of authority. shall be provided. All measurements shall be eligible for overriding. All digital points shall be eligible for overriding.g.39 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope by a return to normal alarm when the Procurement of Plant . a protection signal that is present for the duration of operation only) and non-fleeting or persistent (signal that remains in changed state until state changes again e. The appearance of digital points on displays shall be modified when an override has been applied. these being fleeting (momentary signal e. Overridden values shall not be updated by values telemetered from Outstations or calculated by the system for values which are scan inhibited. 2. shall not result in an alarm signal until a predetermined period has elapsed to allow the device to reach its final position.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Acknowledged limit alarms associated with the measured value shall not generate an additional alarm. All status changes shall be processed immediately. protection operation.g. Transitory conditions that generate intermediate signals as may occur with disconnects. Double Points Double point indications shall be used to indicate the status of circuit breaker and switch position (Open or Closed) and other devices where a higher integrity is required than is possible with single point indication. Status changes arising from operator issued commands shall not be treated as an alarm condition.3.g. The ability to differentiate between ‗authorised‘ status changes.Digital Points Status Indications comprise signals formed as single or double point values.g. Two forms of alarms shall be supported. The system shall also be able to process these as switch position but without the ‗validity‘ logic. Overrides shall be enterable and removable wherever the value is displayed subject to appropriate user function authority. most signals are in this category) alarms.2 Status Indications . Manual Overrides Facilities shall be provided for overriding measured values with fixed values entered via the User Interface. An output must be obtained from each of the two positions (e. e. Manual Overrides Facilities shall be provided for overriding digital point values with fixed values entered via the user Interface.g. 10 or 01) so that a persistent invalid combination (e. In many cases the indication wiring and interposing relays are existing and have been implemented as single point status signals. Single Points In general this category encompasses alarm and status indications. 00 or 11) shall result in the data being declared invalid. Unacknowledged limit alarms shall be annunciated again measured value returns within limits. but shall be removed from the alarm list when the measured value returns within limits.

On removal of an override the SCADA shall immediately request the present status of the point from the RTU.2. The definition of a derived measured value shall permit the prioritisation of elements within a calculation. Overrides shall be enterable and removable wherever the digital point is displayed subject to appropriate user function authority.3. The construction of these derived data values shall be operator orientated and not require the use of the tools used for database management and manipulation.3 Derived Data Facilities shall be provided for deriving data values from other data items (including other derived measured values and digitals from anywhere in the system).Section 6 . The operands that shall be supported are as follows: a) Arithmetic       b) Unary   c) Square root Unary negation Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Modulus Boolean     Logical AND Logical OR Logical exclusive-OR Logical NOT d) Relational       Greater than > Greater than or equal to  Less than <  Less than or equal to Equal to Not equal to =  e) Functions      Absolute Minimum Maximum Logarithm Natural logarithm Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications On removal of an override the digital point shall be marked suspect until the value has been updated from the telemetered source or recalculated.40 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 2.

It is anticipated that the storage will be achieved by use of the historical data processing and storage facilities and may include some pre-processing such as totalisation by period.3. These attributes shall be propagated with the status or value of each data item. with appropriate functional authority. MVAr and Voltage measurements -MVA calculated from MW and MVAr values -MW values calculated from MWh values averaged over 15 minute periods -MVAr values calculated from MVArh values averaged over 15 minute periods -MWh and MVArh values calculated from MW values over defined periods or accumulative values 2.2.12. cosine and tangent and their inverse functions. to set or clear the event inhibit attribute on-line.6 Data Quality Attributes All telemetered data.2. A derived measured value shall be processed in the same way as any other measurement.2 Event Inhibited The event inhibit attribute is applied when the data item is active and up-to-date but no event or alarm is to be annunciated or recorded even if a limit is transgressed or a change of status is detected.g. e. region and for the total system. etc. The performance requirements for the processing of derived values are specified in Clause 2. monthly and annual energy figures by substation.3.2. A facility shall be provided for setting up and synchronising the stored values such that there is consistency with the actual measuring device. The quality attributes required as a minimum are given in the following sub-clauses.6.6.4 Meter Values Energy metering values will be available as pulsed inputs to Outstations.2. Examples of derived values that will be used are: -Line currents calculated from MW. derived data and received via ICCP data link shall have attributes associated with each value that define the current quality of the data. 2. 2.3. 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications    Statistics Summation Sine. area. day.Section 6 . area. A lack of any other quality attribute can be used to indicate this state. Where master-follower equipment is installed the process shall identify whether a slave tap changer is out of step with the master. This condition shall be annunciated as an alarm. The arrangement should be such as to ensure the integrity of the data after temporary loss of the SCADA or communications.41 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . There would normally be an out of step indication as well derived directly from the AVR system. limit checking and propagation of quality attributes. The SCADA system shall be able to report the daily. And be available in one line and tabular displays. The energy metering data collected by the SCADA shall be stored within the SCADA system.3. 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The alarm generated by the tap position processor shall be used to determine whether there is a fault on the tap position indication circuitry.5 Tap Position These shall be processed from transducers with mA or binary coded outputs and displayed as integer number tap positions. up-to-date and uninhibited.3. The system shall provide facilities to enable the user.2.1 Normal Data A normal data item is defined as one which is active.

Successful completion of a control shall be indicated by update of its new telemetered state and the presentation of a confirmatory message. 2. e. overridden or value-out-of-range attribute(s) set if any of its constituent elements has the corresponding attribute(s) set. The transmission of a command signal. ‗close‘ or ‗trip‘ shall not interrupt the receipt of incoming data from the Outstation.2.3.6.5 Value-Out-of-Range The value-out-of-range attribute shall mark a measured value as exceeding the metering range of the measuring device. Failure of a control shall be indicated by de-selection of the plant item and the presentation of an informative message. Controls may be individual or part of a user definable sequence. Facilities shall be provided to inhibit control of any plant item suitable for supervisory control. 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. to trip a breaker which is in the open position. The failed control shall generate an alarm and initiate audible annunciation. The override feature shall be separate from the facility to change manually-dressed (non-telemetered and non-derived) data items.2. the following conditions must be satisfied: a) b) Initiation of a command shall involve a ‗select before operate‘ procedure. Errors occur in the control protocol sequences.2. If equipment suitable for remote control is selected.6.6.3.2.42 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It shall not be possible to control an item where an applied tag is specified as an interlock. The system shall also cancel controls automatically.3.7 Controls The system shall provide the facility to control plant and equipment by telecommand.g. then the command shall be blocked and an appropriate message given to the operator.6. e. but the device is selected to local control at the substation. Any plant item so inhibited shall have suitable identification on the displays. However.4 Overridden Data The overridden attribute shall apply when the value of a data item has been manually replaced.6 Propagation of Quality Attributes A derived item shall have its suspect.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.3. control orders may be sent to different Outstations at the same time. Only one valid control order may be sent at any time to a given Outstation. This should be confirmed to the Master Station from the appropriate Outstation. An item shall remain suspect until a valid update is received.g.3.2. A change of state resulting from a successful control shall not generate an audible annunciation.Section 6 .3 Suspect Data Data shall be marked suspect if the item is active but the updating of its value or status is discontinued for any reason other than an applied override. 2. If equipment is selected which is unsuitable for remote control or if the wrong control initiation is attempted. In communicating commands to the Outstations. 2. then an incorrect selection indication shall be given. such as when: a) A control check-back failure occurs at any stage b) c) d) A control is not executed within a predetermined time of selection There is a failure of a main computer resulting in a restart or changeover to a standby computer.

e and selected instances of i above. requiring acknowledgement by an operator. Many events will arise from initiating conditions that have two well defined states and. Illegal values shall be alarmed. a) A state change of a binary signal input at an Outstation b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) A supervisory control action issued from the master station System generated messages. Typically. Certain exceptions to the normal interpretation of events shall apply:  A state change [source (a) events] normally expected to result from a supervisory control action [source (b) events] shall only be interpreted by the system as an alarm when the associated control command has not been issued.g. it will be required that the transitions between both states are recorded as events.43 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . 2. 2.3. The Telecommand Log shall identify the user. This situation shall also give rise to an alarm and the representation of the corresponding device upon diagram displays as being in an 'undefined' state. An ‗alarm‘ is defined as an annunciated event. Where binary coding of transformer tap positions is employed.   2. e. when the breaker moves to the closed position and when it moves to the open position).1 Definition An ‗Event‘ is defined as any change of state or threshold transition and includes the following. circuit breaker status. a further event shall be derived from any incongruent condition arising between the independent contacts (e. and dynamic display facilities. alarms may be generated from any of sources a. However. All control actions and individual steps of switching sequences shall be logged in a single Telecommand Log which shall be available for display on-line and/or printed if required.3 Alarm and Event Processing 2. time and date of the occurrence of each entry. Event description text shall be appended to each item in the event list and be available for printing.e. c. In the case of double point status indications (e.3.3.g.3. both contacts open or both contacts closed for longer than a defined time). the resulting changes shall be used to update the real-time database.2 Event Handling As events are processed. log 'OFF' actions Measurand limit violations Manual diagram dressing actions Alarm acknowledgements System configuration and data amendment actions Conditions derived from the logical combinations of signals.2.3.3. where both the open and closed states are monitored by separate auxiliary contacts) it will normally be required to record as events only two of the four transitions (i.3. whether or not a transition is recorded as an event shall be user configurable. The actual events to be defined as alarms shall be user configurable. the signal shall be processed to give a discrete integer value output corresponding to the tap position and changes between these discrete values shall be handled as an event. control action tracking messages. In the case of double point indications. single bit state changes shall be evaluated by the system in the context of a coded group of bits for the purpose of registering an event. fault messages Log 'ON'. in the majority of cases.g.1 Event Descriptions Event descriptions shall comprise the following information for each event: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. Where analogue transducers are used to provide transformer tap position indications.Section 6 . Illegal values shall be alarmed.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Cancellation shall return the plant item to a state in which a new operation may be selected.

It shall also be possible to save a number of search criteria for quick access and use in the future. and device or other identifier. message descriptions. action. In addition to the paging mechanism. 2.44 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Each alarm entry shall include the time and date of occurrence. but each new page displayed shall retain some lines from the previous page. substation name) Voltage level (where appropriate) Circuit description (where appropriate) Signal specific description (e. source location.3.2. filtered and sorted according to certain criteria. including either end of the list. incorporating features such as variable Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. so that it always displays the most recent entries. backup protection) Signal state (e. it shall be possible to generate an audible annunciation for selected alarms by setting attributes in the database.3. etc. whereby he shall be able to produce a reduced list. as required. source location. NORMAL) Operator's identity (for e.g. If page 1 (most recent entries) of a list is displayed.3. it shall be paged automatically. OPERATED. An operator shall be able to send the search output to a printer or a disc file. A search and sort facility shall be available to the operator. The search and sort facility shall be very flexible. alarm acknowledgements) For limit violations. as required. manual dressing actions.g. 2. The operator shall be able to page through the lists in either direction. The mask shall allow entry of search and sort criteria such as: date/time. the most recent page of entries shall be presented. incorporating features such as variable length character string searches and the use of wildcard characters. The search and sort facility shall be very flexible.3. message type. whereby he shall be able to produce a reduced list. operator identity. there shall be a facility to jump immediately to an approximate position within the list. to achieve rapid location of any portion of a list. Event list shall be sized to accommodate at least 10 000 events and shall automatically archive any overflow on a first in first out basis. location. The list shall be updated automatically with new entries as they enter the system. it shall be automatically brought to the Operators‘ attention via the Graphic User Interface GUI. filtered and sorted according to certain criteria. etc. Additionally.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) 2. A search and sort facility shall be available to the operator. status. the value of the limit transgressed and the actual value of the measurand The value entered for manual entries Event list When an event list is first called up for display in a list window.Section 6 . commands. message type. When the page is full the system shall refresh the display to ensure that the latest events are shown. message descriptions.3.g. The alarm lists shall be displayed in chronological order with the most recent alarm first with the occurrence of new alarms handled in the same manner as events.g. upon operator request.3 Alarm Management Where an event is configured as an alarm. to provide visual continuity. The criteria shall be entered through a pro forma mask that the operator shall be able to call up. A list of substations and SCADA system groups with unacknowledged alarms shall be available to the operator.2 Date and time from the event message time stamp Location description (e. The mask shall allow entry of search and sort criteria such as: date/time. It shall be possible to use the jump and page controls at will.3. operator identity. value and normal limits.1 Alarm Lists Alarms shall be displayed on Acknowledged and Unacknowledged alarm lists. The criteria shall be entered through a pro forma mask that the operator shall be able to call up.3.

It shall be possible to navigate directly to the substation unacknowledged alarm page from this display.3 Alarm suppression The software shall support two forms of alarm suppression manual and automatic.3. Each suppression command shall be recorded on the event list. The acknowledgement shall be logged in the event list.3.Section 6 . it shall be possible for the operator to suppress the processing of individual alarm. Any device being displayed on a one line diagram to which the alarm is associated shall flash. 2. Reset of alarm condition shall be treated in the same manner as the onset except that on acknowledgement the onset and reset messages shall be removed from the alarm list.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications length character string searches and the use of wildcard characters. The alarm sequence shall be as follows: a) At the onset of the alarm condition the alarm will be entered into the alarm window. If the alarm is fleeting it shall disappear from the alarm lists.45 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . b) c) The audible alarm may be silenced by the operator(s). A nuisance alarm shall be defined by the occurrence of a user definable number of changes of state within a user definable period Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. a) Priority b) c) d) e) f) g) Voltage level Substation Equipment type System Area of responsibility Time period A display shall also be provided which identifies all substations with unacknowledged alarms. It‘s priority shall be highlighted with the use of colour.2 Alarm Sequence All alarms shall be brought to the attention of the operators.3. on a page basis and from diagrams on a device basis. and into the Unacknowledged alarm list where displayed. d) e) f) The operator shall have the facility to accept alarms individually.3. Silencing alarms shall not inhibit the annunciation of further alarms or constitute an acknowledgement of the alarm. It shall also be possible to save a number of search criteria for quick access and use in the future. Where the reset condition occurs before the onset has been acknowledged. For manual suppression. If the alarm is persistent it shall be displayed on the Acknowledged alarm list. Symbols on the one line diagrams shall cease flashing when the alarm is acknowledged. Flashing shall not be used in the alarm lists. the message for both conditions shall remain in the alarm list and device symbols shall flash at half the rate of the alarm conditions. Alarm list shall be sized to accommodate 5000 Alarms and shall automatically archive any overflow on a first in first out basis. The system shall support the automatic suppression of nuisance alarms. The presence of an unacknowledged alarm which has reset shall be indicated by colour in the alarm list.3. This facility is intended for use in cases where faulty signals generate repetitive nuisance events and alarms. 2. The alarm message will be acknowledged by the operator.

etc. which allows the operator to save and subsequently restore the screen layout and its contents. The workstations shall be capable of supporting as a minimum the number of windows per display specified in the Schedules.2 Access Control The SCADA system software shall be capable of supporting different levels of user.3. It shall be possible to alter the duration of the pre and post event recording by simple Operator settings. An organised approach to handling multiple windows. The total pre event and post event storage times shall be readily adjustable using simple user instructions.3. Access control shall be provided which requires all users to identify themselves and enter passwords before being granted access. 2. is preferred.3. The Bidder may offer a system that records all data samples and provides facilities to construct such reports.3. the main functional requirements and principles of operation have been defined and it is required that the Contractor shall develop his design accordingly.5 Sequence of Events Processing Sequence of events processing shall be provided whereby the order of occurrence of events shall processed for: a.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications of time. All suppressed alarms either manually by the operator or automatically shall be displayed on a list suppressed alarm list.Section 6 . 2. The initiating of such recording shall also be possible from logical rules and calculated values. The process shall also group the data on an event basis. An alarm shall be generated indicating that the event has been automatically been suppressed. The list will have the facility to sort the alarms suppressed by to display those by station and/or by type either manual or automatic suppression. A ‗first in first out‘ log of values and events shall be maintained such that following predefined alarm conditions the values of measurements and status (received from the entire telemetry system) for the previous 5 minutes and the values for the following 10 minutes shall be stored and made available in a disturbance monitoring record. 2. Rather.3.g.4. such as Operator. Events that are time stamped on occurrence by the Outstation The sequence of events processor shall maintain a chronological list of events that can be viewed on a station.4 Graphic User Interface (GUI) 2.3.4. It is not intended that they should define in detail the methods of presenting information to the operator and the means of operator interaction with the system.3. Engineer. System Manager. The data shall be readily available to include in reports. Supervisor. The operator shall be able to define the start and end points in terms of message identity numbers or date/time stamps.46 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Events where a time stamp is applied to a signal on receipt by the Master Station b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The records shall be available for inclusion in reports and shall be readily viewable by Operators at their workstations. incorporating all additional detail necessary to furnish a comprehensive and fully functional interface for interaction with the system. e. Under these conditions the SCADA software shall automatically suppress the processing of this alarm.3.6 Disturbance Monitoring A facility to record events associated with disturbances shall be provided. 2. When the number of changes of state fall below the user defined threshold then the SCADA software shall remove the automatic suppression of the alarm. circuit or system basis.4 Printing of Alarm & Event Lists Operators shall also be able to request the printing of all or a portion of any event or alarm list or search for an output list (see above) by defining the start and end points through a screen pro-forma or dialogue. The design of the User Interface shall be based on standard software packages.3. per fault. An alarm reset shall be generated indicating the removal of the automatic suppressed condition. 2.1 General The following sub-clauses outline the general functional requirements and principles of operation for the Graphic User Interface.

disconnected.4. earthing switches.Section 6 . These shall include selection of individual stations from the overview diagram and by database search selection using the station name or mnemonic.3. including transformers. An alarm event shall be generated whenever the topology processor encounters a circuit arrangement resulting in the interconnection of the secondary windings of two transformers in either the same or different substations at the distribution level (11 kV or 33kV). etc. etc.) Geographical areas Designated areas of responsibility Editing or creating data files. The displays shall include most items of plant explicitly.4. The connectivity data shall be updated automatically whenever a topology change is detected. Database and graphic display amendment The actual access privileges and users will be defined during the detailed implementation phase of the project. Connectivity shall be determined and held for each version of the network image resident in the database. reports. It shall be possible to show the operating status of any circuit.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The system shall be capable of supporting a minimum 32 different levels of users. energised. as a result of telemetered status changes and/or manual diagram dressing. displays.3. When fully zoomed in the diagram shall show the level of detail traditionally included on substation one line diagrams making these unnecessary. by use of colour. with progressively more detail including measurement values shown as the display is zoomed in. disconnects/isolators. isolated.2 Network Connectivity Display Network Topology Processing The topology of the power network shall be monitored to determine the network connectivity.3 Displays 2.3. It shall also be possible for the operator to access any data which has been associated with the plant item by selecting the item on the diagram displayed on the workstation.4. etc. earthed. The access control facilities shall be arranged to restrict functional access to predefined users. Fast panning shall be supported to traverse the entire network display and zoom/declutter facilities shall allow a large area of the network to be seen with a low level of detail. 2.3. 2. reports. Additional means of navigating the network diagram shall be provided apart from panning. Access privileges shall be freely definable and shall determine access to areas such as: a) Functions (controls. It shall also be possible to navigate directly to the network display of an item of plant which is in alarm by selection from the alarm list (and similarly to an alarm list entry from an item in alarm on the network diagram).47 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . etc. shading and line format. over/under voltage etc. The search facility shall allow the use of 'wild cards' so that it is not necessary to enter the full name. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. Schematic layouts shall be represented in which the substations are laid out in approximate geographic positions with the interconnections shown by orthogonal lines with minimal crossovers. bus couplers/section switches. degree of loading including (warning and alarm states).1 Network Displays The network display facilities shall use the principle of a ‗world map‘ whereby different levels of detail from geographic overview to detailed substation plant/circuit are accessible. The main network display shall be updated in real time with plant status and measurement information from SCADA or manually dressed and shall be used for initiating control actions and recording a variety of information concerned with the operation of the network.) b) c) d) e) f) Data (real time. buses. historical. Generally the design of displays shall focus on clarity and bringing abnormal conditions to the attention of operators. whether real time or study cases.

the operator would position the cursor on a circuit element in the portion of the network of interest and all circuit elements electrically connected to that selected shall be traced and identified by the System.e.4. The line display attributes for the connectivity presentation function shall be set up in a priority display table such that when an operator invokes multiple connectivity traces (i. The identification shall be carried out by means of a change of colour. Separate commands shall be available to enable the operator to clear down the connectivity traces both individually and globally. although default selections shall normally apply. near spill and whether operation is near minimum limits. transformer tap positions. 2. In operator selective mode. In addition to these displays being available on Operator VDUs and the Video Wall.e.3.        Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.e.48 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3. permanent pictorial displays shall be located adjacent to the Video Wall. In global mode. tables of measured values comprising circuit loading (A. Area Control Error in MW derived by the AGC application Actual Time as real clock time and date Synchronous time derived from the system frequency Time deviation calculated from Actual Time – Synchronous Time Water levels for reservoirs and ponds System Frequency derived directly from the HV busbars of the adjacent Grid Sub Station. 2.3.6 System Displays The following ‗System‘ displays shall be provided with the purpose of providing the operators with key system information:  Total System Demand (TSD) in MW as a digital readout derived from the SCADA/EMS system which shall calculate the TSD by comparing the TSG and the system frequency deviation. energy meter advances (kWh.4 Tabular displays For each station. more than one feeder) on a display at any one time. TSD = TSG + ACE Total System Generation (TSG) in MW as a digital readout derived from the SCADA/EMS system by summing the generation outputs of all synchronised generators.3. frequency (Hz).5 Video Wall displays The video wall display shall be capable of presenting any of the Graphic and Tabular displays available in the system. all islands of interconnected equipment shall be highlighted.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Connectivity Presentation The operator shall be able to call up connectivity information for superposition upon a network diagram display. 2. kVAh) and other measurements shall be available for display. The actual line attribute change invoked shall be freely user definable. different colours or line types). originating at the primary substation source circuit breaker and terminating at the open point(s) of the circuit (feeder).Section 6 .3. each feeder) shall be distinguishable from others (i. This function shall have both global and operator selective modes.4. These displays shall be driven by telemetered and manually entered data and shall indicate warning and alarm conditions. each connectivity trace (i. For example. or a change of line type (e. but not during panning and zooming actions. style or thickness but not flashing).4. if yellow colouring is set up by the system engineer as the default line attribute. MVAr).3.3 Hydro Complex Displays Displays representing the hydro complexes shall be provided that show water levels for reservoirs and ponds in a cascade overview indicating spill gate operation.4. Automatic clear down shall occur upon closure of the display window. The operator shall have the facility of an independent command to visually accentuate the open points in the network. Clear down shall be by manual command and automatically upon closure of the display window. MW.3. voltages (kV). 2. selection of the connectivity presentation function by the operator shall cause the lines of the relevant portion of the network to be displayed in yellow.g.3.

smooth panning and zooming) and to provide one step control functions (e. These shall contain field descriptions that readily identify the required information to the operator. step zooming). rather than completely filling the pro forma each time. Linking shall also be possible between text lists (e. selecting an alarm entry in a list may be configured to open a diagram window and display the related substation at an appropriate level of detail. All such facilities shall be context sensitive and. Where text entry is more appropriate for the interaction or dialogue between an operator and the system.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications   System Frequency Trend derived directly from the above measurement A further 6 frequency measurements shall be available for display that are derived from other GSS or generating stations and provided by direct communication via digital channels supplied under this contract. It shall then be possible to continue the sequence with a valid entry. previous values or default values shall be entered into the interactive fields by the system. The operator shall not be permitted to make invalid entries. Selection of a softkey function shall automatically cancel any alternative (mutually exclusive) selections previously made.4 Supervisory Control The sequences employed to execute all required selection and control tasks.7 Display Interaction The User Interface shall be designed to maximise the use of graphical interaction implemented using standard software wherever possible and to this end it must be stated where the standard software. does not comply with the functional requirements detailed herein. Where appropriate. the (latched) selection of a softkey function shall be visually indicated by a change of softkey appearance.3.g. as offered. 2. Such soft keys shall duplicate equivalent selections available via the keyboard and through menus and shall typically be used to switch between mouse controlled actions (e. so that an operator only needs to make amendments. Softkey control shall avoid the use of more cumbersome menu selection sequences in situations where one step execution of and rapid switching between functions is desirable. through each sequence by identifying the remaining valid entries. an alarm list) and other windows.3. Provision shall be made for 3 such frequency measurements to be displayed simultaneously. Warning messages shall indicate if for any reason the selected control action is not possible. pro forma screens (data entry masks) and dialogue boxes shall be used. Where a command sequence requires selection from a series of menus. for example.Section 6 . The software shall also guide the user.g. These reasons shall include the following: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Any invalid entry shall be detected by the software and ignored. they shall be displayed sequentially at approximately the same position on the screen.49 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . pointer selectable "softkey" symbols shall be available for use by the operator. With the exception of the latter 6 frequency measurements these values shall be permanently displayed on a panel adjacent to the video wall. Context sensitive help screens shall always be available to the operator to assist him to interact with the system. An explanatory message shall be displayed. All user actions shall be initiated using a mouse/trackball and keyboard using standard methods. step-by-step. It shall be possible to navigate directly from station single line level to both station acknowledged and unacknowledged alarm lists. All operator entries shall be checked by the system for validity and plausibility. only menu options relevant to the command sequence being executed shall be presented to the operator for selection. dialogue prompts and help screens.4. Where practicable. For rapid selection and control of diagram manipulative functions in particular.4. preferably via the use of pop-up menus. Wherever possible. the help screens shall consist of the relevant pages of the Operators' Manual.g. via the workstation. The display of the other 6 frequency measurements shall be operator selectable and presented in the same panel. For example. 2.3. It should be noted that the frequency measurements are the most critical system control variables and are required to be displayed without any delays incurred in the SCADA acquisition process and must be available in the event that the SCADA system fails. shall be by standard methods.

e. Alternatively the validity of the command should be checked at the main computer and. Circuit breaker closure will be controlled as follows: (a) Where voltages are present on both sides of the 'circuit breaker. In the event that a command sequence is left incomplete.g. if correct. and ‗unauthorised‘ changes such as occur from other actions.Section 6 . transmitted to the Outstation at very high security. subsequent inadvertent operation of the ‗execute‘ key shall be prevented. such as occur due to commands initiated by the operator. or through the ''circuit breaker sync deselect' command (common for the substation). which will latch the command until one of the following occurs: the relay closes the 'circuit breaker. 2. This should be confirmed to the Master Station from the appropriate Outstation. i. "incoming" and "phase angle" voltages to bus wires. This will initiate the synchronising action of the local synchronising relay. Normally. This command shall be interlocked in software to prevent its issue if voltages exist on both sides of the 'circuit breaker. (b) Where voltage exists on only one side of a 'circuit breaker.4. The ''circuit breaker sync select' command is latched within the switchgear control panel and connects the appropriate "running". the ''circuit breaker deadline close' command should be issued by the operator. These voltages shall also be transmitted to the Master Station for display to the operator. control orders may be sent to different Outstations at the same time. The transmission of a command signal. Unlatching will be performed locally by the closing logic. e. ‗close‘ or ‗trip‘ shall not interrupt the receipt of incoming data from the Outstation. circuit breaker closing will be initiated by a 'circuit breaker close' command issued by the operator.e. the ''circuit breaker sync close' command should be issued by the operator. Status changes arising from operator issued commands shall not be treated as alarm conditions.3. by means of appropriate check synchronism and dead bus relays. shall be provided.4. ''circuit breaker sync close' and ''circuit breaker deadline close'. However. Checking for synchronism and dead line conditions will be carried out locally by the switchgear control scheme.g.50 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In communicating commands to the Outstations. Certain circuit breaker closing command schemes will incorporate synchronising relays. or the ''circuit breaker sync deselect' command is issued by the operator. Three special control signals are associated with such breakers: ''circuit breaker sync select'. a watchdog timer expires. to trip a breaker which is in the open position d) Device or other device at the Outstation is already selected for control e) Device has controls inhibited f) Device has a tag applied which is specified as an interlock All command sequences shall be terminated by pressing an ‗execute‘ key. the following conditions must be satisfied: a) Initiation of a command shall involve a ‗select before operate‘ procedure.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) Device is not suitable for remote control b) Device is selected to local control at the substation c) Redundant control initiation is attempted.1 Circuit Breakers Only one valid circuit breaker control order may be sent at any time to a given Outstation. protection operation. This shall be achieved either by a 30 s time-out function initiated by the key sequence reaching the ‗execute‘ stage. b) The ability to differentiate between ‗authorised‘ status changes. A ‗cancel‘ key shall be provided to allow termination of the command sequence. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

7.4. If a control sequence fails because of an unsuccessful check or control.4.4.Section 6 . line switching. the need for set point acknowledgement may vary. Automatic controls shall be issued by the control sequence function.1 Non-telemetered data Network diagrams may contain variable elements. Associated with each sequence shall be a text description to allow the operator to identify what will be achieved by the sequence and a summary of the steps involved. which are manually-dressed by the operators. Where the transmitted values have been manually set by an operator or the output of an EMS function has been manually endorsed by an operator receipt of new set point values at the remote station will produce an indication that they require acknowledgement by power station operators.51 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Circuit breakers and other remote controlled plant included in a control sequence selected for execution or being executed shall be identified on displays by a symbol. These facilities shall include syntax and logical validity checks on the sequence.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.7 Manual Dressing 2. The initiation and completion of a predefined control sequence shall be logged. Any check must be successful before the system proceeds to the next step.4. 2.6 Set Point Control Means shall be provided to transmit set point values to Outstations for output as analogue or binary coded signals. therefore. the master station automatically resets the indication to show that acknowledgement is no longer required. busbar changing. the following principle of operation is expected to apply. and this aspect shall be user configurable. The system shall handle a sequence generated control exactly as if it had been manually generated and shall provide all of the necessary time-outs and check of plant status. A failed check shall cause the sequence to suspend operation and alert the operator that this has occurred. Facilities shall be provided to allow the switching between automatic and manual control of the AVR‘s.4. or for automatic transmission (eg. Manual controls included within a sequence shall be carried out under instruction from the operator.3. automatic controls. Such set points may be used for machine control or remote indication.3. 2. The raise and lower commands shall not require an execute action by the operator. then an appropriate operator alarm message shall be generated and the sequence shall enter a paused state. Once acknowledgement is received. it shall be possible for raise and lower commands to be issued to the tap changers from the master station. Power station operators‘ acknowledgements shall be transmitted to the master station via the respective Outstations. via the GUI. It shall be possible to execute a sequence automatically or on a step by step basis. etc. All sequences shall consist of checks.4. This shall require the operator to decide whether to continue by retrying the check or to cancel the sequence. from an EMS function).5 Sequence Control Facilities shall be provided for the creation and editing of predefined control sequences to facilitate complex switching operations such as feeder switching.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. at the substation. manual controls and delays. transformer tap changers will be controlled by automatic voltage regulating (AVR) relays. When selected to manual control. If acknowledgement is not received after a preset time (user configurable) an alarm shall be generated and a message shall be displayed to the System Control Room operators. Checks shall provide the facility within a sequence to verify that an item of plant is in a particular state or that an analogue value is within pre-defined limits. It shall be possible to configure such set points independently for manual entry.2 Tap Changers Under normal operation. Where set points are used for the transmission of MW and MVAr target indications to displays at power stations. Feedback of command execution will be by an associated change in the indicated tap position.3. 2. with a single control. The operator shall be required to enter that the control instruction has been issued before the sequence will continue.

circuit breaker closure) associated with the element is disabled. returned to their normal presentation and hence regularly updated on the displays.4. The manually-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database and logged as an event.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Operators may change the status of manually-dressed elements on receipt of verbal instructions from site stating the actual element position. to insert a new (manually-dressed) value for the element. It shall be possible for the operator to link the tag to diagram elements.4.9. modification and removal shall be accompanied by an entry in the event list. with a suitable error message being displayed on the screen. It shall be possible to compare on the same display. On manual restoration of the elements back into service the readings shall again be recorded in the database.9 Diagram Tagging 2. as described above. or indication that comes within the operators area of responsibility. Manual-dressing operations. It shall then be possible. up to sixteen trends of real-time data or historical data.7. with the manual-dressing also suitably indicated by a symbol or tag.3. Fault Information It shall be possible to place a tag marker anywhere on a diagram. It is essential that all tag lists and associated notepad pages are held on disc to ensure non-volatility of data in the event of a total Master Station shutdown. 2. so that control actions (e. shall be logged as an event. The manually-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database and thus on all other displays on which that element occurs.g.1 General The operator shall have the facility to tag network diagrams to indicate various conditions.3. In such cases of multiple tags the tag shall be presented in such a way to show that other tags are present.8 Trending The system shall be capable of displaying any measured value in graphical form to show the trend of the value over a selected time period. the following tags shall be provided. from the workstation. The system shall support as a minimum 16 different tags.2 Telemetered Data It shall be possible from the operator workstation to remove from scan any measurement. The trend display shall have adjustable x and y axis. Each tag placement.4. The system must recognise an attempt by the operator to make an invalid manual-dressing operation and this should be blocked. 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. where it shall act as a selection point to tag data and corresponding notepad pages associated with each tag. The notepad pages shall enable supporting textual and graphical information to be held in the system. In particular.4.52 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 2. but the system shall also support user-definable tags: a) Permit-to-Work (PTW) b) c) d) e) f) g) Sanction for Test (SFT) Operational restriction Point of Isolation Earth point. These other tags shall be readily opened via the ‗priority‘ tag. This shall be suitably indicated on the display by a symbol or tag to indicate the removal from scan.Section 6 . It shall be possible to set a number of tags for the same object but only the tag with the highest priority (Operator definable/selectable) will be displayed.

2.3.4.10 2. in the manner described for tag list entries.4.placement or removal The associated PTW/SFT numbers.4. list entries and diagrams An operator shall be able to initiate an automated search of the earth list for those entries linked to a particular PTW An attempt by an operator to remove a PTW tag shall cause the corresponding isolation/earth points to be identified.3 Permits-to-Work and Sanction for Test Tags It shall be possible for an operator to easily link points of isolation and earth point tags to PTW/SFT tags.4. An operator shall be able to view and print out both current and expired PTW/SFT lists.3. The system shall issue an alarm when the PTW/SFT files are 90% full. such that: a) b) c) Quick access links shall be established between the associated notepad pages. advising that archiving is due to be carried out.1 Printing Printer Management Facilities All printers supplied shall be under the control of printer management facilities which provide buffering such that print requests do not disable operator interaction at a workstation whilst printing is taking Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.9. It shall be possible to define notes which include displays or segments of displays.3.2 Tag Lists Each tag type shall have its associated listing.9. Expiry time Where a tag has reached its expiry time the Operator shall be alerted to this automatically. 2. The notes shall be stored in the System and their existence shall be indicated on displays to catch the attention of operators. 2. which shall record all tags placed on diagrams.53 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .9. The list shall hold earth tag entries.3.Section 6 .4. d) An operator shall be able to display and/or print out the PTW or SFT list in both tag number and PTW/SFT number order. telemetered earthing point status information and manual diagram dressing information.4 Earthing List The earthing list shall hold a comprehensive record of all earths applied to the network.3.4.10.9.3.5 Operator’s Notepad The System shall provide a facility to allow operator‘s to create notes or messages to other operators. this fact shall also be notified to the operator attempting to remove a PTW/SFT tag or the relevant isolation/earth tag Removal of a PTW/SFT tag shall cause associated operational restriction tags to be identified to the operator. with the following supplementary information: a) Unique tag number (automatically allocated by the system and corresponding to that displayed on the diagram) b) c) d) e) f) g) Date and time of placement or removal Location and circuit description of tagged item Operator's identity Description of tagging action . It shall be possible to link any such entries to a PTW/SFT. Expired PTW entries shall be retained on the system until manually archived. Where an isolation/earth point is associated to more than one PTW/SFT. 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.

The set-up and execution initiation for each application shall generally be through an Execution Control Display which shall have a similar layout for each application or facility. etc that are specified elsewhere. The Bidder shall identify in Technical Schedules those EMS modules which will require modification to meet the specified requirements and shall provide an estimate of the extent of amendments necessary. 2. The Employer uses the PSS-E application suite for operational and network planning. in order to ensure that the specified requirements are met. redirect print output to an alternative printer to that originally selected to cater for situations where the originally selected printer is unavailable for printing.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications place. Printer selection should preferably be via a menu list although the system shall preset the selection to a user defined printer. reports. topology. etc.1 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM General Introduction A comprehensive and integrated suite of power system computational assistance programs is required for the monitoring. The estimated CPU loading factors and execution times for each major application program shall also be stated in –the Technical Schedules. optimisation algorithms. Any decision relating to the selection of particular methods.3. The functional and performance requirements of the EMS are described in the following Clauses. study cases etc. The printer management facility shall warn operators of pending print buffer overflow. The Bidder shall provide sufficient technical detail in the offer to enable a full assessment of the suitability and compliance of facilities. trend displays. Wherever possible. control and management of the 220kV and 132kV transmission network. It is a requirement of the Contract that an interface be provided between the PSS-E applications and the SCADA/EMS system to enable interchange of data. The suite of software shall comprise two principal sub-systems: (a) Network Analysis and Security Assessment (b) Forecasting. and any proposed alternatives. The application of 400kV is likely in the future.Section 6 .4. results.54 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Any EMS module requiring special development for this project shall be identified. sparsity techniques or special file management and accessing techniques. diagrams. or manually upon operator request. whether for immediate. such as the use of accelerating factors. to be made. the Bidder is invited to propose applications/modules as options which. It shall be possible to direct output to any appropriate printer type. in any location. The Contractor shall demonstrate the accuracy of solutions and optimisation result for each application prior to operational acceptance of the system. This facility shall be additional to those for printing of lists.2 Screen Prints An operator shall be able to initiate a screen print to a full graphic colour printer upon demand. shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.4 2. at each request. In the near future the Employer intends to implement a ‗Transparent Despatch‘ facility to enable the details of daily despatch to be made available on line to market participants. to aid the operator. 2. Production Scheduling and Despatch. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. as appropriate.10. Printer buffers shall also retain data waiting to be printed to cater for events such as printers being temporarily off-line for paper loading. at the time a print-out is ordered. which feed an extensive radially operated 33kV and 11kV networks. In addition to the main offer. The Bidder shall describe the method and tools that are used in his standard system to achieve this. future.2 Transmission/Generation Network The transmission network presently comprises 220kV and 132kV cables and overhead lines. periodic or continuous printing. The EMS system shall be able to interface with such a facility. the Bidder shall offer standard EMS modules with proven software. offer improvements or cost savings. It shall be possible for the print manager to automatically. in his opinion. This facility shall be user configurable.4. 2. The Bidder shall state the service experience of each module.

2. each of which may be independently monitored for status and load (current).4. etc) are defined in the Graphic User Interface Clause 2. These programs shall execute in response to trigger events and/or cyclically. These give a guide to the size of network that the network analysis programs will need to handle at the time of commissioning.3. without the need for any hardware or software upgrade. The design of the database shall be such that any new application program can be integrated with minimum interruption to the normal operation of the EMS. such as the security assessment and loss penalty factor programs can be executed not in every cycle but for every pre-defined number of state estimation runs.4. Facilities shall be provided to allow the operator to specify that some of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence. The following Clauses describe some aspects of the functional and computational requirements of various key functional blocks in the EMS. There are a number of hydro and thermal generating stations within the Country. Each "load" above can comprise up to twenty individual 33kV feeders. loading values in time-based schedules) shall be provided. hydro or wind turbines exists in various parts of the network. Bid drawings show the Employer system for 2012 and 2016. as required. The general functional requirements of the User Interface (e. Means of easily duplicating data entries (e.4. as well as breaker status changes. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that these functional and performance requirements are met with practical and reliable software implementation. The scope of coverage of the EMS shall extend to the 33kV load points. or upon operator demand.4.Section 6 . for operator interaction with the EMS functions. or as a result of the occurrence of a triggering event. All support software for the real-time network analysis programs.3 EMS Database The general requirements for databases. This is a significant issue and the system shall model this characteristic clearly.g. and upon operator demand. shall be standard modules within the EMS environment. so that no special purpose or customised support software or procedures shall be provided solely for the real-time network analysis functions. amendment and data entry.4. typically every fifteen (15) minutes for the complete sequence and at least every few minutes for state estimation.3. However. It is important that. the initialisation of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The collective capacity of these sources of generation is significant and must be taken into account in the EMS modelling and optimisation. their creation.4 Real-Time Network Analysis 2. The EMS shall cater for both existing and future multiple voltage network configurations and for a comprehensive mix of generating plant.g. the data entry task is minimised through the general use of default (or previous value) entries within screen pro-forma. The EMS shall be capable of handling a 400% increase in network size. diagram displays. When the triggering event is detected. At times the generated output from these units exceeds the local load and provides an infeed to the transmission system. The real-time network analysis software shall comprise the following programs: (a) Network topology (b) State Estimation (c) Security Assessment (d) Bus Load Forecast (e) Loss Penalty Factors (f) Optimal Power Flow.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The transmission network is an island network but may in the future be interconnected with the Transmission System in Southern India. The triggering events shall be user definable and shall include system load changes and circuit loading thresholds. are defined in Clause 2.8 and specific data management facilities for the SCADA/EMS functions are defined in this Clause 2. trend plots.1 General Requirements The real-time network analysis software shall comprise a number of power system application programs. construction of display pages. embedded generation which may include small thermal. 2.4. as appropriate. input/output pro-forma. The programs shall be executed within a user-definable Network Analysis Sequence with a userdefinable periodicity. to monitor and assess the security of the transmission system.55 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . it shall only be necessary to carry out database amendments to incorporate the increase in network size.

e. 2. if necessary. It establishes the single line node-branch model of the current power network using status values from the real-time database. or a message to indicate that the sequence is currently in execution. The convergence index for the last run of the State Estimator shall be displayed. Any one of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence shall be executable independently. Real-time Network Analysis Execution Control Displays shall be provided for the following functions: (a) Definition and display of the selection and sequence of programs to be executed in the Network Analysis Sequence (b) Definition and display of the cycle period for the automatic execution of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence. This is particularly important where the values generated by a program which does not converge would normally be used by a subsequent program in the EMS execution cycle. e. convergence status. Overall the EMS facilities shall provide a coherent and integrated approach and produce and present information in a form that is readily assimilated by system operators. It shall be possible to include both single and multiple outage contingencies in any one list. upon operator demand.g. or upon operator request. generators.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the real-time Network Analysis Sequence shall be delayed for a pre-defined time interval to allow the power system to attain a steady state condition. All inputs required for the proper execution of the real-time network analysis sequence shall be entered via Execution Control Displays and/or screen masks.4. Only one real-time network analysis sequence will be executed at a time. run the Security Assessment software for every two State Estimation solutions (d) Definition and display of the events that will trigger the real-time network analysis sequence. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Execution displays should provide details of program status under these conditions. For example. power lines and cables. terminated. blocked. due to the occurrence of a triggering event.4. The Network Topology program determines the connectivity of the network components.e. any previously scheduled real-time network analysis sequence shall be removed from the pending queue or.56 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . if currently in execution. i. reactors. those that cause measurements to be declared as bad data and raise alarms/messages (h) Identification and display of the status of each program including whether it is running. the controlled termination of a program which will not converge. In addition. For operator demanded and event triggered runs. Execution Control Displays shall show the time remaining until the next scheduled periodic execution of the sequence. irrespective of the execution frequency relationship defined above. programs which cannot be sensibly run without data from the non-converging program. capacitors. Manual input or override of measurement values and states of devices such as breakers. and shall include a cursor selection point that allows a manual request for execution of the real-time network analysis sequence or any one of the programs in the suite of real-time network analysis software.g. are removed automatically from the execution cycle. shall be accepted by the program. etc. The default contingency list used by the real-time Security Assessment program shall be defined via the Execution Control Display. as well as to identify those breakers whose status change shall trigger the sequence (e) Definition and display of the contingency lists.2 Network Topology The Network Topology program is one of the basic functions of the real-time network analysis software. switches. The period shall range from one (1) minute to sixty (60) minutes in increments of one (1) minute (c) Definition and display of the cyclic execution ratio for any program in the Network Analysis Sequence relative to the State Estimation runs. The system shall deal with the non-convergence of any program in a manner which requires the minimum amount of interaction with the operator but results in a sensible outcome. all network analysis programs. It shall also be possible to define the priority levels of the outages in the list (f) Definition and display of the threshold boundary mismatch between the internal and external networks. using power system nomenclature. shall be executed in the sequence. The mismatch threshold defines the trigger for execution of the External Equivalent Network Modelling program (g) Definition and display of occurrences of anomalous data. through the single line diagram of the internal as well as the external networks. When a new real-time network analysis sequence is initiated.Section 6 . stopped. It shall be possible to define triggering thresholds for total system load change and percentage of circuit loading.

The State Estimation program shall make use of all relevant measurements in the network and calculate the best estimated system steady state solution. In addition. MVAr and voltage magnitude. The state estimator shall have the following features: (a) Measurement Data Real-time measurements will be available. pseudo-measurements shall be computed and made use of with appropriate weighting factors. When a measurement is identified as bad data for a number of specified occurrences. grossly erroneous measured values shall be detected. as well as parts of the internal network which become unobservable due to temporary loss of telemetered measurements. It shall also perform digital smoothing to minimise data acquisition time skewing for measured values and shall generate a vector of digitally smoothed MW. identified and eliminated from the solution process. This checking process shall ensure that data points which have been identified as anomalous are not utilised by the state estimator until they are shown to be permanently recovered.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Network Topology program shall perform switch status validation to determine a consistent set of switch states. (c) Transformer Tap Position Estimation Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. open ended circuits. (b) Bad Data and Measurement Bias As part of the state estimation function. MVAr flows (iv) Transformer tap positions (v) Generator. The State Estimation program shall also perform plausibility checks. MVAr injections (vi) Reactor. 2. The state-estimator is required to maintain an accurate balance between the estimated flows on the boundaries between the external and internal networks. Measured values which do not pass the checks shall be flagged and listed.4. a list shall be provided to indicate the electrical island to which each device /substation/power station is connected. For the un-observable portions of the network.Section 6 . which may include the near external networks. line currents. equipment with an abnormal status. The State Estimator shall also be able to detect and report measurement biases. The calculated state values for both the internal and external networks shall be available for use by the other EMS application programs and for display on the single line diagram. at all relevant line ends and buses for the state estimation and external network model calculation programs. To assist with the presentation of network topology the program shall include a facility for tracing network connectivity and presenting this on network diagrams either by a change or colour or a change in line type. far external networks. bus voltages and phase angles for the observable portion of the transmission network. alarms shall be issued and messages logged. For the unobservable portion of the network. The state estimator shall continue to function without degradation in performance should the network split in to two or more observable areas (islands).4. The Network Topology program shall detect network islands and identify them to the operator. (i) Busbar voltage magnitudes (ii) Line MW and MVAr flows (as shown on drawings) (iii) 220/132/33kV. The state estimator shall re-determine the best estimation of the system state after all such anomalous data is eliminated. The program shall generate summaries of equipment and network status including de-energised equipment. Bad data and measurement bias information shall be summarised in suitable Tables for presentation to the operator. as stated below and indicated in the Bid Drawings and Schedules. based on assumption and historical data. etc. pseudo measurements shall be used.57 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3 State Estimation The State Estimation program is necessary in order to provide an accurate and reliable database for all subsequent energy management functions. 132/33kV and 132/11kV transformer MW. The State Estimator shall be able to re-incorporate the measurements once they are checked as being nonanomalous. It shall be possible to invoke a trace from any point in the Transmission network for selected voltage levels. MW. If an Outstation fails the State Estimator shall continue to function without degradation in performance for those areas of the power system for which it still has telemetered values. MVAr injections The State Estimator shall make use of all measured values where available. including line power flows.

via the execution control display.4. (b) Predictive Security Assessment (Optional) In the predictive mode. Automatic and periodic execution of either or both security assessment modes shall be accommodated in the real-time network analysis sequence. There shall be user friendly facilities for defining. the results of the state estimation programs. which shall evaluate in detail post-contingency branch flows and bus voltages of the contingencies in the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. there will not be any real-time measurement values.5 Security Assessment The function of security assessment is to predict post-contingency security violations using the solutions of State Estimation and External Network State Estimation programs. including line/cable ratings. forecast of bus load distribution and generation schedules. 2.58 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It shall be possible to define time steps at which the predictive security assessment will be made within the overall time horizon.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The State Estimator shall be able to estimate both in-phase and phase-shifting transformer tap positions when requested by the operator.4. for both the internal and external networks. For security monitoring purposes. annunciated and displayed on the single line diagram. irrespective of whether they are in the contingency list or their priority in the list. Each security assessment mode shall also be executable on demand or by user definable triggering events. Power circuits that are loaded to their security limits in the base case shall be selected automatically for screening. 2. (d) Security Monitoring The solution of the State Estimator shall be checked against the operating limits of the transmission network components. voltage limits. as defined via a realtime Execution Control Display.4 External Network Modelling and State Calculation The network modelling program shall be able to accommodate external network models as may be required in the future. Significant deviation between the estimated values and the telemetered tap positions shall be reported. for the current network condition. (a) Contingency Selection The Contingency Selection program is the first stage of security assessment. real-time mode and predictive mode: (a) Real-time Security Assessment In this analysis. the current system state. and generator power injection limits. historical data. (d) Contingency Analysis The second stage of security assessment is Contingency Analysis.g. Rather. The program shall take due account of any automatic switching regimes (e.Section 6 . shall be used as the base case. Violation of the redefined limits shall be listed. loss of a transformer infeed at a substation results in restoration of supplies by automatic switching) and their impact on the security of the system. The Bidder may offer other applications as options which would assist the operators assess security and network stability in a predictive manner. shall be utilised to establish the pseudo-measurements for the times of interest. Security assessment divides into two solution processes. Contingency Selection and Contingency Analysis. the State Estimation program shall allow the operator to define an operating margin for each type of limit. using power flow techniques with adequate accuracy. the limits may not be the actual operating limits of the components of the network. Circuit ratings and voltage limits shall be checked and the severity of security violations of the contingencies shall be ranked in order of their relative seriousness. The program shall determine.4. scheduled switching actions. validating and ranking contingencies for addition to the contingency list.4. State estimation programs shall then be executed to provide the base case system state. In this predictive mode. Constraint violations shall raise alarms in the alarm list. Instead. At this point in the development of the transmission system the operators experience difficulties with voltage stability and load despatch which is often security constrained. It selects the contingencies from the contingency list according to priority. Two modes of operation are required. the post-contingency branch flow and nodal voltages. the system condition for future time horizons of up to two hours ahead shall be treated as the basis of the assessment.

4. Full AC network model equations. It shall be possible to limit the number of contingencies that will be analysed to a user defined maximum (typically 50. including any combination of: (i) Generators/Loads (ii) Transmission lines/cables (iii) Shunt capacitors/reactors (iv) Series capacitors/reactors (v) Transformers/Synchronous condensers (vi) Bus Couplers (vii) Outages causing islanding For generator and load outages.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications ranked contingency list produced by the Contingency Selection stage. 2.g. shall be forecast. Displays shall also allow estimated and forecast values for individual loads to be compared. Results of security assessment programs shall be available for viewing. Output from the Contingency Selection program shall include a ranked contingency list. The analysis shall incorporate any subsequent and multiple tripping arising from violations caused by the first contingency. the re-distribution of power injections shall be according to participation factors which are pre-defined by the user. The Bus Load Forecast program shall be executed after each state estimation calculation. as configured by the operator via the Execution Control Display. The matrix is required to support operational planning studies.4. The security assessment programs shall have the capability to handle single and multiple outage contingencies.6 Bus Load Forecast A Bus Load Forecast program shall be provided to forecast the loads at all the internal and external buses. that result in branch flow and voltage limit violations. 2.8 Optimal Power Flow This facility shall enable an operator to optimise a target functions such as minimisation of losses. the active and reactive loads and generation injections and voltage magnitudes at different buses of the system. It shall be possible to configure the OPF facility for a wide variety of optimising tasks via a user friendly interface which can be configured to speed up the execution of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. location and type of violations) presented in a format approved by the Employer. where N is user definable via the real-time execution control display.4. although this should not be the ultimate limit) or to define that analysis will cease after N successive contingency evaluations have resulted in no limit violation. 2. The output of the Bus Load Forecast program shall be available for viewing by the operator in the form of tables and on network diagrams. The program will generally be activated following a user definable number of state estimation runs.4. The results of the Bus Load Forecast are particularly useful to provide a source of information for pseudo-measurement values for those non-observable parts of the internal and external networks.7 Loss Penalty Factors The network Loss Penalty Factors program shall calculate the marginal losses with respect to active and reactive power injections at the Employer generator buses. minimise generation cost via manipulation of the physically controllable devices or quantities on the system subject to a set of constraints. The values for the factors used in producing the forecast shall also be available. Based on these distribution factors and patterns. The bus load forecasting program shall analyse the results from the state estimation programs and update the stored distribution factors and load patterns with regard to both active and reactive power injections for different times (48 half hourly values) and day types covering the complete yearly cycle of climatic conditions. based on current network configuration and State Estimator results.59 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . immediately prior to generator plant scheduling calculations and periodically in support of load dispatching calculations. a list of equipment subject to violations for each contingency. A penalty factor matrix for typical system loading shall be stored and updated. shall be used to derive these penalty factors. for different times of the day. ranked in severity order. Load characteristics and time switched loads shall be taken into account by the forecasting process. The Contingency Analysis program shall provide outputs including: lists of contingencies.Section 6 . The results of each contingency analysed shall also be available for displaying with information (e.4. a list of violations for each contingency analysed. and any other outages which cause loss of generation or load.4. The Bus Load Forecast shall provide modelling of embedded generation sources in order to effectively represent the effect on bus loads when in operation. These factors and patterns shall be modified by applying smoothing techniques.

Restoration of save cases.4. interactively. If the system cannot restore a save case reports shall be produced advising on the probable cause and shall include details of all inconsistencies which it cannot resolve. Output of the program shall include lists of fault currents/powers and faults causing over duty of circuit breakers. ground fault current/power and bus voltages. Data for the study mode is based on saved copies (snapshots) of the relevant section of the real-time database. It shall be possible to use the OPF in the real time and study mode environments. monitoring the optimisation analysis. It shall also be possible to display the results of the analysis on one line diagrams and in graphical format as well as in tables. pointing device and keyboard.5 Real-Time Short Circuit Calculation The Real-time Short Circuit Calculation program determines the possible over duty of circuit breakers.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications repetitive tasks.9 Save cases Facilities shall be provided for generating save cases from study or real time databases. Output of the program shall include lists of post-fault branch currents/powers. There shall be facilities for identifying save cases and maintaining a record of those which have been stored on disk or archived. The operator shall be able to specify the faulted phase(s) (single. The program shall be executed upon operator demand.4. The OPF facility shall produce solutions quickly and shall be able to deal with situations where an optimal solution does not exist without frequent interaction with the operator. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. including: (a) Network topology (b) State Estimation (c) Security Assessment (d) Bus Load Forecast (e) Loss Penalty Factors (f) Optimal Power Flow. reviewing the active constraints and causes of infeasibility. any external fault impedance and the bus fault location. It shall not be possible to recover a save case into the real time environment. selecting appropriate constraint limits.Section 6 . the system states determined by the State Estimator shall be used as the pre-fault system condition. selecting appropriate control variables.4. observing the effects of constraints and control actions on the target function. from disk or archive. 2. double or all three).4.60 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and reviewing the performance and nature of the results of the OPF analysis. It shall be possible to maintain at least ten save cases of each type on disk and archive save cases to a readily retrievable medium. The operator may choose to calculate the fault level at all buses or at selected buses. 2. It shall be possible to set up scenarios for analysis from save cases and historical data. Detection of any fault which would overstress any circuit breaker shall be annunciated (b) Phase-to-ground Faults Similarly to the three-phase fault calculations. 2.6 Study Mode Network Analysis Study mode network analysis provides facilities to allow operators to carry out short term or operational planning studies. The following types of fault evaluation shall be provided: (a) Three-phase and Phase-to-Phase Short Circuit Faults The system states as determined by the State Estimator shall be used as the pre-fault system condition. An operator shall be able to retrieve saved case databases and then modify them via single-line diagrams (using the pointing device and keyboard) and the study mode Execution Control Display. modifying variable limits. The operator interface to the OPF facility shall facilitate the selection of target functions. All real-time network analysis programs shall be available in study mode for operators to select for execution. shall be possible even though the current database configuration (study mode or training simulator environment) is different from the one which was current when a particular save case was generated. through the graphical interface.

Hydro Storage . In the on-line mode. the facility shall permit the calculation of unit commitment schedules and expected generation power outputs at user defined intervals from 15 minutes to 1 hour. The system shall be capable of supporting the simultaneous execution of three different studies on three different workstations concurrently with the Real Time Sequence.7 Generating Plant Scheduling 2. together with the study mode application programs.7. upon demand. In study mode it shall also be possible to use the output of the power flow and bus load forecast programs to generate base cases for the security assessment and other programs. the facility will be used to derive daily commitments. it shall be possible for an operator to carry out security checking prior to any switching operation. The scheduling facility shall be able to accommodate the following types of generation and produce optimal hydro thermal coordinated schedules taking into account network constraints: . to access the study mode environment from any workstation. There shall be simple procedures for quickly utilising a study session based on the current real time situation regardless of the previous state of the study mode environment. Typically. the Employer proposes to install additional thermal and hydro generating capacity and there is expected to additional mini hydro and wind generators. and in study mode. with the ability to calculate short-term revisions of these schedules. following changes in plant availabilities or demand expectations.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The HMI for the application programs in study mode.Section 6 .61 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . in order to minimise expected operating costs. There shall be facilities which allow an operator to modify a save case after it has been recovered. It shall be possible for operators to define and save a number of such study-mode Network Analysis Sequences for subsequent selection and execution. During the lifetime of the SCADA/EMS system. however. By using interactive network editing capabilities.Hydro Chain/Complex .Coal fired steam turbine . It shall be possible to apply the network analysis programs to save cases originating from the real time and study mode databases. The EMS facilities shall include a plant scheduling calculation for optimising the start-up and shut-down times of all generators. It shall be possible with the right access privileges. The facility shall run in both on-line mode. for example. only be possible to initiate one study at a time from an individual workstation. for longer term costing evaluations with manually prepared data. It shall also be possible to return quickly to the real time environment and without terminating the study session. The EMS functions shall be capable of incorporating these additional units as they are introduced onto the network. It shall. 2.Single and dual fuel fired Gas Turbines (Open and Combined Cycle) . as far as possible.Diesel .4. These revisions may also be used to refine the scheduling of plant up to several hours ahead of the event. result in any constraint violations. The input/output data for the above programs shall be relevant to study mode analyses.1 Introduction The system generation includes hydroelectric units and thermal units. Under these conditions the associated studies shall not interact at any level including event and alarm processing.Hydro Run of River . similar to that for the real-time network analysis facilities. The study mode Execution Control Display shall provide facilities to allow operators to select some or all the study-mode application programs to be executed sequentially and automatically. The plant scheduling facility shall be fully integrated with the other EMS facilities to ensure commitment schedules do not. shall be. using estimated demand data from the demand prediction facility. up to several days ahead of the event. some of which are based on IPP agreements and a number of mini hydro and wind turbine stations.HVDC Interchange Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4. consistent with all system operating and security constraints. A workstation shall indicate clearly whether it is in the real time or study mode environment. including the study mode Execution Control Display.Embedded generation .

start-up delays. functions describing turbine heat rate and boiler efficiencies (xiii) Regulating Reserve functions and parameters (xiv) Emergency Reserve parameters (xv) Start-up heat as function of boiler and turbine down times (xvi) Governor regulating gains (xvii) Output dependent operational and maintenance costs. This imposes constraints on the use of water for generation. Facilities shall be provided for establishing a library of commitment schedules.Section 6 . to prepare preliminary schedules and to assist in operational planning and maintenance programming. the scheduling facility will be used to evaluate hypothetical future situations. 2.62 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Variable Data These data are held in a variable generation data file that is updated systematically and regularly by the on-line data system and by manual input of information. The scheduling application shall incorporate detailed hydro topology models of each of the hydro complexes that represent the reservoirs and plant characteristics. water flow or fuel restrictions. The applications offered shall satisfy the current operational practice in addition to the requirements specified in the section. e. the bidder shall present in his bid the hydro optimization algorithm that he proposes to use. hydro systems and current operational practice are given in Volume 7 Part D. (b) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Restricted outputs. These are 'Fixed' Data.g. Variable Data. predicted system demands and system operational constraints. run-up rates. It shall also be possible to use the output of the generation scheduling facility as an input to other network analysis programs such as the security assessment program. The present mini hydro and wind generation stations are not subject to scheduling and despatch as their production is dependent on weather conditions and is usually automatically activated. This historic data will be made available to the Contractor for use in the water forecasting models of the scheduling applications. The data include: (i) Boiler and Turbine Plant Availabilities for all periods of the scheduling timehorizon (ii) Fuel costs and calorific values (iii) Temporary modifications to plant capabilities. In study mode. However. minimum run periods.4. etc. After sufficiently studying the Sri Lankan hydro system detailed in volume 7. The scheduling application shall take into account any constraints arising from the water flow management restrictions.2 Plant Scheduling Input Data In the on-line mode of operation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Further information on the generating plant. their contribution shall be taken into account in the scheduling and despatch models.7. The Employer has database of historic data associated with the quantity of water that was available in a given year on a monthly basis since 1950. the scheduling input data comprises four principal data sets. (a) 'Fixed' Data (i) Minimum stable output for each generating unit (ii) (iii) (iv) Maximum and Economic Continuous ratings for each generating unit Maximum and Economic Continuous ratings of combined cycle units Maximum generation for each turbine (taking into account the MW/MVAr operating limits) (v) Boiler and turbine start-up delays as functions of down times (vi) Maximum sustained turbine output ramping rates (vii) Maximum sustainable step output changes (viii) Minimum turbine run periods (ix) Minimum turbine down periods (x) Overall generating unit heat-rate curves (xi) Efficiency curves for hydro units (xii) On combined cycle stations. with sufficient detail to demonstrate its efficacy for the Sri Lankan hydro system. The hydro schemes also provide water for irrigation and domestic potable use.

g. together with any bulk supply point loads that are within network zones whose exports or imports are limited by transmission security considerations [see item (d) below]. Outputs from the plant scheduler shall include: (a) Synchronising times and shut-down times for all generating plant over the scheduling time span (b) Run-up and loading profiles for all synchronised generators for each scheduling interval of the scheduling time-span (c) Expected emergency and spinning reserve generation for each scheduling interval (d) Expected active transmission security constraints for each period (e) Start-up costs of each plant item and system totals (f) Variable system generating costs by period (g) Total and marginal system generation costs (h) Hourly and daily summaries of the anticipated maximum and minimum load.4. the scheduling calculation shall have the capacity to derive weekly or daily unit commitment schedules together with short-term revisions following system changes or unexpected demand levels. Penalty factors. shall be included as input data.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (iv) (c) (d) Variations from normal heat rates and efficiencies. due to cooling water temperatures. 2.7.Section 6 .7. derived from on-line data. using manually derived generation. together with system operational requirements and security constraints. The operator shall be able to use stored data files for this purpose.3 Plant Scheduling Outputs The plant scheduling facility shall derive the optimal unit commitment schedule taking due account of all plant operating costs and constraints. In study mode. as derived from network load flow calculations. These will promote the improved management of system security and economy of operation. These shall include: (i) Minimum system spinning reserve (ii) Minimum system emergency or immediate reserve (iii) Generating Plant must-run constraints (iv) Simplified transmission security constraints in the form of modified generator or station output constraints and maximum zonal or group export and import limits (v) Minimum system frequency regulating gain These constraints should be defined for each quarter-hour period of the scheduling time-span. On-line monitoring facilities are required for four principal categories of power reserve: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. and production costs. 2.4.7. energy generated (MWh). System Operational Constraints The calculated generation schedule is required to satisfy the relevant system operating constraints. the scheduling function shall enable the operator to initiate long-term studies. 2. ambient temperature and other restrictions (v) Time elapsed since last start-up.4.5 Reserve and Plant Monitoring The power system requires comprehensive reserve and plant monitoring facilities. demand and system data. derived from on-line data (vi) Time elapsed since last shut-down. e. The predicted quantities shall include the total system demand at quarter-hourly intervals.63 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It shall be possible to run the scheduler on demand without degrading the performance of the SCADA/EMS System. or other transmission loss coefficients. over the relevant time span.4 Generation Scheduling Operating Modes In on-line mode. (vii) Water availability for hydro units taking into account irrigation and domestic requirements/limitations (viii) Value of water (to be calculated by this application) and marginal rate curves (ix) IPP agreement values and conditions Predicted Demand and System Data At each initiation of an on-line scheduling calculation. the short-term demand prediction facility shall be invoked to derive predicted demands over the time horizon of the scheduling period. It shall be possible to automatically adjust the demand data for present and scheduled load management using data from load management programs.

Spinning Reserve .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) (b) (c) (d) Emergency Reserve . together with governor gains and response rates.3 Short-Term Demand Prediction Facility Short-term demand predictions are required for plant scheduling. a consequence of plant scheduling and load dispatching. for predictive security assessments and for operational planning purposes. Forecasts up to a year or more ahead of the event are required. Standby Reserve . including impending monthly peak demands and expected times of occurrence (b) Estimated monthly integrated energy demands under normal weather conditions (c) Estimated monthly and annual load duration functions for production planning and costing purposes.8 Demand Forecasting 2. together with the reactive capacities of all unused static reactors that can be made available by switching. standby and zonal reactive reserves shall include the values of the prevailing user-specified targets for these quantities. using historical demand data from previous months and years. available to respond within a defined (user-configurable) time of a few minutes. This component may be subdivided into auto-standby and manual standby. These requirements are summarised below. requires the aggregation of the expected responses of individual generators. for load dispatching. The EMS facility is required to model individual generating units in sufficient detail to permit the accurate estimation of emergency reserves available in response to credible system incidents. on request.g.Section 6 . It shall be possible to generate save cases for load forecasts produced in the study mode and to generate a number of forecasts for the same period but using different assumption for each forecast. This calculation shall be based upon bus demand data and under-frequency settings. 2. The facility shall also provide statistical measures of the accuracy of compliance of generating units with scheduling and dispatching instructions. as well as unsynchronised but ready to generate steam driven plant.4. generator trips). The facility is required to run both automatically with on-line data and in study mode for longer-term network and economic calculations: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Reactive Reserve Generation . Input data will include historical demands over previous months and years. The display of spinning.this component is the reserve generation provided by the unloaded capacity of the synchronised generation. including production planning and plant maintenance scheduling.8.this capacity will be evaluated as the sum of the unloaded reactive generation that can be made available by increasing the excitation of synchronised generators. The long-term facility shall run in study mode. 2.8.this reserve will include that available from fast starting gasturbine or hydro generation.2 Long-Term Demand Forecasts Long-term demand forecasts are required for the purposes of operational planning. The calculation of this reserve.this reserve is the active power that is available within a few seconds of an incident. Plant monitoring facilities shall include the collation of data required to evaluate plant response models in relation to both steady-state and emergency operation. Predicted information requirements include the following items: (a) Predicted system peak monthly demands under average weather conditions. The reactive reserve in userspecified network zones shall also be derived.64 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4. Also to be included in this calculation is the expected load shedding via underfrequency relays over this timescale. is required for this purpose.8. adjusted to standard weather conditions and corrected for deviations from nominal frequency and supply voltage.1 Introduction The requirements for computer aided demand forecasts divide into two categories: long-term predictions for production and operational planning and short-term forecasts for scheduling and load dispatching. 2. both for manually operated units and those under automatic generation control. Modelling of turbine response capabilities.4. to cater for occurrences such as circuit breaker trips resulting in infeed losses (e. but it shall not require immediate access to on-line demand data.4.

relating principal substation demands to total system demand (v) Historical load data relating to typical standard daily load curves. approximate bulk supply point demands for security assessment and network studies (ix) Predicted total reactive demand. the type of day.Section 6 . the economic allocation of load.4. by time of day and season. the dispatch facility shall utilise both on-line data and database resident plant parameters to calculate the optimal trajectories of the outputs of all synchronised generating units. holidays and other special days (vi) System power factor at principal demand points. including weekdays. or upon operator demand. taking due account of historical and on-line demand data. It shall be possible to enable.9.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) On-Line Short-Term Forecasts On-line forecasts are required up to one day ahead of the event for scheduling plant and for loading of plant. These are detailed in the following Clauses. obtained by averaging historical active and reactive recorded demands. The function of the on-line demand prediction facility shall be to forecast total system demand. (b) These studies require the same input data as the on-line load forecasts.4.1 Introduction The functional requirements for load dispatching include the economic allocation of loads to committed generating plant. Study Mode Short-Term Forecasts Study mode short-term forecasts are required for system security and plant scheduling studies. In this mode.4. derived from the power factor data in (vi) above (x) Statistical information relating to previous prediction accuracy (xi) Validated.9. and its distribution. time of day and year. Input data for the on-line facility will include the following items: (i) Recent on-line demand data obtained from the state-estimation facility (ii) Demand corrections arising from. embedded generation. Data outputs shall include: (vii) Predicted total system demand for each forecast interval for up to one day ahead (viii) By application of load ratios. with a user definable periodicity of 3-30 minutes. 2. The forecast interval shall be user configurable with a minimum interval of not more than 15 minutes. by time-of-day and season. The load dispatching facility is required to operate in two main modes: Computer-Aided On-Line Dispatching Mode and Study Dispatch mode. disable and set the execution periodicity for this facility through an Execution Control Display. in order to minimise the minute-to-minute operating costs. but the input data will be manually alterable off-line by the user. It shall be possible to enter weather data manually and to acquire it automatically via Outstations which interface with appropriate sensing/measuring equipment. together with adjustments for voltage and system frequency deviations. and prevailing or expected meteorological parameters.9 Economic Load Dispatching 2. (iv) Bulk supply point demand ratios. interchange schedules and IPP schedules. wind speeds and precipitation. Due account shall be taken of the current fuel or water utilisation of the generating plant. weekend days. corrected and adjusted demand data for updating the historical demand database. (iii) Meteorological data relating principally to weighted ambient temperature (for humidity). illumination index. load management and load shedding. The calculated generator loadings shall take due account of all relevant input data as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.65 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and its distribution.2 Computer Aided On-Line Load Dispatching The computer aided on-line load dispatching facility is required to run automatically and cyclically. 2. taking due account of all operational requirements and system security constraints.

prevailing and dispatched (iv) Active transmission security constraints (v) Average and marginal generation costs (vi) Transmission constraints MW. loading rates and operating costs (viii) Prevailing load shedding profiles (ix) Reserve generating capacity requirement (x) Transmission loss penalty factors obtained from load flow studies (xi) Scheduled start-up and shut-down times of all generating plant.2 Reactive Scheduler Input Data In on-line mode.1 Introduction A requirement of the EMS facility is the inclusion of a reactive power scheduling function for maintaining an acceptable power network voltage profile. 2. together with defined run-up loading schedules (xii) Transmission circuit and zonal security constraints that may require out-ofmerit operation. By relaxing on-line plant or system security constraints. whilst satisfying all system operating constraints. whilst minimising losses. In particular.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) (b) Dispatch System Input Data (i) For all committed and scheduled units and interchanges over the period: generator operating limits. reactors) (f) Transformer tap options Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. MW net of unit and static station MW requirements) (iii) Fuel costs and calorific values (iv) Water values and marginal rate curves (v) Interchange transaction costs (vi) Energy dependent costs of operation and maintenance (vii) Emergency reserve availabilities. The on-line reactive scheduling calculation shall be initiated automatically following execution of the on-line generation plant scheduling program or significant network topology changes.g.4.9.Section 6 .66 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . an operator shall be able to evaluate the out-of-merit operational costs due to those constraints. load flow relating to security contingency analysis. The facility shall enable the operator to evaluate load dispatching under hypothetical plant and demand conditions.4. within a study mode dispatch. Dispatch System Outputs (i) Target outputs of all synchronised generating plant.3 Study Mode Load Dispatching In this mode. It shall be possible to run the program in study mode using saved case and manually entered data. overall heat rates as functions of sent out (SO) active powers (i. 2. or upon operator demand. maximum capability. stability and reactive power considerations).10. short circuit levels. plant ramp rates and reserve functions (ii) For unit generators.10 Reactive Power Scheduling 2. the facility shall run on request. They will take the form of additional limits on the power outputs of individual power stations or generating groups. capacities.e. by means of manual modification of selected previous output data. 2.10. economic continuous rating.g. the dispatch facility shall enable the operator to evaluate the dispatch problem associated with any feasible set of committed generating plant and demand data. start-up delays.4. The reactive power scheduler shall utilise an optimal power flow calculation for optimising reactive power controls. Plant commitment schedules and demand profiles shall be prepared by the operator. or achieving an alternative objective function. the reactive power scheduler shall utilise the following input data: (a) Predicted quarter-hourly bulk supply point active and reactive demands (b) Network configuration and parameters (c) Generating plant schedule and expected loads over the period of interest (d) Permitted generator operating regions in active/reactive power output planes (e) Availability of reactive compensating devices (e. with manually entered generator commitment schedules and predicted future demand profiles. these constraints will be defined by the user typically as a result of off-line studies (e. (ii) Identification of target outputs which have varied by more than a userdefinable threshold since the previous load dispatch calculation (iii) Active power reserve generation.4. minimum stable generation.

means of enhancing the network voltage profile can be investigated.4. in the on-line mode.11 Automatic Control of Generating Plant 2. Normally. network configuration and system demand expectations.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (g) (h) 2. However. area interchange. shall be catered for. The output of the Reactive Power Scheduler shall be in the form of detailed schedules of settings for the above devices. if required. The reactive schedule shall satisfy the following operational constraints: (a) User specified voltage limits and stability margins (b) Generator MVAr output limits (c) Circuit capacity and other security limits (d) Generator MW output limits. Reactive Power Calculation The optimising calculation shall permit a choice of objective function.4. which will result in the determination of the optimal reactive control settings associated with the projected plant schedule and loading profile. It shall be possible both manually to modify and to store the schedules and to use them to provide the data source for setting the foregoing power network devices. in response to the output of EMS scheduling and dispatching functions. Study mode operation will aid the operator in evaluating the effect of different operating regimes.Section 6 .3 System voltage limits Other security and operational limits. via the SCADA interfaces. the algorithm shall determine the values of the reactive control variables that minimise the objective function. so that.4. including those not under AGC operation. system time deviation and. Reactive control of generating plant is required to follow the output of the reactive power scheduling function.10. in accordance with the schedules. including the minimisation of generation cost.10. thus allowing any sub-optimality resulting from the plant scheduling function to be discerned. the minimisation of active power losses and the minimisation of a measure of the deviation of the voltage profile from a desired user-specified profile.4. Subject to user-specified operational constraints. It shall also provide means for automatically regulating power system frequency.2 Automatic Generation Control An Automatic Generation Control (AGC) facility shall provide the interface between the active power scheduling and load dispatching functions of the EMS and the generating plant.1 General Requirements A means shall be provided for directly controlling the output of those generating units with interfaces for supervisory control by the SCADA/EMS System. shall be converted to the corresponding generator AVR and generator transformer tap positions and the control actions shall be executed by issuing the necessary raise and lower output pulses to the devices concerned. The control variable schedule shall include the following: (a) Generator MVAr set-points (b) Multi-step reactive compensator switch positions and settings (c) Transformer tap positions (d) Switching of bulk reactive compensation.11. 2.4 Reactive Scheduler Outputs The reactive power scheduler shall derive a schedule for reactive control variables over the daily load cycle and shall allow revisions of the schedule following significant changes in power plant availabilities. Scheduled MVAr set points. Control of active power shall be handled by the AGC function described below. 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2.67 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . for example. Control of both active and reactive outputs of generators.11. The function shall provide power loading base points for all generators. It shall be possible for an operator to enable the function to automatically issue controls to the devices (or values to set point displays). for each generating set available for automatic control.4. in study mode the operator shall be able to run the optimal power flow program without the constraints of the plant schedule (active power schedule). the generator active output limits will be constrained to those determined by the plant scheduling calculation.

embedded generation) The general requirements for the above types of facilities are covered elsewhere in this Specification.Section 6 .4. These will provide the reference frequency measurements for the AGC function and will assist operators managing islanded sections of network.g. the AGC function shall operate in both emergency and normal modes and it shall be possible to independently set operating limits and control parameters for each mode. By means of user specified deadbands and filtering of the plant control error.4. and may include the following: (a) Telephony communication between the NSCC and station control rooms (b) SCADA Outstations at the stations for: Data acquisition Output to set-point displays Output of controls to plant (c) Facsimile communication between the NSCC and IPP stations control rooms (d) Via e-mail or CEB internal messaging facilities.12. as derived by the On-line Reactive Power Scheduler [Clause 2. It shall be possible for the load dispatch operator at the NSCC to manually amend the schedules prior to their issue to the power stations. The first form shall comprise raise and lower pulses for governor speeder-motor action and the second form shall comprise set-point values for display and manual implementation. It shall also be possible to do this using Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.10] shall be arranged into schedules for issue to the power stations via the Data Exchange Facilities [Clause 2. installation and commissioning of frequency measurements derived from selected station busbars. The Contract shall include the supply. The AGC system shall include facilities for adjusting independently all control system parameters and plant static and rate limits.4. together with terms dependent on system frequency error and system time error. Parameter tuning and control system testing shall require the temporary disabling of the control outputs to the plant controllers. 2. The AGC facility shall include the facility for operating under Interchange and Area Control Error (ACE) modes. as calculated in the On-line Load Dispatcher [Clause 2. 2. control deadbands and predictive loading signals. and reactive power schedule data. The AGC function shall provide outputs for plant loadings in two alternative forms.4. 2.12. In particular. excessive control action will be avoided and the plant loading instructions follow a smooth trajectory.4. The PCE will include terms dependent upon the difference between required and actual plant output.12 SCADA/EMS System Interfaces with Power Stations 2.2 Active and Reactive Power Dispatch Schedules Each active power target output data. The AGC operation shall initiate a change in unit power output by means of proportional and integral control action in terms of the plant control error (PCE). both for normal and emergency modes of operation.12.1 Introduction The interfacing to the SCADA/EMS System with each of the transmission and generating stations for the transfer of operational information may take various forms. The AGC system shall include comprehensive monitoring facilities to enable the operator to analyse control system performance and to promote the tuning of control system parameters. Specific functions utilising the above interfaces are specified in the following Clauses. depending on the facilities provided at each location.3 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Displays For generating sets with set-point displays driven from the power station SCADA Outstation. The normal mode rate limit shall refer to sustained response whereas the emergency rate will be higher.4.9]. (e) Data via GSM channels from certain plant (e. Facilities for avoiding excessive governor set-point control action shall be provided by the use of filtering.68 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The power loading base points shall take account of the operating limits and dynamical rate constraints of the individual generating units to ensure that the base point load is within the plant's feasible operating region.9]. the load dispatch operator at the NSCC shall be able to either manually dispatch target active and reactive power output values to the set point displays of each generating set.

switching schedules. for outages resulting from faults. sequence. The job management facility shall generate all necessary supporting documentation necessary for the execution of each job. it shall be possible for the load dispatch operator at the NSCC to either manually dispatch active and reactive power output set points to each generating set. or to enable those EMS functions to output the controls directly to the plant.Section 6 .4.2 Job Management There shall be an integrated facility for controlling scheduled and unscheduled work on the transmission network. or to enable those EMS functions to directly output the target values to the displays automatically. i. and execution (local or supervisory) of the associated switching e) Managing the authorisation. issue and cancelling of any associated Sanction to Test (STT) h) Noting comments during and on completion of the job i) Identifying the relevant portion of the network diagram. 2.1 Switching Schedules There shall be facilities for assisting the operator to compile.12. test. e. review and authorise switching schedules.4 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Control For generating sets with plant controllers able to be remotely controlled via the power station SCADA Outstation. The scope of work shall include provision and implementation of set point displays for each unit defined in the signal lists as having set point outputs.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the output of the AGC and Reactive Power Scheduler EMS functions in an advisory role. 2. This includes documents for use in the field. 2. save. e. The stations that are initially assigned for load frequency control are: Kotmale PS 3 units New Laxapana PS 2 units Samanalawewa PS 2 units Victoria PS 3 units The scope of work shall include the adaptation works to connect the set point at each generator unit and to set to work the AGC function with these generator units.g. issue and cancelling of the associated Permit to Work (PTW) f) Monitoring the progress of the job g) Managing the authorisation.69 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 2. The data shall be used to provide approximate MW values for the preceding period.5.5. it shall be possible to copy a switching schedule to other functions such as the Job Management and Load Shedding facilities. The data will include whether a machine is running and the MWh production value for predefined and operator adjustable periods (typically 15 & 30 minutes).e. 'jobs' or outages.5 OTHER APPLICATIONS The applications described in the following Clauses shall be provided at the NSCC.12. using the output of the AGC and Reactive Power Scheduler EMS functions in an advisory role. Once compiled and tested. This shall include pro forma facilities for: a) Identifying a job b) Noting the reason for the job c) Identifying the work to be carried out d) Identifying the time. 2. The outage management facility shall receive inputs or requests for jobs/outages from the Employer‘s maintenance department via remote workstation(s) located in that department or from an NSCC operator.g.5 Embedded Generation Data Production data for embedded generators may be available from the respective locations via GSM channels or Operator entered values.4. permits to Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

The facilities shall be able to support the fully expanded System without degradation of performance. It also includes any documentation to be kept as a hardcopy record of the work. by compiling a list of those feeders shed through under frequency action. the System shall simplify the task by means of cross-linking the lists to diagrams and/or permitting initiation of control actions from the lists.5 Under Frequency Load Shedding An under frequency load shedding scheme is implemented at a number of substations. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each signal.Section 6 . Where shed load has not been reconnected after an Operator definable period following its interruption. It shall also be possible to archive job records.5. for restoring the system to its normal configuration. later.3 Fault Detection. It shall be possible to extract statistical information from these job records. Such schedules would be used in times of shortage of generation or limitation of circuit loadings in order to curtail demand and protect the system or circuits. hospitals). performed and approved the work. Such facilities should provide the operator with assistance in analysing alarms and events. digital and other internally calculated or generated signals. As each stage of tripping is reached signals are sent to the local Outstation. 2.6 HISTORICAL DATA The SCADA System shall incorporate historical database facilities for all measured.5. the duration expected and to provide for a rotor system whereby the curtailment is shared by all but consumers with essential supplies (e. 2. The facility shall be linked to the Switching Sequence facility so that shedding can be instructed using simple instructions from the UI which will result in the required sequence to effect shedding to be initiated.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications work. alarms. e. 2. identifying those who planned. The under frequency scheme is currently arranged in a number of stages. and provide advice on appropriate remedial action including recovery of unserved load. The scheme is designed primarily to protect the power network in the event of a loss of infeed (e.g. The list shall indicate the last recorded load of each feeder. fault isolation. The facility shall enable selection of loads and/or MW to be shed. 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5. location and restoration. and subsequent system reconfiguration. Although the load restoration is to be under operator control. authorised. Switch status indications.g. generator trip). All signals shall be scanned periodically and updated values or digital status changes stored with station/point or other identifier. network connectivity information and other relevant data shall be utilised by a fault identification and location facility to assist the operator to identify faults. identifying faults.5.4 Expert System Assistance (Option) Bidders shall include in their offer as an option any 'expert system' based facilities they could provide that would be appropriate and effective in the context of the Employer‘s transmission system. the situation shall be brought to the Operator‘s attention by periodically annunciated alarms or by other suitable visually effective means. if required and appropriate.6 Load Shedding Schedules A function shall be provided that facilitates setting up of Load Shedding Schedules. to utilise the switching schedule facility to compile a schedule for isolating the fault and recovering any load that has been lost and. each stage resulting in tripping of the connected feeder circuits at the frequencies set. The facility should also assist the operator. This shall be one alarm or alert associated with the load shed list so that one annunciation for any number of cases is required and where the list shows the remaining disconnected loads. The facility shall provide assistance to the operator to restore load following an under frequency event.70 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Location and Load Restoration (Option) Bidders shall include in their offer as an option facilities to assist the operator with fault detection. their location and effect on the network.g. 2. sanctions to test.

The design shall ensure that historical data is not lost if the historical database goes out of service and that when it comes back online. 2. All reports shall be available for display on the operator workstations. The data extraction via the spreadsheet client shall be user definable on a point by point basis in terms of the start and finish times and pre-processing of the data before delivery to the spreadsheet. monthly and annual reports of network conditions and loading. The historical data database shall use highly efficient compression algorithms to store the data. and support arithmetic and logical operations that may be needed on the data before presentation in the reports. 2. where consistent with the above requirements.71 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . restored archive data or a mixture of both as the source data for reports. report configuration and presentation is very flexible.7 REPORT GENERATION Operators shall have the facility to configure periodic and ad-hoc reports. etc. These reports shall be routinely printed at a designated time.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Data shall be stored online for up to 12 months and be available for subsequent recall at any time.. weekly and annual basis and derived from half hourly values of: (a) Pulse accumulator MWh and MVArh values acquired from energy meters (b) MWh and MVArh values calculated by integration of MW and MVAr values (c) Generator unit despatch instructions (d) Generator unit incremental costs Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 Energy Reports The Contractor shall configure and implement a set of reports to assist the Control Centre to record. 2. The content and format shall be developed during the preparation of the Functional Design Specification. Ideally this should be done through a client facility that is integrated directly into the spreadsheet. The format of these reports shall be fully configurable by the operator using any system data acquired and/or calculated. The format of all reports prepared by the Contractor shall be to the approval of the Employer. There shall be facilities for extracting data periodically and on demand from the historical database directly into third party spreadsheet programmes such as MS Excel™. Historical data held on the existing SCADA system shall be imported into the new SCADA/EMS System and consideration should be given to retaining the present data structure. Data recovered from archive shall be accessible via the same tools as the current historical database. it is able to automatically un-spool data that has been saved instead of being passed into the historical database. report and manage the daily system production and related factors.1 Routine Reports The Contractor shall configure and implement a set of routine reports. There shall be facilities for selecting on a point by point basis whether or not an historical record is maintained for each telemetered data point. This ensures there is easy access to historical data and that.7. date.Section 6 . It shall be possible to restore the data from the long term archive facilities at any time for viewing without disrupting the online historical data. and presented either in tabular or graphical form. Facilities shall be provided for the printing of these reports either automatically at specific times or on request by the operator. An alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches its capacity at which time the data shall be sent to the Data Archiving System for long term storage and retained for future reference. These shall include daily. All changes in each real time data point (analogue and digital) received from the plant shall be recorded in the historical database. There shall be user friendly facilities for archiving data to archive files to hard disk and to back up media and for recovering archived data. The reports shall be on a daily. It shall be possible to use current online data.7. The operator shall be able to request an immediate printout of any report and this shall include the values stored up to the time of operator request. The report generation facility must allow for selective searching for data by location. The Bidder shall describe the report generation facilities offered.

2. It shall not be necessary for the same data to be entered more than once in order to provide the source data for different SCADA/EMS functions.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (e) Generator variable and fixed costs (f) Generator unit availability (g) Generator scheduling constraints including permitted starts. it shall be possible to create an offline amendment of the database on the System Maintenance Workstation. The format and presentation shall be developed during the preparation of the database.g.72 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . The System shall prompt for supplementary data. as necessary. in Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. (g) The system energy balance between production and energy delivered to the 33kV system The weekly and monthly reports shall present cumulative values in a similar manner.Section 6 . The user shall be able to amend the real time database using screen pro forma and menu driven techniques.1 DATABASE MANAGEMENT General A data engineering tool with a graphical user interface shall be provided to generate and maintain all data and displays.8 2. The system shall be capable of updating retrospectively any data that was not available at the half hourly interval (e. For example. stops (h) Generator unit regulation participation (i) Hydrological data pertinent to despatch and production (j) Weather data (k) Load forecast values (l) Transmission constraints (m) Transmission loss factors (n) Scheduled maintenance (o) Unscheduled outages (p) Other data available within the SCADA/EMS system or entered by users.8. The daily reports shall present the following information: (a) Daily Despatch schedule per half hour (b) Daily Despatch actual per half hour (c) Load forecast per half hour (d) Load actual per half hour (e) Energy per half hour and daily cumulative values per unit and station (f) Other data and information shall be presented in a suitable text form to give a clear presentation of the factors influencing the daily production results. The ability to activate downloading of stored databases to the online system shall not be limited to the System Maintenance Workstation user or to any specific workstation. as required. to accommodate such changes as:      Modifications to the power network topology Addition and deletion of substations (and Outstations) Amendment of signals at Outstations Signal processing requirements Reconfiguration of the communications network It is essential that database amendments propagate through the System and that all necessary consequential changes are carried out automatically. It shall be possible to store offline amendments ready for incorporation into the real time database. because of telemetry failure) but retrieved at a later time.

The user shall be able to construct the definable symbols using other symbols and graphic primitives. character fonts and user definable symbols.3 Data Manipulation Function A facility shall be provided to enable the user to generate derived data using arithmetic and logical functions. These facilities shall include functions for generating duration curves for showing graphically when measurands were above. Facilities shall be provided which allow operators to quickly restore the original database on the operational system where amendments have been incorporated and found to be unsatisfactory. The user shall have access to the facility. but be prevented from updating the current (operating) diagram files. etc shall be the sort of mechanisms provided to facilitate this activity. Facilities shall also be provided which ensure that when restoring. The spreadsheet facility shall also include normal spreadsheet calculation. through an interpretive high level interface.8.8. within. manipulation and printout facilities as are found in current proprietary products. operators familiar with the facilities shall be able to use quick selection methods such as the use of function keys and/or short form command line entries. and initiate its incorporation into the online System from a control room workstation at a later time. 2. The diagram editing function shall be implemented using the same type of graphical user interface as that used for the power network control function. The Contractor shall prepare a set of 20 displays or status lists covering 20 different sets of selection criteria to be defined during the course of the contract and provide a pro forma template which enables an operator to quickly set up additional status lists. This shall be capable of imposing different access restrictions to different display editing functions. equipment. 2. For example. The access authority of the operator activating such a predefined database amendment shall be definable by the System Engineer and shall not be restricted to levels at or above those normally permitting on-line database amendments. The library shall hold a minimum of 256 symbols. for display.73 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . or below specified limits over a selected time period. At one level the user shall be fully guided through the interaction with the editor by the use of menus and context sensitive help screens. 2. menu selections. Each symbol shall be capable of being scaled and oriented at will during construction of a diagram.Section 6 . These facilities shall enable operators to define status lists which list data points. Screen proof reads. substations etc in accordance with user defined criteria and which can be designated for updating on a cyclic basis and on demand by the operator. The derived data shall be held in the database and shall be accessible. measurand alarm limits shall automatically be checked to ensure that HH>H>L>LL and that dead bands (which shall be user definable) do not overlap with adjacent limits.8.4 Graphic Display Construction Diagrams shall be prepared and modified using an interactive screen display editor that shall be available at any workstation incorporating graphic display capability.2 Data Entry The data entry task shall be made as simple and error free as possible. Such user defined symbols should be capable of being stored in a library for ready retrieval and use in diagram construction. User interaction with the editor shall support different levels of user familiarity by providing parallel paths for command entry. modify and store diagrams. So for example. To assist the operator in making a query which relates to one or more items of equipment there shall be simple procedures for identifying the item or items of equipment to be queried on one-line diagrams. User access to the function shall be controlled through the normal system access control mechanism. as for any other real time data. a user may be able to copy. wherever possible.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications advance. There shall also be a facility for interrogating the Master Station database via SQL type queries. which shall include spreadsheet format or 4GL language. Construction of the diagrams shall use graphic primitives. However. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. reporting and historical data compilation. amending or regenerating the system database it is not necessary to re-enter all data which had previously been entered manually. Validity and plausibility checks shall be carried out on all data entries. block copying. The Bid shall provide a detailed description of the facilities he will be providing in respect to the requirements of this clause.

line type. the entry of network electrical parameters. power lines. e. line isolator. To assist the Employer in future data gathering and collation activities the Contractor shall specify the detailed requirements of all data necessary to configure the SCADA/EMS System to enable it to meet its specified functionality. the user shall be able to define certain attributes associated with the elements (e. Bidders shall clearly define in their Bid the tasks they have allocated to be performed by the Employer. polygon. prior to making the Configuration and Maintenance Facilities available for use by the Employer. where the states of corresponding busbar isolators. but they shall be capable of independent amendment. it is intended that some members of the Employer‘s data engineering team will spend at least one month in the Contractor‘s Works assisting with Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . the design of report formats. as appropriate. and that of the associated communications arrangements. The remaining database and graphics work will be completed by the Employer‘s staff following suitable training and under the supervision of the Contractor. etc are logically combined to a single status indication). etc. text labels. to facilitate the copying of areas of the diagram and replication of them within the world map and to permit the relocation of areas of the diagram without disrupting connectivity. etc. etc. It shall be possible to select from a minimum of eight line types. For the purpose of training and becoming fully familiar with techniques and methods for data configuration. rectangle. circuit breaker. the editing facilities shall enable the diagram elements from an adjacent plane or overlay to be transferred to the layer being constructed. A minimum of two vector character fonts. to build screen displays and report formats. This shall provide a means for readily aligning the diagrams on different layers of the world map and speeding diagram building. circuit breakers.1 Configuration Responsibilities It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all configuration tasks are completed correctly and in accordance with the approved project programme.g. Additionally. solid/broken) fill pattern and colour for each. The responses for active and interactive elements shall be determined by user definable default values of attributes for each element type. Diagram construction shall be made less arduous by providing editing tools. the Employer will provide a number of staff to assist in this exercise. It shall be possible to define elements such that they respond to a logical combination of database points (e. the required programme for the performance of those tasks to meet the overall project programme and the resources required to complete those tasks. The Contractor shall be responsible managing this work through to successful implementation is completed.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Graphic primitives typically comprise: line. alarm points.74 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . eight fill patterns and 32 colours. To facilitate the tasks of data engineering the Contractor shall arrange for the Maintenance Workstation to be delivered at an early stage of the Contract. both in terms of man power and System facilities.. shall be defined. at a certain magnification level the substation diagram may represent each line end status as a single symbol. colour. ellipse. In this way the user shall be able to define how an element changes its appearance in response to a change in a database point or points to which it is linked. It is anticipated that this configuration task will include the preparation of network diagrams.g. etc. field signal definitions. Independently. measured values. although default values (last setting) shall normally apply until changed. it shall be possible to define line type (thick/thin. for example. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the 'first fit' of user definable displays including the world map single line and geographical representations and individual object summaries together with displays relating to the SCADA System status (including Outstations). screen displays.g. active or interactive. The Contractor‘s training regime shall ensure that the Employer personnel shall be fully competent to undertake these tasks as the system evolves over time following completion of the Works under this contract. arc. They will use the Configuration and Maintenance Facilities in the task of entering the project specific data required to configure the new SCADA/EMS System database(s). the number of workstations required to be used to perform those tasks.4. During diagram construction. e. comprising 96 characters each. It shall also be possible to define the element as passive. etc).8. 2. The text strings constructed from them shall be capable of being freely scaled and oriented as for user defined symbols. The Contractor shall carry out any necessary training. This information shall be provided as part of the Contractors training effort. produced by the Contractor.g. Diagram elements may be defined as the component parts of the power network representation. For construction of the multiple layers of a world map. circle.

word processors and graphics programs. 2.8. 2. c) Interface to a future ‗Transparent Despatch‘ facility. trends.9 DATA EXCHANGE FACILITIES The System shall be capable of supporting the following data interchange facilities: a) Import/export of data via a standard SQL interface.5 Changes to Configuration Data During the initial configuration period prior to provisional acceptance initial source data may change as the Employer's staff gain a deeper understanding of the process and they or the Contractor gather more complete and or accurate power system data.Section 6 . The Contractor or the Employer's staff under the supervision of the Contractor shall incorporate any such changes into the system. If any changes are required to database. b) Interface to the Employer‘s PSS-E study and planning applications. The Contractor shall ensure all changes are subject to formal change and version control procedures.1 The major objectives of the training simulator are summarised as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.10. e) Export of files in standard formats suitable for import into spreadsheets. 2.6 Change Control When modifying the database or displays.10 OPERATOR TRAINING SIMULATOR Objectives 2. 2. The original item shall be available for selection as part of the normal real time system operation.75 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . f) Import/Export of data via ICCP (TASE 2) interface g) Web server that permits external users with appropriate access rights to obtain network displays. The Contractor shall include the cost of travel and subsistence for 6 persons in his Bid. The Contractor shall consider the implications of any such changes on the hardware and software capacity and performance of the system. The data engineering tools shall have built-in extensive validation checks on power system components and their integration topology.8. and shall advise the Employer of these implications. The facilities shall be able to provide an audit trail to identify changes and the by whom the changes were carried out by. alarm/event lists and reports available within the system h) E-mail i) Facsimile The external access shall not affect the operational performance of the system in anyway and shall be via a highly secure mechanism whereby non authorised user cannot access the system and no authorised external user can make modifications other than providing data such as may be required for reports or operational planning. d) Dynamic data linkages such as ODBC. etc. Previous revisions of graphics and databases shall be retained for manual deletion by the system manager. until the modified item is specifically substituted for the original. screen or report configuration data after completion and before final acceptance. Excel.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the initial data engineering tasks. DDE and OLE shall be provided to access real time and historical data by Windows™ based applications such as Word. and update the source data under supervision of the Contractor. the item to be modified shall be copied into a work area for modification. the Employer will provide details of the changes to the Contractor.

AGC. The basic functions available in the simulation environment shall be the same as those used in the operational system including SCADA functions. -Simulate random disturbances to measurements. -Simulation of the effects of a fault. -Load sensitivity to voltage and frequency. 2. -Simulate load shedding -Simulation of the operation of protection relays -Simulation of the operation of re-closers. The instructor shall be able to monitor simulated events and trainee responses during simulation and be able to introduce further scenarios at will. it shall be possible for save cases and database snap shots available on the main system to be loaded and used in simulation sessions.2 Simulation Functions The SCADA User Interface functions provided for the training simulator shall be the same as those provided in the Control Room except that the data acquisition functions shall be replaced by an event simulator. The simulator shall present the following features: -Variations of loads according to predefined models. The simulation model used shall be identical to that for the power network applications. The instructor shall also be able to activate individual events or chains of events at will from the instructors console without first having to set up a scenario. However. The event simulator shall provide simulation of the real-time power system offering a realistic perspective to the trainee. b) To provide realistic simulation of power network events in quasi-real-time so that control room operators can be exposed to a wide range of power network contingencies and interactively initiate remedial actions. The network behaviour shall be presented either at real-life speed or with some acceleration or slow down factor. power system analysis functions in real-time and study-mode. The man-machine interface of the instructor and of the trainee-Operator shall be the same as that of the Operators in the control room. Individual points shall be described in these ‗scenario files‘. turbine controls (primary frequency regulator and interactions with AGC for secondary frequency regulation). The bidder may offer a simulator meeting the full EPRI standard as an option. The software facilities to be provided shall be fully described and are expected to include the features described in the remainder of this section. To fulfil the above objectives a separate operator workstation as a training simulator is envisaged.76 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .10. -Simulate multiple islanding of the network Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. voltage regulators. scheduling. forecasting. including boiler and boiler controls. A specific console shall be dedicated to the instructor for supervising the training. Instructor facilities shall be provided to set up any number of pre-determined sequences of timed chronological events to change the state or value of any point defined in the simulation model. despatch.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) To enable control room operators to become fully practised with the SCADA/EMS facilities under steady state conditions. The simulation software shall display to the trainee the redistribution of network voltages and powers based upon the simulated operating conditions. -Simulation of the operation of synchronous-checks.Section 6 . The facilities shall not cause any disruption to the normal operation of the NSCC whilst training is taking place nor adversely affect the reliability and availability of the on-line SCADA system whilst training is taking place. -Long-term dynamic models for generating unit components. active and reactive power loading static and dynamic limitations. water flow and controls for hydro generators.

the successful reclose at the near end is simulated in the power flow with subsequent reclosing of the far end. the reclose operations are unsuccessful and there is no effect on the simulation except for circuit breaker status closing and opening. the difference between the voltage magnitudes and phase angles at the two ends have to be less than a specified value for closure to occur. Through predefined scenarios or through manual interventions during a session.Section 6 . For example. a predefined end of a tripped transmission line will attempt three reclose operations at specified times. -Active and reactive branch flows. a short circuit on a high voltage transmission line activates protective relaying within a few cycles but this process shall be modelled in the scenario as the tripping of certain circuit breakers.10.3 Relay modelling Protection relay models which trip or close circuit breakers and switches for the purpose of protecting and controlling the Power System and its components shall be provided.77 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In the case where the two ends are in different islands. -Set RTU and communication lines out-of-service.. -Allow / prohibit supervisory control of breakers. For example. -Active and reactive generations. Line or transformer overloads. If the line has a permanent fault. -Synchronous check relays shall be modelled which check voltage magnitude. Such events shall occur either at instructor specified times. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. voltage and frequency excursions shall be processed by relay models. Relays which operate rapidly during transients in the system need not be modelled and only their effects are introduced into the simulation. transformers. When both ends of the breakers are in the same island. -Trip generating units. -Trip lines or transformers. -Under/over voltage relays which trip bus load breakers or generators according to the value of the bus voltage. or conditional to some designated variables satisfying some instructor specified condition. Those relays that operate because certain simulated variables reach particular thresholds shall be explicitly modelled. -Loads. the check is done on voltage magnitude and frequency differences. Relays shall be modelled in such a way that the automatic switching operations in the network are accurately portrayed in the simulation. The simulator shall be configurable to serve as testing tool during Factory and Site Acceptance Tests 2. phase angles. It shall provide: -Bus voltages in the range nominal +30%/-30%. Inverse time over current relays shall be modelled. -Frequency in the range 45 to 55Hz. Otherwise. The near end breaker (s) attempt reclose for a maximum of three times. The following relay types shall be represented explicitly: -Under/over frequency relays which are activated by the value of system frequency. the instructor shall be able to: -Modify the loads (individually or globally and time scheduled). -Change plant control mode (local / AGC). These relay models shall trip the associated breakers if the violations exceed predefined thresholds based on duration and magnitude.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications -Simulate reconnection of network islands The simulator shall compute a complete AC load flow solution in the acceleration framework. -Automatic reclose relays attempt the reclose of transmission line circuit breakers after they have tripped. and frequencies across a breaker before attempting closure.

There shall be a minimum of 50 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for expansion for future use as specified in 2. The Bidder shall describe the management process by which this will be carried out. Long term data storage facilities shall be provided for loading and backing up of software. database configuration.11. is exceeded for a predefined time.11. a) No carrier from the Outstation over a user configurable time period (where appropriate) b) No reply from the Outstation for a user configurable time period and number of tries.11 MASTER STATION HARDWARE 2. The detection of the loss of a communication channel shall include the following conditions. All servers shall be rack mounted within a cubicle.11. c) A user configurable number of bad responses in a user configurable period of time. Highly reliable mass storage devices shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of the operating system. All servers shall have redundant hot swappable power supplies. and redundant systems mounted in separate cubicles for location in equipment rooms. The operation of this device shall not require that the device be physically connected to each computer in turn.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications -Directional and non-directional inverse time MVA or current flow relays which trip a line or transformer if a limit.78 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . MVA or current. However it is not acceptable for the system console to be shared with a server or servers located in another equipment room.3. Where a number of servers are mounted within in a cubicle or suite of cubicles it is permissible for these servers to share a single system console connected via a KVM switch. b) 64kbps interfaces c) TCP/IP 100/10 Mbps (where appropriate) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The data acquisition server shall be capable of being equipped with the following interfaces for communication with the Outstation equipment: a) V. Each data acquisition server shall be equipped with a system console to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages.11. including CRC errors. All servers shall be equipped with a system console to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages.24/V. For each communications channel the data acquisition server shall detect loss of communications with an Outstation and raise an alarm.28 interfaces for unbalanced communication configurable up to 9600 bps.Section 6 . On completion of the project update and maintenance of the Antivirus product will be undertaken by the Employer IT staff.4 Data Acquisition Servers Data acquisition servers shall be provided at the Master Station to independently carry out all acquisition and processing of telemetered data.2.1 Operating Systems It is required that each category of computer has its own operating system and that this operating system is capable of supporting all on-line and standby functions to be performed by that computer. 2. 2.3 Servers All servers shall be of a well proven design suitable for ‗real-time‘ operation where reliability is a prime consideration.2 Antivirus Software Antivirus software shall be supplied on all computer systems. length errors in data etc. applications and data. graphics and the archive and retrieval of historical data on magnetic or optical media. 2. 2.

In particular. Each operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm. Routers Where routers are provided for connections of other LANs to the SCADA LAN for the purposes of remote access or the exchange of operational data these shall have the following minimum features: a. bridges.79 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Failure of a LAN in a redundant configuration shall not degrade system performance below the specified performance requirements of Section 2. Modular architecture permitting field configuration and upgrades.12. separate Ethernet switches and power supplies shall be supplied for each. communications servers and peripheral devices shall be supported by a dual redundant LAN which conforms to IEEE standards. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirement of the operating system and applications software.1 Ethernet switches Where dual redundant LANs are required.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. Hot-swappable boards.6 Local Area Network (LAN) Interconnection between computers. 2. Redundant power supplies (for main switches). separate LAN switches equipped with redundant power supplies. When required a firewall or filtering router shall be provided to separate the SCADA master station LAN from all other LANs and WANs. repeaters. b) c) d) e) f) g) h) 2. All LAN equipment shall be rack mounted within a cubicle. multiple independent Ethernet LANs shall be concurrently supported. and redundant systems mounted in separate cubicles for location in equipment rooms. The removal.3. Failure or degradation of LAN operation shall be reported via alarms. Each operator workstation shall be provided with adequate main memory for the required tasks with 50 per cent spare capacity.Section 6 . routers/gateways etc necessary for the operation of the SCADA system.6. There shall be a minimum of 50 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for expansion capacity for future use as specified in 2.5 Operator Workstations Each operator workstation shall be equipped with alphanumeric keyboard and mouse/trackball and LCD screens.11. Centralised network management via SNMP. or malfunction of a piece of hardware on a LAN shall not interfere with the operation of that LAN. Media support for Ethernet Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6.11.2.11. The dual redundant LANs will be constructed. The LANs must be constructed to provide the necessary throughput to meet overall system performance requirements. The number of workstations and LCD screens shall be as stated in Technical Schedules. Single-mode fibre up to 2 kilometres. All transfers of devices between redundant LANs shall be performed automatically without disruption of any logical channel between applications.2 Media support for Ethernet Category 5 e UTP or better. The operator workstations shall meet the requirements defined in Technical Schedules 2. The LAN shall be complete with all necessary terminal/printer servers. The Ethernet switches provided by the Contractor shall have the following minimum features: a) Multiple LANs supported concurrently. There shall be 50 per cent spare capacity above that required for the fully expanded system. operator workstations.11. powering off.

or via hardware switch through a standard GPIO port.11. 2. and support peripherals. Redundant power supplies. The printers shall be able to print A4 and A3 black and white and colour pages. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. e.6.. Printers shall have separate black and coloured toners and printers using individual colour cartridges are preferred to those that use single multi-colour cartridges. The construction shall provide for an aesthetic mounting and finish.8 Video Wall The Video Wall shall provide for a 8 panel display with overall size of approximately 160 inches wide x 60 inches high comprising 50‖ (diagonal) panels. via external computer or terminal via networked RS-232.11. The number of colour printers shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules.11.7 Printers 2.7. 2. LAN Management LAN management facilities shall be provided via a full graphical user interface that shall be supplied and configured. This management function shall provide overall control and monitoring capabilities to reconfigure and indicate the status of the LANs.3 Colour Printers Colour printers shall comply with the above requirements for general purpose printers.11.2 Laser Printers All laser printers shall produce clear black & white copies on standard A4 paper or transparencies with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi. The number of laser printers shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules.1 General The devices shall contain off-line self-test systems that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system.7. d. The projection system must be capable of being controlled via remote keypad (wired or IR). The design of the construction and appearance shall be subject to approval by The Employer. Printer consumables shall be readily available locally in the Employer‘s country. network equipment. by external computer via Ethernet. c. The system shall include both digital (DVI) and analogue inputs and allow easy expansion to support additional inputs for compatibility and redundancy purposes. The equipment offered in this Contract shall be suitable for continuous 365 day per year 24 hour control room operation and have been proven by satisfactory operating experience in similar environmental conditions elsewhere.7. Each panel shall be set and be capable of automatically maintaining equal levels of contrast and brightness to each other in order to achieve an even and homogenous presentation of displays and information. The joints between panels shall be such that lines or diagram elements crossing them are clear and without discontinuities (a maximum screen to screen gap of 1mm). 2. Centralised network management via SNMP.11.11. 2. 2. f. Each printer shall be capable of manual and automatic paper handling and be equipped with 500 sheet paper tray.Section 6 . Each printer shall be capable of printing at minimum speed of 15 ppm.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications   b. Hot-swappable boards.3 Category 5 e UTP or better G703 optical fibre interface Multiple routing protocols including RIP and IGRP Modular architecture permitting field configuration and upgrades.80 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

The video wall controllers shall be supplied with Microsoft Windows based operating system. Outline details shall be submitted in the Bid and agreed with the Employer prior to manufacture. The screen technology shall be of a Fresnel lenticular construction and not use a Blackbead screen technology. motorized colour wheels.11.3 Video Wall Construction The minimum overall size of the video wall display area shall be as stated in the technical schedules. In addition panels shall be located at each end to house the displays described in sections 2. through the provision of independently fed redundant power supplies. It must be possible to enlarge any single window to use the whole display area. It must be possible to move and resize these windows to use any part of the video wall area. The Bidder shall specify the heat loads generated by the video wall equipment. 2.g.8. 2. or motorized apertures. All maintenance of the display units shall be from the rear of the units.4. Each display unit shall be equipped with a three colour LED light source using single separate Red. The entire video wall must be available for presentation of a minimum of 16 windows containing graphical displays.3. d.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. Green and Blue LEDs.Section 6 .8. 2 off DVI inputs 2 off VGA inputs The video wall controller shall be resilient to single equipment failures e. These panels shall be sized and constructed to house additional active video wall screens which may be implemented at a later date. The system shall automatically ensure a consistency of colour and intensity between each display panel. Fixed access shall be provided for maintenance of the units as part of the video wall supporting structure. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B.5 metre above the floor level. Duplicated Giga/Fast Ethernet connections 2 off video/CCTV camera inputs. The Bidder shall describe the resilience features of the equipment supplied. The lower edge of the display units shall be 1. b.4 Software The video wall controllers shall be capable of displaying windows from all sources simultaneously.11.3.4.11.1 Display Units Each rear projection display unit shall be equipped with projector based on DLP technology capable of 1400x1050 SXGA+ pixels or higher resolution. Each video wall controller shall be equipped with the following interfaces as detailed in the technical schedules: a.3 and 2. The projection system shall not contain arc lamps.81 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant .8.6. 2. The display units and their supporting structure shall be enclosed in an external finish to the approval of the Employer. Samples of the proposed finish shall be provided to the Employer for agreement prior to manufacture.3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the confirmation of actual enclosure dimensions prior to commencing manufacture.2 Controllers Video wall controllers shall be supplied for interfacing to the SCADA system equipment. The display units shall be installed fully in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and in such a manner that allows safe access for maintenance. The installation of the display wall units shall be such that they appear as an integral part of the overall enclosure.3. The display units and associated equipment are to be installed in a suitable enclosure for location in the control room. c. The Bidder shall specify the viewing angle which must be at least 180 degrees horizontally and 120 degrees vertically.11.8. The Bidder shall state the brightness which shall be at least 450 Cd/m2 and also the brightness uniformity between centre and edge of screens which must be greater than 90%.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B.4.82 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . e) A new display being requested every minute (Each display containing an average of 30 analogue values and 50 indications). f) One alarm page ‗accept‘ every 3 minutes.11.5 Management Management facilities for the control. It shall also be possible to synchronise the Outstations from the Master Station via the SCADA telecommunication channels in cases where no GPS is installed or the GPS has failed.8. The Bidder shall provide details of the time synchronisation procedure. Outstations shall normally be synchronised directly from GPS equipment located at each of the substations. The time synchronisation procedure shall maintain time synchronisation between the Master Station equipment and each of the Outstations to better than 10 ms and to better than 20 ms between Outstations. 2. with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. the Master Station equipment shall initiate a regular time synchronisation procedure. To this end the Video Wall housing shall have a panel at each end both with matching bezels.Section 6 . 2. day. b) A total of 1 per cent of all analogue measurements exceeding their alarm limits per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. Time synchronisation between workstations and servers on the Master Station LAN shall be better than 10 ms.11. 2. The performance test shall be carried out at different times of day including crossing hour. Similarly Hydro Complex Displays shall be provided in an adjacent panel to the Video Wall.1 Normal Activity Conditions The normal activity level shall be defined as the following conditions: a) Changes in 2 per cent of all status indications per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. c) All measurements being transmitted to the Master Station at the update times specified in the Schedules with subsequent processing and presentation on displays at the Master Station. g) All application and standard software running as normal. d) A total of 2 per cent of all alarm points being initiated per minute. Facilities shall be provided for the definition of up to 8 video wall window layouts which can be recalled from the management interface.10 System Displays System Displays shall be provided to present the information described in section 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. month and year boundaries. However. as the information is permanently on display separate dedicated display devices shall be mounted adjacent to the Video Wall and fitted with surrounds and bezels in keeping with the Video Wall design.12.9 System Time Time synchronisation of the Master Station equipment shall be from the GPS master clock system located in the NSCC. and monitoring of performance shall be provided with the video wall controllers. This shall be from a dedicated console that provides control to all equipment connected to the video walls. With the exception of the directly derived frequency measurements the system shall be able to present this information on the Video Wall.11.3.6. 2.12 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE The following Clauses describe the performance requirements for the System operating in its normal configuration. backup. in addition to alarms caused by the above mentioned status changes (see (a)) and measurement limit violations. Where the Master Station equipment is required to maintain time synchronisation of the Outstations.3. Updating shall take place automatically at start-up and regularly thereafter to ensure that the error between the GPS master clock time and Master Station Servers does not exceed 1 ms.

12. a complete restart of the System. The operators shall not need to login again and the display selections should remain as they were prior to the failover.83 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications h) Execution of topology processing and any cyclically executing EMS applications every 5 minutes. g) Execution of topology processing and any cyclically executing EMS applications every 5 minutes.12 The response times for interactions with the UI displays shall be measured from the time of completion of the initiating action on the operator display to the time the relevant operator display has been fully updated with the respective real time data resulting from the action. including full update from the field.12.3 Computer Start Up Total time for the start up of a computer. 2.g. all functions shall be available to the operators. b) A total of 10 per cent of all analogue measurements exceeding their alarm limits per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station.5 System Response Times The performance of the System shall meet or better the maximum response times specified in Table 2. All applications and standard software running as normal. initialisation and database updating. c) All measurements being transmitted to the Master Station at the update times specified in the Schedules with subsequent processing and presentation on displays at the Master Station. d) A total of 10 per cent of all alarm points being initiated per minute. The Bidder shall provide detailed calculation that demonstrates that the proposed system has the capacity and response capability to meet the full requirements for performance initially and when a fully Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Panning and zooming in/out movements shall be achieved in increments of no greater than 1/8 the screen size. Automatic restart following a power down shall not exceed five minutes.Section 6 . shall not exceed five minutes. the time for the display to be refreshed shall be no more than 0. The response times for events and alarms shall be measured from the time of occurrence in the field of the initial event/alarm to the time the relevant operator display is updated with real time data or an event or alarm appears in the respective list.2 High Activity Conditions The high activity level shall be defined as the following conditions: a) Changes in 10 per cent of all status indications per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. Thus. 2.25 second.12. including automatic program load.4 Transfer of Operation No operational feature of the SCADA/EMS System shall be unavailable for more than 30 seconds at any time due to the transfer of operation from one processor to another following processor failure (e. with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station.12. e) A new display being requested every 15 seconds. 2. Complete SCADA/EMS functionality shall be available within a further five minutes following a start up or automatic restart of the last computer in the minimum set of computers required to be running to support this functionality. 2. If a display is suspended during panning and zooming. The time for the display to be refreshed following each step shall be no longer than 0. at each operator workstation (Each display containing an average of 30 analogue values and 50 indications). Immediately after failover.5 seconds after the panning/zooming operation has completed. shall not exceed 15 minutes. i) f) One alarm page ‗accept‘ every 30 seconds. in addition to alarms caused by the above mentioned status changes (see (a)) and measurement limit violations. Updating from outstations may extend beyond this time but the full update of the System with data from the field shall not exceed a further five minutes. failover to a hot standby computer or reconfiguration of networked tasks) or for any other reason.

The calculations shall demonstrate that there is sufficient disc capacity. The design. and finish of the control desk shall be to approval.84 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The control desks shall be of robust.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications expanded. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. They shall provide for adequate writing space and have room for a communication console. MVAr & Voltage measurements b) Other measurements The time between successive updates of the main computer database with pulse meter values shall not exceed Loading of a save case and initialisation of a study mode EMS application Results available from a derived calculation Time from request of hard copy output to the commencement of printing Normal Activity 1 2 2 2 2 High Activity 1 4 2 4 2 1 1 2 4 2 4 5 5 20 40 30 30 10 2 2 30 2 5 2.1 Operator Desks The Operator Workstation VDUs and associated keyboards described in this Specification shall be mounted on control desks to be supplied under this Contract. durable construction and shall be ergonomically designed to facilitate operation of the equipment to be mounted on them.Section 6 .13 CONTROL CENTRE FURNITURE 2.12 Maximum System Response Times (seconds) Description Confirmation of point selection on a VDU The time between selection of a display and the VDU diagram fully updated shall not exceed Acceptance of a single alarm Acceptance of a page of alarms The time between selection of a control function and check back from the outstation as to whether or not the control can be performed shall not exceed The time between execution of a control function and initiation of the control at the outstation shall not exceed The time between the occurrence of a change of state or an alarm at an outstation and display at the Master Station shall not exceed The time between a change of state at an outstation due to a control action and display at the Master Station shall not exceed The time between successive updates of the main computer data base with analogue measurements shall not exceed a) MW. The arrangement and method of mounting equipment on the desks shall be subject to approval. Table 2.13. processing power and main memory to achieve the requirements. appearance.

construction and finish.3 Equipment Stands All peripherals which are not free standing must be mounted on suitable robust stands. The chairs and their upholstery shall be of a design. All stands shall be complete with all necessary trays and accessories for orderly paper handling.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The furniture shall be of a good quality.13. tables and chairs in the quantities stated in the Price Schedules. 2. The proposed furniture will be subject to approval by the Employer. arm rest chairs complete with five castors shall be provided to match the desks.2 Operator Chairs High back reclining swivel.13.4 Office Furniture A range of standard office desks. the design and finish of which shall be subject to approval. and shall be subject to approved. shall be provided by the Contractor.13.Section 6 .85 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 2. The design of the furniture shall be in keeping with the general office décor. The chairs shall be of robust construction suitable for continuous use and shall be designed to give optimum body support and comfort during use. durable and appropriately designed for office work where staff members are expected to be seated for several hours at a time.

The Telecommunication System Specification is to be read in conjunction with other documents containing the Technical Schedules and Drawings.Section 6 . IEEE Standards. It is also recognised that such a system will have standard functional features not specified herein but nevertheless important or essential for the implementation of a fully operational system. In this context it is important to recognise that the systems being provided are likely to be expanded in the future and new facilities added. performance and general hardware and software requirements for the new telecommunication system needed to support the new NSCC SCADA system. The proposed telecommunication system shall fully comply with the requirements stipulated in all these documents. The Bidder‘s attention is also drawn to the Schedule of ―Confirmation of Compliance‖ which is contained in Volume 7.1. ISO Standards. It should be emphasised that the existing telecommunication system should be modified. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 3. extension and upgrading works carried out by the Contractor must be well planned and co-ordinated with other parties involved in the NSCC Project.2 Reference Documents and Standards All equipment supplied under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Specifications. the SCADA system and telecommunication system designs shall constitute a fully integrated and complete operation and control system.1 Specification and Design Criteria The equipment. hardware. Together. Therefore existing telecommunication equipment should be re-used or de-commissioned and re-commissioned elsewhere and be integrated into the new telecommunication network wherever possible. It also describes the overall functional. including details of necessary survey work to be undertaken by the Contractor. to be supplied to meet the requirements set out in this document shall be based on mature and proven products that have evolved and been field proven in comparable projects. the modification. The Bidder shall identify where the solution offered is a deviation from the requirement or an alternative that meets the objectives of the specified requirement. Such future flexibility shall be borne in mind in the detail design of the telecommunication system.1 INTRODUCTION The Telecommunication System Specification details the requirements for the modification. International Telecommunication Union (ITU) Specifications and the General Technical Specification. The transition from the old telecommunication network to the new telecommunication network should be carried out in a staged and overlapping manner to minimise ―cut-off‖ time and disruption to power system operation The strategy of working with one communication link (main or secondary) only at a time should be applied wherever possible during upgrading/reinforcement of the existing telecommunication network. documentation and miscellaneous items required to implement a complete and fully operational system that is fit for the intended purpose whether or not those items are specified herein. Further to this the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying. The Bidder shall provide cross referencing for his Bid submission identifying where the particular clauses of this Specification and the associated General Technical Specifications are addressed. extension and upgrade of the existing telecommunication system and associated works. installation requirements and other project specific particulars. Bidders may propose alternate design solutions so long as these match or exceed the specified functionality and performance.86 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . all software. technical and functional requirements of the new telecommunication system as a base for preparation of offer by the Bidders. Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Employer. extended and upgraded in a cost effective manner to meet the new telecommunication requirements.1.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3. The intention of these documents and drawings is to provide the basic design concept. In order to minimise disruption to the Employer‘s power system operation. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. As far as possible these products shall be customised to meet the specified functional requirements. 3. within the Contract price. including software. 3.

(see drawing no. PLC links. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-005).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3.3 Site and Environmental Conditions All equipment supplied shall be fully suitable for operating at the temperature and humidity as specified in the General Technical Specification contained in Volume 4 Section 6 Part A and Volume 5. Except for some voice links. Part D. Teleprotection signalling equipment. Pilot copper cable links. SCADA data transmission between the RTUs and the control centre is using data channels with transmission speed of 200 bps via the analogue PLC links and 9600 bps via the FO links. with a SCADA system based on ABB BECOS 20 system. redundant telecommunication paths do not exist.1. The telecommunication network is used for the transmission of SCADA data. having no remote control facility. The existing telecommunication network (see drawing TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-006-PLTS not shown). Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Fibre optic terminal equipment.Section 6 . The present system is based on an older ABB Spider Micro SCADA system commissioned in the year 2000. Party line telephone system Administrative telephone system. ADSS and underground fibre optic cables. Most of the PLC links are double channel equipment with one channel being used for party line telephone system and the other channel used for PAX system. The existing telecommunication system comprises the following sub-systems:         PLC equipment. Multiplexing equipment and modems. via OPGW. Section 6. does not provide sufficient communication channels / capacity required for the efficient operation of the power system.1. VHF radio links. which include the following:     Fibre optic links. consisting mainly obsolete and aged analogue Power Line Carrier (PLC) equipment. fibre optic (FO) links have been increasingly used for these functions. The system comprises of a master station equipment at the SCC and terminal equipment at all power stations and grid substations.87 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The party line telephone system (PLTS) is a dedicated non-switched telephone system. which is exclusively used for system control purposes. 48 Vdc power supply system for both SCADA RTU and telecommunication equipment. 3. It only covers about one third of the power stations and grid substations and further stations cannot be connected without severe degradation of the already insufficient system performance. The system can monitor the transmission network and power system only. The SCADA RTUs communicate with the master stations at the existing SCC via data communication channels. ADDS or underground fibre optic cables. The FO links are based on synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) technology operating at a STM-1 transmission rate (155 Mbps). Optical ground wire (OPGW). The existing telecommunication network is composed of a mix of communication media. voice and teleprotection signals. operating over high voltage transmission lines. The existing SDH equipment is FOX515 from ABB. It was commissioned in 1985. In recent years. It is responsible for the despatching of load to the power stations and the operation of the power transmission network.4 Existing Control and Telecommunication Facilities At present a System Control Centre (SCC) is in operation and is located near Kolonnawa substation.

To meet the Employer‘s present and future operational and business requirements. b.5 Implementation Programme The telecommunication system shall be implemented in accordance with the milestones set out in the Contract Implementation Programme contained in Volume 7 Part D Schedule E section 11.28 (RS232C) asynchronous data channels with speed up to 9. the existing telecommunication network shall be modified.3. upgraded and expanded to meet the following: a. It should be noted that since some elements of the fibre optic backbone communication network rely on optical ground wire (OPGW) to be fitted on existing overhead transmission lines as well as the provision of some SDH equipment by others. The sub-systems include: a. Part C may not be up to date and that a site visit by the Bidder will be needed to confirm the extent of work required. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-001 shows an overview of the new telecommunication system requirements. c. d.24/V. Voice channels.88 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . To have sufficient telecommunication system spare capacity for selling to third parties at a later date. 3. data and teleprotection signalling communication channels. To facilitate future expansion of the telecommunication system to meet the requirements of power system expansion.Section 6 . 2 Mb/s transport service. c. Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) communication system. Digital power line carrier (DPLC) equipment.4. 3. c. with the objective of making both SCADA and telecommunication facilities progressively available throughout the power system.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Bidder should be aware that due to constant expansion of the Employer‘s power network. To accommodate the telecommunication services needed to meet the Employer‘s operational and administrative requirements. the existing telecommunication drawings contained in Volume 6. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the telecommunication system and the provision of telecommunication equipment under the Contract. d.6 kb/s for connection to RTUs connected to the telecommunication network via DPLC links. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2. the following facilities: a. Telephone system. Section 6. The Telecommunication Specification describes the project specific requirements to fulfil the telecommunication objectives including detailed functional and performance requirements of the various sub-systems comprising the telecommunication system. High speed (nx64 Kb/s) data channels for connection to RTUs connected to the telecommunication network via optic fibre links.2 3. The Contract Implementation Programme that is proposed takes into consideration the above constraints. as a minimum. Drawing No. Telecommunication management system (TMS).1 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Introduction A reliable and high performance telecommunication system is needed to support power system operation. The telecommunication system shall provide. e. b. The prime function of the telecommunication system is to provide the necessary speech. V. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment. the Contractor shall take into account possible changes to the OPGW and SDH installation programmes and plan his work in a manner that mitigates against delay to the implementation of the telecommunication system in general.1.

Overhead lines that are to be fitted with OPGW currently use PLC links for transmission of teleprotection signalling commands. Teleprotection signalling commands will be transmitted as before via the existing PLC equipment. the existing telecommunication equipment should be re-used or dismantled and re-commissioned elsewhere to form part of the integrated telecommunication network.2. Cross-connection criteria of channels shall be as follows: a. Remote monitoring of telecommunication equipment operational status including alarms and performance shall be under the supervision of the telecommunication management system (TMS). It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the parameters of the existing systems and equipment owned by the Employer and to ensure that new equipment supplied by the Contractor is fully compatible with such existing systems and equipment. Transmission of teleprotection channels over physically separated multiplex equipment. where the existing PLC equipment is relatively new the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services except teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. The system must be fault tolerant. Teleprotection signalling channels. The Contractor shall furnish equipment. data and teleprotection signalling channels can be automatically re-routed in the event of a trunk/node failure and/or traffic congestion occurring anywhere on the network. The equipment shall preserve configuration data during power failure and all modules shall be capable of hot swappable. which shall meet in all respects the performance specified under the prevailing site conditions. f. Transmission of ―main‖ and ―secondary‖ channels over physically separated multiplex equipment as much as possible.Section 6 . It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor. where the existing PLC equipment is old and obsolete the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. assisted by the Employer. Video transmission service (at a later date). Necessary teleprotection signalling equipment shall be provided by the Contractor to allow teleprotection signalling commands to be sent via the new fibre optic network. In order to provide a cost effective telecommunication network. The design objective with respect to reliability is to ensure that no single contingency results in loss or unacceptable degradation of service. to alert the system operators of the operational status of the telecommunication system. resilient to hazards and robust in all respects. 3. to demonstrate by means of tests at site that the Employer‘s existing equipment and any supplied by the Contractor perform satisfactorily together. In general. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Other non-critical operational and administrative data communication services using TCP/IP.89 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the telecommunication network shall be capable of providing a fully resilient network in which all speech. Major telecommunication equipment malfunction alarms shall be transmitted to the NSCC via the SCADA system. address the requirements set out in this document with respect to availability and reliability. and that the incidence of failure of components/elements is consistent with achieving high availability. These criteria will normally require dual routing or dynamically allocated virtual circuits. The primary multiplexers shall be used widely at substations to combine at maximum of 30 pulse code modulation (PCM) voice channels or 64 kb/s data channels into a 2048 b/s signal. The proposed design shall incorporate proven technology. b. However. All necessary additional user interfaces shall be provided to meet the new communication requirements.2 Design and Operational Philosophy The design philosophy of the new telecommunication network is that failure of any single component shall not cause failure of critical function.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications e. subject to the proviso that any fault or failure of existing equipment shall be the responsibility of the Employer. g. In addition.

optical terminal boxes. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications and re-allocations of existing channel assignment required to ensure that the telecommunication system can be developed and existing facilities are fully migrated to the new network with minimal disruption to power system operation. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. if the distance involved so requires. TCP/IP Ethernet networking. b. It is preferable that one common telecommunication network management system is used to monitor and supervise the new integrated digital telecommunication network. At substation sites currently with fibre optic communication facilities. 3.2.2. with 1310 nm being the preferred choice as most of the fibre optic span lengths are generally less than 50 km.1 Configuration and Topology The new telecommunication fibre optic network backbone shall employ SDH technology with STM-1 (155. SDH and primary multiplexers and cross-connect units will remain the same and be re-used for the new SDH network. terminal hood closures.4. Open topology network allowing the most flexible way of building the SDH network shall be adopted and the network shall be able to evolve in functionality just by simply adding plug-in units. Dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM). System expansions and upgrades carried out at a later date shall be possible by means of minor modifications and/or by the addition of extra equipment modules to the telecommunication system. 3. A minimum of 50 per cent system expansion capability shall be provided over and above the capacity/channel requirements that are needed for the new telecommunication system. existing equipment such as indoor fibre optic cables. In addition. c. be supplied already equipped with a minimum of 25 per cent spare capacity including interface modules for each type of communication circuit.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Contractor shall deliver any unused dismantled telecommunication equipment to the Employer‘s store.4 Telecommunication Network Approximate numbers and types of various communication channels required are detailed in the Specification for Bid purposes. Single fibre operation.52 Mb/s) transmission level.90 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The telecommunication network backbone shall be based on ring topology with self healing protection capability. However. Longer span lengths may require the use of 1550 nm operating wavelength window. the telecommunication system shall have built-in flexibility to cater for communications requirements outside the power system operation of the Employer. such as corporate business computer applications and regional administrative communications etc. The Contractor shall carry out optical loss budget calculations for each fibre optic link to determine the most suitable operating wavelength to be used. It is desirable that no intermediate repeaters are employed. Details of system expansion and upgrade capability shall be submitted with the Bid. The operating wavelength of the SDH network shall be 1310 nm or 1550 nm. The new SDH network backbone shall be linked to the existing SDH network and also to the new DPLC network to form an integrated digital telecommunication network. the Contractor shall provide all necessary optical regenerative repeaters including solar power supply and all associated works and plant to enable the proper operation of the repeaters.2. However. All systems shall. It shall be possible to purchase the additional telecommunication hardware and software needed for future expansion and upgrade from different vendors. however. fibre approach cables. 3.3 Expansion and Upgrade Capability The telecommunication system supplied by the Contractor shall employ open standard concept in the design and shall offer greatest flexibility for future expansion and upgrade of the system and facilities.Section 6 . The following future upgrade options shall be possible: a. the exact number and type of communication channels required shall be determined by the Contractor during the detailed engineering design of the telecommunication system.

6 kb/s asynchronous V. performance.24/V. SNCP (Sub-Network Connection Protection) where working traffic flows in one direction and protected traffic flows in the opposite direction. The Bidder shall comment on the proposed SDH network topology. with regard to any deficiencies.Section 6 . Fibre optic links that will be made available by others for use to implement the SDH fibre optic network backbone are shown in Drawing No. Voice channels (VF E&M 2/4 wire). The 2 Mb/s transmission system will interconnect the following end-user facilities: a. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-003.2. in particular.2 Network Design The design of the telecommunication network backbone should make use of independent fibre path where available to provide the necessary resilient. If a problem occurs in the working traffic path. In order to increase the availability and reliability of the telecommunication fibre optic network. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-002.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The SDH network shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode optical fibres and shall conform to the relevant ITU-T recommendations for STM-1 transmission bit rate.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design and implementation of the network so that it achieves the design objectives set out in this document.91 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Each SDH ring shall be designed to operate independently and a failure in one ring should not affect the normal operation of other rings. 3. data. teleprotection signalling and video.3 Network Protection The telecommunication network shall employ the following network protection methods as appropriate: a.4. c. and with the appropriate quality of service (QoS) required for power system operation at a later date without sacrificing current investments in telecommunication infrastructure. The system shall be capable of being upgraded to the next hierarchy level STM-4 (622 Mb/s). Details of how this can be achieved shall be submitted in the Bid. reliability and availability. High speed (64 kb/s) data channels according G. Remote subscriber channels. d. The SNCP shall be in accordance with ITU-T G. It should be emphasized that due to unforeseen circumstances it may be necessary to change some of the routing during the course of the Contract. 3. The proposed SDH network should be designed in such a way to allow easy migration to a fully integrated multi-service TCP/IP (transmission control protocol/internet protocol) networking for voice. the receiving node switches to the path coming from the opposite direction. Low speed data channels (up to 9. by exchanging appropriate modules at a later date.841. The telecommunication network shall also have provision for an engineering order wire (EOW) facility capable of providing a dedicated telephone communication system for commissioning/maintenance purposes between nodes. A diagram showing the Bidder‘s proposed integrated telecommunication network and a detailed description on the functionality provided shall be submitted with the Bid.28). The Contractor‘s design should therefore be flexible and be able to accommodate of such possibilities. b. The maximum transmission capacity which the proposed SDH network can be achieved and whether the upgrading can be carried out whilst the system is carrying live traffic shall be stated in the Bid. if any.703. e. to provide a higher transmission rate using the same optical fibres and repeater locations. 2 Mb/s tributaries on the STM-1 system will be utilised to provide voice. The proposed SDH network design is shown in Drawing No. SDH equipment shall be equipped with dual redundant hotstandby control modules and power supply units. Due to the variety of equipment available in the market place the final solution may not exactly mirror the equipment and connectivity shown here but it should achieve design objectives in terms of functionality. nx64 kb/s data channels according to ITU-T V. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. data and teleprotection signalling connectivity between substations and NSCC using first order multiplexing equipment at all the stations.2.35.

conforming to ITU-T recommendation G. 3. The Contractor under this Contract shall take whatever steps necessary to ensure the works supplied by others are properly co-ordinated with the works supplied under this Contract and that together they provide the functionality and performance defined for the works in this Contract. Fibre optic links currently under construction by others.92 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . b. Fibre optic links to be supplied under the NSCC OPGW Cable Contract. The switch over times for SNCP and MSP shall be less than 50 ms. The Contractor must provide all information and complete comments on designs produced by others that relate to the works to be supplied under this Contract in a timely manner and in accordance with the programme for the works under the related contracts. c. Demarcation of responsibility between this Contract and optical fibres supplied by others is at the optical terminal box.1.4.4 Fibre Optic Links The new telecommunication fibre optic network backbone shall make the best use of the following available fibre optic links: a. A maximum of 4 fibres in each fibre optic link will be made available for telecommunication use. Details of the available fibre optic links can be found in the Table 3.Section 6 . Existing fibre optic links. c. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2.652. Details of the proposed network protection shall be submitted with the Bid. d. Ring MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) shares the ring bandwidth equally between working and protected traffic.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications b. 2 fibre bi-directional self healing ring. Linear MSP for point to point applications. The remaining fibres will be for other purposes and/or served as spares. Each fibre optic link generally comprises a total of 24 discrete single mode optical fibre cores.

0 6.0 6.0 6.93 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .0 6.1 15.5 70.6 4.5 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Ongoing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Ongoing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Optional under NSCC OPGW Contract Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract ------As per NSCC OPGW contract --------Dec 2010 Dec 2010 Dec 2010 ----------------As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract SCC Colombo Region 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4 0.0 0.9 0.6 4. route (km) 14.0 0.5 6.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.3 4.0 0.0 2.2 0.1 – Available fibre optic links Region FO Link 1 2 From Kolonnawa Kolonnawa Sri Jaywardanapura Sri Jaywardanapura Pannipitiya Pannipitiya Dehiwala Havelock Town Maradana CEB HQ CEB HQ CEB HQ Kolonnawa Kolonnawa Kelanitissa GIS Kelanitissa Kelanitissa GIS Kolonnawa Kelaniya Sapugaskanda GS Biyagama Biyagama Biyagama Biyagama To Athurugiriya Sri Jayewardenepura Pannipitiya NSCC Ratmalana Dehiwala Havelock Town Maradana Kolonnawa Havelock Town Maradana Kolonnawa ESCC Kelanitissa GIS Kelanitissa ESCC Barge Kelaniya Sapugaskanda GS Biyagama Sapugaskanda PS Pannipitiya Kotmale Kelanitissa Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 132 132 220 132 132 132 132 220 220 220 Approx.0 8.9 9.0 2.2 2.Section 6 .6 0.5 12.

3 30.1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) Region FO Link 25 26 Northern Region 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 From Kotmale Kiribathkumbura Kiribathkumbura Kotmale New Anuradhapura Puttalam Puttalam Puttalam Puttalam Pannala Pannala Bolawatta Katunayake Kotugoda Kotugoda Veyangoda Kotugoda Kotugoda Ukuwela Ukuwela Ukuwela Naula Habarana To Kiribathkumbura Ukuwela Kurunagala New Anuradhapura Norochchole PS Maho Madampe Pannala Diesel gen.3 18.94 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .0 42.3 29.0 117.0 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing UGFO (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Optional under NSCC OPGW contract Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Jul 2013 Apr 2013 Aug 2012 As per NSCC OPGW contract ----------------------As per NSCC OPGW contract Aug 2012 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.0 17.Section 6 . route (km) 22.0 17.9 34.0 100.0 45.6 10.0 31.2 86.4 0.7 11.6 163.0 14. 100MW Madampa Bolawatta Katunayake Kotugoda Kerawalapitiya Veyangoda Norochchole PS Aniyakanda Kelaniya Bowatenna Pallkele Naula Habarana Valachchenai Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 220 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Approx.8 27.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.0 37.5 29.5 100.0 68.

route (km) 48.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.Section 6 .1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) Region FO Link 48 49 Northern Region 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Kotmale Region 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 From Habarana New Anuradhapura Old Anuradhapura New Anuradhapura New Anuradhapura Vavuni Kilinochchi Old Laxapana New Laxapana New Laxapana Old Laxapana Kotmale Kotmale Badulla Nuwara Eliya Old Laxapana Badulla Madagama (T-off) Old Laxapana Kotmale Victoria Randenigala To Old Anuradhapura Old Anuradhapura Puttalam Trincomalee Vavuni Kilinochchi Chunnakam New Laxapana Balangoda Canyon PS Polpitiya Upper Kotmale Polpitiya Rantambe Badulla Nuwara Eliya Madagama (T-off) Monaragala Wimalasurendra Victoria Randenigala Rantambe Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 220 220 Approx.95 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4 38.0 35.2 0.8 32.6 43.0 8.9 1.1 30.4 3.3 53.3 18.1 67.1 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing ADSS Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Existing UGFO Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Dec 2011 Dec 2012 Dec 2012 Dec 2012 Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Jul 2012 Jul 2012 --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 75.5 74.1 16.9 10.0 103.5 37.5 29.0 5.5 16.

1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) FO Link 70 71 Kotmale Region 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Southern Region 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 Approx.96 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .0 8.1 30.0 34. route (km) 21.0 28.0 24.0 24.0 40.0 35.6 0.0 38.0 44.4 10.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.0 33.0 Region From Rantambe Mahiyanganaya Vaunativu Badulla Polpitiya Seethawake Athurugiriya Pannipitiya Panadura Horana Matugama Matugama Embilipitiya Matara Matara New Galle Embilipitiya Embilipitiya Balangoda Balangoda Balangoda Matara Matara-Embilipitiya (T-OFF) To Mahiyanganaya Vaunativu Ampara Wallawaya Seethawake Kosgama Thulhiriya Panadura Horana Matugama Kukule Ambalangoda AES PP ACE Matara PP New Galle Ambalangoda Samanalawewa Hambantota Samanalawewa Rathnapura Deniyaya Embilipitiya Beliatta Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 33 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Remark Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Expected completion date Jul 2013 Jul 2013 Jul 2013 Jul 2013 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract --------------Aug 2012 Dec 2013 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Dec 2011 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.0 89.1 25.2 52.Section 6 .0 60.0 19.0 40.0 1.3 48.0 17.

b. PLC equipment such as line traps.Inginiyagala Kolonnawa . The scope of work shall include dismantling of existing analogue PLC terminal units and delivering them to the Employer‘s store and shifting the existing communication services to the new DPLC equipment. The new digital PLC equipment shall use existing frequency bands in accordance with the existing PLC frequency plan.4. 3.Section 6 .Kosgama The Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands onto the new DPLC links. The following existing analogue PLC links are to be replaced with new digital PLC links: a. coupling capacitors and matching units will remain the same. An engineering order wire facility capable of providing a dedicated telephone communication system for commissioning/maintenance purposes between PLCs shall also be provided.6 Communication Facilities The new telecommunication network shall be capable of providing the necessary speech. The existing PLC terminals operate on nominal carrier frequency band between 50 and 500 kHz. Necessary teleprotection signalling equipment or modules shall be provided by the Contractor to allow teleprotection signalling commands to be sent via the DPLC links.5 Upgrading of Existing PLC Links New digital PLC (DPLC) links shall be established as reinforcement of the existing PLC links via 132 kV O/H lines. The new DPLC shall have the capability to fall back to analogue mode should the noise on the overhead power transmission lines is high.2. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 Location Existing SDH Node New SDH Node STM-1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6 k/s.28) or combination of the two and up to 4 teleprotection channels out of band.24/V. data and teleprotection signalling channels at the following locations: Table 3.97 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2 SDH Nodes No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AES power plant Ambalangoda 132/33kV Ampara 132/33kV Aniyakanda 132kV Anuradhapura 132kV (old) Anuradhapura 220kV (new) Athurugiriya 132/33kV Badulla 132/33kV Balangoda 132/33kV Beliatta 132/33kV Biyagama 220kV Bolawatta 132/33kV Bowattenna PS Canyon PS CEB HQ Chunnakam 132/33kV STM-1 By Others.4. up to 9 data channels with transmission rate per data channel 1200 b/s (ITU-T recommendations V. The Contractor shall ensure that the new DPLC equipment to be supplied is fully compatible with the existing analogue PLC system. The DPLC shall comply with IEC 60495 recommendation with channel capacity of at least 32 kb/s which enables transmission of up to 3 speech channels with transmission rate per speech channel (including signalling) 9. by replacement of some of existing old analogue PLC equipment with the new digital one. Badulla .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.2.

FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others. STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification No 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Colombo City DCC Dehiwala 132kV Deniyaya 132kV Location Existing SDH Node New SDH Node STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 . STM-1 By Others. FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 Embilipitiya 132/33kV Galle 132/33kV (new) Habarana 132/33kV Hambantota 132/33kV Havelock Town 132/11kV Horana 132/33kV Katunayake 132/33kV Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kelanitissa 132kV Kelaniya 132/33kV Kerawelapitiya 132kV GSS Kerawelapitiya 220kV PS Kilinochchi 132/33kV Kiribathkumbura 132/33kV Kolonnawa 132/33kV Kosgama 132/33kV Kotmale 220kV PS Kotugoda 132kV (old) Kotugoda 220kV Kukule 132kV PS Kurunagala 132/33kV Laxapana 132/11kV PS (new) Madampe (Chillaw)132/33kV Mahiyangana Maho 132/33kV Maradana 132kV Matara 132/33kV Matugama 132/33kV Monaragala 132/33kV NSCC (National System Control Centre) ESCC (Existing System Control Centre) Naula 132/33kV Norochcholai 220kV (Puttlam PS) Nuwara Eliya 132/33kV Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. FOX515 STM-1 . .98 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

Each communication link shall initially cater for 4xE1 (i.4. STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 43 3.4.8 Communication Requirements at Power Stations / Substations Communication facilities to be provided by the new telecommunication system are: (1) For sites that are connected to the telecommunication network via fibre optic links the minimal communication requirements shall be as follows at each site: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Contractor shall determine the required speed of this link based upon the amount of operational data to be transferred between the NSCC SCADA system and DCC SCADA system.e. 4x2048 kb/s) but can be upgraded to a higher speed at a later date if required.2. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 New SDH Node Polpitiya 132/12.5kV PS Puttalam 132/33kV Randenigala PS Rantambe PS Ratmalana 132/33kV Ratnapura 132kV Samanalawewa PS Sapugaskande 132/11kV GSS Sapugaskande PS Seethawake 132/33kV Sri Jayawardanapura 132/33kV Thulhiriya 132/33kV Trincomalee 132/33kV Ukuwela PS Ukuwela GSS Upper Kotmale PS Valachchanai 132/33kV Vaunativu 132/33kV Vavuniya 132/33kV Veyangoda 220kV Victoria PS Wimalasurenda PS Wimalasurenda GSS TOTAL 37 STM-1 By Others STM-1 By Others .7 ICCP links between NSCC and Colombo City DCC Dual redundant ICCP (inter-control centre communication protocol) links shall be provided between the NSCC and DCC (Colombo City Distribution Control Centre) for the transfer of operational data.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification No 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Pallekele 132/33kV Panadura 132kV Pannala 132/33kV Pannipitiya 220kV Location Existing SDH Node STM-1 By Others.99 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 . 3.2. Details of the proposed ICCP links shall be included in the Bid.

Independently routed teleprotection signalling channels as required. and vice versa. TCP/IP communication link is required for connection to the Substation Automation System (SAS). data and teleprotection signalling communications. . teleprotection signalling for first and second main protection associated with existing circuits shall be implemented using separate multiplexing equipment and routed via physically segregated paths wherever possible. e. as a minimum. g. TCP/IP Ethernet communication link to NSCC via gateways for non-critical substation data. Non-critical substation data communication link based on IEC60870-5-104 should be available as an option at a later date. The speed of data channels shall be able to be upgraded to nx64 kb/s if it is necessary to meet the performance requirements. SCADA data communications protocol shall be based on IEC60870-5-101 and/or 104. The TMS shall have. User friendly computer based network management. c. g. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Two V 24/V28 data channels for connection of RTUs at the substation with NSCC. f. Automatic reconfiguration of traffic requirements and channel re-allocation. The switching and channel reallocations from active to standby route shall be transparent to the users and shall cause no loss of information. Performance monitoring and fault co-ordination facilities.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification a. Multi-user capability. d.28 data channels for connection of existing RTU at the substation to the NSCC. Four spare 64 kb/s data channels for future use. Three voice communication channels. The TMS shall enable the telecommunication network be configured in such a way that there shall be a preferred routing for normal operation for speech. b. c. This link will be used to allow remote access to substation data that would be inappropriate to transmit over the SCADA links. In addition. Two V. Ability to integrate with other propriety equipment sub-management systems. f.5 Telecommunication Management System A telecommunication management system (TMS) shall be provided to monitor the new SDH network performance and status and to make alternative routing and channel allocation changes as necessary. b. Two 64 kb/s data channels for connection of new RTU at the substation to the NSCC.24/V. To ensure secure and reliable transmission at all times. 3. the following features: a.2. This link may also be used to remotely reconfigure the SAS database or to adjust protection relay settings. No single point of failure in the design. End to end circuit management. the requirements shall be as follows at each existing site: a. d. and an alternative routing in the event that there is a failure and/or traffic congestion on the preferred routing. For example fault waveforms from the substation protection equipment.100 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . (2) For sites that are connected to the telecommunication network via transmission media with limited capacity such as PLCs. All necessary switching and channel re-allocations shall be automatic during the changeover from the preferred route to the alternative route. b. e. c. Independently routed teleprotection signalling. Two voice communication channels.

Details of how the various telecommunication equipment can be integrated and monitored by the TMS shall be included in the Bid. 3. b. The TMS central computer system shall in turn initiate a regular time synchronisation procedure to maintain time synchronisation of the remote network elements.101 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification h. In addition to monitoring and supervising the SDH network.2. PAX equipment. Alternatively integration of the new SDH network components into the existing TMS provided by ABB. b. However.Section 6 .2. d. PDH equipment. Analogue PLC equipment. one black/white laser printer and one laser colour printer. Reports management The TMS shall include facilities that enable the system to be extended without interruption to existing services. it is recognised that not all the existing and new telecommunication equipment can be integrated in the TMS and that equipment monitoring can only be carried out via voltage free alarm contacts.Samanalawewa The Contractor shall provide necessary teleprotection signalling equipment including all necessary ancillary equipment so that existing teleprotection signalling commands can be transmitted via the new fibre optic network for the above PLC links: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The application/communications servers shall be interconnected with the operator workstations and printers via a dual LAN. Security management. e.2 Time Synchronisation The TMS shall interface with the master GPS clock system at the NSCC for time synchronisation of the TMS central computer system. Compliance to international standards such as ITU-T. Teleprotection signalling equipment. Details of how this is achieved shall be fully described in the Bid. Digital PLC equipment.Rantambe Old Laxapana .5. 3. j. f.Canyon PS Badulla . A common integrated TMS for monitoring all telecommunication equipment is the preferred choice.Nuwara Eliya Embilipitiya .Samanalawewa Balangoda . Human machine interface (HMI) at the NSCC shall include two operator workstations. 3. Kiribathkumbura -Kurunegala New Laxapana . d. i. c.6 Teleprotection Signalling Equipment Overhead lines that are to be fitted with OPGW currently use PLC links for transmission of teleprotection signalling commands. e. The following PLC links are using old and obsolete PLC equipment and the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. a.5.2. the TMS shall also be capable of monitoring the following telecommunication equipment: a. The Bidder shall provide details of the time synchronisation procedure and method of interfacing with the master clock system.1 TMS Control Centre Equipment Dual redundant application/communication servers shall be provided at the NSCC. c.

The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed telephone network and method of providing hot line and party line functions. The existing PLC equipment shall be decommissioned. New private automatic exchanges (PAX) are proposed at the following locations. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-004 shows the proposed telephone network. All necessary interfaces shall be provided to enable hotline and party line functions are available in the new telephone system. telephone numbering system and network shall be modified according to the Employer‘s new telephone network requirements.7 Telephone Network 3. 5 PAX-PAX tie lines.2. 20 PAX-PAX tie lines. 500 subscriber lines.2.102 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .7. Laxapana. Initially the equipment shall be capable of providing 16 simultaneous speech channels recording but with a capability of being expanded up to 32 speech channels at a later date. The voice logging will be used for the purpose of determining sequence of operational events. The existing telephone extension lines. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Kotugoda. 150 simultaneous subscriber to subscriber communication channels. b. 200 subscriber lines. d. The voice recording equipment shall be a multi-channel digital communications logger that can simultaneously record and replay voice messages. 3.2 Voice Recording Equipment A PC based voice recording equipment shall be provided and be capable of interfacing with the new NSCC PAX to automatically log all telephone communications between operators in the NSCC and other personnel. The capacity of the new PAX at the substations shall be as follows: a. It should be possible to preset individual channels to bypass some PAXs on the trunk routes to reduce the number of intermediate steps on the long haul routes. b. Drawing No. c. 50 simultaneous subscriber to subscriber communication channels. a. The new telephone system shall be capable of providing at least similar PLTS functions such as hot line telephone communications between Control Centres and Grid Substations/Power Stations. removed and returned to the Employer‘s store. The capacity of the new NSCC PAX shall be as follows: a. c. b.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Bidder shall include details of the proposed teleprotection signalling system in the Bid.1 Telephone Exchange Equipment Some of the existing telephone exchanges are old and operating at their design capacity and these are to be replaced with new modern telephone exchanges. The PAX shall automatically use available alternative routes in the event of faults or congestion. The old exchanges as well as the existing PLTS in the SCC shall be decommissioned. NSCC. A voice recording equipment and a main distribution frame (MDF) shall be provided at the NSCC. The new telephone exchanges shall be microprocessor based stored program control (SPC) exchanges. The voice recorder shall record all voice communications on the telephone network. The Bidder shall comment on the effect of failures within the PAX on the integrity of communication channels routed through the PAX. Kotmale. 3. removed and returned to the Employer‘s store.7.Section 6 . c.2. Provision of all necessary hardware and software required for voice logging shall be supplied by the Contractor.

However.2. User friendly.2. Transfer to tape cassettes and other archive media . d. The voice recording equipment shall also be available for replay regardless of the operation of the system. Automatically monitoring the correct operation of the channel.2. The digital voice recording equipment shall have the following features: a.8. operator workstations and printers that are to be installed in the NSCC shall be designed to operate from a 240 Vac uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system. The Contractor shall liaise with other parties to ensure that there is sufficient space and suitable environmental conditions for the installation of the 48 Vdc power supply system.Section 6 . e. During replay incoming messages shall be stored on the hard disk(s).2. Date and time recording facility such that the date and time of each recorded call is easily traceable. positive earthed supply. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 3. Remote facilities interface (clean contacts for remote indicators/alarms etc). operator workstations and printers) shall be powered from a new 48 Vdc power supply system. f. The new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be sized to meet the electrical loading of the telecommunication equipment plus 100 per cent spare capacity. b. g. 3.8.3 At Employer’s HQ Building A new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be provided at the Employer‘s HQ Building by the Contractor to support the new telecommunication equipment.2.9 Equipment Locations The majority of the telecommunication equipment will be located at the NSCC and at existing substation and power station sites. 3. 3. Appropriate audible alarms and visual indications shall be provided to alert the operator whenever the disk storage space for voice logging is less than 50 channel hours.1 At NSCC The new telecommunication equipment (excluding the TMS central computers. the new telecommunication equipment shall be designed to operate from a nominal 48 Vdc.2 At Existing Substations and Power Stations The new telecommunication equipment shall be powered from the existing 48 Vdc power supply system.8 Power Supply Requirements In general. details of the anticipated power requirements and power consumption of the new telecommunication system shall be included in the Bid. The digital voice recording equipment shall have sufficient built-in redundancy to prevent a single point of failure causing the equipment to malfunction. a new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be required. The hard disk(s) shall be sized to provide a minimum of 2 500 channel hours voice recording on a roll-over basis. the TMS central computers.103 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . As majority of new telecommunication equipment will be powered from existing power supply systems. Appropriate compression algorithm and sampling rate shall be used to minimise the disk space storage requirement and maximise voice recording quality. The TMS workstations and printers shall be powered from a 240 Vac UPS. The Bidder shall include the supply and installation of all necessary interconnecting cables required for the proper installation of the telecommunication equipment in the NSCC and substation sites. Voice operation so that the equipment can be operated in a voice operated record start mode. However at some sites.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All messages shall be digitised and stored on the hard disk(s). 3. c. Voice playback facility.8.

Section 6 . The removal of existing telecommunication equipment shall cause minimal disruption to the power system operation. Existing Substation Automation Systems. Master GPS clock system at the NSCC for time synchronisation of the telecommunication management system and telephone exchange equipment.11 Interfaces with Other Systems/Equipment The telecommunication system shall be equipped with the necessary hardware including interconnection cabling and software to enable interfaces with the following systems to be made: a.2. e. i.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In general. Co-ordination with other contractors shall therefore be required to ensure that the equipment cubicles are arranged in an orderly manner to facilitate ease of equipment identification and access for maintenance. f. Existing fault recorders. Failure to co-ordinate or delay in providing or timely requisition of the necessary interfacing information/ requirements shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the Contractor shall bear any costs which may arise as a result thereof for the provision of modification to other works which are involved with or subject to another contract. 3. The telecommunication equipment will also be co-located with existing or new NSCC RTU and equipment supplied by others.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving and co-ordinating with other contractors or Authorities to ensure that the interfaces and the final installation between the telecommunication system with the other systems are fully compatible both physically and operationally. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications and re-allocations of channel assignment required to ensure that the network can be developed and be capable of providing the necessary communication facilities and security required from one phase to the next. b. new telecommunication equipment will be located adjacent to existing telecommunication equipment or in a location previously occupied by existing equipment. NSCC SCADA system. h. j. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The proposal shall also include any anticipated duration of outages required for the installation. Fibre optic cables (supplied under the NSCC OPGW Contract). 3. testing and commissioning work. timing and phasing of the removal of existing telecommunication equipment that are to be replaced by the new telecommunication equipment. g. A detailed method and programme for the removal of existing telecommunication equipment and transition from the old telecommunication network to the new telecommunication network shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Employer.104 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The discarded equipment shall be returned to the Employer to be used as spares.2.10 Transition from Old to the New Telecommunication System The Contractor shall determine the method. Existing power supply systems that are to be utilised for the new telecommunication equipment. c. (SAS) Existing telephone exchanges Existing ABB FOX515 SDH equipment New SDH equipment (supplied under the ongoing Station Projects) PMC Interface-Protection Monitoring Computer Interface d.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) As the telecommunication equipment will be installed in substations and power stations it must be able to co-exist and operate within the electromagnetic environment with adequate immunity to any electromagnetic disturbances in order that operations will be free of malfunction and safe. Equipment and system designs proposed by the Bidder shall take into account the requirements outlined in the relevant internationally recognised Standards and Regulations to ensure electromagnetic compatibility. 3.

performance or loss of function. The inclusion of EMC requirements in the equipment/system design shall not cause any degradation of quality.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The design shall take account of all aspects of EMC including. for example. circuit design. etc. filtering. equipment and cable screening. bonding.Section 6 . grounding. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B..105 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

The optical power budget calculation shall take into account of the following parameters: a.3. b.3. The equipment shall be suitable for operation in a substation with harsh environment as is found on site and with high electromagnetic interference. Where the performance of the equipment could be susceptible to electromagnetic interference. alarm and fault monitoring. installation of SDH and primary access multiplexing equipment. Bidders shall provide detailed design philosophies for equipment and routing redundancy. the Bidder shall state the maximum level of such interference.3 3. prioritising of channels. using the respective maximum and average attenuation predicted for each component in the system. bandwidth management. testing and maintenance facilities etc.783 and G. equipment cubicles and enclosures. Cross connect facilities shall be provided to enable interconnections between different channels and network components. power supplies.2 Loss Budget Calculations The Contractor shall carry out loss budget calculations for each fibre optic link to ensure the FOC system meets the requirements of this Specification. optical repeaters if required. The multiplexing structure of the proposed FOC system shall allow existing PDH signals to be carried over the synchronous network and shall permit the extraction of individual circuits from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole system. the system shall include network management capability so as to facilitate system performance monitoring.1 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM General Requirements 3.Section 6 . and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. automatic re-routing.1 Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a high bandwidth digital fibre optic communication (FOC) system and associated works. G.1. A redundant configuration for ensuring minimum down time in case of equipment failure shall be provided. digital cross connection units including necessary optical line terminal equipment.957. be highly reliable and provide secure communication for real time signals such as voice.106 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .704.3. In order to maximise the benefit of the telecommunication network and to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the FOC system. The calculations shall include both a ‗worst case‘ and a ‗typical‘ loss budget calculation. which will not cause equipment malfunctioning. Built-in test and self-monitoring facilities shall be provided to enable maintenance personnel to break-in and/or make bridging measurements without degradation or interruption of service. All test loops and loopbacks shall conform to ITU-T recommendation X. SCADA. The FOC system shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode optical fibres and shall conform to the ITU-T recommendations G. service telephone handsets. This Specification includes for all design and engineering. teleprotection and status/control signals. dynamic allocation. The FOC system shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. handheld maintenance terminal units. Mean launch power.150. All electrical and electronic equipment supplied shall be properly grounded and shielded to protect the equipment and operating personnel from effects of induced currents and voltages. system configuration. the fibre optic equipment shall also have remote loopback test facilities. G. optical fibre distribution frames and patch panels. The digital fibre optic communication backbone shall be based on the SDH technology and network architecture. The proposed SDH system shall be capable of interworking with lower order PDH systems. G.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. interconnecting cables including pigtails and patch cords. all associated connectors. The enclosures shall be provided with lockable doors.707. 3. Any failure shall produce automatic switch-over to the back-up unit and initiation of an alarm.703. Receiver sensitivity. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. In order to facilitate maintenance work and trouble shooting. The equipment shall be rack mounted and be of modular design construction and be housed in approved equipment enclosures.

e. The possibility of automatic laser shit down adjustment through the telecommunication management system should be supported.3. Direct connection to multiplexing equipment employing pulse code modulation (PCM) techniques. Direct and easy access to the transmitted base band signal.52 Mb/s (STM-1). f. The FOC system shall be capable of normal operation with or without the TMS. b. h. Maximum installed cable loss.3.107 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . As far as practicable all fibre optic equipment shall self diagnose internal fault conditions and separately alarm their occurrence. Flexibility for adaptation to the desired transmission capacity.4. Integrated monitoring facilities.3. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to the equipment. d. System performance calculations shall include a minimum safety margin of 3 dB. The designs shall also include diagnostic test facilities to allow step-by-step checking of the performance of the equipment.Section 6 . i. f. g. Capability of routing TCP/IP traffic.3 Safety The FOC equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject to rises in earth potential at times of system faults. j. The FOC system shall be required to interface with the telecommunication management system (TMS) for the purpose of centralised supervision and monitoring of the telecommunication system performance. High quality transmission in accordance with ITU-T recommendations. 3. metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth. The system shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provision for the safety shut-off of the optical source to prevent exposure to laser light during installation. Comprehensive operation and fault diagnosis. Details of the earthing arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. Connector losses. All metal parts. Support Q3 interface in accordance with ITU-T G. 3.3.4. High operational security and reliability. Capable of integrating/upgrading with existing system. All necessary hardware and software interfaces to enable integration with the TMS shall be provided under the Contract.4 Functional Requirements 3. maintenance and repair work. Redundancy capability where required.2 System Capacity and Performance The SDH network backbone shall be designed initially with transmission rate of 155. Margin for age degradation and temperature. e. Laser products shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60825 specification. 3. The TMS shall enable circuits to be automatically re-routed in the event of a trunk failure and/or traffic congestion occurring anywhere on the telecommunication network. Detailed calculations shall be submitted during the detail design stage for the approval of the Employer. c. k.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification c.773. Preliminary loss budget calculations shall be included in the Bid. System design penalties. d.1 General The FOC system shall have the following features: a. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

The switchover shall be transparent to the data stream. Each SDH equipment shall comprise. The equipment shall provide interfacing and multiplexing for broadband.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The system shall be capable of being upgraded to the next hierarchy level.826. Switching shall also be possible manually for maintenance purposes. to provide a higher transmission rate using the same optical fibres and repeater locations. The multiplexing structure of the proposed SDH equipment shall permit the extraction of individual 2 Mb/s tributaries from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole STM-1 frame. by exchanging appropriate modules at a later date. During power or management connection failure alarm logs and performance monitoring statistics shall be preserved. Details of the performance of the proposed FOC system shall be included in the Bid.5 SDH Equipment 3. 34 Mb/s. The SDH equipment shall be capable of being configured as a hub. c. Tributary module. and from STM-1 operation. The automatic switch-over to standby transmitter criterion shall be BER>10 -9. for example from STM-1 to STM-4. and facilities for connection of unused multiplexer inputs to appropriate signals as specified by the manufacturer shall be provided. or as an ‗east/west‘ mode when used in a drop and insert chain in a ring. VC3 and VC-4 to enable interconnections between different channels and network components. details of how the Bidder intends to perform synchronisation across the fibre optic communication network shall be included in the Bid. repeater. between any terminal and repeater station and between any two repeater stations (if applicable) exclusively for the use of installation and servicing personnel.4. but not be limited to. The SDH equipment shall be equipped with a range of plug-in tributary interfaces to support a comprehensive range of plesiochronous and synchronous tributaries including 2 Mb/s.1 General The SDH equipment shall perform both multiplexing and optical line terminating functions. Optical line interface. 3. 140 Mb/s.825. Compact unit design and flexible shelf architecture shall allow for housing of various plug-in units. The capacity shall be 63 E1 (2Mb/s) signals for STM-1 and 252 E1s for STM-4. In addition. Cross connection levels shall include nx64 kb/s. The overall mean equivalent bit error rate (BER) of the SDH system between any two end terminals shall not be worse than 10-9 under normal operating conditions. The FOC system shall include provision for overcoming impairments caused by transmission delays. The FOC system shall preserve configuration data during power failure or management connection failure. b. Electrical line interface. Jitter performance on STM-1 interfaces shall be in compliance with ITU-T recommendations G. wideband and narrowband applications. The 64 kb/s digital service channels shall be suitable for any data transmission requirements. Signal synchronising facilities are required to enable the system to be implemented effectively. The aggregate ports of the SDH equipment shall be duplicated and shall be capable of operating in a ‗1 + 1‘ protected mode as part of a point to point link. All features and functions of the SDH equipment shall be readily software configurable to suit operational requirements of the SDH system. add/drop multiplexer or terminal multiplexer. 3. 8 Mb/s. if any.3. End to end error performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITUT recommendation G. The typical error rate for each traffic path shall be stated.3 Service Channels Each optical line terminal equipment shall provide at least two analogue and four digital service channels for voice communications and testing purposes between any two terminal stations.813 and G.3.5.Section 6 .3. Each terminal equipment shall have a handset for voice communications. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. VC-12. the following functional elements: a. The SDH equipment shall be capable of upgradeable from STM-1 to STM-4 without disruption to existing traffic. P12. cross connection.108 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d. The design of the transmitter shall be such that under fault conditions.1.109 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2 Optical Line Interface The SDH equipment shall be capable of supporting the following optical interfaces: a. L4.709.957. Service data interface. Transmitters which output optical power of sufficient intensity to cause hazard to health shall have mechanical interlocks to isolate the diode supply current during the installation or maintenance of the equipment.703.3.5. The optical source shall have minimum life of at least 50 000 hours at an ambient temperature of +50ºC.2 STM-1 interfaces in accordance with ITU-T G. The electro-optic converter shall have a power output suited to the requirements of the fibre optic links and shall be suitable for transmission length of at least 120 km without any use of intermediate repeaters. h. The optical receiver equipment shall have a bit error rate performance suited to the requirements of the network. The optical section shall convert electrical signals into an optical signal for transmission over an optical fibre and perform a reciprocal function on the receive side.1 and L-4. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Transmitters shall provide the continuous transmission of data timing information. Power supply unit.Section 6 . It shall be possible to use an electrical interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM-1 signals to be terminated when the equipment is configured as an ‗Add/Drop‘ mutiplexer. It shall be possible to use an optical line interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM-1 signals to be terminated when the equipment is configured as an ‗Add/Drop‘ multiplexer.1. e.3 Electrical Line Interface The equipment shall support standard electrical tributary interfaces in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G. A 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN interface shall also be supported.3. The transmitter shall have internal diode current and output power monitoring. Control and alarm functions.957. SDH equipment shall be located on a fibre optic backbone system that serves the major facilities within the system. 3. i. Where necessary receiver optical attenuators shall be provided to optimise link performance. Engineering order wire (service telephone) unit. 3. All transmitter equipment shall use the same laser type. The receiver shall automatically accommodate signal level changes due to temperature effects and ageing of the system. L1. Sign warning of possible hazard shall be permanently fixed at all appropriate points. which will provide status indications. The optical interface shall carry out the parallel to serial conversion of traffic from the switch unit into a STM-1 155 Mb/s stream. g. Each optical line system shall be suitable for duplex operation at optical wavelength of 1310 nm or 1550 nm over 2 optical fibres. Centralized function. to simplify spares and maintenance aspects. Switching unit. b.5. The electrical interface shall perform the same electrical functions as the optical interface unit.2 STM-4 interfaces in accordance with ITU-T G.1 and L-1. S-1. with optical amplifiers or attenuators provided to suit the optical performance requirements for each fibre optic link as far as is practical. f. STM-1 electrical line signals shall be in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G. the launch power shall be significantly reduced to a safe level. S-4. It is preferable that the optical transmit and receive equipment are interconnected in such a way that a broken fibre will automatically switch off the optical transmitters at both ends of the section.

3. Distance alarms. Multiplex input fail. alarm and fault monitoring. The alarm concept shall conform to ITU-T recommendation G.6 Control and Alarm Functions Comprehensive control and alarm functions shall be included to provide performance monitoring. The alarm monitoring system shall form an integral part of the telecommunication management system. Loss of clock signal.5. Digital data streams shall be monitored at all levels. k. The system shall be capable of providing details of origin. e. Optical receive level low. testing and maintenance facilities etc.5. f.3. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. 3. Bit error rate (BER) threshold high. These functions shall interface to the telecommunication management system to allow the control and alarm monitoring of the equipment to be carried out locally and remotely. An alarm monitoring system shall be provided to monitor and display the locally derived alarms and if applicable adjacent repeater station alarms. Test points shall be available on each unit to help in failure diagnosis. It shall also be possible to remotely display some of the alarms locally at that site via voltage free contacts. i. The switching shall be done within the multiplexer without using the telecommunication management system. c.110 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Loss of frame synchronisation. prioritising of channels. j. Optical transmit power low. Laser current high.784. The fault location and supervision system shall provide in-service bit error monitoring facilities. date and time of the occurrence of alarms. Alarm indications shall be clearly displayed through LEDs on the front panel of the module. system configuration. The switching unit shall provide the change over facility from faulty units to the standby units to achieve 1+1 protection.5 Switching Unit A switching unit shall be provided to allow traffic from any line interface unit to be connected to any tributary port or any other line port. dynamic allocation. b. The tributary module shall be capable of supporting tributary data rates of 2 Mb/s. In addition it shall allow full cross connections between tributaries.4 Tributary Module The tributary module shall perform the selective extraction/insertion of tributaries to and from the STM-1 signal whilst enabling other traffic to pass through without interruption.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. bandwidth management. 3. The following alarms shall be provided on the SDH equipment as a minimum: a. 34 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s.5. automatic rerouting. It shall be possible to change alarm severity and threshold levels manually.3. 8 Mb/s. Power supply fail or out of limits. h.774 which shall make up the SDH payload before being sent to the switch unit. g. d. Failure of check bits. Equipment power supplies shall be monitored and a fuse alarm indication shall be provided for each cabinet or rack. The equipment shall be provided with a fault location and supervisory system to monitor the status and alarms of the SDH equipment. The data from each tributary shall be mapped into virtual containers and tributary units in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G. showing the location of each alarm displayed.Section 6 .

teleprotection and telecommunication equipment to the fibre optic communication system.Section 6 . 3. 3. Communication interfaces shall be capable of being made available by means of insertion of appropriate plug-in cards into the multiplexer rack.3. 3. Power supply units located in the same shelf shall be capable of maintaining shelf power in the event of single power unit failure.10 Centralized Function The SDH equipment shall have comprehensive monitoring and high capacity management channels to facilitate centralised network controls and maintenance through the network. with a telephone handset. including redundancy requirements.111 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . d. The FOC system shall be capable of supporting the following user interfaces: a. Path protection on 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s shall be supported. 2-wire E&M signalling.6 Primary Access Multiplexing Equipment 3.3. The number. selective calling to reach any station along the route and an audible alert provided at each terminal and repeater site. Each power supply unit shall have fuse protection and alarm reporting/indications as standard features. The types and quantities of the cards for the 30 PCM 64 kb/s channels shall be supplied so as to meet the requirements of the Contract. 3. 2-wire with ring down suitable for a remote subscriber telephone connection.2 Multiplexer The primary digital multiplexing equipment shall be capable of combining 30 PCM 64 kb/s channels with standard frequency ranges of 300 Hz to 3400 Hz into a digital 2048 kb/s data stream conforming to the ITU-T recommendation G.8 Service Data Interface Means shall be provided for accessing auxiliary channels using spare bytes in the SDH ‗overhead‘ bit stream to enable management signals from additional equipment such as primary access multiplexers to be transmitted over the fibre optic transmission system.3. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the types and quantities of primary multiplexing equipment provided shall be capable of meeting the required number of communications channels specified. All equipment shall be wired for their maximum capacity. 4-wire to 4-wire voice frequency.5. All primary access multiplexing. b.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.7 Engineer Order Wire An engineer‘s order wire (EOW) system providing call. bit rate and type interfaces available shall be stated by the Bidder.6.703 to enable direct connection to the SDH optical multiplexing equipment. 3.3.3.3. Future extension shall be possible by simple field installation of appropriate modules. ring and speech facilities shall be provided with each SDH multiplexer. e.703.5. 4-wire E&M signalling.5. The multiplexer shall provide means to drop and insert individual 64 kb/s signals and allocate them to determined time slots in the 2 Mbps streams. demultiplexing and signal processing and conditioning equipment shall be provided to interconnect SCADA. c. 2-wire to 2-wire voice frequency. The system shall be configured as an omnibus circuit.6. The system shall operate on a service channel in the STM-1 bit stream.3.1 General Primary access multiplexing equipment shall be provided as necessary and shall comply with the relevant ITU-T recommendations. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.9 Power Supply Unit The power supply unit shall be capable of being paralleled with another power supply unit in the same shelf to provide redundancy in case of a single unit failure.5. The digital interface of the multiplexing equipment shall be of a time division multiplex signal conforming to the ITU-T recommendation G.

6. Power supply fail or out of limits. f. Remote alarms. g.3. In the event of failure.3 Alarm Indications The PCM multiplexing equipment shall have extensive alarm monitoring facilities. BER threshold high. 3. It shall also be possible to remotely display some of the alarms locally at that site via voltage free contacts. Sample rate for each channel shall be 8 kHz with maximum deviation of 50 parts per million. 2-wire loop disconnect signalling. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification f. Signal synchronising facilities are required to enable the system to be implemented effectively. The 2 Mb/s interface shall be 2048 kb/s 50 parts per million with a HDB3 line code conforming to the ITU-T G. d. j. h. d. Alarm collection interface. appropriate alarm indications shall be initiated. Alarm indications shall be clearly displayed through LEDs on the front panel of the module. g. Multiplex input fail.3. b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.703. b. All PCM multiplexing equipment shall be equipped with alarm circuits to detect at least the following: a. with 8 coding bits per sample. Encoding law shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITU-T G. details of how the Bidder intends to perform synchronisation across the fibre optic transmission network shall be included in his Bid. e. 3.Section 6 . Jitter characteristics shall be equal to or better than ITU-T G. 2 Mb/s data interface according to ITU-T G. Failure of 64 kb/s interface.6. 4-wire to 4-wire voice frequency with FSK modem and channel fail detection. c. i. TCP/IP Ethernet communication. c.703.703.4 User Interfaces User interfaces shall be provided by the Contractor to accommodate various voice frequency (VF) and data channels requirements. The user interfaces shall allow direct connection to SCADA. Loss of clock signal. Test points shall be provided on the channel cards for level measurement and adjustment. In addition. Data interface suitable for multirate synchronous/asynchronous data signalling. giving 256 quantisation levels.112 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . l. resulting in a 64 kb/s rate for each channel. and facilities for connection of unused multiplexer inputs to appropriate signals as specified by the manufacturer shall be provided. k. Details of the channel cards to be supplied by the Contractor shall be included in the Bid. teleprotection and telecommunication equipment. The multiplexing equipment shall have the following features: a.703. It is preferable that a channel card should contain all the components necessary to enable the same card to cater for as many different types of operation as possible by means of software configuration both locally and from a remote site. A suitable rack mounted level meter shall be provided at each station with the necessary test leads and patching cords.771. 64 kb/s data channel according to ITU-T G.

3. b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4. 2 Mb/s HDB3 coded signals on line interfaces conforming to ITU-T G.4.3. e. Provision shall be made by the Contractor to enable direct connection to the teleprotection equipment for transmission of remote protection signalling/tripping commands. 3. Multirate 0 to 19.2 Data Interface Data interfaces of the following types shall be capable of being made available by insertion of appropriate cards into the multiplexer rack for direct connection to computer systems.6.6 to 64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T X. The interface shall be capable of operating from an external power supply with either positive or negative polarity grounding and a maximum potential of 100 V. Signalling (E & M) channel interfaces shall be suitable for a maximum signalling rate of 300 baud. The Contractor shall ensure that the routing and rerouting of the SDH transmission network do not compromise the operating time of the protection signalling equipment. 3. 2-wire analogue subscriber interfaces shall permit direct connection of subscriber sets to the PAX equipment. d. Where modems are connected to communication cables. nx64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T V.Section 6 .703. Multirate 0.11. c. The protection channel interface units shall operate regular loop tests to ensure their readiness for operation.3.3 Teleprotection Signalling Interface The FOC system shall be capable of facilitating the transmission of teleprotection signalling commands associated with the power transmission network.2 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T V. The following data interfaces shall be supported as a minimum: a. In the event of a fault being detected an alarm shall be raised and the protection command inhibited.35.113 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Any special interfaces which are considered necessary for the provision of a full and complete installation of the telecommunication system shall be included in the offer and full details shall be supplied with the Bid. The E-lead shall be capable of switching currents up to 100 mA.28. 64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T G. Interfaces shall comprise balanced circuits with E & M signalling and recall facilities and shall be suitable for both standard telephone instruments and telephone consoles using dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) signalling.6. The maximum signal transmission time of the FOC system over any fibre optic links shall not exceed 2 milliseconds.703.3. with co-directional interface synchronisation.703 using 120 ohms balanced impedance. The transmission of protection signalling commands shall preferably be utilising a complete 2 Mb/s channel according to ITU-T G.21/V.24/V. Telephone ringing supplies shall form part of the interface equipment. VF signal levels shall be adjustable within the range: Input: -16 to +1 dBm Output: -7 to +7 dBm E & M signalling interfaces shall be provided on each 4-wire VF channel.6.4. Sub-multiplexing up to 8 low speed (0 to 1 200 baud) asynchronous data inputs over a single 64 kb/s communication channel shall be possible. The external connections of both VF and E & M circuits shall be isolated from the associated board circuits. barrier transformers shall be supplied for protection against induced overvoltages. This signal transmission time shall exclude any delay times of the teleprotection equipment.1 Telephony Interface 4-wire voice frequency channel interfaces shall comprise 600 ohm balanced circuits with a bandwidth of 300 Hz to 3400 Hz.

2 Alarm indications The following alarms shall be provided on the optical regenerative repeater equipment: a. shall be connected to the fibres of the optical cable at the repeater sites by means of detachable optical connectors. The repeater shall be equipped with facilities for sending alarm signals to the optical line system to indicate a fault condition.703 unframed and G. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. vandal resistant and equipped with all accessories necessary for securing to the tower and for grounding any metal parts.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. Optical regenerative repeaters. Each spare fibre shall be equipped with an optical connector.4 Ethernet Interface The FOC system shall be capable of supporting a 10/100 Mb/s BaseT Ethernet interface complying with IEEE standard 802. and to accommodate duplex repeaters and all necessary ancillary equipment including storage for sufficient length of fibre for at least 10 future splices. broadcast. The Bidder shall state the cross connect capacity for high density application. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. if the distance involved so requires. Cross connection functions available shall include pass through.8. BER threshold high (for both directions of transmission).3. Optical transmit power low.114 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The enclosure shall be weatherproof and suitable for installation in a manhole.3.Section 6 . and an optical transmitter.3. c. each optical line repeater shall be mechanically. The second type shall be suitable for use underground. Each optical regenerative repeater shall be totally compatible with other optical repeaters and optical line system described in this Specification. a regenerator circuit. 3. non-blocking. 3. add/drop and loopback.1 General It is desirable that no intermediate repeaters are employed. Proper operation of the repeaters shall be continuously monitored during service. Both types on enclosure shall be of sufficient size to meet minimum bending radius requirement of the fibre optic cable.7 Cross Connection Equipment Cross connection equipment shall be provided as necessary to enable interconnections between different channels and network components be made. However. It shall cross-connect 64 kb/s as well as 2 M/s (ITU-T recommendations G.704 framed) and VC12.8. If the enclosure is metal.8 Optical Regenerative Repeaters 3. the Contractor shall provide all necessary optical regenerative repeaters and associated plant together with detailed calculations justifying the need to have intermediate repeaters The locations for repeaters shall be determined by the Contractor and details of equipment locations shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Employer.4. The enclosure shall be weatherproof. Laser current high.3. Each two-way repeater shall comprise an optical receiver. b. d.6. The optical output level shall be maintained relatively constant with variation in the optical input level due to fibre length. cathodic protection shall be incorporated where corrosion would otherwise occur. The first type shall be suitable for mounting on overhead line towers. b. and with variation in power supply voltage and/or ambient temperature. The optical repeaters shall be housed in a weatherproof enclosure. 3. Except for minor level adjustments. The enclosure shall be one of two types: a. electrically and optically interchangeable. where required.

testing and isolation of both the optical fibre cable and fibre optic terminal equipment. f.Section 6 . b. All fibre distribution frames shall have a earth connection provided. The following basic functions of the fibre distribution frame are required: a. The optical fibre distribution frames or patch panels shall be mounted at a maximum height of 1.115 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Fault in supervision channel. Bridging measurements. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules. h. The optical fibre tail cables and connections shall be substantially protected from possibility of damage due to maintenance or installation activity. It shall be possible to connect each optical fibre to the appropriate point on any terminating equipment. Optical fibres shall be terminated by detachable connectors. All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the fibre optic transmission equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract. Power supply fail or out of limits. Sufficient space shall be available on the frame to allow ease of access and minimise the possibility of interference or damage to fibres carrying traffic during maintenance testing on the back-up or spare fibres. destination or source. 3. complying with the requirements of IEC 60874. the repeater alarms shall be monitored and displayed on the alarm monitoring system. The alarm monitoring system of the repeaters shall also form an integral part of the telecommunication management system.5m above ground level so to facilitate ease of maintenance.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification e.3. Circuit re-routing/jumpering.3. and the transmit and received direction of the transmission shall be segregated. 3. At the terminal ends. Optical receive level low. The capacity of the fibre distribution frame shall be chosen to accommodate the maximum capacity of the fibre optic communication system plus 50 per cent spare capacity to cater for any future expansions.9 Power Supplies Requirements The fibre optic transmission equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. d.10 Optical Fibre Distribution Frames / Patch Panels Optical fibre distribution frames or patch panels shall be provided as necessary by the Contractor to facilitate the termination of fibres. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Fixed couplers shall be provided for each fibre comprising a link. Plug-in connection shall be used. Facilities shall be provided for termination of any metal cores within the fibre cables. at the optical fibre distribution frame and shall be properly labelled with fibre identity. c. Switch-over to standby transmitter. and to provide interface and/or cross-connect facilities between the digital multiplex equipment. g. go or return. and shall be protected from corrosion by painting or galvanising. The alarms from the repeaters shall be transmitted to the terminal ends. Patching and test connections. Circuit disconnection. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the fibre optic transmission system shall be individually fused.

2.4. Performance management. configuration and resource management. b. SDH equipment. A common integrated TMS for monitoring all telecommunication equipment is the preferred choice. The telecommunication management equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters. the following management capabilities: a. system telemetry. Technical descriptions detailing the TMS performance and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. interfacing equipment.4 3. equipment cubicles. The TMS shall be capable of monitoring the following telecommunication equipment: a. Fault management.4. However. 48 Vdc battery and battery charger system. The TMS will be used for administering the management activities associated with the telecommunication system so as to maximise the benefits of the telecommunication network and to ensure that the telecommunication resources are utilised efficiently. b. Digital PLC equipment. Security management.4. e. Reports management. d. interconnection cabling.116 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . it is recognised that not all the existing and new telecommunication equipment can be integrated in the TMS and that equipment monitoring can only be carried out via voltage free alarm contacts. g. c. Configuration management.1 TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a telecommunication management system (TMS) and associated works. 3. Details of how the various telecommunication equipment can be integrated and monitored by the TMS shall be included in the Bid. handheld maintenance terminal units. All necessary hardware and software interfaces to allow integration with existing and new telecommunication equipment for alarm management via external voltage free contacts shall be provided under the Contract. The TMS shall also provide the necessary information to assist the Employer in the operations and maintenance of the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. d. The TMS shall have. c. The TMS equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. central computer system including system and applications software and human machine interfaces. PDH equipment.1 General A telecommunication management system shall be provided by the Contractor to monitor and supervise the telecommunication network. e. This Specification covers all design and engineering. and command controls.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.2 Functional requirements 3. Analogue PLC equipment.Section 6 . power supplies and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. Teleprotection equipment. PAX equipment. f. as a minimum. The telecommunication management system shall provide equipment status and alarms.

administration of customers as well as business planning and forecasting. e. and vice versa. The system design concept shall allow a user to set up. Ability to readily export/import files to Microsoft Windows based software packages such as Word or Excel for TMS report presentation. All necessary switching and channel re-allocations for speech. maintenance and provisioning of telecommunication network and services.4. The up date time of a visual display unit (VDU) screen shall be measured from the final action of the operator to request the display.Section 6 . c. Remote control and reconfiguration of the network. d.2.4.3 System Performance The response times required for the TMS are stated in Technical Schedules. 3. Automatic generation of network configuration data. l. On-line testing of any transmission network components.4. j. installation. g. System set up and configuration of the network elements. k. updated with real-time data. h. detection of degraded circuits and system performance. The switching and channel re-allocations from active to standby route shall be transparent to the users. 3. Back up facility.1 Configuration Management The configuration management shall include. data and teleprotection communications shall be automatic during the changeover from the preferred route to the alternative route.3100 and G.3010.2. f. via software configuration. and an alternative routing in the event that there is a failure and/or traffic congestion on the preferred routing. the implementation of remedial actions and the allocation or reallocation of telecommunication resources. i. The features to be provided by the telecommunication management system shall include at least the following: a. 3. administration. to the time of the relevant page. the following functions: a. the diagnosis of problems.2 System Architecture and Design Concept The TMS functional and informational architecture and physical architecture shall be in compliance with ITU-T recommendation M. at a future date. Creation of end to end circuits and paths in the network. a preferred routing to be used for normal operation for speech and data communications between the Control Centre and remote sites. for billing. On-line help facilities and easy to use graphical user interfaces. End to end circuit and allocation management capability. Interfaces for proprietary network monitoring sub-management systems. new installations. 3. It shall be possible to upgrade the TMS to include accounting and business management functions. The TMS shall provide standard management interfaces. Real time status of every individual network component. Hard key licence.4.4 Management Functions The TMS shall be capable of supporting a wide variety of management functions to cover planning. appearing in full on the operator workstation.774. as a minimum.2. b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification telecommunication resources of the telecommunication system including planning.2. such as Q3 interface based on ITU-T recommendations M.117 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . b. operations. which enables easy integration with other management systems. Historical and statistical information on network alarms and signal quality. Computer based system with multi-user capability.

Alarm reports. Diagnostic displays. c.826. o. l. to alert the TMS operators. Alarm delay time filtering. g. Archiving of event logs. with the requirements of ITU-T b. i. Initialise/reset performance monitoring data.821 and G. c. j. i. Graphic display of alarms.4. Ability to accept voltage free alarm contacts.4. f. Display of historical alarm data. Performance monitoring in accordance recommendations G. Classification of alarms. Software upload/download of network component configuration to/from system database.2.4. as a minimum.2 The fault management shall report faults and system anomalies. Performance Management The performance management shall include. n. f. Automatic or manual switching from preferred route to alternative routes in the event of failures. p. Trends display. Graphic display of network topology. d. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2.3 Real time alarms acquisition and logging. Clock synchronisation. 3. the following functions: a. Grouping of alarms. Alarm inhibiting/blocking. Setting up and monitoring of loopbacks.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification c. k. e. b. m. Define data collection interval. h. e. g. Create or delete network components. Creating and editing of cross connections. Locating of faults. Create. Configurable audible alarms. j. Fault Management d. delete or modify network links between network components by end point selection.Section 6 . the fault management shall include the following functions: a. h. 3. As a minimum requirement.118 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Alarm list presentation. via the human-machine interface. Spontaneous printout of alarms.

Interconnecting cables shall be made via substantial. b. 3. Predicative capabilities. emphasising the availability and security provided. The system shall be designed. e. g. as a minimum. secure plugs and sockets. 3. c. Telecommunication Management System 3. The system shall be user friendly. The proposed configuration of equipment shall be described fully. modification and testing with the minimum of disruption.2 Central Computer System The TMS central computer system shall be based on a distributed client/server computer architecture as far as possible complying with internationally accepted standards.4. e.4. Performance management.4.4. Alarm management report. b.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d.3 Configuration management report. User groups with several levels of privileges.4. delivered and commissioned with sufficient capacity for meeting the required performance. 3. Security Management The security management shall include. The system shall provide data retention feature to enable off-line analysis of configuration or of events and alarms. Dual LAN. the following functions: a. c.4. as a minimum. System design shall meet the following general requirements: a.119 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . c.2. c. The hardware design shall allow expansion. Dual redundant application/communication servers.Section 6 .3. The system shall have a high degree of automation and easy to maintain.1 General The telecommunication management system shall be based on an open application environment and a standard user interface to ensure connectivity to different vendor‘s network components can be made easily. Assigning performance counter thresholds. Audit trail of user actions Reports Management The reports management shall include. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Two operator workstations. Security management report. f. d.5 Users log on via passwords protection.2. which shall be mounted in accessible positions and clearly labelled. b. The TMS central computer system shall comprise the following: a.4 Setting and clearing of performance counter thresholds.3.4. b. Control of line signal and tributary signal performances. the following functions: a. 3. d.

Each server shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. The design of the human-machine interface shall be based on latest de facto standard software packages.4. 3.120 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The HMI shall also support multiple user levels such as operator and system manager etc. There shall be 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. zoom and windowing facilities shall be provided.2 Local Area Network Interconnection between computers. Pan.3.2. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of the operating system and applications software. Database held on each server shall be updated simultaneously with the latest data from all telecommunication network elements. The level of control and monitoring authority for each user shall be configurable. The LAN shall be complete with all terminal/printer servers.3 Human-Machine Interface The human-machine interface (HMI) shall provide all the necessary facilities for the users to interact with the telecommunication management system. Disk mirroring facility shall be provided.3.1 Telecommunication Management System Workstations Two workstations shall be provided. Each operator workstation shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with 100 per cent spare capacity.1 One black and white laser printer. 3. The transmission medium of the LAN shall be fibre optic. Failure of one of the servers shall not cause maloperation and/or degradation of the performance of the telecommunication management system.3.3. The servers shall carry out the management functions as well as all acquisition and processing of network components alarms and data. The level of authority for each user shall be set so that the user‘s area of responsibility is defined. bridges. The maximum number of different level users supported shall be stated in the Bid. 3. Archiving and retrieval of historical data shall preferably be via optical media such as CD or DVD. e.2.4. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Applications software and operating system. f. communication servers and peripheral devices shall be supported by a dual redundant local area network (LAN) complying with internationally accepted standards. The HMI shall be capable of supporting multi-layer graphics to provide both detailed and overview displays of the network topology and individual network components. Interconnecting cables and interfacing equipment. There shall be 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. operator workstations.4. database configuration and graphics.2. Application/Communication Servers Two servers shall be provided and shall be of a well proven design suitable for ‗real-time‘ multi-tasking operation where reliability is a prime consideration. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirement of the operating system and applications software. Disk mirroring facility shall be provided.2. The operation of this device shall not require the device be physically connected to each computer in turn. One colour laser printer. The size of the VDU shall be at least 19 inch.Section 6 . Provision shall be provided to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages. repeaters. routers/gateways etc necessary for proper operation of the TMS system. g.4. an alphanumeric keyboard and a mouse.3. Each workstation shall be equipped with a high resolution flat screen LCD type colour VDU. 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d. Long term data storage facilities shall be provided for loading and backing up of software.

4. It shall also be possible to allocate all areas of responsibility to any one operator workstation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Workstations shall be fully interchangeable with areas of responsibility and functions allocated to any workstation. 3.3. 3.121 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3. program linkers etc shall be provided.4.2 Applications Software The TMS applications software shall include the following categories: a. by means of online and off-line test programs. Data acquisition and control. All applications shall be supported by user accessible ‗help‘ commands to assist the user in performing the tasks. where the standard software as offered. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The printer shall be capable of printing at least 20 ppm (pages per minute) and equipped with at least 200 sheet paper tray. The application software offered shall facilitate the secure execution of these functions.3. storage and retrieval. User interface.3 Software Software program packages shall be developed in a high-level program language complying with industry recognised standards. continuous correct operation of all system functions b. The printer shall contain off-line self-test facilities that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system.2 Black and White Laser Printer The laser printer shall produce clear copies on standard A4/A3 paper with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi (dots per inch). Each operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm and a CD/DVD writer and reader device. All firmware and software delivered under the Contract shall be the latest field proven version available at the time of design approval. application programs etc and to allocate system resources. Data acquisition and control functions include management of database. program compilers or assemblers.3 Colour Laser Printer The colour printer shall produce clear prints on A4/A3 size paper with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi.3. The printer shall contain off-line self-test facilities that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system.3. Source codes for software programs specifically developed for use in this Contract shall be provided so to enable the Employer to make minor modifications if required. The printer shall be capable of printing at least 12 ppm and equipped with at least 200 sheet paper tray. All software licences required for proper operation of the TMS shall be included in the offer.3.2. Software development tools such as editors.4.3. Telecommunication network information shall be presented to the operator via the human-machine interface.Section 6 . data acquisition and processing.1 Operating System Software Operating system software based on standard software packages shall be provided to control the execution of system programs. The diagnostic software shall provide. Each category of computer shall have its own operating system and that this operating system shall be capable of supporting all on-line and standby functions to be performed by that computer.3. 3. Support and diagnostic.3. does not comply with the functional requirements detailed in the Specification. c.2.4. 3. 3. It is intended that standard software will be implemented wherever possible and to this end it must be stated.4.

h. Event displays. and in particular this shall give details as to how extra data points and additional network components would be incorporated into the database. Network component overview displays. The real-time databases shall be continuously updated by the processed information from the network components and that entered by the operator(s). Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 3. Adding/deleting network components and data Installing new or modified VDU diagrams and lists. Alarms Facilities shall be provided for processing of alarms. f.3. database management and administration.Section 6 . 3.4 System Functions System functions of the TMS shall include alarms handling. location. c. Silencing alarms shall not inhibit the annunciation of further alarms or constitute an acknowledgement of the alarm. Tabular displays. as a minimum.122 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . historical retrieval and storage.3. Modification of existing databases and creation of new databases. reports generation. Dynamic data linkages shall be provided to access real-time and historical data by industry standard applications software such as Microsoft Excel etc. device or other identifier. e. c. The operator shall have the facility to accept alarms individually or a TMS of alarms.4.4. The support software shall include automated back-up/restore and archive facilities provided by menu driven utilities.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification even when essential system components fail. Installing new or modified log formats. Facilities shall be provided to allow.4. Alarm summary displays. 3. remote commands. b.3 Network overview displays.4. b. graphic displays generation. Trend displays. action.3.4. and status etc. d. The alarm list shall be displayed in chronological order with the latest alarm first. the following user displays: a. as a minimum. Classification and grouping of alarms shall be possible.3.4. The database shall be open and the data dictionary published. d. When an alarm occurs an audible alarm shall sound and the appropriate symbols shall flash in the alarm field.4. 3.1 Real-time Databases The system shall comprise a distributed real-time database resident on the application servers.2 Displays The TMS shall provide. g. Diagnostic displays. TMS hardware configuration. Full details of display generation and data modification procedures shall be provided. the following: a. Each alarm entry shall include the time and date of occurrence.

4.3. 3. the design and finish of which shall be subject to the approval of the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. An alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches the capacity of the storage medium.4. Any data processed by the TMS shall be available for storage and subsequent re-call. durable construction and shall be ergonomically designed to facilitate operation of the equipment to be mounted on them. All stands shall be complete with all necessary trays and accessories for orderly paper handling.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 Chairs Swivel chairs complete with five castors shall be provided to match the desks. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each event. When the archive becomes full it shall automatically overwrite the oldest data on the archive without degradation of system performance. Information on print-outs may be either in tabular form or in a preformatted report form and may be automatic at specific times or on request.123 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4.4. construction and finish.4 Telecommunication Management Centre Furniture 3. appearance. 3. The design.4. The chairs shall be of robust construction suitable for continuous use and shall be designed to give optimum body support and comfort during use. operator commands and system generated actions. The requested information may be presented on the operator‘s workstations either in tabular form or as selected variable on a trend display.4.4. User customised report generation shall be possible. and finish of the control desk shall be to the approval of the Employer.5 Reports All report generation shall be generated and edited using report generation software delivered with the TMS. Data shall be stored for up to three months on a suitable storage medium and be available for subsequent re-call at a later date. 3.4. to be approved by the Employer. The control desk shall be of robust.4. The arrangement and method of mounting equipment on the desk shall be to the approval of the Employer. The operator shall have the facility to recall data held in the data logger memory or from archives over a specified period of time. All data shall be capable of being archived and retained for future reference. and sufficient information to enable full identification of the outstation affected. event or alarm. Alarms and events shall be logged on a designated printer as they are received at the central computer system with each item consisting of the date and time of occurrence.1 Control Desk A control desk shall be provided for mounting the HMI equipment described in this Specification.4. They shall provide for adequate writing space and have room for a telephone handset. 3.4 Event and Alarm Logging The TMS system shall incorporate long-term logging facilities for all alarm events. The chairs and their upholstery shall be of a design.3 Stands All peripherals which are not free standing must be mounted on suitable robust stands. user identification.4. together with a description of the operation.Section 6 .

The DPLC system shall use the latest signal processor technology to permit optimal operating behaviour under all operating conditions. Details of the earthing arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. 3. The equipment shall operate satisfactorily under all power system switching and weather conditions likely to be encountered at any time. power supplies and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. If any problems are foreseen by the Contractor he should draw attention to them at the time of preparing the site survey report. Details of the maximum transmission capacity of the DPLC and the signal to noise ratio required shall be included in the Bid. handheld maintenance terminal unit.3.1 General Digital PLC equipment shall comply with the recommendations of IEC 60495 and shall be fully compatible with existing analogue PLC system.5.1.5. The Contractor shall put forward a solution for mitigating the problems for consideration by the Employer.5.2. 3. The transmission capacity shall be at least 32 kb/s which enables transmission of up to 3 speech channels with transmission rate per speech channel (including signalling) 9600 bit/s. data and protection signals shall be software programmable. interconnecting cables.5.2 Functional Requirements 3.2 Safety The DPLC equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject to rises in earth potential at times of system faults.5. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to the equipment.5. equipment cubicles. The digital PLC shall be designed to transmit and receive speech.3 Digital PLC Equipment 3. metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth. The DPLC equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. teleprotection signalling and voice frequency telegraph signals. This Specification includes for all design and engineering. All metal parts.1 Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a digital power line carrier (DPLC) system and associated works. 3. service telephone handsets. twin channel equipment.2 Carrier Frequency Allocation The DPLC equipment shall be capable of operating satisfactorily using the same frequency allocation previously assigned and with the same line traps.1.5. amplitude modulated.1 General Transmission shall generally be carried out by single sideband.5. DPLC terminals including user interfaces. The digital PLC equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of builtin alarms associated with vital operating parameters. suppressed carrier.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. The nominal carrier frequency band shall be 40 – 500 kHz. Configuration of carrier frequency and setting up of transmission of speech. telephone signalling. Technical descriptions detailing the DPLC equipment design and performance including equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid.1 DIGITAL POWER LINE CARRIER SYSTEM General Requirements 3.124 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . up to 9 data channels with transmission rate per data channel 1200 bit/s Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 3. coupling capacitors and line matching units. 3. The power line carrier equipment shall be designed to work over the high voltage overhead power transmission lines.2.

3.2 Design Characteristics The DPLC shall have the following characteristics: a.28). c.3. Transmission capacity: Number of speech channels: Channel (including signalling): Number of data channels: Transmission rates per data channel: 32 kb/s (minimum). Any means adopted to achieve end-to-end frequency stability shall be clearly stated. 320  30 dB.9.5. k.3 Carrier Oscillators The carrier frequency oscillators shall be fully field programmable and capable of producing the entire range of frequencies from 40 to 500 kHz. as required. 9600 b/s.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (ITU-T recommendations V. 0 .24/V. h. j. The Bidder shall state in the Bid the maximum numbers of speech channels and data channels possible.125 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 1200/9600 b/s (ITU-T V. Carrier oscillators shall be designed to operate with a high degree of stability and this shall be stated in Bid.4 Automatic Gain Control Automatic gain control shall be provided to prevent transmitter overload and proper operation of the receiver.500 kHz. The DPLC equipment including transmit and receive filters shall be field programmable over the entire frequency range. 8 kHz. Number of teleprotection channels: Carrier frequency range: Nominal bandwidth for duplex connection: Output power: Coax impedance: Line impedance: Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR): – 4 per circuit. Details of modulation adopted for the digital PLC equipment shall be included in the Bid. d. 3.5. The frequency difference between a transmitted voice frequency (VF) signal and the received signal shall be not more than the figure stated in the Technical Schedules. g. 3.3. 75  unbalanced.3. The Bidder shall state the means of obtaining automatic gain control and the degree of regulation attained. The Bidder shall state the type of modulation scheme and the minimum signal to noise ratio for guaranteed performance. l. 4-state quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) or OFDM (othogonal frequency division multiplexing) multi carrier etc and shall be compatible with the required transmission capacity and signal to noise levels. b.24/V.Section 6 . e. The digital PLC equipment shall be equipped with built in self diagnostics and status monitoring facilities including service telephone.5. Programming and system configurations shall preferably be carried out using a window based operation. 40 . The demodulation of the signals shall be coherent. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 0 . The modulation used shall be based on internationally recognised standards such as 4-state phase shift keying (PSK). 3. i. and shall interface with the telecommunication management system for remote supervision and monitoring.28) or combination of the two and up to 4 teleprotection channels out of band. f.

c.Section 6 .3. g.24/V. Receive pilot level. Engineering order wire maintenance telephone handsets shall be provided. d.10 Power Supplies Requirements The DPLC equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. Remote alarms shall provide dry relay contacts for forwarding alarms to the Control Centre via the SCADA system. b.5. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5.5.5.9 Alarms Provision shall be made for the following alarms as a minimum: a. Transmitter output level.6 Test Facilities Means shall be provided for testing the input and output levels at all stages throughout the equipment. Low receive pilot level. with suitable LED‘s and alarm relays.7 User Interfaces The following user interfaces shall be provided as a minimum: a. 2 and 4 wire E & M signalling. Low SNR (ie high noise level). b.28 interface. Ringer facility. and must have associated dry relay contacts.5. Multi-rate synchronous data with ITU-T X. All alarms shall be shown on the front of the module or panel by suitable LEDs. 3. 3. e. f. d.3. Low level transmit carrier.5 Service Telephone Provision shall be made on each carrier terminal for emergency and maintenance telephone communications together with audible and visible calling indicators. e. Receive carrier level.3.3. Test jacks and/or test points must be available for diagnosing problems. Teleprotection commands.3.11 interface. 3. Low power supply voltage. the following functions: a.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. Decadic signalling. d. Ethernet interface. Multi-rate asynchronous data with ITU-T V. Power supply voltage. IF oscillator levels. b. 3. f.3.8 Monitoring Provision shall be made for monitoring. Loop test facilities shall be provided in order that a PLC link can be fully tested from one end. c. System operating correctly.5.21/V. e. control elements and visual indicators shall be on the front of the modules or front panel. c. 3.126 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules. Important metering points. Low level receive carrier.

The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the DPLC equipment shall be individually fused. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the DPLC equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract.Section 6 .127 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

d.2. The type of teleprotection signalling equipment proposed shall be clearly stated in the Bid. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed and manufactured in such a way that disturbances on the transmission path shall not lead to false operation or cause undue delay in the transmission of the tripping command. f. including all interconnecting cables. Easy programming for optimum setting of signal processing time.6.1 General The teleprotection signalling equipment shall have the following features: a. e. dependability and security to suit the different operating modes shall be possible by means of programming using either a plug-in handheld terminal or programming switches on the equipment. permissive and direct tripping commands without any additional equipment. Simple operation and fault diagnosis.128 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . High equipment reliability. Technical descriptions detailing the teleprotection signalling equipment performance and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid.1 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of digital teleprotection signalling system and associated works. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be suitable for transmission of teleprotection commands in the high voltage networks and shall be capable of being used for blocking.6. Teleprotection signalling in point to point or T-networks shall be possible. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall employ state-of-the-art components together with the digital signal processing technique to provide programming facilities for flexible adaptation to various requirements of teleprotection signal transmission. Permanent self-supervision. c. It shall therefore be of a modular design so that it can be readily for direct connection to the PLC or SDH fibre optic equipment by insertion of a plug in interface module. The teleprotection signalling equipment and signal transmission shall not be affected by switching operations. atmospheric conditions and other sources of interference. The selection of transmission time. Teleprotection signalling equipment that is an integral part of the PLC or SDH equipment without going via multiplexing equipment is preferred. and necessary installation materials to complete the system. 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.Section 6 . This Specification includes for all design and engineering of the teleprotection signalling equipment. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall. Wide selection of user interfaces.6 3. Integral monitoring facilities. The equipment should be able to select and disconnect the faulty part of the system in the event of faults in high voltage installations within the shortest possible time. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters and a loop test facility. be capable of direct transfer tripping. The protection signalling equipment shall be capable of providing reliable performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. Direct integration to existing telecommunication systems. The teleprotection signalling equipment is required to operate over PLC and fibre optic links.6. g. in addition. special switching functions and digital current comparison protection. power supplies.2 Functional Requirements 3. b. security and dependability. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

Command transmission – 4 binary inputs with (NO) 4 relay outputs. Loss of synchronisation. g.2.4 Interfaces The teleprotection signalling equipment shall provide suitable interfaces for the direct connection to fibre optic transmission equipment.3 System Performance The protection signalling system performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60834 specification. Bit error rate above the set level. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the teleprotection signalling equipment shall be individually fused. It shall also be possible to transmit alarms to the telecommunication management system. 3. All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the teleprotection signalling equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules. Alarms and monitoring indication shall be clearly displayed through coloured LEDs on the front panel of the module.6.6. 3. The equipment shall be equipped with alarm circuits to detect at least the following: a.6.2 System Capacity The protection signalling system shall be designed with a minimum of 4 diverse teleprotection command channels operating in full duplex mode. Error rate of guard or tripping signal codes too high. Response of an internal test routine. Automatic loop checking. d. c.2. Message – 8 (changeover) relay outputs.129 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2.2.5 ms. h. e.Section 6 .6.6 Power Supplies Requirements The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. 3.2. b.6. Direct tripping – 4 binary inputs with 4 (NO) relay outputs. Alarm indication signal response. The LED alarm displays shall be capable of being reset from the equipment. Components failure. c. 3. NCC SCADA system and SAS via voltage free contacts with a maximum operation time of 1.5 Alarms indications The teleprotection signalling equipment shall have extensive alarm and operational monitoring facilities. 3. Receive signal low level. b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The equipment shall have as a minimum the following relay interfaces: a. Loss of guard signal. appropriate alarm indications shall be initiated. f.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification h. In the event of failure.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7 3.7.1

TELEPHONE SYSTEM Introduction

This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a digital telephone system and associated works. The private automatic exchange (PAX) shall be designed to fulfil the requirements for the Employer‘s private telecommunication networks and combine both power system operation and administration into one PAX. This Specification includes for all design and engineering, system software, telephony equipment including telephone operator‘s console and handsets, telephone socket outlets, interfacing modules, voice recording equipment, handheld maintenance terminal unit, equipment cubicles, main distribution frames, surge arrestors, isolation transformers, associated ancillary equipment, interconnecting cables and power supplies. The choice of system hardware and the associated software shall be restricted to the use of digital facilities, with the use of analogue techniques being used only at the interfaces to analogue power line carrier (PLC) equipment and telephone handsets. Technical descriptions detailing the PAX equipment performance and capacity, and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. The equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance continuously throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters. 3.7.2 Functional Requirements

3.7.2.1 General The PAX equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be capable of being integrated into the existing telephone network. To ensure maximum compatibility with future systems, all equipment and systems provided by the Contractor shall conform to the latest ITU-T recommendations. The PAXs shall be interlinked by either digital or analogue trunk/tie lines to form an integrated telephone network for the purpose of providing operational and administrative telephone communications covering all power stations, transmission and primary substations and Control Centres. The telephone network shall be transparent to the users and all users shall have the same functions and features as if they were connected to one exchange. The PAX equipment shall have facilities to give priorities and restrictions according to the function and importance of users. System parameters and database shall be configurable by software both locally and from a remote site. The PAX software shall be designed for the full capacity that does not required to be modified or replaced by the extension of the PAX hardware. Operating system software shall preferably be stored in EEPROM or similar technology. 3.7.2.2 System Performance The PAX equipment shall be designed with a low probability of losing telephone calls and be capable of providing the following minimum traffic handling capabilities: a. b. 0.4 erlang per extension. 0.7 erlang per trunk.

The signalling and switching system shall be designed in such a way that the call setup time to any extension on the PAX network shall be less than 2 seconds. 3.7.2.3 Network Management Facilities The PAX equipment shall be provided with network management and supervision capability so as to facilitate continuous access to operation and maintenance information associated with the telephone network. The network management and supervision equipment shall enable a network operator to monitor several communications links from a centralised location, and where necessary remotely carry out diagnostics and modifications to equipment configuration.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 130 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

All items of equipment necessary for providing the network management and supervision facilities shall be supplied under the Contract. 3.7.2.4 Analogue and Digital Interfaces The exchange equipment shall require both analogue and digital interfaces. The analogue interfaces shall be two and four wire interfaces, with and without E & M signalling and busy/test signalling, to suit telephone, PLC and pilot cable equipment. 2 wire loop subscriber/tie lines shall be possible as an option. The digital interfaces shall be 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s with and without common channel signalling, to suit digital data links and inter-exchange trunks. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected; ie neither a short circuit nor open circuit on the line shall cause permanent damage to the exchange equipment. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected so that the application of a 500V, 50 Hz signal to either or both legs of the line, shall not cause permanent damage to the exchange equipment, or cause malfunctioning of the exchange equipment. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall have an insulation resistance of greater than 10 mega ohms when a 500 Vdc megger is applied between the line terminals and earth. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected from electrostatic discharges transmitted to, or occurring at the line interface unit. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be capable of withstanding longitudinal voltage impulses, with a peak voltage of 2 000 volts, a rise time of 10 microseconds and a decay time of 1 000 microseconds, without damage. 3.7.2.4.1 2 Wire Analogue Telephone Interface

The interface shall be suitable for both standard telephone instruments and telephone consoles using dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) signalling. The interfaces shall provide BORSCHT functions (ie Battery supply, Over-voltage protection, Ring current supply, Supervision, Code, Hybrid and Testing functions) for each line connection. The line feed shall be sufficient to ensure the satisfactory performance of two telephones in parallel on a balanced line of between 0 and 1 500 metres in length. The range of loop resistance over which the interface will operate will be 0 to 500 ohms, with a similar limit for the Transmission Equivalent Resistance (TER). The 2 wire port impedance shall be 600 ohms, nominal, balanced and suited to the telephone instruments during ringing, signalling and voice transmission conditions. 3.7.2.4.2 Analogue Power Line Carrier Interfaces

The interfaces shall operate as four wire plus E and M interconnections, with the facility for equipment busy signalling wire and test signalling wire, for use with existing transmission equipment interfaces such as PLC and pilot cable interfaces. The electrical interface requirements are as follows: Transmit and receive pairs: impedance 600 ohms balanced; better than 20 dB; levels - 3.5 dBm. 48-volt battery and relay coil. voltage free relay contact to earth. voltage free relay contact to earth. return loss

E wire: M wire: Test/busy wires: 3.7.2.4.3 PAX to PAX Interface

The interfaces shall operate as digital trunk/tie line interfaces to enable exchanges to be interconnected with digital PAX and multiplex equipment. 2 Mb/s interfaces shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITU-T recommendations G.703 and G.732.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 131 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

64 kb/s interfaces shall be in accordance with requirements of ITU-T recommendation G.703, and shall be complete with channel associated signalling. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that these interfaces enable the full range of network facilities to be available for the PAX extensions. 3.7.2.4.4 Pilot Cable Interface

The interface shall provide facilities to interconnect telephone and other terminals to multiplex and between exchanges via pilot cable systems. These interfaces generally conform to those of the PLC system, and are suitable for extending 2 or 4 wire analogue telephone interfaces beyond the 500 ohm limit. All necessary isolating transformers shall be provided. 3.7.2.5 Interface with Other Systems/Equipment Provisions shall be provided by the Contractor to enable: a. b. PAX equipment to interface with the telecommunication management system. PAX equipment installed at the Control Centre to interface with the master clock system for time synchronisation purposes. PAX equipment installed at the Control Centre to interface with the voice recording equipment. PAX equipment to interface with the facsimile machines. SPC Telephone Exchange Equipment

c.

d. 3.7.3

3.7.3.1 General The PAX equipment shall be microprocessor based stored program control (SPC) digital type exchange with non-blocking architecture, suitable for the transmission of 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s digital signals. It should be possible, if required at a later date, to interface with public switched telephone network (PSTN) and other public integrated services digital network (ISDN) exchanges. Details of how this can be achieved shall be included in the Bid. The PAX shall be capable of being connected via 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s digital trunk links as well as analogue PLC circuits utilising multi-frequency and E&M signalling to other existing PAXs installed in the telephone network. It shall also be possible to transfer 30 voice channels to a remote place or as a tie line to another PAX. The PAX equipment shall also be capable of fully automatic switching and use completely solid state time/space switching methods. All PAXs shall provide an orderly shut down during loss of power and automatic recovery after restoration of power. Furthermore the PAXs shall be capable of being configured by software to automatically search for alternative routes in the PAX telephone network should the first choice route be busy or faulty so to maximise the availability of the network. Only if all possible routes have been attempted and found unavailable will the ‗engaged‘ tone be returned to the caller. The equipment shall be expandable to at least the specified maximum switching capacity without impairment to reliability and performance, and without the need for replacement of installed major software or equipment items. Failure of any single component shall not go undetected or cause failure of critical function. The PAX equipment shall be capable of detecting faulty trunk lines and disconnect them as well as periodically test their status and re-connect the trunk line once it is operational. The PAX shall report to the telecommunication management system should one or more trunk lines are faulty. The PAX shall be capable of incorporating the facility for recording voice messages on a store and forward basis. Telephones connected to the network shall be able to send a voice message to the PAX, together with a called extension number. A message waiting indication shall be available to telephone stations to advise that a message has been stored when a code prefix is keyed. Messages are to be password (key pad code) protected.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 132 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7.3.2 Switching Facilities The switching equipment shall provide for the following facilities: a. b. The interconnection of calling and called extensions. The interconnection of the PAX exchanges for information, control and voice via multiplex circuits conforming to relevant ITU-T recommendations and PLC channels confirming to IEC 60495. Interconnection with central PAX telephone system manager console at the Control Centre. A traffic monitoring and reporting system.

c.

d.

3.7.3.3 System Facilities a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. Abbreviated dialling. Alarm signalling. Answering machine connection. Auto-attendant. Hot line dialling. Long line extension. Incoming/outgoing call barring. Automatic call distribution. Break-in/listening-in. Call identification. Central/distributed operator. Conference call. Day/night mode. Directory assistance/programming. Directory dialling. Emergency alarm. Message answering. Music on hold. Password protection.

3.7.3.4 Extension Facilities The PAX shall provide for the interconnection of any calling and called extension connected to the exchange, without the participation of a telephone operator, on the basis of keyed or dialled number information. The exchange equipment shall provide, as a minimum, the following facilities: a. b. Normal telephone-to-telephone communications. Limited access extensions and tie circuits for which special prefix calling codes shall be applicable and as a selectable option, that only specified calling extensions can access.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 133 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

c.

Priority access enabling selected extensions to interrupt busy extensions or trunks and either request or force the freeing of the busy extension or trunk. Both ‗request‘ and ‗forced‘ priority levels to be available. Automatic callback on ‗Busy‘ or ‗No Reply‘ in which the PAX will automatically initiate a retry of a called extension once the called extension becomes free. The calling extension will need to enter a prefix code for this facility to be operable. Conference call, both 3-way conference established by a normal extension, and a multiparty conference (up to 20 extensions) established through a multi-key hand set at each Control Room Operator position. Call transfer to enable a calling party to be transferred to another extension. Call transfer/follow-me to enable all incoming calls to be re-routed to another extension. Call transfer on no answer to enable incoming calls to be re-routed to another extension if not answered within a predetermined time (programmable time adjustment 5 to 30 seconds). Call pick up to enable a called extension to be answered at another extension by keying from that other extension using a prefix code. Last number redial to enable a call retry without re-keying the required extensions. Abbreviated dialling in which short key codes will enable access of previously stored longer numbers for extensions connected directly to the network. Call waiting indication, a busy extension shall receive a call waiting signal, once a calling extension keys a ‗camp-on‘ request suffix code. The exchange will automatically call the called extension when it becomes free, while the second caller is waiting. Extension group hunting, a number of extensions may be grouped on a common extension number and incoming calls shall be assigned in priority on cyclic order to the next free extension. Extensions directly connected to the network shall be able to press a hold button to hold an existing call while initiating a second call.

d.

e.

f. g.

h.

i.

j. k.

l.

m.

n.

The facilities shall be available on an assigned basis, whereby a central operator shall be able to allocate any or all facilities to any extension either directly connected, or remotely connected to the PAX on the network. The means of assignment shall be by the use of a simple task list, entered at the exchange administrative/supervisory terminal. The task list shall not involve complex codes and shall use a high level, easy to operate man-machine interface. All facilities shall be readily available without limitation, i.e. the use of any single facility or any combination of facilities shall not limit the use of other facilities on any extension. 3.7.3.5 Switching Capacity The exchange equipment shall have initial and final switching capacities as detailed in Technical Schedules. 3.7.3.6 Transmission Performance Transmission through the exchange will involve: a. b. c. 2-wire to 2-wire analogue working. 4-wire to 4-wire analogue and 64 kb/s digital working. 2-wire to 4-wire working, both analogue and 64 kb/s digital.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 134 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

d.

2 and 4-wire analogue and 2 and 4-wire 64 k/s digital to 2 Mb/s composite digital signal working, and the reverse direction. 2 Mb/s to 2 Mb/s composite digital signal working.

e.

The exchange transmission performance shall comply with the ITU-T recommendation G.712, for combined transit/local exchanges and related recommendations in regard to measurement techniques, interface characteristics, definitions and, in particular, in respect of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Relative level values and tolerance. Impedance, nominal values return loss, longitudinal balance. Terminal balance return loss. Nominal transmission loss and variations with time and input levels. Attenuation/frequency distortion. Group delay, absolute delay, absolute group delay and variation with frequency. Noise, weighted idle channel, cross talk, intermodulation, impulse noise, quantization distortion, spurious signals. Discrimination from out-of-band signals. Bit error rate performance.

h. i. 3.7.3.7 Software

The preferred software programming language is CHILL, as described in ITU-T recommendation Z.200. However, other high level programming languages may be offered if they can provide better reliability and maintainability required, and which conform to the basic structural requirements. Details of the programming language used and software licensing and upgrades arrangements shall be included in the Bid. The software shall be well tried and tested and shall be of modular construction, using a hierarchical set of function levels and modules. The modules shall be combined using structured programming techniques, in which each module is well defined and the communication between the modules also well defined. Security measures shall be provided to protect the system software from corruption. System parameters and database shall be user configurable by software. Password protection shall be used to allow only authorised users access to the modification of system parameters and database. It shall be possible to modify the database without disturbing operation of the exchange. All programming tools and man machine interfaces required for system modifications and re-configurations shall be provided under the Contract. 3.7.3.8 Maintenance The exchange shall provide automatic monitoring and reporting functions to verify the proper execution of call handling and exchange software or hardware malfunctions, and report on the condition of interfaces and exchange resource, eg memory occupation, call queue levels, CPU utilisation, traffic levels. The exchange shall be equipped with the following alarm facilities: a. Urgent alarms are those indicating the exchange has or is about to stop or that a major malfunction has occurred that can affect the operational service. Non-urgent alarms are resulting from transient conditions or self-clearing (automatic partial restart) conditions that do not affect the operational service.

b.

Classification and prioritisation of system alarms shall be configurable by the user. Local urgent and non-urgent alarm indicators shall be provided. Voltage free alarm contacts shall also be provided to enable integration into the telecommunication management system and SCADA system. Provision shall be provided to enable diagnostics and maintenance functions, telephone numbering changes and network management facilities be carried from a remote site.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 135 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7.3.9 Hardware To meet functional, reliability and performance requirements, the hardware for the exchange shall use: a. b. c. d. e. Distributed call handling multiprocessor architecture. Duplicated processors each equipped with its own memory and memory control. Duplicated buses for common data, memory and control. Duplicated power supply units. High speed RAM backed by non-volatile, eg EEPROM, memory and duplicated hard disk storage (storage to have 50 per cent spare capacity). Duplicated ringing/tone signalling. Bulk software loading facilities, preferably of the hard cassette disk or CDROM/DVD type. System control and display panel. All switching/exchange equipment shall operate from a 48 Vdc power supply system. Synchronisation

f. g.

h. i.

3.7.4

The telephone exchange shall be provided with facilities for linking to a master clock system for time synchronisation purposes. 3.7.5 Telephone Numbering Plan

The PAX shall be programmed according to the Employer‘s telephone numbering plan. The exchange shall have facilities to transpose telephone numbers for routing to and from extensions on remote exchanges. It shall be possible to alter the numbering plan at a later date should this be required. 3.7.6 Telephone Signalling

Line, information, tone and ring signalling shall be provided to suit analogue and digital telephone extension equipment. Analogue telephone extension signalling shall provide the line, information, tone and ringing facilities as follows: a. The extension line control signalling shall use line loop signalling to initiate and terminate extension calling and answer activities, in accordance with BORSCHT exchange and multiplex interface requirements. Information signalling will be DTMF in accordance with ITU-T recommendations Q.23 and Q.16, and other associated ITU-T recommendations. Tone signalling will conform to the supplier‘s standard equipment and appropriate ITU-T recommendations. Ringing current shall be to the manufacturer‘s standard.

b.

c.

d.

The network signalling protocols for the PAX network shall be based on internationally recognised standards such as analogue private networking signalling system (APNSS) and digital private networking signalling system (DPNSS). Details of the PAX network signalling protocols proposed shall be included in the Bid.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 136 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

patching and test connections for the telecommunication system. headset and exchange function controls. In addition. Details of features provided for each type of telephone handsets shall be included in the Bid. The operator‘s console shall be capable of displaying the following information as a minimum: a. They shall be suitable for either desk top or wall mounted. c.7. c. Ability to produce management and equipment status reports. circuit re-routing. Called/calling parties identity on the other terminal. Longest waiting call. The data collection device shall be protected with 24 hours of battery back-up and equipped with floppy disk or tape back-up storage device. d.7. e. c. In addition. 3. establishing multiparty conference calls. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Hands free operation.Section 6 .8 A telephone system management console shall be provided for the PAX at the Control Centre.7. The operator‘s console shall be equipped with interactive VDU. The following facilities shall be provided as a minimum: a. Record incoming and outgoing calls by destination and trunk groups.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.7 Status Reporting and Call Detail Recording Facilities Printed and visual display reports of the status of the exchange shall be possible either as an integral part of the PAX equipment or via a personal computer (PC). 3. b. including enquiries on system operation and extension numbers. Built-in speaker shall be provided to enable hand free operation. Centralised voice recording for operational telephone communications. The reports shall be date and time stamped and identify exchange and software version codes. provisions shall be made to enable details of each incoming and outgoing call on the network be recorded.7.9 Telephone Handsets The handsets shall be of modern design and equipped with push buttons for call selection. Ability to collect data either directly or via a remote data collection device. d. The final design and colour of the telephone handsets shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. stored and printed in a report form for administrative and operational purposes. The facilities available on the console shall include at least the following: a. and be ergonomically designed for "stress free" operation. The final design of the console shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. Capacity to store at least 50 000 call records with expansion capability to 100 000 records.137 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Waiting time for unanswered incoming calls.10 Main Distribution Frame Main distribution frame (MDF) shall be provided to facilitate cable terminations. Ability to initiate multi party conference call. handset. Line engaged. Telephone System Management Console b. b. Priority override calls. call transfers and fault reporting. circuit disconnection. e. Ability to produce traffic analysis and summaries by locations and called number plus exception reports. the console shall also control the normal monitoring and operation of the switching network. 3. keyboard.

3. Appropriate compression algorithm and sampling rate shall be used to minimise the disk space storage requirement and maximise voice recording quality. The digital voice recording equipment shall have the following features: a. e. User friendly. Provision of all necessary hardware and software required for voice logging shall be supplied by the Contractor. and shall be protected from corrosion by painting or galvanising. Initially the equipment shall be capable of providing 16 simultaneous speech channels recording but with a capability of being expanded up to 32 speech channels at a later date. The voice recording equipment shall also be available for replay regardless of the operation of the system. h. Automatically monitoring the correct operation of the channel. c. Archiving on optical media such as CD or DVD for long term storage.11 Voice Recording Equipment A computer based voice recording equipment shall be provided at the Control Centre to automatically log all telephone conversations between operators in the Control Centre and other personnel. Voice playback facility. The voice recording equipment shall be a multi-channel digital communications logger that can simultaneously record and replay voice messages. All messages shall be digitised and stored on the hard disk(s). Voice operation so that the equipment can be operated in a voice operated record start mode.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Main distribution frames shall preferably be single-sided and suitable for wall mounting.7. g. Cross connection by means of jumpering facilities shall also be provided. b. During replay incoming messages shall be stored on the hard disk(s). Date and time recording facility such that the date and time of each recorded call is easily traceable.138 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . f. Sufficient verticals and termination blocks shall be provided to accommodate the anticipated ultimate number of exchange and extension lines and cabling requirements for other systems. Appropriate audible alarms and visual indications shall be provided to alert the operator whenever the disk storage space for voice logging is less than 50 channel hours.Section 6 . Fuses. surge protectors and barrier transformers etc shall be provided under the Contract. d. All main distribution frames shall have an earth connection provided. Sufficiently built in redundancy to avoid single point of failure. The hard disk(s) shall be sized to provide a minimum of 2 500 channel hours voice recording on a roll-over basis. Remote facilities interface (clean contacts for remote indicators/alarms etc). The capacity of the main distribution frames shall be chosen to accommodate the maximum capacity required for the telecommunication and SCADA data channels plus 50 per cent spare capacity to cater for any future expansions. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The voice logging will be used for the purpose of determining sequence of operational events.

OUTSTATION AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS 4. The Bidder shall provide a reference list detailing where the proposed equipment has been supplied for comparable applications. Equipment construction and installation shall allow easy access so that tests.2. provide:   Protocol Adaptation Signal data definition Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 4.1 INTRODUCTION This section describes the project specific requirements for the Outstation and Substation Adaptation works in terms of overall design. At these locations the Contractor shall.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 4. The Outstations proposed for this contract should have a proven track record of satisfactory operation in similar environments.3 lists the locations where there are existing Outstations that the Contractor shall integrate into the new SCADA/EMS.1 and 4. The installation shall ensure that exposure to hazards is minimised and where possible protected from common mode failures or damage caused by other failures. subject to the results of the site surveys.3. and Distributed RTUs. For the purpose of this document Outstations includes Remote Terminal Units (RTU). SCADA Interface Panels (SIP) or Marshalling Cubicles.2 DESIGN OBJECTIVES The principle objectives of the design of the substation works shall be to provide high reliability & availability. These tables identify the number of each type of signal required at each location. 4. relays and sundry other miscellaneous equipment are specified in the General Technical Specifications and Technical Schedules. However. 4.1 Initial Equipping of Outstations The Outstations supplied under this contract shall be equipped for monitoring and control as defined in Tables 4. It is expected that where new or replacement outstation equipment is required that each substation will be equipped with: a) Remote Terminal Units (conventional or distributed) b) SCADA Interface Panel(s) – SIP c) Bay Control Units (for distributed solutions) d) Plant interfaces (existing and new devices where required) e) Plant to SIP cabling f) SIP to RTU cabling g) 48Vdc positive earth power supply with battery and charger h) Communication interface All components shall be wholly suitable for operation in the hazardous environment of substations. cables. This table indicates the activities and devices that are required to complete the integration task at each location.139 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . Substation Automation Systems. The general requirements of the various elements of the substation works including Outstations. Table 4.3 OUTSTATIONS Outstations supplied under the contract shall be entirely suited for operation in HV substations both in terms of functionality and suitability for the climatic and EMC environments. ease of maintenance and to meet the system performance requirements. functionality and performance. the Bidder is not restricted to offering individual transducers and may offer combined transducers or other signal conversion techniques suitable and proven in HV substation environments and providing they comply with the relevant IEC standards. They also identify the number of transducers and interposing relays required. The Contract also requires that all existing Outstations are connected to the new NSCC Master Station and where necessary that additional signals are incorporated. repairs and replacements can be carried without endangering or disruption to other parts of the works. The components/modules shall be designed to have inherently high reliability.

140 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification     Point to Point Verification New/Additional Communication Gateway Port New/Additional Communication PDH Port New GPS And any other items to complete and set to work.Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

No. No. No.Battery Transducers .1 Materials and Works for New Outstations Stations Embilipitiya SS Sapugaskanda GSS Bowatenna PS Anuradhapura New Valachchenai Nuwara Eliya Trincomalee Hambantota Seethawaka Veyangoda Canyon PS NSCC RTU Ratmalana Panadura Kosgama Kelaniya Ampara Matara Total Outstations without existing RTUs Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Item of supply/work Site Survey Design Works Installation and Commissioning RTU Complete with all necessary cards and racks I/O Cards/modules to provide for: Control Outputs Indication Inputs Measurand mA Measurand Binary (No of i/p bits) Indication Outputs Pulse Counter Inputs Set Point mA Set Point Binary Signal Totals per Station RTU Cubicles Complete with all necessary terminals fixtures and fittings RTU GPS Clock RTU Communication Modules/Interfaces RTU PSU SCADA Marshalling Cubicles Dual 48Vdc Power Supply . No. No.Tap Position Transducers 4-20mA – Water Level Transducers 4-20mA – Gate Limiter Transducers 4-20mA – Turbine Water Flow Transducers 4-20mA .Section 6 .Voltage Transducers 4-20mA . No.141 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4. No. m m Lot Lot Lot Qty 1 1 1 1 1 83 331 36 18 0 0 0 0 468 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 2 1 1 1 1 110 373 41 12 0 2 0 0 538 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 3 1 1 1 1 5 57 16 6 3 2 0 2 91 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 4 1 1 1 1 2 74 24 12 6 4 0 4 126 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 5 1 1 1 1 79 343 42 12 0 0 0 0 476 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 6 1 1 1 1 63 235 24 18 0 0 0 0 340 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 7 1 1 1 1 111 364 43 12 0 0 0 0 530 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 8 1 1 1 1 63 252 26 12 0 0 0 0 353 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 9 1 1 1 1 83 337 36 18 0 0 0 0 474 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 10 1 1 1 1 70 287 29 18 0 0 0 0 404 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 11 1 1 1 1 63 291 31 18 0 0 0 0 403 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 12 1 1 1 1 83 310 31 18 0 0 0 0 442 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 13 1 1 1 1 93 423 47 18 0 0 0 0 581 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 14 1 1 1 1 70 276 29 18 0 0 0 0 393 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 15 1 1 1 1 45 200 26 12 3 2 0 2 290 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 16 1 1 1 1 67 263 28 12 0 0 0 0 370 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 1 1 1 1 54 205 19 18 0 0 0 0 296 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 1 1 1 16 64 16 16 16 16 16 16 176 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 18 18 18 1160 4685 544 268 28 26 16 24 6751 18 18 18 18 18 18 17 9 0 6 9 10 0 9 2 12 12 4 0 1 1 3 83 349 32 1 1 2 110 387 30 4 1 3 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 65 2 6 1 5 5 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 90 0 11 1 10 10 8 0 6 0 5 5 6 0 14 0 12 12 3 0 6 0 5 5 8 0 8 0 7 7 12 0 6 0 5 5 11 0 6 0 5 5 13 0 8 0 6 6 9 0 12 0 11 11 11 0 5 0 5 5 12 0 1 1 2 79 355 28 1 1 3 63 253 20 1 1 2 111 376 30 1 1 2 63 264 20 1 1 3 83 355 26 1 1 3 70 305 22 1 1 3 63 309 20 1 1 3 83 328 26 1 1 3 93 441 32 1 1 3 70 294 18 8 0 6 6 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 214 16 6 0 5 7 8 0 3 0 3 3 8 0 8 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 2 67 275 24 1 1 3 54 223 14 16 16 1 8 64 1 135 6 112 117 135 1 2 3 3 32 32 41 1152 4947 361 0 1800 52000 18 18 17 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 1000 1 1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. No. No. No. No. No.Frequency Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No. No. No. No.Current Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.Rectifier/Charger 48Vdc Power Supply . No.MW Transducers 4-20mA .Temperature Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No.4-20mA: Transducers Composite Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No.MVAr Transducers 4-20mA . No.Humidity Transducer Binary Command Output Relays Status / Indication Interposing Relays Bay Control Selector Switches Connection of Sub RTU Cables: Power Cables Signal Cables All other Ancillary Equipment required Minor Civil Works Removal of existing equipment Unit Lot Lot Lot No. No. No. No. No.

No. No. No. No. No.Voltage Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.MW Transducers 4-20mA .Humidity Transducer Binary Command Output Relays Status / Indication Interposing Relays Bay Control Selector Switches Connection of Sub RTU Cables: Power Cables Signal Cables All other Ancillary Equipment required Minor Civil Works Removal of existing equipment Unit Lot Lot Lot No.Tap Position Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No.142 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . No. No.Section 6 . No. No.Battery Transducers .4-20mA: Transducers Composite Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.MVAr Transducers 4-20mA . m m Lot Lot Lot Qty 1 1 1 1 1 120 375 40 18 0 0 0 0 553 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 2 1 1 1 1 115 430 49 18 0 0 0 0 612 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 3 1 1 1 1 212 661 84 18 0 0 0 0 975 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 4 1 1 1 1 90 391 44 18 0 0 0 0 543 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 5 1 1 1 1 16 276 52 12 18 12 0 12 398 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 6 1 1 1 1 91 379 45 18 0 0 0 0 533 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 7 1 1 1 1 115 519 64 18 9 6 0 6 737 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 8 1 1 1 1 96 302 35 24 0 0 0 0 457 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 9 1 1 1 1 73 346 33 18 0 0 0 0 470 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 10 1 1 1 1 85 307 55 6 15 10 0 10 488 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 11 1 1 1 1 114 340 39 18 0 0 0 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 12 1 1 1 1 79 308 45 0 6 4 0 4 446 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 13 1 1 1 1 12 104 27 0 6 4 0 4 157 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 14 1 1 1 1 88 401 54 36 6 4 0 4 593 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 15 1 1 1 1 37 178 27 12 0 4 0 4 262 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 16 1 1 1 1 37 316 50 24 0 24 0 0 451 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 1 1 1 1 9 56 17 0 6 4 0 4 96 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 1 1 1 1 2 184 41 18 9 6 0 6 266 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 18 18 18 1391 5872 801 276 75 78 0 54 8547 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 0 187 30 203 219 70 6 8 21 21 17 17 44 1391 6227 442 0 1800 54000 18 18 18 9 0 9 13 7 0 12 2 11 11 11 0 21 4 23 26 8 0 10 0 9 11 12 0 14 0 14 14 8 0 10 0 9 13 11 0 1 1 6 120 393 38 1 1 3 115 448 32 1 1 3 212 679 76 1 1 3 90 409 34 0 0 0 16 300 2 1 1 3 91 397 36 15 2 19 19 0 0 1 3 3 1 1 3 115 543 38 10 4 8 11 0 0 6 0 5 7 13 0 1 1 4 96 326 34 1 1 3 73 364 26 10 2 14 14 0 2 1 5 5 1 1 1 85 323 18 11 2 12 12 0 0 1 1 0 114 358 32 12 2 12 12 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 79 312 22 7 1 6 6 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 12 108 4 13 3 14 13 0 4 1 2 2 1 1 6 88 441 28 6 2 6 6 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 37 194 10 6 2 20 20 0 0 1 1 4 37 364 10 4 2 2 2 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 9 60 2 11 2 10 9 0 0 1 3 3 1 1 3 2 208 0 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. No. No. No. No. No. No.Old Sapugaskanda PS Kelanitissa PS Anuradhapura Old Rantambe PS Laxapana PS (old) Kothmale PS Polpitiya PS Ukuwela PS Kurunegala Pannipitiya 132/33kV Victoria PS Balangoda Outstations RTUs with INDACTIC 33 RTUs Biyagama Habarana Total Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Item of supply/work Site Survey Design Works Installation and Commissioning RTU Complete with all necessary cards and racks I/O Cards/modules to provide for: Control Outputs Indication Inputs Measurand mA Measurand Binary (No of i/p bits) Indication Outputs Pulse Counter Inputs Set Point mA Set Point Binary Signal Totals per Station RTU Cubicles with all terminals fixtures and fittings RTU GPS Clock RTU Communication Modules/Interfaces RTU PSU SCADA Marshalling Cubicles Dual 48Vdc Power Supply . No.Frequency Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4. No. No.2 Materials and Works for INDACTIC 33 Replacement RTUs Stations Kiribathkumbura Randenigala PS Samanalawewa PS Kotudoga . No. No.Rectifier/Charger 48Vdc Power Supply . No.Temperature Transducers 4-20mA . No.Current Transducers 4-20mA – Water Level Transducers 4-20mA – Gate Limiter Transducers 4-20mA – Turbine Water Flow Transducers 4-20mA . No.

5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .5 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .Section 6 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .TH1 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB SYS 500 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to VATech Stat.5 .101 IEC 60870 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 60870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .5 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101/104 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Computer Under station project Under station project Interface to ABB Gateway Computer Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project 2012 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .143 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .5 . Computer Interface to VATech Stat.101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .3 Existing and Proposed SCADA Facilities and Protocols Item 560-1 560-2 560-3 560-4 560-5 560-6 560-7 560-8 560-9 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 V1 V2 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19 Station Athurugiriya GSS Chilaw (Madampe) GSS KCCP / AES PS Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kerawalapitiya PS Kotugoda 33kV GSS Puttalam GSS Ratnapura GSS Thulhiriya GSS Colombo Substation C Dehiwala GSS Havelock Town (SUB A) Horana Kelanatissa 132kV GSS Maradana GSS (SUB 1) Sri Jayawardhanapura GSS Vavuniya GSS Kolonnawa GIS Pannipitiya 220/33kV GSS Puttalam PS(Coal power) Veyangoda 220kV GSS Ambalangoda GSS Aniyakanda GSS Bolawatta GSS Deniyaya GSS Katunayaka GSS Kerawalapitiya GSS Kotugoda 220kV GSS Pannala GSS Laxapana PS (New) Wimalasurendra PS Wimalasurendra GSS Ukuwela GSS Badulla GSS Kukule PS Matugama GSS Chunnakam GSS Galle New GSS Kilinochchi GSS Maho GSS Mahiyangana GSS Naula GSS Pallekele GSS Polonnaruwa GSS Vavunativu GSS Upper Kotmale PS Beliatte GSS Baddegama Colombo B Colombo K Kadawatha GSS Kappalthurai GSS Kegalle GSS Monaragala GSS Piliyandala GSS Existing/Planned Outstation Type Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 561 .101 IEC 60870 .5 .2016 Under station project 2012 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .2016 Under station project 2012 .5 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101/104 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Existing Protocol IEC 60870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4.101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

Item SP20

Station Weligama GSS 4.3.2

Existing/Planned Outstation Type Under station project 2012 - 2016

Existing Protocol IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104

Expansion and Upgrade Capability

The expansion capability of the SCADA system is required to match power system developments over its service life of some 15 years. All delivered Outstations shall be dimensioned according to the following criteria: a. b. c. d. All delivered Outstations shall be equipped to accommodate a 20% increase in I/O as defined in the I/O schedules Where spare capacity would mean that I/O cards with no signals are required then only the wired rack space shall be provided This expansion capability shall be realisable solely by the plugging in of additional I/O modules For stations where supervisory control is not yet required, the Outstations shall have the functionality to execute controls and sufficient rack space, processing power and power supply capacity to accommodate control output modules for the number of circuit breakers and switches being monitored. This expansion capability shall be realisable solely by the plugging in of additional I/O modules. The provision shall also take into account the requirement for a 20% increase in controls outputs. The SCADA Interface Panels (facilities) shall be equipped with sufficient spare terminals to accommodate the expansion requirements set out in ―a‖ to ―d‖.

e.

Cabling for these expansion requirements shall be installed between the Outstation and the SCADA Interface Panels. Cabling from the plant to the SCADA Interface Panels shall contain a minimum of 10% spare pairs for each signal type or a minimum of one spare pair for each signal type associated with the Outstation. 4.3.3 Functional requirements

4.3.3.1 General The standard Outstation software shall be capable of supporting, but not be limited to, the following basic functions: a. b. c. d. e. f. Data acquisition and processing, data preparation for transmission, data transmission, and performing control functions commanded by the Master station. Alarm/Event prioritisation for the interrogation of changes of status. Sequence of Events recording with a storage capacity for 24 hours alarm, event and measurement data. Synchronising of internal time clocks with a high resolution GPS signal or synchronising messages from the Master Station. Secure telecommand using the select/check/execute mechanism with OPEN and CLOSE command outputs. Initiate Load Shedding of pre-definable sizes of load following specific and/or broadcast instruction from the NSCC (the load shall be monitored on each MV feeder and based on a predefined priority the required circuit breakers corresponding to the predefined load shed value shall be tripped/opened). The predefinitions shall be readily set up and amended by the Operators in the NSCC. Programming to carry out specific user defined functions

g.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 144 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

The alarms shall be assigned with priority levels at the Outstation and transmitted according to priority or alternatively as soon as the alarms are received, whichever method is standard. The standard method employed shall be fully described. The occurrence of an alarm or an event shall be arranged for transmission to the Master station at the earliest opportunity. Alarms or events occurring during a transmission of measurements shall be arranged for insertion at the next convenient point in the message cycle. Details shall be provided in the Bid describing the message cycles employed for methods where priority assignments are implemented at the Outstation (e.g. arranging multiple alarms with different priorities). Each Outstation shall have the capability of automatic start-up and initialisation following restoration of power after an outage without need of Master Station intervention. 4.3.3.2 Time Synchronisation Outstations shall have the capability to time tag events and alarms to a resolution of 1 ms or better with respect to other time tagged signals in the same Outstation. To complement this feature, the Outstation clocks shall be synchronised to enable system wide comparisons to be made on the alarms and events recorded by different Outstations. The synchronisation shall be achieved by providing periodic time signals from GPS clocks and from synchronising messages from the Master Station. The resolution of time tags between Outstations shall be better than 5ms. In the event of a failure of the external synchronising time signal, the Outstation shall continue to perform time tagging from its internal clock until the synchronisation signal is restored and the clock is corrected to compensate for any time drift. 4.3.3.3 Communication Protocols 4.3.3.3.1 Master Station

The Outstation shall be capable of supporting the following master station communication protocol: a) IEC 60870-5 101 b) IEC 60870-5 104 4.3.3.3.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED)

The Outstation shall be capable of supporting the following communication protocol for communicating with intelligent electronic devices: a) IEC 62056-21 b) IEC 60870-102 c) IEC 60870-103 d) MBUS e) Modbus RTU f) 4.3.3.3.3 JBUS Satellite RTUs

Where an Outstation is used to collect data from a remote location using a Satellite RTU a standard protocol shall be used to suit the communication medium available. 4.3.4 Control Security

Operation of control outputs shall use a true select/-/check/-/before/-/execute command sequence between the Outstation and the master station. The sequence shall include, as a minimum, the following functional capabilities: a. The master station shall transmit a control selection message addressing the required Outstation and control point within the Outstation, and indicate the control action desired.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 145 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

b.

The Outstation shall initialise its control logic, reassemble the control selection message received in (a) above, and transmit the reassembled message to the master station. The information in the message sent to the master station shall be generated by the Outstation‘s point-selection logic indicating the point and control function selected. It shall not be a simple repeat of the master station‘s message transmission. The master station will verify the returned message with the message sent in (a) and, if valid, shall issue an execute control message to the Outstation. The Outstation shall only operate the control point selected after the check - before - execute sequence above has been performed without error or interruption by any other messages. The Outstation shall reset its control logic upon any error in the sequence or if the execute message is not received within a set time (user adjustable) after the command message is received at the Outstation. Hardware Requirements

c. d.

4.3.5

4.3.5.1 General Each Outstation shall comprise microprocessor based equipment with its software (firmware) resident in non-volatile memory. It shall be readily possible to update the software (e.g. by PROM replacement) to alter or extend the Outstation‘s functionality. The Outstation shall be linked to the plant by means of a number of I/O modules with a main processing module processing the signals. The standard I/O shall include single, double point and multi-point teleindication input signals, analogue telemetering input signals, pulse counting and double point telecommand and teleswitching output signals. Communications to the SCADA master station shall be by communications modules via modems connected to the bearer circuits. The I/O modules shall include all interface and protection circuits. The design of all Outstation equipment shall be such, as to ensure satisfactory operation in an electrically hostile environment typical of high voltage electrical installations. In order to prevent incorrect functioning or damage to the equipment when subjected to interference arising from power system switching, fault currents and lightning, all Outstation input and output circuits, and power supply circuits shall be provided with isolation and/or immunity to electrical interference. Where the inherent withstand capability of Outstation I/O modules does not meet the test requirements specified in IEC 870-3 Class III then interposing equipment with the required withstand characteristics shall be provided. 4.3.5.2 Digital Inputs The digital inputs shall comprise ‗volt free‘ contacts. Changes of state in the digital inputs shall be reported to the main processing module for further processing. The inputs shall be configurable from a down-loadable database. Status changes shall be time tagged to a resolution selectable from 20 ms, 10 ms, 5 ms, 2 ms and 1 ms, with or without debounce filtering. Digital inputs may be single point, double point or multi-point. The interpretation of states for single or double point inputs shall be configurable. A single point indication shall be represented by a binary digit. Double points shall be represented by a pair of binary digits. 4.3.5.3 Analogue Inputs The analogue input module shall be capable of processing standard voltage and current inputs continuously. Input voltage and current range, and variable scan rate shall all be configurable. The inputs shall be multiplexed and digitised by the use of an analogue multiplexer and an analogue-todigital converter (ADC). A fast sampling, self calibrating ADC technique shall be utilised to measure the input signal. The ADC shall be capable of providing a minimum resolution of 11 bits plus 1 sign bit ADC specification over a wide temperature range. Additional software filtering facilities shall be provided for minimising sampling errors. Each analogue input shall be monitored, by the Outstation, against two upper and two lower limit values, with an alarm time delay. An alarm shall be generated only if the limit has been exceeded for longer

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 146 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

than the programmed time delay. This shall be operator adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds or by a variable number of scan cycle periods (1 to 100). Each analogue input shall be terminated with transient voltage protection components. In case of overload, the input circuit shall not sustain any deterioration of its characteristics. Furthermore, an overload present on one of the circuits shall not induce telemetering errors on the other circuits. 4.3.5.4 Pulse Counting The Outstations shall be capable of counting and storing the number of pulses generated by MWh or MVArh metering equipment external to the Outstation. The metering equipment will provide an isolated normally open contact. The pulse counter shall be incremented one count for each cycle of the input (pulse). The pulse counter shall be capable of accepting pulses at a rate of ten counts per second. The count shall be ―frozen‖ (transferred to a buffer register) when commanded by the master station or when commanded by locally generated contact inputs. The Contractor shall describe his method for ensuring the value recorded at the master station(s) corresponds precisely with the value indicated by the pulsing instrument. 4.3.5.5 Command Outputs Command outputs shall enable the Outstation to telecommand power devices by operating external interposing relays. Galvanic isolation shall be achieved by relays on the modules. Facilities shall be provided for pulse controls with programmable duration from 0 to 60 seconds. The module shall provide dual pole control outputs configured as high security select/actuate with check-back. The module shall operate by means of internal ―select‖ relays following a command from the master station. Each ―select‖ relay shall have a pair of isolated contacts which shall be used to select a power device. Once a particular power device has been selected, a second command shall be required from the master station to energise one of two ―actuate‖ relays. These relays shall each have a pair of contacts which shall be configured to complete the circuit to energise the selected power device using the substation/plant supply. The duration for which the external device is energised shall be determined by a programmable interval timer whose value shall be set either locally or remotely. The design of the command circuit shall ensure that no single hardware failure on the module can cause incorrect operation of the command outputs. Also an on-board watch-dog circuit shall be provided to monitor correct software operation. Should time out occur then all outputs shall be inhibited. 4.3.5.6 Digital Outputs The digital output module shall provide non-isolated digital outputs suitable for driving local display lamps or external interface relays. Each digital output shall be configurable between continuous and pulse modes. In continuous mode the digital output shall be set to a particular state and remain there until set to the opposite state. In pulse mode the digital output is set to the energised state for a predefined time. The time shall be user configurable for each pulse mode output. The mode and time information shall be down-loadable from the master station. 4.3.5.7 Analogue Outputs The analogue output module shall provide dc voltage or current outputs. The analogue output module shall convert data from digital form to analogue form utilising a digital to analogue converter (DAC). The DAC shall be cyclically tested for correct operation. The DAC shall be capable of providing a minimum resolution of 11 bits + 1 sign bit on unipolar, bipolar and offset outputs. 4.3.6 External Communications Interfaces

4.3.6.1 Master Stations Outstations shall have capability to support simultaneous communications with multiple independent master stations. Each Outstation shall be equipped with a communication port for communication with the SCADA Master Station. The Outstations shall be capable of expansion to support an additional port for communications with another Master Station. The communications interfaces provided shall depend on the type of communication channel available at the location:

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 147 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

 

SDH Node o The interfaces shall support 64kbps digital channels and TCP/IP Ethernet channels

DPLC Channel o The interfaces shall conform to CCITT Recommendations V.24 and V.28. The baud rate of each communication port shall be configurable over the range 50 to 9600 baud for connection to modems.

4.3.6.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) Each Outstation shall be capable of being equipped with up to 4 communications ports for communication with intelligent electronic devices (IEDs). The communications interfaces provided shall conform to EIA RS 485. communication port shall be configurable over the range 300 to 38400 baud. 4.3.6.3 Configuration and Maintenance Each Outstation shall be equipped with an external communications ports for connection to a portable configuration and maintenance PC. 4.3.7 Power supplies The baud rate of each

At each location the Outstations and ancillary equipment will be supplied from a battery backed dc power supply. Where a new power supply is required it shall be a duplicated system that meets the requirements for 48 Vdc Power Supplies specified in this document. The battery charger units shall each be capable of supplying 100% of the load for the fully expanded Outstations and following loss of primary supply to maintain supply for a period of at least 8 hours. This power supply is subject to voltage fluctuations and the Outstation shall therefore be capable of operating with supply variations of between +20 and -15 per cent of nominal voltage. Power input fuses and LEDs for monitoring shall be provided on the front of the unit. All power supply failures shall be reported to the master station. The power supply units shall incorporate surge suppression and isolation circuits to protect the Outstation modules from external electrical disturbances. Overvoltage and undervoltage protection shall be provided within the power supply to prevent the Outstation internal logic from being damaged as a result of a component failure in the power supply and to prevent the Outstation internal logic from becoming unstable and causing misoperations as a result of voltage fluctuations. 4.3.8 Configuration and Maintenance

4.3.8.1 Configuration Tools A portable PC based configuration and maintenance facility shall be provided along with all software and hardware necessary to interface to the Outstation. All database and software interfaces (Outstation diagnostics, database compiler, software listings, Outstation configuration listings, etc.) required for the maintenance and configuration of the Outstation shall be provided. The Outstation configuration and maintenance PC shall have diagnostics for the Outstation‘s processor(s), memory, I/O ports, and any other functional areas of the Outstation. The portable Outstation configuration and maintenance PC shall also be used to monitor and test the Outstation‘s operation and communication interfaces. The configuration and maintenance PC shall be capable of emulating both the master station and the Outstation. The Outstation shall have the capability to have I/O cards and distributed modules changed without powering down the equipment. 4.3.8.2 Database Management System Each Outstation shall be provided with a database management system. The database management system shall present the information via a user interface such that any individual database is transparent to the user.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 148 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

The database management and configuration software shall not impose a limit on the sizing of the Outstation It shall be possible to expand the Outstation up to it maximum physical limit without the need to reconfigure, or purchase additional software licence The database management system shall provide a means of verifying the database in order to check consistency and completeness of the database. The database modifications shall all be documented. The contents of a database shall not be lost if the power supply fails. Outstation shall start and load its database automatically. After a power failure, the

It shall be possible for the current database to be printed out on-line at any time on a printer connected to the Outstation. 4.3.8.3 Maintenance and Diagnostics Facilities The Outstation shall perform continuous self diagnostics to monitor its own operational capability. Any detected fault or abnormality which could affect the Outstations performance or operational capability shall be indicated to the master station and locally at the Outstation. The Outstation design shall facilitate first line fault location and maintenance to be readily performed on site. Maintenance equipment shall include an engineer's portable test unit. The test unit shall enable all the Outstation functions to be tested on site, with the Outstation in both off-line and on-line states. It shall provide an indication of the presence and location of any detected Outstation fault. Safeguards shall prevent the activation of Outstation control outputs with the test unit connected and the Outstation in the on-line state. The design of the O Outstation shall allow the replacement of I/O cards and distributed modules without powering down the Outstation. 4.4 SCADA INTERFACE PANEL

SCADA Interface Panels (SIP) or Marshalling Cubicles shall be provided to marshal all wiring related to supervisory measurement, indication and control functions from the local control panels, remote control panels, relay panels, transformer tap changers and other panels, as necessary. In addition to the standard requirements for equipment construction specified elsewhere in this Specification, each SIP shall incorporate terminal blocks and, where required, SCADA transducers. Terminal blocks or sections of terminal blocks shall be clearly labelled with the name of the circuit and its alphanumeric identity. With the exception of terminals for connections in current transformer (CT) circuits, all terminals shall be provided with an isolating link that may be operated without disturbing the connected wiring. Terminals used in CT circuits shall provide a means of maintaining continuity of the CT circuit external to the SIP, without disturbing the connected wiring, so that SIP equipment (such as transducers) may be safely disconnected from those terminals without disrupting the CT circuit. Terminals for the connection of transducer wiring shall be arranged to enable any one transducer to be disconnected and replaced without disrupting the connections or operation of any other transducer, particularly where more than one transducer is connected to the same CT or VT input signals. The field wiring side terminal blocks shall be grouped on the basis of individual circuits and bays. The Outstation side terminal blocks shall also be grouped on a circuit basis but split into Analogues, Indications and Controls. All looping between terminals and cross connections between the field wiring side and Outstation side terminal blocks shall be supplied and installed under this Contract. Each SIP shall be fitted with a Dummy Circuit Breaker to simulate the open and close operations of a circuit breaker to enable the command outputs of the associated Outstation to be tested. This shall comprise a latching relay with the dummy breaker relay ‗open‘ and ‗close‘ coils connected to a double point command output on the Outstation. Contacts on the relay shall be connected to a double point digital input on the Outstation to provide indication of the dummy breaker state, i.e. open and closed. 4.5 4.5.1 POWER SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS General

All power system measurement transducers for the measurement of MW, MVAr, voltage, current and frequency shall be plug-in type and individual transducers shall be enclosed and mounted in sheet steel cubicles. The location of these cubicles will be subject to the site survey but there is a preference for a

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 149 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

centralised arrangement. Transducers shall provide continuous dc analogue output signals from continuous ac analogue inputs. Transducers shall include all necessary circuits for signal amplification and for scaling. Transducers for MW and MVAr measurements shall correctly compound the voltage and current inputs to provide bi-directional output related to active and reactive power flow. Transducers for MW and MVAr measurement shall be suitable for three phase unbalanced load. Power system measurement transducers shall provide galvanic separation between the primary current, voltage transformers and the Outstations. Measurement transducers and interposing transformers connected to any main instrument transformer of one main circuit shall be kept fully segregated from those associated with any other main circuit. Test terminal blocks shall be provided with all transducers to permit injection testing of individual transducers, without interference to the continuous operation of other apparatus connected to the same current and voltage transformers. Isolation links shall be provided for current transformer circuits which automatically short circuit the current transformer output. 4.5.2 Overloads

Each current input shall be capable of carrying 200 per cent rated current continuously and withstanding ten times the rated current for 5 seconds. Each voltage input shall be capable of carrying 120 per cent rated voltage continuously and withstanding twice the rated voltage for 10 seconds. The output shall be limited so as not to exceed 1.6 times nominal full range output current. The open circuit output voltage shall not exceed 25 volts dc. Transducers shall be protected against overcurrent and overvoltage. 4.5.3 Burden

The burden imposed on the primary current transformer, at full rated input shall not exceed 1 VA per transducer. The burden imposed on the primary voltage transformers at full rated input shall not exceed 3 VA per transducer. Preference shall be given to transducers which offer burdens significantly lower than the values specified in this document. 4.5.4 Output

The output shall be linear in respect to the measured value with a range of 4 to 20 mA. Transducers shall be designed to operate into any load impedance between 20 and 1000 ohms, maintaining measuring accuracy to IEC 688 (Class 1.0). 4.5.5 Response time

The response to achieve a final steady value for any step change of 90 per cent of input range shall not exceed 1 second. 4.5.6 Power supply

Preference will be given to transducers which derive auxiliary power from the measured voltage input. An auxiliary dc supply will be available from the Outstation dc power supply system. Attention is drawn to the fluctuating nature of the dc voltage. Variations of between +20 and -15 per cent of nominal voltage shall not cause any detectable inaccuracies. 4.6 4.6.1 RELAYS General

Electrical equipment, materials and components shall comply with the requirements of IEC 150, IEC 439 and IEC 445 in so far as they are applicable to equipment of this type. All relays shall be hermetically sealed with transparent covers. All dc operated relays are to be equipped with flywheel diodes.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 150 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

151 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Where such devices exist or are to be installed under other projects the Contractor will be provided with the operating schedules following contract commencement.3 Status indication repeat relays The status repeat relays shall each be provided with a minimum of three sets of contacts.Section 6 . without failure. shall be acceptable subject to the approval of the Employer. transformer tap changers. One contact per pole is the nominal requirement but series or parallel arrangements of contacts for each pole will be considered. The control signal will be in the form of a pulse of short duration but to ensure high reliability.6.7 SAS GATEWAYS The SCADA system shall be capable of communication with SAS Gateways that operate with IEC 80670-5-101/104 protocols. (d) Generally comply with the foregoing requirements for Outstations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. etc by means of light current signals from the Outstations. 4. Interposing relays shall be capable of performing at least 25 000 operations at the rated duty. 4.2 Control interposing relays The control interposing relays shall provide a means of operating the electrical control circuits of switchgear (circuit breakers and disconnectors). Where SAS systems are provided under this contract the following features shall be provided: (a) A full graphic HMI from which local control and monitoring can be carried out (b) Capable of supporting communication with more than one Control Centre using protocols as stated above (c) High reliability with duplicated LAN for acquisition and control within the substation. The relays shall provide double pole switching. Where plug-in type relays are approved each relay type shall have a unique plug to socket colour.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Plug in types complete with socket bases and retaining clips. 4. The rating of repeat relay coils shall not exceed 2 Watts. Contacts shall be designed to conduct load currents of less than 5 mA and also be suitable for infrequent operation. suitable for the loads to be switched. each set arranged to close while the relay coil is energised.6. The Bidder shall clearly state the lowest operating current for the proposed relays. The relays shall have a high degree of reliability. all control interposing relay coils and contacts shall be continuously rated.

Contractor shall demonstrate this ability e. The UPS system shall have the following features: a. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. etc.1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES Functional Requirements 5. The manufacturer shall specify the size of conductor required for the battery cables. and Communication equipment. including those to the battery.152 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In this case the batteries shall be located in a battery room and connected to the rectifier/inverter units located in an adjacent room via fuse switches located in the battery room. The power supplies are required for: a. Damage arising from component failure should be confined to the component concerned. The Outstations and associated telemetry equipment in substations and generating stations. The Contractor shall provide the cables interconnecting the UPS unit with external equipment. b.g. it shall be possible to isolate inverters and static switches from the load by means of a manually operated make-before-break switch. The Substations and other sites shall be equipped with 48Vdc battery backed power supplies. A static voltage stabiliser shall be provided in the mains by-pass circuit to maintain ±2% static voltage tolerance when the by-pass is in use. For ease of maintenance. the d. POWER SUPPLIES 5. Simple operation and fault diagnosis When required by the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5. Similar parts shall be interchangeable.1. These shall be located conveniently for the connection of the power supply equipment. Communication equipment located in substations.Section 6 . The NSCC – Control Room equipment. 5. telecommunication equipment not supplied by the 48Vdc system. 5. High operational security and reliability b. The Employer shall provide primary supplies at each location.2 UPS Configuration The UPS configuration shall be ―parallel redundant hot standby‖ with 2 x 100% inverters. The Bidder shall advise of any locations outside of the Control Centre or Substations (e. The manufacturer shall provide a suitable fused load-switch or moulded-case circuit breaker with the UPS unit to facilitate on-load isolation of the battery for the purpose of performing battery maintenance. The functional requirements for these power supplies are detailed in the following sections.2. Components shall be capable of withstanding the thermal and dynamic stresses resulting from internal and external short circuits and circuit switching operations.2.1 GENERAL Secure power supplies are required at all locations where equipment is supplied under this contract. selected lighting circuits in the Control Room to allow for continued work and sufficient air conditioning to allow for the temperature and humidity in equipment room(s) to be maintained within operating limits.2 5.2.1 General The UPS shall be rated to supply the complete Master Station system. c. the SCADA Master Station. 2 x 100% chargers and 2 x 50% batteries.1. repeater sites or other buildings) where power supplies will be required. Integrated monitoring facilities c. The Control Centre location shall be equipped with battery backed 415/230Vac Uninterruptible Power Supplies and diesel generator capable of supplying the complete building load. generating stations and other locations where equipment may be installed as part of the overall communication system.

Under synchronous operating conditions. for not less than 3 hours based on the full load plus the 50% spare capacity.1 Rectifier The rectifier shall be of constant voltage. via the inverter.2.2. 5. The rectifier shall incorporate a ―soft-start‖ feature to gradually accept load on initial energising. within the specified time. while simultaneously recharging the battery. if applicable. the UPS shall automatically resume synchronous operation with the mains bypass supply and shall initiate uninterrupted retransfer of the load to the UPS inverter. via the inverters. to a capacity that will enable it to again fulfil the discharge performance requirements. while simultaneously maintaining the battery charge in the float charge mode. the rectifier shall supply the power requirements of the load. The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following a number of automatic transfers of the load to the bypass.2 Modes of Operation The operation of the UPS shall comply with the following basic operating principles. In the event of automatic transfer of the load to the bypass circuit and subsequent restoration of the inverter output quantities to within the permissible tolerances. Upon restoration of the AC mains voltage. 5.Section 6 . 5. 5.2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Moulded-case circuit breakers shall be category P-2. via the inverter. The rate of recharging the battery shall be such as to restore it.2. the batteries shall supply the power requirements of the load. 5. provided the latter is within the tolerances specified for the load transfer conditions. If both inverters develop a fault. then the UPS shall revert to unsynchronised operation at its own internally set frequency. or outside the battery room. The output of the inverter shall be maintained within the voltage and frequency tolerances of the load at all times.2.1 Normal The output of the rectifier shall continuously supply the power requirements of the load. 5.4 Static Bypass Facilities shall be provided to enable manual initiation of uninterrupted transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass.2 Main Supply Failure In the event of an interruption or depression in the AC main supply voltage to the rectifiers. external overload/short circuit condition or switching-off of the inverter.2. The output voltage of the inverter shall also be controlled to maintain synchronism and phase with the mains bypass supply voltage.153 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the static switch shall initiate uninterrupted transfer of the load to the mains bypass supply in the event of deviation in the output quantities of the UPS unit resulting from a UPS component failure (including inverter static switch element.2. Normally both inverters shall be synchronised with each other and with the main supply. The two inverters shall be operating in parallel and sharing the load equally.3. the load shall be transferred to the bypass supply through the static switch.2. The rectifier shall re-start automatically upon restoration of the mains power supply following a main supply interruption.3 Performance 5. if applicable). and from the mains bypass to the inverter. The UPS shall be capable of energising the load within the permissible tolerances and of achieving the uninterrupted load transfer requirements via the static switch.3 Overload When a disturbance/fault occurs in any of the inverters the faulty unit shall be automatically disconnected and the entire load supplied from the remaining inverter. If the mains bypass supply voltage exceeds these tolerances.2. The switching device shall be installed adjacent to the battery.2. The UPS shall automatically resume synchronous operation with the mains bypass supply when the voltage and frequency of the latter are within the specified tolerances. in accordance with IEC 947-2.2. without the battery connected. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. current limiting output type designed for float charge operation. if these take place within the specified period.

Automatic initiation of battery rapid-charge operation shall occur following any period of battery discharge exceeding ten seconds. The output current shall be smoothed by means of series reactance or equal. Each charger shall be sized to supply full load plus boost charging the two batteries simultaneously. Short-time mains supply voltage depressions of not more than 20 percent. shall be controlled to within plus two percent and minus two percent of the set value. It shall be capable of being connected to the fully discharged batteries.Section 6 .  The rectifiers shall be capable of limiting the output current to 110 percent of rectifier rating and be capable of operating continuously at that current. and recharge them to their full capacity within a period of eight hours. iii. The DC output current of the rectifier. The range of adjustment shall include allowance which may be necessary to compensate for the ageing of the rectifiers. ii.154 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Battery rapid-charge operation i. Battery float-charge operation i. On-line adjustment of the set value of float-charge voltage shall be possible by means of a potentiometer on the relevant control circuit card. Battery rapid-charge operation shall be automatically controlled according to a constant current/constant voltage characteristic. The rectifier steady-state DC output voltage variations shall be controlled to within plus one percent and minus one percent of the set value (corresponding to the battery float-charge voltage) during load variations between zero and the rated output of the rectifier.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The DC output of the rectifier unit shall remain within the limits of ±2 percent under any of the following conditions. Ripple in the rectifier output voltage shall not exceed 2 percent of nominal voltage for all values of load within charger rating. Each rectifier shall be capable of fully charging the two batteries upon initial installation. when operating under constant currentlimiting conditions. ii. which may be the result of motor starting activities. Switched diodes or supplementary battery cells as a means of limiting DC voltage variations are not acceptable:    System frequency between ±10 percent Output between 5 and 100 percent of rated output Output power shall be controlled via a full wave half controlled thyristor/diode bridge with free wheeling current facility. whilst simultaneously supplying the full load plus 30 percent spare capacity. and during steady-state input voltage and frequency variations referred to above. without overloading. shall not result in a trip of the rectifier or the initiation of battery discharge. iii. Facilities shall be provided to initiate battery rapid-charge operation by manual and automatic means. iv. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

the momentary voltage change shall not cause damage to any connected equipment and shall be capable of restoring it to nominal value in a period not exceeding 0. The dynamic output voltage variations shall not exceed plus 10 percent and minus 10 percent of rated output voltage in the event of instantaneous load change of 100 percent rated output. The total rms harmonic content of the output waveform shall not exceed five percent of the fundamental value and shall not contain harmonics higher than the 15th. float charging system and be capable of providing the guaranteed output throughout the range of ambient conditions specified.2. The output voltage static regulation shall be maintained within plus one percent and minus one percent of rated output voltage. When rated load is suddenly applied or removed. plus 50 percent at a power factor of 0. in accordance with IEC 269. It shall be possible to vary the output voltage within ±5% of the specified output voltage. This Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The inverter shall be capable of delivering sufficient short circuit current to cause the output fuses rated nearest to 10 percent of the UPS rated output current to interrupt the short circuit current within 3 ms when the UPS is not synchronised to the bypass power supply.155 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2 Battery and DC Circuit The batteries shall operate in conjunction with a constant voltage. A facility shall be provided for adjusting the synchronising frequency from one percent to two percent. 50 Hz supply at the appropriate voltage. designed to maintain a single phase. 5. The output voltage shall be regulated to ±1 percent of rated output voltage with load power factor over the range 0. A suitable filter shall be included in the dc input circuit of all inverters to prevent noise from the inverter being fed into the dc supply system.8 lagging continuously when operated from the battery and charger system and alternatively from battery only. The inverter shall be capable of the necessary output to satisfy capacity of the computer system and the essential services load. The equipment shall be so designed and constructed that it is capable of operating reliably for long periods of time with minimum maintenance.1 seconds. the UPS shall be maintained in continuous operation at full load (including spare capacity) within its stated voltage limits for a period of three hours.3.2. from no-load to full-load. The equipment shall be capable of providing an output voltage which has a waveform approximating to a sinusoidal shape under all steady load conditions from zero to rated load. for the specified input power supply conditions. The inverter shall maintain output frequency such that synchronism with the bypass voltage is maintained. 5. At the end of the rated discharge period the voltage available at the output terminals of the UPS shall not be less than the minimum operating voltage of any load normally connected to the UPS including the spare capacity. The main output circuit fuse links shall be of the slow-acting type g1.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification iv. The waveform shall be such that there is no measurable difference between positive and negative half cycles. The power supplies system will operate with battery terminals free of earth. The float voltage of the batteries shall be the optimum required to ensure the maximum possible period between topping up with electrolyte. adjustment shall be possible ―on-line‖. During variations greater than ±2 percent in the power supply frequency the inverter shall revert to internal frequency control.3 Inverter Static inverters shall be of an approved type.Section 6 .7 lagging to unity. The output voltage shall be restored to within the steady state limits within 0. A suitable earth fault detection scheme shall be provided. without the need for supplementary charging to restore the battery to its fully charged condition. The battery discharge capacity shall be such that with the charger disconnected.1 s.3. at the worst environmental conditions obtainable. v.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The UPS shall be suitable for both floating output or with one leg of the AC output earthed. Mains input voltage and current b.2. 5. Transfer should be accomplished before the voltage reaches 115% of the nominal value.e. c. protection and control of the UPS in accordance with this specification. If tonal components are present. at any position. shall not exceed 75 dB(A) at any load between zero and the rated output of the unit. The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following four automatic transfers of the load to the bypass. Transfer should be accomplished before the voltage reaches 85% of the nominal value. if these take place within an interval of 5 minutes. Retransfer of the load from the mains bypass to the inverter Load retransfer shall only be possible when: The inverter output voltage is within ±10% of the nominal output voltage for more than 5 seconds. howsoever caused. The principle indications and alarms shall be: a.  Subject to fulfilling the above criteria.156 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . i. and to safeguard the unit and its components from the consequences of internal and external short circuits. f.4 Static by-pass switch The by-pass circuit shall have a continuous current rating equivalent to the rated output of the UPS unit.2. 5. and The inverter output and mains bypass voltages are synchronised. The combined detection and switching time required to transfer load from the inverter to the by-pass circuit shall not exceed 0. or The inverter output voltage exceeds 105% of the nominal output voltage. the noise limit shall be 5 dB(A) less. 70 dB(A). and The inverter output and mains bypass voltage are synchronised Automatic transfer of the load shall be initiated when: The inverter output voltage drops below 95% of the nominal output voltage. It shall be capable of conducting a current of ten times the rated output for not less than two seconds.3.2. d. retransfer of the load from mains bypass to the inverter shall be initiated automatically following automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass. or The inverter output current limit is exceeded. e. Inverter output voltage and current Battery voltage Rectifier alarms Inverter alarms Load alarms Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4 Controls and Instrumentation The UPS unit shall incorporate all the necessary equipment to enable operation. over voltages and any main or control circuit malfunctions. The UPS shall have a local control panel to show the status of the key parameters and mode of operation of the system. 5.5 Noise limits The sound pressure level measured at one metre distance from the UPS unit. Facilities shall be provided to manually and automatically initiate transfer of the load from the inverter to the by-pass circuit and from the by-pass to the inverter. The criteria for load transfer shall be as follows:  Transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains by-pass load transfer shall only be possible when:  The mains bypass voltage is within ±15% of rated UPS output voltage.5 ms. and The mains bypass frequency is within the tolerances specified.3.

1. They shall comply with utilisation category AC23 and DC23 for AC and DC switches respectively. Nickel cadmium batteries having steel cell containers shall be supplied in wood crates. 5. Taping together of cells will not be accepted.5.2. sintered plate or fibre plate types.2. in general.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Remote indication of the ―general alarm‖ status of the UPS system shall be made available.1 Enclosures 5. Support racks for the latter shall be solid wood. inverter and static switch shall be housed separately in one or more free-standing. Nickel-cadmium battery cells shall be of the pocket plate. The lowest rack for accommodating battery cells shall be a minimum of 30 cm above ground level. 5. free-standing support racks for batteries having plastic cell containers may be steel or solid wood. They shall be capable of withstanding the ‗let through‘ energy of the fuse controlling the AC supply to the transformer. All wood should be treated to render it non-hygroscopic and acid resistant. Battery cell cover shall be sealed against creepage of electrolyte and shall be fitted with spray proof vent plugs. Wiring and terminations shall.Section 6 . 5. Sealed.2. or adjacent cells.5 Construction Requirements 5. Rectifier transformers shall be of the air-cooled type.3 Battery cells and containers The battery cells shall be of the nickel-cadmium type and shall comply with and selected in accordance with IEC 623 and IEEE Std 1184. Each enclosure shall comply with the relevant requirements of the General Technical Requirements. self-supporting steel cabinet forming an enclosure. rated in accordance with the requirements of the Data Sheets and comply with IEC 742 as appropriate. recombination battery cells shall be of the flat plate construction incorporating electrolyte absorbed in the plate separators.5. A summary alarm shall be wired directly into the Control Room from the UPS indication panel and the individual signals shall be input to the Local RTU. Transformers and reactors shall be of the air-cooled type and comply with the relevant parts of IEC 146.157 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2.1. The battery shall be positioned such that possible leakage of electrolyte or emission of gaseous products shall not cause damage to other equipment.1.2 Converter components Main circuit switches (mechanical) shall comply with IEC 947-3 and be of the independent manually operated air-break type for continuous duty.5. Contactors shall comply with IEC 158-1 and be rated for uninterrupted duty and intermittent duty of at least class 0. but where an earthed screen is inserted between the windings this may be reduced to a level of 1500 volts. Rectifier stacks shall comply with the requirements of IEC 119 and IEC 146 as appropriate.5. Steel racks shall have a plastic or epoxy coating to provide suitable protection against the effects of electrolyte spillage. The insulation level between transformer primary and secondary windings shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2000 volts rms AC applied for one minute. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. comply with all the requirement details in the General Technical Specification. The utilisation category for DC contactors shall be not less than DC-4 and for AC contactors not less than AC-3. Battery enclosures shall be naturally ventilated to disperse gaseous products. Terminal pillar seals shall be of a design that prevents the initiation of pillar corrosion.1 Electronic Equipment Enclosures Each unit consisting of a rectifier.5. Separate. components.2.2. unenclosed. 5. free-standing support racks in a separate room.2 Battery Enclosures The battery may be installed in a separate cabinet adjoining that of the rectifier/inverter or on separate.

The Generator shall be located within the Control Centre site boundary in suitable accommodation which is also to be provided by the Contractor. installed and commissioned by the Contractor. Plastic containers of vented. Steel cell containers are preferred in applications requiring large capacity batteries. in a clean condition when bolted and protected against corrosion. In any case the location shall be above potential flood water levels. Each outgoing circuit from the distribution board shall be controlled and protected by fuses and links or miniature circuit breakers.158 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . including HVAC. required for the batteries. The Generator may be a packaged unit or housed in a purpose built structure which is separate from the new control room building.4 Distribution Board The UPS shall be equipped with a distribution board that permits segregation of duplicated devices. plus 50% spare capacity.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Cell containers of plastic material. The Contractor shall provide suitable foundations and a bund wall as part of the civil works to be provided under the Contract. bolts. The number of spare ways for future loads shall be at least 25 percent of the number required for the master station equipment. or deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part. Electrolyte level lines shall be marked on the front side of each container. 110% of distilled water.5. Inter-cell connectors and terminals shall be insulated or otherwise provided with protective covering to prevent inadvertent short circuiting.Section 6 . Vented. small power and lighting. Batteries shall be supplied complete with all necessary interconnecting links. flooded cells shall permit the electrolyte level to be viewed through the container material. if parallel operation of battery cells is thereby avoided. inter-cell connections shall be of low resistance. A bulk fuel tank of sufficient capacity to store fuel for 7 days continuous running of the generator at full load shall be supplied and installed within the complex. subject to the material being non-flame propagating and mechanically shock resistant. No welding. 5. their short circuit rating being adequate to protect each circuit against the effects of a fault at the outgoing terminal of the unit. All material used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperature and atmospheric conditions arising under working conditions without distortion.3. bolts and associated hardware shall be of electrolyte-resisting material. The diesel generator shall be wholly suitable for supplying UPS. 4-wire).3 5. 50 Hz. 5. insulation terminal covers etc. filling or plugging of defective parts will be permitted without the approval in writing of the Engineer. A daily service fuel tank shall be provided and this shall have sufficient capacity to supply fuel for 8 hours continuous running of the generator at full load. at 415/240 volts (3-phase.2. shall be supplied in separate containers. Cell terminal posts. and also without affecting the strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to perform. flooded cells shall be fitted with flame arresting vent plugs. The Contractor shall provide and install cables from the generator to the main switchboards in the new control centre building. are preferred. The generator shall be rated for continuous output and capable of supplying the total load of the new control centre building (including the UPS and battery charging demand concurrent with supplying the load) and all electrical loads to be supplied under the Contract.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 Design Requirements The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other Contracts. Batteries shall be supplied filled with dry electrolyte. rectifier and computer loads.1 DIESEL GENERATOR General Requirements A standby diesel generator and all its associated ancillary systems shall be supplied. 5.

The underside of all tanks shall be ventilated in an approved manner to prevent corrosion. fitted with locking devices of approved type and material. Gasket material shall be of the minimum thickness necessary and of approved composition. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All mechanisms shall. Bolts. The site rating of the generator.3. connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to minimise the risk of fire and any damage which might be caused in the event of fire. The continuous site rating shall be based on the specified site operating conditions. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil-filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment which is in tension or subject to impact stresses except where it can be shown that service experience has been satisfactory with the grade of cast iron and the duty proposed. bending and removal of burrs shall be completed before galvanising. If the continuous site rating is less than the stated catalogue rating. Joints employing a gasket material shall be so constructed that the packing is maintained under sufficient compression in all parts. Nuts and pins shall be locked in position with lock nuts or lock washers. punching. All connections and contacts shall be of ample section and surface for carrying continuously the specified currents without undue heating. the Contractor shall demonstrate this capability. or other devices if approved. Accessible means shall be provided for the easy lubrication of all bearings. The set shall operate at a maximum speed of 1500 rev/min. No bolt or stud shall project through its nut by more than approximately 10mm or four threads whichever is the less. except for terminals and relay stems.3 Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions The engine may be naturally aspirated or turbocharged and charge air-cooled and shall be capable of giving continuously at site not less than the specified output and an overload of 10% in excess of this output for one hour in any period of 12 hours of consecutive running. mechanisms and moving parts. Pre-site drilling. irrespective of engine rating. size M5 may be used. and shall be secured by bolts or set screw of ample size. Suitable special spanners shall be provided for bolts and nuts which are not properly accessible by means of an ordinary spanner. Surfaces in contact with oil shall neither be galvanised nor cadmium plated. be constructed of stainless steel.Section 6 . The average thickness of the zinc coating shall be equivalent to not less than 0. brass or gunmetal to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion. All apparatus shall operate without undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Corresponding parts liable to renewal shall be interchangeable. cutting. Alternatively.6 kg/m2 of zinc for all surfaces. but these must be of stainless steel. Bolts and studs for electrical connections shall preferably be of brass M6 size. When requested by the Employer. All apparatus. nuts and washers on outdoor equipment shall be of non-corroding material where they are in contact with non-ferrous parts in conductor clamps and fittings and elsewhere if specially required. 5. unless finished with an oil resisting varnish. The preparation for galvanising and the galvanising process shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the material being coated. when necessary. Galvanising shall be applied by the hot dip process. A sound attenuation to 55 dB(A) (or lower) at 10 metres from the set shall be achieved. All rubbing or wearing surfaces shall be machine surfaced. All taper pins used in any mechanisms shall be of the split type.159 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Lock washers shall not be used above M24 size except when a spring type is specially approved. so that an efficient joint can be made without the use of jointing compound. shall also be stated and the rating of the set will be based on the lower of the two. a detailed explanation of the de-rating shall accompany the Bid. phosphor bronze or high tensile brass.

of tank level together with an alarm from a separate initiating device for tank full. 5. inspection manhole.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Attention is drawn to the requirement that the engine may stand for a considerable period yet must be immediately available for full load and any special lubrication or heating arrangements necessary to meet this condition shall be provided. vent.9 Fuel Oil Piping The Contractor shall provide and install all required piping to carry the fuel from the bulk storage to the service tank and the engine. It shall be of sufficient capacity to enable the service tank to be fitted in not more than 4 hours. shall be designed too minimise the risk of fire and explosion. A suitable strainer shall be supplied and fitted at the transfer pump suction line.3. The pump shall have on the suction side a course strainer and on the delivery side a duplex 'full flow' fine filter complete with Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 5. Level switches shall be provided for the following services: (a) Low level alarm (b) (c) (d) 5. The capacity of the pump shall be such that the service tank can be completely filled in not more than 2 hours. vent and drain pipes. drain and overflow lines. 5. 5. access ladder. fabricated from steel plate and supplied complete with mounting saddles. The fuel oil storage and delivery system.8 Fuel boost Pump If required by the engine manufacturer. level indicator.6 Daily Service Tank The daily service tank shall be totally enclosed and of welded steel construction with suitable supports and shall be installed in a position where any fuel leakage cannot impinge on exhaust pipes or other hot engine surfaces.3. a semi-rotary hand pump shall be supplied and connected in parallel with the motor driven pump. The pump motor starter control panel shall contain a selector so that the pump may be either started and stopped by hand or automatically on receipt of signals from the level switches in the service tank. delivery. All necessary valves and fittings shall be provided including sufficient isolating valves to enable items in the system to be serviced without draining down the whole system. and in no circumstances shall it be permitted to pass over exhaust pipes. fill pipe and cap. The tank shall be provided with all necessary fittings including fill.3. level indication and access for inspection and maintenance. a fuel boost pump shall be provided between the service tank and the engine. The pump shall be directly driven by the engine.Section 6 .3. at the filling point.160 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .10 Engine Lubrication Lubrication of the engine shall be by means of an engine driven integral pump.5 Bulk Fuel Storage The bulk fuel oil tank shall be of horizontal cylindrical type.7 High level alarm Low level start of transfer pump High level stop of transfer pump Fuel transfer Pump An electric motor-driven transfer pump shall be provided to enable the service tank to be filled from the bulk storage tank. The pipe layout shall be such that it does not pass close to hot surfaces. There shall be an indication.3. 5. overflow.3. including the associated earthing arrangements. 5. For emergency use.3.4 Fuel The engine shall be supplied with and operate on diesel fuel.

3. With the exception of the overspeed condition. 5. 5. Micro switches shall not be used in any direct current circuit nor in any inductive circuit. The engine shall be fitted with a mechanically operated device which will shut off the fuel supply to the engine when any of the specified alarm conditions occur. 5. fuel and water piping to avoid fracture due to vibration and to minimise conduction of noise.161 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3.3. Flexible connections shall be provided to the exhaust. Suitable anti-vibration mountings shall be supplied for the diesel generator unit.12 Crankshaft The design shall avoid undesirable torsional oscillation at or near the designed running speed and. 5. It shall control the speed within the limits specified and be capable of adjusting the engine speed to a minimum of 5% above and below the rated speed.3. the Contractor shall submit his calculations to the Engineer for examination. and all set-mounted ancillary apparatus.15 Starting System Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that the engine will start automatically on failure of the normal electricity supply. The Contractor shall ensure that the lubricating oil system capacity shall be sufficient to enable the engine to run continuously for 12 hours at any load without replenishment. An inhibit system to cater for normal shut-down and initial start-up shall be provided. the set shall preferably be mounted on a welded steel common bedplate. The engine shall also be capable of being started by "push Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Visual indication of the cause of an alarm signal or shut-down shall be given on the local control panel.14 Engine Protection The following protection devices shall be provided with the engine and the Contractor shall provide and install all the necessary alarm initiating devices: (a) High Lubricating Oil Temperature (b) (c) (d) Low Lubricating Oil Pressure High Engine Jacket Cooling Water Temperature Engine Overspeed. air. 5. The device shall be fitted with one normally open and one normally closed contact which will trip and lock-out the generator circuit-breaker in the event of the automatic device operating. The Contractor shall supply all lubricants necessary to commission the generator and it shall be fully lubricated at Handover.13 Governor The governor shall preferably be of the hydraulic type and shall be equipped with an adjustable droop mechanism. the Contractor shall propose an alternative to item (c). the bedplate shall be stress relieved before machining. the protection shall be in two stages.Section 6 . Item (a) may be omitted if lubricating oil cooling is carried out by the jacket water. the first operating an alarm indicator and the second operating the emergency shut-down relay.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification changeover cock incorporating pressure by-passes to facilitate oil flow to the engine should the filter become blocked. In the case of air cooled engines. The overspeed condition shall operate both an alarm indicator and the emergency shut-down relay simultaneously. If a flange mounted generator is not employed. The alarm initiating devices shall be of high quality and of robust construction to withstand operation in high temperature and vibration conditions entailed with the diesel engine. if required.11 Set Mountings To achieve simplicity in foundation work.3.

The radiator may be mounted on or remote from the engine. 5.3. Without power supply to the charger. Upon restoring power supply to the charger immediately thereafter. The battery shall be adequately rated for any standing load and its specified starting duty. shall be provided on the engine to prevent starting while the engine is under maintenance.16 Cooling System The engine shall be provided with a two or three section oil and water tropical radiator capable of dissipating the heat from the jacket water.162 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . in order to prevent danger to personnel. The insulation shall be 75mm thick preformed rigid insulation wired on and then covered with hammered aluminium sheet. 5. 5.18 Silencers The engine shall be efficiently silenced with primary and terminal silencers complete with interconnecting exhaust pipe and fittings. to the satisfaction of the Engineer.19 Air Filters Air filters shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions which are likely to arise occasionally. Provision shall also be made for local manual starting of the set. The necessary cowling shall be supplied and installed by the diesel plant manufacturer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification button" from the local control panel specified. welded on. to a condition in which one more starting cycle can be completed. Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that: (a) At engine speeds in excess of the minimum firing speed it shall be impossible to complete the starting circuit (b) Not more than two consecutive attempts to start may be made in any period of 1 minute. The silencers and exhaust pipes shall be provided with 25mm stools.3. The battery charger will be supplied from the mains and an engine driven dynamo is not required. Due allowance for expansion of the exhaust system shall be made by the inclusion of expansion bellows if necessary.Section 6 . free standing cubicle shall be provided as the engine/generator control panel. The radiator must be generously sized to permit operation at full load and overload in the specified ambient conditions. lubricating oil and charge air (if appropriate). 5. It shall be protected against accidental. The charger shall be mounted remote from the engine and shall include a battery charge fail alarm. each starting period and the period between such consecutive attempts being automatically time controlled by the equipment. the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery. A centrifugal pump shall be supplied to circulate the coolant. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing the fittings and wall plates necessary to carry the tail pipe through the generator room wall. within 30 minutes. alarm and control equipment shall be contained within the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.17 Safety Guards All moving parts shall be adequately guarded.3. instruments. the battery shall be capable of providing no fewer than four starting cycles within a period of 5 minutes. Supports for the complete system shall be of the anti-vibration type and shall be so arranged that no weight is carried by the engine set. mechanical or electrical damage. Each silencer shall be supplied complete with a drain off point. A suitable battery isolating switch. to accept extruded mesh to provide a 25mm air gap between the hot surface and insulation to be applied.3. front access. At the failure of the second attempt the starter circuit shall be locked out pending manual resetting.3. control switches. The equipment shall include an adequately rated lead/acid starter battery and battery charger which generally comply with the requirements of IEC 60623 except that discharge time indication is not required. All indicators. The complete system including brackets shall be supplied galvanised and shall be insulated within the building. capable of being locked in both the open and closed positions.20 Engine/Generator Control Panel A rigid. 5.

163 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . reset and lamp test facilities. The following alarms shall be annunciated: (a) Failed to start (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 5. The control panel shall incorporate the following equipment. All alarm circuits shall derive their power supply from the starting battery. When the MANUAL/AUTO control selector switch is in the AUTO position.20.1 Alarms Annunciator A local alarm annunciator panel shall be provided equipped with audible and flashing visual annunciators.Section 6 . master shut-down relay shall be provided in the control panel.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification cubicle and indicators. the relay shall automatically: (a) break the closing circuit of the circuit-breaker (b) (c) (d) 5. 5. instruments and control switches shall be visible from the front of the cubicle with the door closed. so arranged that upon the occurrence of the specified fault conditions. Alarms shall latch until accepted. Summary alarms shall be connected into the Master Station Computer System via the local RTU in order to generate System alarms. A muting facility shall be provided for the audible device. the audible alarm shall be inoperative.3 make the tripping circuit of the circuit-breaker stop the engine close a set of voltage free contacts to operate an alarm annunciator Engine/Generator Controls The following controls for the engine/generator set shall be provided in the control panel: (a) Automatic/manual selector switch for set starting (b) (c) Start pushbutton Stop pushbutton Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.20. temporary overload and mains disturbances.3.3.2 Low lubricating oil pressure High lubricating oil temperature High jacket water/cooling air temperature (as appropriate) Engine on overload Overspeed Emergency shut-down Starter battery low-voltage Daily Service Tank high level Daily Service Tank low level Emergency Shut-down Relay A manually reset.g. e. The alarms shall also be connected to the Auxiliary Plant Annunciator. accept. Alarms shall be inhibited from operating during transient conditions.3.20.

It shall have ball and roller bearings. 5. The machine shall have an ac exciter and liberally rated silicone diode assembly with a self contained excitation system with transistor automatic voltage regulator (AVR). salient pole. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 5. and an efficient cooling system using a centrifugal fan.3. The critical speed shall exceed twice the overspeed test value.21 Generator The generator shall be a brushless.164 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All windings shall be tropicalised and suitably impregnated to withstand the site ambient conditions. The generator shall be capable of maintaining continuous maximum rated output when operating within + 5% of rated voltage and at rated power factor. low loss steel stampings.22 Stator The stator core shall consist of high permeability.3. revolving field self regulating alternator of fabricated steel construction throughout. a dynamically balanced rotating field.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (d) Emergency stop pushbutton (the emergency stop pushbutton only shall be operable without opening the control cubicle door) Speed adjustment Alternator voltage adjustment Stop/manual/auto selector switch for fuel transfer pump On/off switches for heaters in alternator stator and engine jacket (if required) Logic equipment for start sequence of set including lock-out after two attempts to start Automatic voltage regulator Engine/Generator Instrumentation (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 5.4 The following instrumentation for the engine/generator set shall be provided in the control panel: (a) Engine Speed (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Lubricating oil pressure Lubricating oil temperature jacket water or cooling water temperature Engine hours run meter Generator frequency Generator voltage (with phase selector switch) Individual phase currents (3 instruments) Watt meter Kilowatt hour meter All transducers and connections necessary for the functioning of the above instrumentation shall be provided. The generator shall be star connected.20. It shall be screen protected and drip proof with a large terminal box for outgoing connections. tightly clamped and securely located within the machine casing.3. salient pole construction with heavy damper windings.

together with the generator neutral earthing connection shall be supplied and accommodated within a substantial dustproof sheet steel enclosure mounted at the generator neutral terminal position.24 Exciters The core and poles of the exciter shall be made of high permeability low loss steel stampings tightly clamped and secured to minimise magnetic noise. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. When the generator maximum continuous load at rated power factor is rejected. whichever is the greater. The rotor poles shall be constructed of steel laminations.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The windings shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with Class 'B' materials. The windings shall be effectively braced to withstand the maximum forces arising from any short circuit that may occur at the stator winding terminals. A voltage setting device capable of adjusting the required voltage in steps of 1% between the limits of 95% and 105% of normal voltage at any load within the rating of the machine shall be mounted on the control panel.3. keyed and securely fixed to the rotor hub and fitted with interconnected damper windings to absorb the cyclic irregularity of the engine.26 Voltage Regulation Continuously active. transient overspeeds in service and normal operation. required for any instruments and/or protection relays specified or for excitation circuit compounding or compensation. Any material that is liable to shrink in service shall not be used for bracing.3. Where a separate exciter is provided. quick acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to the generator line to line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain the alternator voltage within the prescribed limits. the phases and terminal box being arranged for 3-phase and neutral connection. The characteristics of the exciter shall comply fully with the operational requirements of the alternator in matching the required loading conditions. The minimum factor of safety of the rotating system shall be not less than 1. The field winding shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with class 'F' materials. Preference will be given to equipment based wholly or mainly on static state devices. resistors and any other auxiliary components necessary for the satisfactory operation of the plant. 5.3. rectifiers. indicating instruments. Tubular low-temperature heaters of sufficient rating to maintain the windings in dry conditions during long periods of standstill shall be fitted in the stator casing and wired out to a terminal box on the bedplate.5.3. preferably in one piece. All current transformers.Section 6 . The equipment shall include all selector switches. including their associated primary connections and secondary circuit terminal blocks.25 Ventilation The generator and exciter shall incorporate shaft mounted fans of sufficient capacity to provide the machine cooling effect necessary to comply with the temperature requirements of the Specification when operating in the specified ambient conditions.23 Rotor The rotor shaft and hub shall be of forged steel. 5. 5. based upon the yield point of the part most highly stressed at the stated overspeed or during a stator 3-phase terminal short circuit at normal voltage. The ventilating circuit shall be designed to avoid hot-spots and to permit adequate cleaning by a portable centrifugal blower. They shall be fully insulated at all positions of support and shall be securely located against movement due to thermal and rotational cycling and the force arising during overspeed testing.165 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Both ends of each stator winding shall be brought out to terminal positions on the stator casing. They shall be suitable for operation from the local single phase ac supply. 5. the exciter rotor shall be mounted on the extended main shaft at the free end of the generator. the regulator equipment shall be capable of limiting the generator momentary over-voltage to a value not exceeding 120% rated voltage and shall restore the voltage to within 2% of the nominal preset value within three seconds. packing or wedging.

A general arrangement of the control cubicle showing cable entry and control wiring termination points. A separate price should be given for any alternative offers and full technical details must be included. wiring.3. maintenance and major overhaul of all parts of the complete plant supplied (b) A comprehensive spare parts list for the complete plant. 5.29 Parallel Running It is not required to run the generator in parallel with any other generator set or in synchronism with the mains. following the end of the Defects Liability Period.2 Operating and maintenance instruction manuals and spare parts lists shall be supplied generally as specified in Section 11.3. and phase rotation. Spare parts necessary to keep the set in a state of operation for a period of 4 years or 12. polarity. giving description and parts identification numbers. 5. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.28 Alternative Generators The Bid shall be based on the requirements of the Specification. or a detailed wiring diagram of the control cubicle.3. the time setting range being adjustable within the range 1 second to 5 seconds in steps of 1 second.000 hours. An electrical schematic diagram of the control cubicle. The Bidder may additionally offer alternative arrangements to those specified in the foregoing clauses.3.31.3.27 Pulley Block A hand-operated lifting block and chain shall be provided for the set. shall be listed and priced as an option. The principal dimensions and weights of the set and major components shall also be shown.3.32 Inspection and Testing Inspection and testing of the engine/generator set shall be performed as provided for under Section 8.166 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The manuals shall contain: (a) Fully detailed instructions for operation. Instruction Manuals (d) (e) 5.6. 5. capable of lifting the largest item that has to be removed from the plant for routine maintenance and overhaul.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Over-voltage protection shall be provided.3.Section 6 .31. and all associated trenches or ducts required for the proper installation of the set. 5. 5. generator and ancillary plant shall be included in the offer.31 Documentation Documentation for the generator set shall be provided as specified in Section 11 and shall include the following: 5.1 Drawings The Contractor shall provide the following drawings prior to delivery of the generating set: (a) A general arrangement of the complete generating set showing details of terminal points for cabling. pipe work. (b) (c) A general arrangement of the diesel engine. A general arrangement of the alternator and exciter showing terminal markings. the voltage setting range being 105% to 125% in steps of 5%. 5.3.30 Tools and Spare Parts A complete set of tools required to carry out all maintenance and normal overhaul work on the engine.

The batteries shall normally be kept charged by a dual battery charger unit.167 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . each charger comprising a float charger with manual boost charge facilities. Variation shall not exceed 0. 10 hours autonomy. Simple operation and fault diagnosis. (e) Battery earth fault.2 System Capacity and Performance The ampere capacity of the batteries shall be adequate when fully charged to maintain the stated load in normal operation within its stated voltage limits for a period of at least: a. (b) Battery voltage high. The boost charger shall be rated to restore the fully discharged battery to the fully charged condition within 12 hours.1.4. without interrupting supplies to the equipment. The output of the battery and charger system shall be 48 volts (positive earth) and shall continuously supply the power requirements of the load. the following features: a. Ripple voltage shall not exceed 0.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5.1 per cent of the working voltage without battery. the psophometric noise level at the output.1.4. 10 hours autonomy. At the NSCC the following signals shall be provided and wired up to the telecommunication network management system and SCADA system Local RTU: (a) AC supply fail. At CEB HQ 10 hours autonomy. Alarm conditions shall be displayed locally.1. shall not exceed the equivalent of 2 mV at a frequency of 800 Hz after weighting as specified by ITU-T recommendations for any operational condition. (g) Output dc MCB trip (Common for all MCBs). as a minimum.4. Alarm monitoring facilities. (d) Charger fail indication.Section 6 . (f) DC supply fail. Automatic control of the output dc voltage is required.1 General The 48 Vdc battery and charger systems shall consist of 1 x 100% nickel cadmium (NiCad) storage batteries and 2 x 100% float/boost chargers and a distribution switchboard. The rating of each charger shall be sufficient to carry the specified maximum load including the spare capacity.1 48 V DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS Functional Requirements 5. 5. When the battery is connected to the charger. (c) Battery voltage low. An alarm shall be activated when a fault is detected. There shall be no power interruption to the load during mains power failure or when the mains power is restored. High operational security and reliability.3 Alarm Indications The battery and charger systems shall be provided with efficient built-in self-monitoring and alarm facilities. whilst maintaining the battery in a fully charged condition.4.4 5. 5. At Control Centre: c. b.5 V from 20 per cent to 100 per cent full load current. for loads between 0 per cent and 100 per cent. c. At substation: b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The systems shall have. Voltage free contacts wired to cabling terminals shall also be provided to enable remote indication of each alarm.

Cells shall be formed into a sub-assembly by mounting in groups. The batteries shall be housed in one of two ways: a. The 50% spare capacity.4. Under normal condition.1 Batteries The batteries shall provide power supply for the telecommunication equipment demand and be designed to give at least 15 years life from the date of installation. Sufficient alarm initiation outputs shall be provided to allow each alarm of the 48 Vdc power supply system to be displayed at up to three remote locations. the healthy charger shall automatically take-over the full load current without supply interruption. The standby time required to supply the entire dc power demand.4. Inside a suitably designed battery cubicle. in robust containers. Stainless steel containers shall be insulated one from the other. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of battery capacity. Nickel-cadmium batteries are required and shall be of the pocket plate. Each cell shall be identified by a number formed in a non-corrodible material and fixed to the cells to be visible when installed on the racks. Each cell shall be provided with a vent cap/electrolyte filler plug and a pressure operated gas release valve designed for intermittent operation. The batteries shall operate in floating service. In the event of a failure of one of the battery chargers. The final choice of battery installation method shall be agreed with the Employer. The voltage fluctuations caused by power consumption of various loads shall be kept within permitted limits. The use of a Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The positive and negative terminals of each cell shall be clearly marked and permanently indicated. The service voltage required shall not drop below recommended figures (permitted voltage tolerances of the individual loads). In a battery room on heavy-duty epoxy coated metal racks suitably protected against corrosion and attack by the battery electrolyte. The fuses shall be of the high breaking capacity type in accordance with IEC 60269. A fuse box shall be provided for the battery. each battery charger shall support half the load. housed in totally enclosed translucent plastic or stainless steel containers.2 Battery Chargers The batteries shall normally be kept fully charged by a dual battery charger unit. or semi sealed type. The Contractor shall select the Ah capacity according to the actual equipment consumption. Manual change-over of chargers shall also be possible. Taping together of cells will not be accepted. i. taking into consideration the following: a. b.2 Battery and Charger Equipment 5. The battery unit shall be connected to the distribution board and battery charger by PVC insulated copper cables. they shall be continuously connected to load and to the charging rectifiers. open. b. The positive and negative fuses shall be arranged in pairs and shall be fully segregated from each other by an insulating barrier. The battery design shall be in accordance with IEC 623 and IEEE Std 1184.Section 6 . d.168 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Cells utilizing plastic containers shall be constructed so that the plates are rigidly held so as to avoid the possibility of distortion and short-circuiting of the plates. The battery shall be spaced so as to permit easy access to all individual cells to allow replacement of cells and/or checking cell voltages and connections.4. Each battery charger shall be capable of simultaneously supply the full load and charging discharged batteries at the optimum rate. 5. The positive and negative terminals of each complete battery shall be indicated by red and black markings respectively in an approved form. 5.2. Each cell container shall be equipped with an electrolyte level indicator and the electrolyte capacity shall be sufficient to ensure long intervals between topping-up.e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In substations and generating stations a summary alarm shall be input to the respective Outstations. c.2.

feeders. full details shall be included in the Bid. If forced ventilation is unavoidable then 100 per cent redundant fans shall be provided. The mains supply voltages available to the chargers will be 415 Vac. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Manual or automatic switchover from one mode to the other shall be possible.169 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Provisions shall be made to adjust the charging voltage for a fully charged battery with an accuracy of at least 1%. The rectifiers shall be fed from the LVAC main switchgear.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification modular type of chargers that have N+1 modules which capable of supplying the load such that the maximum load is divided upon N modules with one module acting as spare is also acceptable as an alternative solution to the traditional dual redundant battery charger configuration. DC output voltmeter. Internal cooling of the charger shall be by natural ventilation. Should modular type of battery chargers are offered. Double wound transformers shall be provided at the input side of rectifier to prevent galvanic connection between the dc and ac system.4. The rated output and current of rectifier shall correspond to the requirements of system load and battery charging. 50 Hz single phase. indicating instruments. 5. etc. and shall be suitable for automatic and manual control.Section 6 . The operation of the rectifier shall be fully automatic. 50 Hz three phase and a 240 Vac. It shall be possible to select the charger to ‗Boost charge‘ mode. protective devices. A mimic diagram shall be mounted on the front panel and shall clearly display the main circuit in relation to the various switching equipment. In addition to ‗Boost‘ and ‗Float Charge‘ modes. Irrespective of the mode of operation the load voltage will be maintained to nominal level by the automatic introduction of suitable dropping diodes. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of rectifier load. The battery charger shall be of the solid state static thyristor or switch-mode rectifier type suitable for dc power supply and charging of the associated storage battery. Rectifier ratings in all modes of operation shall be adequately adjustable to deliver the optimum charging rate recommended by the battery manufacturer while also supplying the normal steady state loads. The battery charger shall be installed in the telecommunication room. The charging rectifier shall normally operate in the float charge mode. and to move the setting point within a range of 10%. Each mode shall be signalled on the front of the rectifier cubicle. The rectifiers shall be equipped with automatic current limiting devices to make them short-circuit proof. Each of the two rectifier cubicles shall contain at least the following indications/meters: a. All fuses shall be equipped with a flag. When an ac supply failure occurs which lasts for more than five minutes.3 Control and Instrumentation The battery and charger system shall have a local control panel to show the status of the key parameters and mode of operation of the system. the rectifier shall automatically regulate the charging current and change over to the ‗Float charge mode‘. Each rectifier shall be designed to carry 110% of rated output current for an indefinite time. Current limitation shall be 100% of rated output current. the rectifier shall automatically select the ‗Boost charge‘ mode immediately on restoration of the ac supply. When selected to ‗Boost charge‘ mode. the battery condition shall be monitored and on achieving a fully charged condition. The output voltage shall be maintained constant and just sufficiently above the open circuit voltage of battery to keep the battery in a fully charged condition. lamps. the charger shall also be equipped with manual equalizing mode for initial conditioning and periodical maintenance of batteries. The final location shall be agreed with the Employer. The charging rectifiers shall be of approved construction and shall be equipped with all necessary fuses. The output dc voltage control range shall be adjustable and the range of voltage shall be stated in the Bid. switches. Battery fuse shall be equipped with signalling contact. enabling an easily visible detection of any blown fuse. independent of load variations or variations of ac input voltage within the specified limits. etc. batteries. All voltmeter instruments shall be connected via fuses to the busbars.2. No break in voltage shall occur during such switchover.

Boost mode. Switching of the outgoing feeders shall be effected by two pole. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. vertical sections bolted together to form indoor metal clad. Current limit. The busbar shall be supervised by an under voltage relay to be set at 80% of rated voltage with time delay between 0-5 seconds. The switchboard and charger cubicles shall be vermin and termite proof. The busbars shall be made of copper painted with suitable paint while all connection points shall be tinplated.4 Construction The cubicles shall be completely self supporting. dust-proof rigid unit. Hinged doors shall be provided to provide easy access to equipment contained within the cubicle. temperature compensated thermal overload and an adjustable magnetic instantaneous over current release for automatic tripping. To ensure maximum safety to personnel. Sheet steel thickness shall not be less than 2 mm. The main switchgear and distribution board shall be provided with a copper earth bus of the size not less 2 than 100 mm and in cases where two or more cubicles are installed adjacent to each other this earth bar shall be continuous. 13A. sufficient creepage distance and shall be able to withstand all short-circuit conditions without damage. The above-mentioned protective devices shall withstand the specified short currents. The miniature circuit breakers shall be equipped with an adjustable.2.4.5 48V DC Distribution Board The 48 Vdc distribution boards shall supply power to telecommunications equipment.Section 6 . made of a required number of standardized. LED indications for:        5. The cubicles shall be free standing. Float mode. manually operated miniature circuit breakers.4. degree of protection IP51. The distribution board shall be mounted in the telecommunication room. The number of spare ways for future loads shall be at least 100 per cent of the number required for the specified loads. Ammeters for charger current output &battery current. Resetting shall also be provided. Adequate working clearance shall be maintained inside the cubicles. The board shall be composed of standard cubicle of approved construction. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each circuit breaker for signalling circuits. 5. Under voltage. Cubicles and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand twisting without distortion. secured with integral handles provided with locks and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket made of rubber or other approved material to prevent the ingress of dust. The short circuit rating shall be adequate to protect each circuit against the effects of a fault at the outgoing terminal of the unit. A light suitably positioned to ensure even illumination of the entire panel shall be provided inside each cubicle as well as 1-phase. Over voltage.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification b. The busbars shall be supported by insulators having high mechanical and electrical strength. The hinged doors shall be of the lift-off type. prefabricated. Time delayed releases shall be used wherever necessary in order to provide proper selectivity between circuit breakers of a circuit.170 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Charger fail.2. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each circuit breaker for signalling circuits. socket-outlet of the same type as other outlets in the installation. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of selectivity between all protective devices in a circuit for all 48 Vdc. equipped with bottom frames suitable for bolting to the floor. feeders to the Employer for approval. The cubicle shall be designed for cable entry from the bottom rear and equipped with glands suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables. the busbars shall be completely insulated at the front. Charger on.

Construction including piling. Landscaping of site around building and reinstatement of surrounding boundary. etc). HVAC. Three dimensional drawings of the Control Room interior shall be provided showing the perspective. materials. labour. The Contractor shall also provide a physical model of the building and its interior to a scale of 1:100. The model shall be in sufficient detail to demonstrate. Complete fitting out 8. superstructure. rooms and furniture. the layout of the control and equipment rooms including the service rooms (UPS. layout. and general appearance. colour schemes and layout of the furniture and equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete works including but not limited to: 1. The requirements for rooms are detailed in the following sections.2 ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS The new NSCC building shall provide for the following accommodation: (a) Control room (b) (c) (d) Main equipment room for the NSCC Master Station and Communication equipment Office accommodation for Operational Support Staff Office accommodation for Commercial support (Future requirement for trading/energy purchase) A separate area/room in which management. Installation. testing and Commissioning of all building services 9.1 INTRODUCTION A new building shall be provided at the designated location in Sri Jayewardenepura on the outskirts of Colombo. The Contractor is required to carry out the design and construction of the new building. ground works. supplies. Processing and obtaining all national and local construction permits and/or clearances 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6. The Bidder shall provide the conceptual design with his offer that presents the proposed design in sufficient detail to demonstrate the general appearance of the external and internal structure and finishes. and supervision to execute the works 6. ambience and appearance of the structure. Satisfying all planning and building regulation requirements 4. Provision of all necessary equipment. It shall also show access to the building for mains cables and communication cables via segregated and protected routes. The results of the Soil Investigation and Land Survey will be provided to the bidders. access. drainage 7. Conceptual Design 2. There should be provision within the control centre complex to accommodate all of the System Control Centre's operational and support staff. access. Detailed Design 5.Section 6 .171 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 6. modification and maintenance of the SCADA/EMS system is performed A separate room for training and location of the Despatcher Training Simulator (e) (f) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. During the initial design phase the Contractor shall provide a computer simulation of the building interior and exterior construction in sufficient detail to demonstrate the layout. CONTROL CENTRE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS 6.

the user interfaces (UI) they use to interact with the SCADA/EMS system. that environment shall be designed to eliminate as many sources of distraction as possible.Section 6 . and through restricting the general access of nonoperational staff or visitors to the control room.172 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Access Control System The requirements for these are detailed in turn in the following sections. it is essential that aspects of control room design. it is necessary to provide separate domestic facilities for them that are in close proximity and with ready access to the control room. TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-001/002/003 and 004 illustrate layouts indicative of the required space for the respective functions and staffing.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) Workshop and office facilities for communications and outstation maintenance groups. the control room shall be segregated from the rest of the control centre both visually and acoustically. Therefore.4 EQUIPMENT ROOM The Equipment Room is expected to house the following: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The control room shall provide a work environment that assists the operators to effectively perform their duties.3 CONTROL ROOM The control room is the heart of the control centre. Such facilities shall include male and female toilets/washrooms and showers. The UI principally comprises of SCADA/EMS workstations and communications facilities (telephone and radio based) scanning. The duty operators must be readily available at all times in order to respond to any situation as it arises. 6. The control room decor shall incorporate relaxing colour schemes that are light. printing and plotting facilities and a rear projection display wall. It is envisaged that all power system supervisory activities will be based in a single control centre that has been sized to accommodate the anticipated expansion in the number of operator positions and facilities for the next 10 to 15 years. such as the selection of decor and furnishings. Since operators spend long periods of time within the confines of the control room. As the task of system control requires sustained vigilance and periods when high concentration is needed on the part of the operators. take ergonomics and comfort into account. All the other control centre facilities referred to above are required to support the control room activities. and other ancillary equipment. Area/room for spare parts and equipment storage A reception area A visitors viewing area Documentation library Conference and meeting rooms Domestic facilities for the Control Room staff. The colours and design shall blend aesthetically with the Control Equipment (e. Domestic facilities for the offices in general The services shall include: (a) Secure power supplies derived from different sources and a standby diesel generator and the associated distribution system (b) (c) Fire detection and fighting equipment. For this reason. Drawing Nos. The Control Room shall be adequately sound proofed against noise from adjacent rooms.g. It accommodates the operators. Lockers for up to 20 persons shall be provided. predominantly sitting in front of video monitors. Workstation & Screens & the Rear Projection Wallboard). There shall also be a fitted kitchen and a rest/dining room suitable for 6 persons for operators to use while on break or meal times. 6. Operator Desks.

g. but the need to avoid glare and reflections on screens still arises.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    The SCADA/EMS Master Station equipment The Communication terminal equipment (e.173 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2C a relative humidity around 50% +. Higher levels of illumination are normally used in equipment rooms compared to control rooms. The equipment room(s) will need to be sized to house the system proposed along with its various peripherals and data storage devices. o o o CE Communication Telecommunication Engineers SCADA Engineers individual office 1 person 2 persons Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5. Decor and wall coverings should be light but not bright and distracting and lighting is an important feature. The Equipment Rooms shall be adequately sound proofed to prevent disturbance to people working in adjacent rooms.10%. This ensures that noise from equipment cooling fans and banks of disk drives and the conversation of those using the associated maintenance terminals does not intrude on control room activities. SDH multiplexer. Equipment Room shall be designed with spare space for additional or replacement equipment in the future. provision of offices shall be made for day staff comprising:       DGM System Control – CE System Operation – CE System Operational Planning – CE Performance Monitoring (Audit)– Training Engineer – SCADA/EMS System support. o o o o o  System Administrator Software and Database Production Applications Network Applications SCADA/EMS Hardware individual office 2 persons 2 persons 2 persons 2 persons individual office individual office individual office individual office individual office Communication System Support. optical terminal box) PAX The Equipment Room shall be partitioned by a fire wall and fire door such that the redundant or duplicated devices of which the SCADA/EMS and Communication systems comprise can be installed in separated areas to avoid common mode damage by fire or fumes or fire fighting substances/actions.1 OFFICES FOR CONTROL CENTRE STAFF General In addition to the Control Room shift staff that will normally use the Control Room as their normal place of work. Air conditioning must be highly reliable and maintain conditions typically around 21 +.5 6. 6.Section 6 .

174 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . This ensures the viewing area is positioned out of the operators' line of sight. Additionally. and to the exterior of the building. This may be through a double or triple glazed window (for sound proofing) behind or to the rear or side of the operators. The space and storage facilities shall allow easy access and identification of all items. 6. A reception area with facilities for a receptionist shall be provided.8 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND TRAINING SIMULATOR ROOM The Development System and Operator Training Simulator shall be collocated in one room for the purpose of database maintenance and Operator Training.10 VISITORS' VIEWING AREA The control room will become the focal point for visitors and the Contractor shall provide an area from which visitors can view and observe the control room activities without the need to enter the control room. 6. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The workshop facilities will also be used for the maintenance of outstation and communications equipment.Section 6 .9 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ROOM A separate room shall be provided for the monitoring of the telecommunication system.6 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP FACILITIES Storage facilities shall be provided to accommodate all of the spares and test equipment delivered under the Main Contract. There shall however be at least 3 individual offices and distinct open plan areas or 4 person offices to accommodate the others. Space for a SCADA/EMS 2 screen workstation with desk shall also be provided. However. 6. will require a room within the control centre with sufficient size to house items in a logical and easily accessible manner. Workshop facilities shall be provided that are suitable for carrying out maintenance to the control centre equipment away from the control and equipment rooms.7 DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY A significant amount of hardware. The accommodation of this documentation. This workshop shall be provided with suitable access to both the control and equipment rooms. a number of technical references and technical papers should be available to the system control centre staff. 6. to facilitate the easy manoeuvring of equipment in and out of the workshop. This is to ensure that such work does not cause distraction to normal control room activities or jeopardise the operation of other equipment. along with suitable reading area and copying facilities. the design and location shall be such that reflections do not interfere with the operators‘ view or ability to read Operator screens or the Wallboard. The Bidder may propose a number of offices to accommodate these members of staff and the respective functions taking into account the functional differences. Provision shall also be made for Drivers (6). Their offices shall therefore be conveniently located to allow this access.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    Electrical Superintendents Secretarial and Clerical support Commercial and Trading support - 7 persons 7 persons 2 persons (future) The foregoing staff will require frequent access to the control room or equipment rooms albeit restricted by ‗Access‘ rights. This would serve the dual function of receiving visitors to the centre and to act as the first line access control to the control room. and operation and maintenance documentation will be required for the new systems. This room shall have sufficient space to house a 2 screen SCADA/EMS workstation and 2 persons for the Development System and for the Operator Training Simulator a 3 screen SCADA/EMS Operator Workstation and a single screen Trainer Workstation. Security (3) & Janitor (3) staff. 6. but from where the operator VDU screens and the Wallboard can be viewed. The room shall house 2 workstations for the Telecommunication Management System and 2 persons. software.

14 POWER SUPPLIES 6. electronic white board and sound system .12 MEETING ROOM A meeting room shall be provided close to the office of the DGM System Control for general meetings and for convening emergency response teams/meetings. the Contractor shall provide the following. lighting.g.1 General Requirements A secure power supply is essential for the control centre in order that the continuity of control activities is not affected by losses of power. whether wide spread or to the control complex alone. cooking facilities and sanitary services. The standby generator should also be connected to the main distribution board to provide supply to the control centre in the event of both LV in-feeds being lost. shall be provide for the supplies to the master station and communications equipment and the control room workstations.13 DOMESTIC QUARTERS Domestic quarters shall be provided for 24hour on call staff. Each infeed shall be fully rated to supply the entire control centre load and should be derived from separate diverse HV sources. training and meetings. the purpose here is to define the equipment that space shall be provided for and details particular requirements related to location and segregation: (a) A dual LV (415V) infeed to the control centre complex (b) (c) An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) with 3 hour standby battery capacity A standby diesel generator. However the two LV in-feeds are derived.14. The dual LV supplies shall be derived from different HV sources to minimise the possibility of simultaneous loss of supply from both in-feeds. The design of this room shall facilitate presentation and training and be equipped with overhead projector. In any case. a purpose built construction is necessary to ensure low noise outputs and minimal transmission of vibration and the ready removal of exhaust without disruption or discomfort of persons in the area. general services and the UPS system. This shall comprise two bedrooms.14. 6.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6. each supplying half of the total control centre load. the UPS full rated load plus the load associated with recharging the UPS battery. it is also essential that the cables carrying those supplies to the control centre's main distribution board and subsequently to the equipment distribution boards are physically segregated as far as possible to avoid points of common failure or simultaneous exposure to hazards.2 Control Centre LV In-feeds The LV in-feeds to the control centre shall be provided from two independent LV (415V AC 3-phase) infeeds. Furthermore. A similar split distribution board should be provided to distribute the supplies from the UPS.Section 6 . With this arrangement either half of the board may be taken out of service for maintenance without total disruption to the control centre's power supply. The main distribution boards shall be arranged as two interconnected boards. i.e.3 Diesel Generator Room/Enclosure The diesel generator must be located in a position that is that is above the worst case possible flood water levels. A fault tolerant form of UPS. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 6. In order to ensure high availability of supply. The detailed technical requirements are specified elsewhere. 6. e.11 CONFERENCE ROOM This room shall house a conference table for up to 15 persons for the use of visitors. lounge area.175 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 6.14. 6. The diesel generator should be rated to supply the complete control centre load including air conditioning. This shall be provided such that conditioning of the mains in-feeds and consequent protection from noise and perturbations occurring on the mains supply is assured and to permit continuity of operation should the mains in-feeds fail completely. dual redundant with static bypass. the routes taken by these in-feeds and distribution cables shall each be securely protected against external hazards.

lifts.18 HVAC Air conditioning systems shall be provided for the building in general to normal office standards. 6. under floor or ceiling cavities shall be independently fitted with detection devices. The general services LV distribution shall be separate from these. For the control and equipment rooms duplicated systems shall be provided with 2 x 100% cooling systems and fans.7 DC Supplies Separate duplicated battery backed 48V dc supplies shall be provided and these may be housed with the 415Vac UPS system and its batteries providing that he same design criteria and constraints are applied.17 LAN The offices shall be fully wired for an office LAN to normal office standards. Separate access control points shall be provided to the LV intake. eye baths etc Air cooling for this room shall be provided to ensure they operate at a temperature that does not cause deterioration and reduction in service life. 6. 6. Control Room lobby and other doors with access to the control room. This is separate to LAN equipment that is to be provided as part of the SCADA/EMS system.5 LV Distribution Panels Separate LV distribution panels shall be provided for the Main Equipment Room and Control Rooms as well for all equipment forming part of the SCADA/EMS or Telecommunication systems and the equipment assigned to supply redundant or duplicated devices from different boards. 3 with 2 capable of providing adequate ventilation). otherwise the UPS shall be segregated by a fire wall. car parks. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. basins. It is expected that forced ventilation will be required to cool the UPS equipment room.4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies A single room may be used to house the UPS system's rectifier/chargers and inverters provided that there are arrangements to by pass the UPS room. 6. In other words each of the systems shall be able to satisfy 100% of the air conditioning requirements allowing one to be out of service for maintenance. This shall be in the form of multiple fans (e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6.6 UPS Battery Room Where Nickel Cadmium or Lead Acid batteries are used the rooms shall meet the requirements for ventilation. Provision shall be made for fire fighting equipment in electrically hazardous areas and for sensitive computer and communication equipment. To achieve secure operation of the air conditioning system.15 ACCESS CONTROL An access control system is required that restricts access to persons into the building and to certain parts of the building.g. Fire fighting facilities shall be provided in accordance with local regulations.14. flameproof electrical fittings.14. To ensure faults are revealed in good time each 100% system shall automatically switch over operation to the second system on a daily basis.Section 6 . CCTV shall be provided to give views of the outside grounds. UPS area and the diesel generator. 6. 6.176 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . reception. The system shall provide access control points from the reception area and car parks for external access and internal control points for access to the Control Room and Equipment Rooms. Unmanned areas such as LV intake rooms. The CCTV viewing console shall be located in the Control Room. 6. The control room and equipment rooms shall be air-conditioned to provide both a comfortable working atmosphere for the operators and the correct operating environment for the equipment.14.16 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM A fire detection system shall be provided that enables smoke or fire to be detected in zones of the building. Cable routing shall ensure protection from hazards and segregation to prevent common exposure to hazards. it should either comprise of duplicated units or incorporate standby units.14. drainage facilities.

Section 6 . 6. It shall include the provision of ready access to all items of equipment. It is important that the design of the building and its services supports principles that are conducive to rapid repair times with minimum disturbance to other control centre functions. needs to be undertaken with this requirement in mind. The design shall provide for sufficient air cooling. floors.19 LIGHTING Lighting shall be designed to be glare free. cabling and connections so that they can be easily repaired in situ.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In the event of a power failure where the only supply is from the batteries of the UPS system (i. The luminosity levels shall be to normal office standards for the offices.e. These luminaries shall be feed from the UPS system.21 MAINTAINABILITY It is vital that the control centre facilities have an inherently high level of availability. the diesel has failed to start) some form of emergency cooling may be required to ensure the SCADA/EMS Master Station continues to function. For the Control Room controls shall be provided to enable the lights to be dimmed to set a comfortable working environment where viewing of screen based data is not impaired. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. This may be achieved by providing ample free space around items of equipment and by the use of a raised 'computer floor' or channelling to accommodate cables. 6. or replaced. avoid reflections on VDU screens and the rear projection screens. In support of preventative maintenance all surface materials within the control centre including ceilings. and wall coverings should be selected to prevent the generation of static electricity and should be non-dust producing. 6.177 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . ventilation and dehumidification to be run from the UPS backed power supply. Equipment rooms shall be illuminated to normal standards for working with machinery. removed for repair elsewhere.20 MATERIALS Generally materials used for the construction and fitting out of the building shall be of high quality and to the required national or international standards. The design of the control centre. particularly the control and equipment rooms. In addition to any statutory emergency lighting a set of luminaries shall be provided in the Control Room that have sufficient luminosity to allow Operators to continue work at their control room desks in the event of supply failure.

air conditioning) to ensure continuous operation. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. including: i. For example. Communication with at least 98% of in service Outstations Data acquisition. correction and message retry mechanisms shall be provided to overcome soft errors. the System must always be able to determine if data has not been received successfully). reliably and efficiently over this period. without loss of any SCADA/EMS functionality and without degradation of System performance.98%. iv.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 7. For communication channels to each Outstation – 99. The System shall incorporate facilities to automatically recover lost data. The Bidder shall describe the self-checks carried out by the System offered and provide an estimate of the proportion of possible faults revealed by such checks. RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS It is a fundamental requirement that the System (and individual items of equipment within it) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and standard existing software used within the System shall have been proven in service. the System includes mains power supplies and the communication links that are used by the SCADA/EMS Master Station for communications with subsystems (principally Outstations) located remotely from the NSCC. The replacement parts necessary to achieve this reliability shall be defined in the Bid.2    AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS For the SCADA/EMS Master Station . In this context.178 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .995 and a MTTR of 12 hours 7. The basic equipment life expectancy shall be at least fifteen years provided that normal routine maintenance is carried out. It shall not be possible for the System to enter a state whereby loss of data is not deterministic (i.98%: a) All real time functions for which the System is designed. including the compilation of historical data records Supervisory controls EMS applications b) One less than the normal complement of User Interfaces in control rooms c) One less than the normal complement of hardcopy peripherals provided for real time output in the control rooms d) Mains supply from the UPS system e) Adequate environmental control (e. The System's response to all corrupted message types shall be defined. standby equipment and standby database information shall be automatically checked to ensure that successful changeover can take place when required. iii. ii.2. random errors and burst data errors. 7.99. the System shall automatically carry out sufficient self-checks to ensure that the overall availability of the System is not impaired due to the occurrence of unrevealed faults.Section 6 .e.1 SCADA/EMS Availability The System availability shall be at least: The following SCADA/EMS facilities are the minimum that shall be available with a probability of 99. following the failure of single items of media or subsystems. Error detection.g.99% and a MTTR of 12 hours. In operation. The equipment shall be designed to operate safely. assuming a 4 hour Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) For Outstations supplied under this contract – 99. The overall System design shall incorporate redundancy to enable the System to continue to operate. Calculations shall be presented to show the probability of single and multiple bit errors in messages escaping detection and possibly causing an incorrect response.

The overall assessment of System reliability shall be provided in the form of an overall System block diagram with each main item shown.2. The reliability calculation for constituent printed circuit boards shall be based on ML-HDBK-217 or other comparable standard. unidentified causes) b) Faults shall be categorised according to their nature c) Unrevealed faults causing loss of essential functions (once identified) shall be considered a serious non compliance Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Calculations for the availability of the System shall be included in the Bidder's offer. normal. together with information on the source of any theoretical or practical data used. complete with its reliability data. e.2 Communication System Availability A communication channel is considered unavailable when no routing to an Outstation is available or end to end service is not available. reflecting the increasing depth of design detail. systematic software. These shall be based upon the Mean Time Between Failure of items of equipment and a Mean Time To Repair stated above. 7.3 AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS Theoretical and practical figures shall be given in the Bid Schedules for the reliability of each individual unit of the System in terms of Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). clearly stating the effects of any subsystem or media failure on the availability and response of the essential SCADA/EMS functions. the reliability in terms of MTBF shall be shown for other specific failure modes detailed by the Bidder. The Bidder shall state the methodology of the analysis and the source of the reliability figures.4 VERIFICATION The verification of reliability and availability of the system shall be realised by maintaining a register of all failures and restoration times which will be compared with the guaranteed characteristics for MTBF/MTTR and the specified criteria. In addition to the overall System reliability block diagram. random hardware.Section 6 . Reliability figures of existing equipment shall be supported by evidence from operational experience at similar types of installation.3 Outstation Availability An Outstation is considered unavailable when: a) Software malfunction affecting normal operation b) Any function is lost for all points of a single type c) More than one input card or output card of the same type fails d) One input card or output card of each type fails e) Communication with the Master is not possible because of Outstation failure f) 48Vdc power supply failure. as the design phase of the project proceeds. The calculation of overall reliability shall be provided with this diagram. The Contractor shall update availability calculations. The Bidder shall describe in detail the failure modes of the entire System. 7.g. exponential.179 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . environmentally induced. etc.2. This shall include: a) All assumptions made b) Assumed failure distribution. 7.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 7. The method to be applied for defined system availability shall include: a) Comparison of the availability of the system (as defined above) with the specified requirements – all failures that cause the loss of the defined essential functions will be considered as failures regardless of their nature (e.g.

Section 6 . During this period the Contractor shall also keep a register and provide written reports of all identified faults (whether they cause loss of essential functions or not). Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. This method shall be adopted to monitor the reliability and availability during the Site Acceptance procedures and until the end of the Defects Liability Period. that explain their causes.180 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . action taken and any implications for the future operation of the system.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d) The calculation of availability of the essential functions shall be the sum of the unavailable times for one or more of these functions divided by the total time expressed as a percentage.

namely:    Type testing Subsystem testing System testing.1 8. The principle of testing shall be that. UPS System. but all aspects must be to the satisfaction of the Employer.2 Responsibilities The Contractor's responsibilities shall include but not be limited to requirements to:   Produce written Test Plans. Inspection of incoming goods and components. to provide a high level of confidence to the Contractor and the Employer (or the Employer‘s designated and authorised representative) that subsequent stages can proceed.1. testing and setting to work the ‗System‘ includes the existing Outstations. at stages throughout the work. test record sheets and procedures for fault reporting. The test methodology shall complement the design methodology and the two shall be developed in parallel. The degree to which the Employer intervenes in the process will depend upon the level of confidence built up during the project. for all tests All test documentation associated with a subsystem or system test shall be submitted for approval by the Employer at least 12 weeks prior to the commencement of the associated test Ensure that all test documentation associated with any testing has achieved Category I approval (See Clause 11. shall be undertaken by the Contractor in accordance with the procedures set out in the Contractor's own Quality Plan and are not described here.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8. The 'System' is defined as the interconnection of all Subsystems and any other equipment which will eventually comprise all of the equipment supplied under this contract (with the exception of spares). Outstations. Operator consoles. This Specification covers the higher levels of complexity. test equipment. Procedures. test software. formal tests shall be performed and recorded against written test specifications. and subassembly testing. if necessary) in collaboration with the Employer and related contractor(s). Type testing is required to verify that the equipment meets with the specified environmental conditions. In the context of interfacing. method statements.7 ) from the Employer prior to the commencement of the corresponding testing Provide the equipment. location and purpose of each stage. 'Subsystems' are defined as single items or small groups of closely related equipment (including software) such as Printers.1 GENERAL Approach to Testing The testing for the SCADA/EMS System. rather it sets out the stages at which tests are required and the subjects. This document does not constitute a Test Specification or Test Procedure for any part of the system. 8.181 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . INSPECTION AND TESTING PHILOSOPHY 8. personnel and facilities to conduct the test (described further in the next Clause) Successfully carry out all tests according to the approved test procedures and correct any errors prior to the witnessed acceptance tests    Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Telecommunication Equipment and Power Supplies shall ensure that the equipment functionality is thoroughly exercised and validated at the Contractor's premises before delivery and commissioning.Section 6 . Schedules. The responsibility for specifying.1. conducting and recording tests shall be with the Contractor. All Test Documentation for all tests shall be written by the Contractor and submitted to the Employer for approval at least 12 weeks before they are first used. The Contractor under this Contract shall undertake to coordinate the System testing (and Subsystem testing. etc. Workstations. Communication System and network media (OPGW. PLC etc) and their interfaces as well as new Outstations that are put into service under other projects during the currency of this contract.

8. emulators. to permit full testing of System functions and performance Other items of the System.3 Test Equipment and Facilities The Contractor shall provide all equipment and services required for testing. All test instruments shall be subject to approval by the Employer and. All test instruments shall be subject to routine inspection. and subassembly tests. specified elsewhere as being part of the Contractor's supply. testing and calibration by the Contractor. It is expressly the responsibility of the Contractor to satisfy himself that items 'supplied by others' are in a satisfactory condition for the Contractor's tests to be conducted. simulators and test software. but approval by the Employer shall not imply any diminution of the Contractor's responsibilities. systems following installation e) Site Update Period   To update and verify the SCADA/EMS database Point to Point testing of each outstation signal f) System SAT Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. even if not part of the Subsystem under test Consumables. shall be performed in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Plan. 8. shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by an approved standards laboratory.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    Provide facilities for the Employer to witness any Factory tests Produce permanent records of all test progress and results in a formal systematic manner Carry out all remedial work and re-testing necessary for the equipment to pass the tests Each of the above responsibilities shall be discharged to the satisfaction of the Employer. All test software shall be subject to formal quality assurance requirements stipulated elsewhere in the Specification. including. Software production and integration testing shall be performed in accordance with the Software Requirements of this specification and the Contractor's Quality Plan.1.Section 6 . subsystems. The stages of testing to be performed at higher levels shall be based on the following: a) Type Testing  To prove that the equipment supplied meets with the specified environmental conditions b) Subsystem Factory  To prove the design of a Subsystem prior to the Subsystem being used in the System FAT c) System FAT  To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements d) Site Installation Tests  To check the operation of equipment. but not limited to:     Laboratory test instruments Special test equipment. if required by the Employer.182 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant .1.4 Testing Stages Inspection of incoming goods and components.

4(a). stability and robustness of the SCADA/EMS System 8.9 Failures The Contractor shall correct all faults found during testing. 8. shall be taken by the Contractor and copies sent to the Employer within three weeks of completion of the tests. (e). 8. The Contractor shall advise the Employer in writing of the actual date of commencement of every test in Clause 8. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The test shall only be repeated when the fault has been remedied and the equipment demonstrated to function correctly.1.8 Conduct of the Tests The Contractor shall conduct the tests in accordance with the approved test procedures. Separate test procedures and result sheets shall be provided for factory and site acceptance tests. 8.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification  To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements and interacts correctly with equipment supplied by others and interfacing to the Works g) Tests on Completion   500 Hour Trial Period 'Hands on' test period (following System SAT) to demonstrate the reliability.1. and shall enter the results in the result sheets. Test results from the prior tests shall be made available to the Employer on request. the Employer will determine whether the test has passed or failed. but some other unexpected or unexplained event occurred which the Employer considers to be a fault Full use shall be made during the tests of operator manuals and other documentation provided by the Contractor.6 Test Procedures and Result Sheets The Contractor shall prepare test procedures and result sheets for all tests.Section 6 .183 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1. using the test procedures and result sheets described in Clause 8. (f)and (g). The Employer shall have the right to witness any tests whether conducted at the Contractor's premises or elsewhere. He shall also prepare a cross reference listing to show that all of the requirements of the Functional Design Specification have been included in the tests.1. to indicate the readiness of the equipment for tests to commence.6. and shall arrange for the test to be repeated. at least six weeks in advance of the tests. 8. (d).1. Test result sheets will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. For each test.5 Notice & Witnessing of Tests The Contractor shall provide. Any revisions to the test documents found necessary as a result of the prior tests shall be made before the commencement of formal tests. a master plan showing the scheduled dates of testing and shall provide updates to this plan. to provide a series of tests of their accuracy. (c). whether witnessed or not. (b). at least 10 working days before the commencement.7 Contractor's Prior Tests The Contractor shall successfully complete a prior run of all tests. before the commencement of the formal tests. In general. Records of every test. as part of the Programme of Work documentation. the test will be considered to have failed if either:   The result of the test is not in accordance with the expected result described in the test procedure.1. or The result of the test is in accordance with the expected result described in the test procedure. when any changes are known.1. All test procedures and result sheets will be subject to review and approval by the Employer.

The report shall clearly show:      The most likely cause of the failure An analysis of any stress that may have been caused to other components of the equipment being tested as a result of the failure Whether the failure is a result of any component operating outside its design range Whether any design changes should be made to avoid further failures All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. The Employer shall have the right to order the repeat or abandonment of any test in the event that results demonstrate that the equipment is significantly non-compliant with the Contract requirements.1. including accommodation. the Contractor shall generate a software failure report. the Contractor shall investigate the failure and prepare a report on its cause(s) and design implications. If the Employer is required to return to the Contractor's premises or the test site to witness such re-tests then time spent by the personnel concerned in travelling to the site of and witnessing such re-tests.Section 6 . will be charged to the Contractor at cost. The fault log will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. subsistence and travel charges. which shall determine the future conduct of test. 8. Test categories shall be as defined in Table 7.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where remedial measures involve significant modifications that might. will be charged to the Contractor.1.13 Hardware Failure Reports For each hardware failure that occurs at any stage of testing. 8. In this event.11 of this Section. Time spent by the Employer and his representatives witnessing re-tests.10 Fault Categories The Employer will allocate a category to each fault. in the Employer‘s opinion. 8. Every fault detected during the tests will be entered in the log.184 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . affect the validity of earlier tests then the Contractor shall repeat the earlier tests and obtain satisfactory results before repeating the test in which the fault was first identified.1. together with the actions taken to clear and re-test the fault. the suspension shall remain in effect until reporting has been brought up to date to the satisfaction of the Employer. The Employer shall have the right to suspend any test in the event that errors or failures have become unacceptable. All other costs incurred by the Employer as a result of such re-tests.12 Fault Log The Contractor shall maintain a fault log throughout each series of tests.1. The report shall clearly show:    The observed symptoms The likely cause The fault category (from Table 1) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 8.1.1. shall be charged to the Contractor at the standard hourly rate for the personnel concerned.14 Software Failure Reports For each software failure that occurs.1. The Employer shall also have the right to suspend any test in the event of a fault being detected by the Contractor but not reported to the Employer within 24 hours. 8. or waiting at the Contractor's premises or the test site while corrections are made prior to re-test. without in any way prejudicing his rights under Clause 8.11 Repeat Tests The Contractor shall correct and re-test every fault detected during the tests. once the software has been approved for inclusion into the system and is subject to configuration control. and all charges incurred by them in so doing.

the type tests should also demonstrate that the equipment does not exceed accepted standards in terms of its impact on its environment (noise.185 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . Minor fault. All software modules affected. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8. and subsequently considered to be a normal acceptable occurrence. Testing may continue at the discretion of the Engineer. but requiring explanation and. Major fault affecting the functionality being tested in the session. The fault must be rectified before retest of the affected test sessions or sessions.). Deficiency in the ability of the test or test equipment to demonstrate the function being tested in the session.1: FAULT CATEGORIES Category 0 Definition An item recorded as a fault during testing. accompanied by a proposed schedule of tests to be performed for each item of equipment. Repeatable fault not affecting the functionality being tested in the session. All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the SCADA/EMS system. Repeatable fault affecting the functionality being tested in the session. testing may continue. Discussion is needed to establish the most appropriate action. electromagnetic (radiated and conducted). Testing may continue. The error will usually be amended during the test and the test will continue. Where appropriate. at the discretion of Employer. Discussion is needed to establish the most appropriate course of action. Testing may proceed on other sessions if permitted by the Engineer. rain etc. Non-repeatable fault affecting functionality being tested in the session. Documentation error or deficiency. mechanical (transport vibration. In general. in some cases. An event not affecting the functionality being tested in that session. correction. handling knocks. TABLE 8. The corrective action taken. wind. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The documentation shall be corrected before the tests are considered complete. The fault must be rectified before recommencing testing. be waived. If the submitted type test results are satisfactory then the type tests specified may. The action taken will depend on the severity of the fault.). The environmental factors include climatic (temperature humidity.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The report shall also clearly show the following information that shall be entered when the failure has been investigated:    The actual cause of the failure. type test results shall show that the equipment being proposed for this Contract will perform in accordance with its design specification in the environments to which it will be subject in its application on this Contract. earthquake stresses) and chemical (salt laden atmosphere).2 TYPE TESTS Full details of type tests performed on equipment identical to that being offered shall be submitted with the offer. mains harmonics etc. Other fault not covered above.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3 General FAT Requirements It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the Test Documentation for the FAT to the satisfaction of the Employer.3. maintainability and operability. (The extent of this testing will be dependent on the extent and nature of the subsystem tests) 3. The Contractor shall have completed his own internal system integration tests prior to commencement of the System FAT. All corresponding inspection. The FAT shall not commence until all documentation associated with the FAT including Test Plan.1 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS Subsystem FAT A Subsystem Factory Acceptance Test shall include the inspection. The tests shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises. disks. the System will be ready for delivery to site. Partial shipment may take place. emulate or simulate those parts of the ‗System‘ to be eventually provided. functional and performance specification. Tests shall be conducted to prove the integrated functioning of the system as a whole and shall include (but not be limited to) the following: 1.3. of equipment that has been successfully factory tested (and the corresponding test records have been reviewed by the Employer) and is not required to form part of the System FAT. Test Specifications. System performance in the face of various contingencies 6.186 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . but not be limited to. Hardware functionality including firmware and operating system level software tests on CPU. hardware test and software test of any clearly identifiable Subsystem. The System shall be inspected to ensure that all interfaces mate correctly and that the System is complete. and component and subassembly test documentation shall be complete and available for inspection prior to the commencement of a subsystem FAT. The System equipment will not be allowed on site until the FAT has been successfully completed and the Employer has reviewed the corresponding test records. I/O interfaces etc. the following: (a) Order of Tests.Section 6 . Integrated system tests to prove the functionality of all applications software in the context of the complete integrated system.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8. It is required that the results of the test shall demonstrate System reliability and availability consistent with the values specified and those guaranteed by the Contractor. performance.3 8. 8. equipment and software configuration 4. The test shall prove that the Subsystem meets its particular physical. prior to use as a component in a System test. System performance tests to demonstrate that the integrated system can achieve the guaranteed levels of response and to determine the limits of the response envelope 5. stability and robustness (b) Inspection. Hardware inspection 2. The test shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises. Test Procedures and Test Record Sheets have achieved Category I approval. Coverage shall include. The System FAT shall commence only if all associated subsystems have successfully completed their individual FAT to the satisfaction of the Employer. The System shall then be tested as a whole to prove that it meets the Specification in all aspects of function. Soak test to give an indication of system reliability.2 System FAT The System FAT shall combine all Subsystems and shall include other equipment that shall represent. Upon satisfactory completion of the test.3. capacity. by agreement with the Employer. 8.

Tests shall include: 1. cabling. 3. quantities of items etc (c) Test Conditions. No repairs or adjustments shall be carried out during the test period unless agreed by both parties. Where there is redundancy in the equipment the test period shall be divided equally between the redundant parts. and all corresponding documentation shall be complete and available for inspection. Data highway loading tests Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All subsystem components shall have been successfully inspected and tested. Each subsystem and/or each module shall be tested cyclically at least once per hour whilst all other parts are functioning normally. 5.Section 6 . 8. remote terminals) and/or simulation devices shall be provided by the Contractor to ensure that the Design System Loading conditions can be achieved and System performance demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer 10. Adequate accessibility 4. RAM write/read tests 3. The tests shall be carried out at the prevailing ambient conditions of temperature and humidity. 4. It need not be permanently manned throughout this period provided that a comprehensive log of operations tested and faults occurring is printed. Verification of model numbers. as necessary.g. Compliance with the Specification and reviewed drawings (including compliance with fire safety and materials requirements) 5. Sufficient hardware (e. Disc write/read tests 4. The printing and recording equipment needed for conducting the test shall be run throughout the test. 7. The Contractor shall provide all the software necessary to carry out the tests. 6. CPU tests 2. may be omitted from the tests if agreed by the Engineer. no special conditioning is required (d) Computer Equipment. Online loading and all functions shall be tested under these worst case conditions. The equipment shall be complete at the start of the tests and no interchange of modules or equipment shall be allowed. Correct identification labels. All modules must remain powered up for the duration of the test 9. The test shall run for at least 200 hours continuously. the equipment shall be inspected to ensure: 1. The conditions of the tests shall be no less rigorous than: 1. housing and mounting etc 3. Automatic changeover is not permissible. 2. tagging. Correct standards of workmanship and quality 2. Test equipment and test software shall be provided to load the equipment to a greater extent than the worst case predicted for the complete system. such as electromechanical peripherals.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Prior to commencement of the tests. All parts subject to wear.187 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All necessary maintenance and adjustments shall be carried out before commencement of the test so that the tests can continue uninterrupted by routine operations.

Demonstrate that communication systems do not interfere with each other (e. control and configuration of the network. every function specified for the system in the Functional Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. (h) Functional Tests During the functional tests. Loss of Link procedures 3. all configurable databases. all software for which source code is supplied under the Contract shall be reassembled and/or recompiled from source. The resulting object code shall be re-linked and used for the tests.g. Similarly. The tests shall use a simulated network. a real network. Data integrity in the presence of noise 2. (e) Communication (i) Tests shall include. Demonstration of network management functions 5. where practical. The initial System soak test shall have a minimum duration of 100 hours. Loading 2. Peripheral tests 6. The time shall be calculated as the number of hours continuously connected and running. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. linkers and generation/startup utilities identical to any of those supplied under the Contract. (g) Soak Test Each subsystem soak test shall be carried out over a period of time sufficient to fully prove the correct functioning of the equipment comprising the subsystem. Before commencement of the functional tests. Messages shall also be output periodically indicating continuing successful operation.188 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5. or where practical. where appropriate: 1. All errors or problems shall be printed out. cross-talk) or with other systems 4. Both positive and negative tests shall be carried out. assemblers. Efficiency 5. screen displays and reports shall be regenerated from source. Availability and functionality of alarm and indication facilities Tests shall use simulated loads that present similar characteristics to those in the finally integrated system. All of these activities shall use compilers. Supply Quality 3. Switching and automatic switchover sequences 4. (f) Power Supplies (i) Tests shall include: 1.Section 6 . Programming. The tests shall use a simulated network or. Workstation equipment test Tests shall exercise communication ports and shall overload ports so that queuing of messages occurs. a real network. The equipment shall perform successfully without errors or failures that are inconsistent with the reliability and availability criteria of the System design.

8.3. The master station SCADA database shall be configured and populated with all system specific data.4 Specific Test Requirements 8. in particular. the Contractor shall include at least one Outstation of each type to be supplied. Simulation shall be used to represent the remaining Outstations. system loading tests.Section 6 . (k) Outstations For the purposes of FAT and. for the fully extended system. as part of this Contract shall communicate with Outstations and/or equipment that can simulate their functionality and performance. during which the Employer shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of the system.3. (j) Unstructured Tests In addition to the structured tests described above. All simulations must be substantiated to show that they provide a realistic simulation of the associated Outstations and the Master Station / Outstation communication process and data acquisition processing.1 Master Stations For this Factory Acceptance Test. all factory acceptance tests shall include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing. All system graphic displays. tabular displays.3. As a minimum the following shall be tested: Data acquisition and processing Alarm and Event Processing Measured and Metered Value Processing Calculated values Operator Interaction Authority Control and Processing Graphics Displays Tagging and hand dressing Reporting and Archiving Performance .2 Outstations For this Factory Acceptance Test each type of Outstation to be supplied as part of this Contract shall communicate with a master station or a master station simulator that can simulate the functionality and performance of a master station. log reports etc shall be constructed for the test.4.data handling capacity and response times Data and graphic display management Multi-processor management including power fail/auto start-up Hardware and software diagnostics ICCP functionality Other data exchange facilities Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.189 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (i) Performance Tests The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements. Suitable simulation shall be provided for Outstation types that are existing and that will be interfaced with. As a minimum the following shall be tested:                8.4. each Master Station to be supplied.

Where appropriate the automatic re-routing of circuits shall be demonstrated and the levels of disturbance to the directly affected services and services on the alternate route assessed. The functionality of the Telecommunication Management System (TMS) shall be thoroughly tested including the circuit and hardware configuration. During the FATs.4. Tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that the telecommunication network is entirely compatible with the Master Station and the Outstations and that it provides the required level of service.25 m from the equipment with cubicle door closed or protective cover in place. The routing of all circuits. The FATs shall be arranged to represent working conditions as closely as possible. shall be verified. Prior to the tests the EMS network model shall be validated using the results of a 'bench marked' off-line load flow program.3 Energy Management Software The EMS network model shall be configured and parameterised and the database populated with all system specific data. For this test the complete telecommunication network equipment shall be staged at the supplier's premises including the core system.Section 6 .3. time tagging. anticipated in the field. b. the Contractor shall demonstrate that: a. The equipment meet the following EMC requirements with respect to: o Radiated immunity to a 5 W hand held VHF transceiver operating at distance of 0. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. The units operate correctly when connected as a system in its operational configuration. and alarm and event handling and archiving. the peripheral network.4. Links shall be set up with the maximum design optical budget loss and tests carried out to show that minimum levels of service quality are maintained. de-bounce filtering and time synchronisation Communications processing including multi-porting functions Data management Hardware and software diagnostics Compliance with communications protocols IEC 60870-5-101 and 104 8.190 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and the network management system.4 Telecommunication The telecommunication network shall undergo Factory Acceptance Testing. The test set up shall include a test SCADA Master Station and a number of Outstations. c. All functions of the test equipment offered shall be tested fully. The performance is in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. As a minimum the following shall be tested:        All Network Analysis Applications All Forecasting and Scheduling Applications All AGC functions All Hydro Chain Control functions All Study Mode Network Analysis Applications Operator Training Simulator All Network Management Applications 8.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification         Analogue and digital inputs and outputs Command outputs Pulse inputs Scanning. As the system will be integrated with the existing SDH and PLC equipment these shall be suitably simulated or emulated in order that the interface and interaction with these may be proven.

all configurable databases. c. class IV). Laser diode bias current measurement. Transmission rate. f. o o o o o During the functional tests. User interfaces. In addition to the structured tests described above. Nominal operating wavelength. Digital. Voice recording equipment. b. all factory acceptance tests shall include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing. Digital power line carrier system. Receiver sensitivity. High frequency test (VDE 0435/T303. d. The power supply limits and tolerances are complied with. as a minimum. e. SDH Communication System The tests on the SDH communication system shall.25 m from the equipment with cubicle door closed or protective cover in place. Optical output power measurement. Electromagnetic fields (IEC 60801-3. l. class III.191 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 8. f. VF channel measurement. during which the Employer and/or its representatives shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of the system. ANSI C37.4. Similarly.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification o Radiated immunity to a GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) phone operating at distance of 0. h. b. Data channel measurement. k.90.1 SDH communication system. g. Electrostatic discharge (IEC 60801-2. c. All of these activities shall use compilers. d. electrical and optical interfaces. e. screen displays and reports shall be regenerated from source. every function specified for the system in the Contractor‘s Functional Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone PAX equipment. i. FATs shall include the following telecommunication sub-systems or equipment components: a. assemblers. Channel capacity. class III).2) Rapid transients (IEC 60801-4. Telecommunication management system. linkers and generation/startup utilities identical to any of those supplied under the Contract. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3.Section 6 . The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements.4. include: a. Bit error rate measurements with optical attenuation representative of the link design budgets and also at the equipment design limits. Analogue and digital service channels. class III). j.

Alarm facilities. c. h. End to end circuit management. e. f. Teleprotection Signalling Equipment The tests on the protection signalling equipment shall. Failure modes and recovery. Alarm and network management functions. b.192 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4. 8. h. Telecommunication Management System The tests on the telecommunication management system shall. include: a.3. Automatic reconfiguration of traffic requirements and channel re-allocation. f. as a minimum. b. d. Alarm and network management functions. Integration interfaces with existing network. o.3. g. Interfaces with other telecommunication sub-systems or equipment components. Receiver dynamic range.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification m. Power supply limits. Channel capacity. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. i. i. d.4. Transmitter output level. d. Power supply limits. Reports and system archiving. 8. r.3 Performance monitoring and fault co-ordination facilities. User interfaces. Signal boost facility. Transmission time.4 Transmission rate. g. q. Power supply limits. c. c. Alarm functions. e. Digital Power Line Carrier System The tests on the power line carrier system shall. System programming. System redundancy and programming. Transmitter output level. n. Different failure modes such as main and standby changeover. p. Engineer‘s order wire equipment operation.3. as a minimum. as a minimum.4. e.4.4. 8. b. include: a.2 Engineer‘s order wire equipment operation. include: a.4. Bit error rate measurements.Section 6 . System configuration and channel assignment.

4. l. e. Analogue and digital interfaces. 8. k. Telephone PAX Equipment The tests on the administrative telephone PAX equipment shall. g.4. b. Alarm and network management functions. Switching facilities. Extension facilities.3. e. Voice Recording Equipment The tests on the voice recording equipment shall. f. Power supply variations. System configuration functions. include: a.5 Power Supplies The UPS System and Diesel Generator shall undergo Factory Acceptance Testing.4.4. Transmission performance. d. Full rang of loading tests with efficiency and supply quality measured Response to step load changes Switchover sequences Failure modes and configuration tests Tests for charging batteries It will not be necessary to test the batteries to be delivered under this contract although inspection may be carried out at the option of the Employer. 8. h. Power supply limits. d. Operator console functions. as a minimum. Telephone network signalling system. Redundant processors functions. c. VF and E&M signalling levels.6 Traffic handling capacity.4.3. d.4 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING Site Acceptance Testing shall comprise the following stages: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. m.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification f. Search and play back functions. e. b. c. i. b. 8. g.193 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 In service loop test. These tests may be carried out in the respective manufacturer‘s works. include: a. Alarm functions. c.Section 6 . 8. The tests shall comprise: a. Batteries used duting the FAT shall be those provided by the manufacturer at their test facilities. Automatic call logging functions. Tie line interface. Power supply limits. Interfaces with PAX equipment. as a minimum. Equivalent loads shall be used for the tests. j.3.

1 General SAT Requirements It must be emphasised that all testing that requires an interface to operational equipment must only be carried out after prior agreement with the Employer and adequate advance notice shall be given to the Employer by the Contractor of their intent to conduct testing involving operational equipment.194 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and the Employer will carry out all operational switching in accordance with a programme that will be prepared and agreed in advance between the Employer and the Contractor. They shall meet the appropriate requirements for the Factory Acceptance Test specified in Clause 8.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification      Site Installation Tests Site Update Period System Integrated Tests System Performance Tests Tests on Completion After equipment has been erected and connected up on site.3(General FAT Requirements) of this Section of the Specification. The Employer shall have the right. 8. The general requirements for testing and factory testing set out in preceding clauses of this Section are applicable to Site testing. in this volume of the Bid Documents. Tests shall be subject to the Employer‘s standard safety procedures. It shall conform to the relevant requirements for test documentation set out in Section 11. All errors or problems shall be printed out. Documentation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the Test Documentation for the SATs to the satisfaction of the Employer. to waive some tests and require additional tests to be carried out if findings on Site indicate additional or alternative tests are required to properly demonstrate that the works comply with the requirements of the Contract. the following requirements shall be met: a) Commissioning It shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The test plan shall indicate test precedence and dependencies and should be co-ordinated with the Contractor‘s general programme of work. The test plan will be subject to the approval of the Employer and should be closely coordinated with the Employer in terms of the availability of plant for testing and the timely provision of the associated permits to work. In addition. c) Testing to Plant Initial setting to work and all subsequent 'live' tests will be directed by Employer.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. independent of any factory tests. Messages shall also be output periodically indicating continuing successful operation. the Contractor shall carry out to the satisfaction of Employer such tests as may be required to prove compliance with the Specification. within the scope of definite work. b) Duration and Downtime Each stage of the testing shall be carried out over a period of time sufficient to fully prove the correct functioning of the equipment. to fully commission the System in such a manner as to enable trained operators to use the System.Section 6 . In support of the Site testing activities. the Contractor shall prepare an overall test plan that covers all testing to be carried out on Site. The equipment shall perform successfully without errors or failures that are inconsistent with the reliability and availability criteria of the System design. and carried out jointly by Employer and the Contractor and third parties responsible for the Telecommunications and Outstation Works.

The process of testing this mapping may take up to 6 months to complete for existing stations and will be an ongoing task as new Outstations under other projects are ready for service.3. The scheduling of Site Installation Tests shall be subject to coordination with the installation and testing schedules of equipment of other suppliers. to the satisfaction of the Employer. the Contractor shall establish.4. Coarse tuning of EMS applications. 8. CEB HQ and each substation and generating station location. The scope of the re-testing shall be agreed with the Employer on a case-by-case basis. delivery and installation on site. to which the Subsystem is designed to interface. The communication installed at the NSCC. They will typically include the following steps: a) Local Tests for new Outstations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Test procedures for point to point testing shall be agreed in detail with the Employer and must include a plan for the phased change over from any existing remote control and monitoring systems to the new system with the minimum of interruption to the Employer‘s operational capability. If test results are invalidated by subsequent actions then re-testing will be necessary. 8. the equipment or subsystem shall be considered ready for the next stage of testing. UPS System The purpose of these tests is to prove that the equipment or subsystems have not been damaged during packaging.195 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4.1 SCADA/EMS Database The Contractor shall work in coordination with the Employer‘s staff to complete and verify the SCADA/EMS database. displays and or the system code. On completion of the tests. The activities shall include but not be limited to:     Completion and verification of network modelling fixed and variable data. Digital power line carrier equipment.3. Telecommunication management system.4. Telephone system. Fibre optic communication system. 8. Setting up of reports with live data/inputs. Setting up of Load Forecast application with live data/inputs. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment. to prove that the equipment or subsystem is operating correctly and interfaces correctly to equipment and services on that site. These procedures should identify when previous test results may no longer be valid due to subsequent changes on the system.Section 6 . Once an Outstation installation is complete and has been configured.4. quality procedures that ensure the validity of the results of previous testing are systematically reviewed following subsequent changes in the database.3 Site Update Period During this period the SCADA/EMS database will be brought up to date and the correct connectivity from the Master Station to plant shall be verified. Therefore.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8.2          Site Installation Tests A site installation test shall be conducted on each part of the system comprising: SCADA/EMS Master Station.2 Point To Point Testing Site acceptance test procedures for the new SCADA equipment shall ensure that the SCADA database and displays are correctly mapped onto the Outstation input output connections to the plant. DCC. it shall be tested without connection to plant or to the Master Station.

4. Conditions and constraints on site may require a different approach to the regime outlined above and a detailed procedure will have to be agreed with the Employer prior to the testing being undertaken. 8. The Contractor shall satisfy himself by testing and other necessary means that the physical communication links between locations supplied by others meets the Contractor's requirements. output signals from the Outstation should be simulated at the cross-connection terminals and correct receipt by the plant confirmed. the links in all input circuits may be left closed but output circuits shall be opened.Section 6 .4. The System SAT shall be conducted after all the various elements of the System have been installed in the field and have all successfully completed their individual Site Installation Tests and the Site Update activities are complete. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Once robust and stable communications have been established and proven between an RTU and the master stations the plant should then be placed in a ―safe‖ situation for personnel and for the power network according to the Employer‘s safety rules. Similarly. If the Outstation and Master Station are stable and operate correctly during this period then with the agreement of all parties those Outstations for which full point to point testing is complete can be transferred to full SCADA monitoring and control.5 Site Acceptance Tests .SCADA The System Site Acceptance (System SAT) Tests for the main SCADA system shall be conducted on all the interconnected equipment forming the Contractor's scope of supply. c) Stability Tests Each Outstation should operate for at least two weeks monitoring only mode. The correction of deficiencies in such equipment shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor. Once this testing is complete and all problems remedied and retested. The Contractor's test plan shall take due account of the requirement to coordinate testing with third parties responsible for equipment to which the SCADA Master Station is designed to interface. This will allow all RTU input and output connections to be closed at the cross connections in the Marshalling Cubicles. Direct ―end to end‖ or ―point to point‖ testing shall then be carried out to demonstrate the correctness of the mapping between the Master Station database and displays and the connections to the plant.4 System Site Acceptance Tests .EMS Site acceptance test procedures for the EMS applications software shall include tests to demonstrate the functionality and performance of all EMS applications. With the agreement of the Employer the System SAT may commence once a predefined number of Outstations have had their point to point testing completed. Those outstations involving substation automation or DCS schemes will also require slightly different approach although the overall objective will be the same. Where necessary to complete the work the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating point-topoint testing activities with third parties responsible for the supply of existing Outstations and new ones provided under concurrent projects. b) ‗Safe Plant‘ Tests Data communication to the master station shall be established for an Outstation following satisfactory completion of local testing. together with equipment of other suppliers to which the System is designed to interface. This test shall demonstrate that the overall design of the System meets the functional and performance requirements of the Specification in the field. 8. These tests shall be undertaken once the SCADA system is fully tested and operating in a stable and reliable manner.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification On completion of plant adaptation works in a substation or generating station the correctness of the works shall be tested by activating each connection on the plant and checking the correct signal is received at the cross connection terminals in the Marshalling Cubicles. Testing to / from the Outstation shall be carried out using a local GUI or Laptop test device that emulates the master station. provided that the deficiencies have not resulted from inadequate definition and specification of requirements on the part of the Contractor.196 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . using the actual communications network and including equipment supplied by others. To ensure prompt remedial action to be instigated the Contractor shall report any deficiencies in such equipment to the Employer fully in writing on their discovery. to which the System is designed to interface.

7 Readiness to Commence Tests on Completion The Contractor may apply to commence the Tests On Completion when the Employer is satisfied that the Site Acceptance Testing and commissioning has shown that the works as a whole comply with the specification and that: a. d. 8. The system is complete and configured according to the design. The trial period is the 'hands on' part of the Site Acceptance Testing and is to confirm the reliability. 8. in working order and available for use The initial issue of technical documentation and copies of marked as built drawings have been provided Training has been completed as required by the Contract The arrangements for support during the warranty period have been agreed b. Functionality testing of the telecommunication system. The tests shall include but not be limited to proving: a. If any fault or unexpected event occurs during the 500 hours trial period.Section 6 .6 Acceptance Tests .Telecommunications The Contractor shall test the telecommunication system as a standalone system prior to connection to the Master station and the RTUs. the Employer shall determine whether it constitutes a minor or a major fault. The correct routing.4. System trial operation and availability test over a period of 1 month.5 TESTS ON COMPLETION Once the Employer has approved the SAT test results and the requirements of the previous Clause have been fulfilled the Contractor may proceed to apply to start the tests on completion. If the Employer determines that a major fault has occurred then the Contractor shall rectify the fault to the satisfaction of the Employer and the 500 hours trial shall restart from the beginning. The Contractor shall have a minimum of one suitably qualified engineer in attendance during the trial period. and where appropriate. c. the correct automatic re-routing of all circuits. The tests on completion comprise a 500 hours trial period during which the System shall perform to the requirements of the Employer and in accordance with the specification.197 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . System performance tests to demonstrate that the new telecommunication system will give satisfactory service under normal working conditions. d. g.4. b. the Contractor may not work or make changes to any part of the system without first obtaining permission from the Employer. System functional and performance tests under abnormal conditions such as disturbances. e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The order of testing shall be as follows: a) First all Network Analysis Applications including Study Mode b) Then all Power Applications c) And finally all Forecasting and Scheduling Applications 8. f. Communication end to end circuit testing. c. All test documentation and records are complete in order and signed off by the Contractor‘s test engineers The spare parts and test equipment are complete. The costs of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Once the system is put into trial operation and availability testing. e. stability and robustness of the SCADA/DMS System.

If the System as a whole is not available for normal operation due to a fault. problems and reservations noted during the tests have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Employer b.1 System Acceptance The System will be accepted by the Employer in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract and if both: a. the trial period shall recommence from the point at which it was interrupted. but the fault is still judged by the Employer to be minor. the Contractor shall provide full details to the Employer of the reasons for the failure and the proposals for overcoming the failure. If such a failure occurs as a result of any deficiency on the part of the Contractor. the Contractor shall be responsible for taking steps to rectify the situation in an agreed timescale. The re-testing shall take account of all aspects of the System performance and functionality that might be affected by the remedial work. 8. then the necessary corrective action shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Employer. The System and all items of equipment have successfully completed all the specified tests All failures. as soon as the Contractor has cleared the fault to the satisfaction of the Employer. All costs associated with non-conformances and re-tests shall be borne by the Contractor.5.6 NON-CONFORMANCE In the event that the equipment fails during testing. Any proposed modifications to previously approved designs shall be approved in accordance with relevant provisions in the Contract documents before implementation. If either of these conditions has not been complied with. 8. Minor faults that do not stop the system as a whole from functioning in accordance with the requirements of the Specification shall be remedied in a manner and to a timetable agreed with the Employer. 8.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification any such re-testing shall be borne entirely by the Contractor.5. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.198 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 .2 Partial & Operational Acceptance Depending on the scope and outcome of the Tests on Completion Partial and or Operational Acceptance Certificates shall be issued in accordance with the stipulations of the General Conditions of Contract.

with the faulty modules being either scrapped. the System design shall be such as to minimise equipment failures and optimise fault-finding and maintenance. SPARES AND MAINTENANCE 9. 9. including turn around times. Where the Contractor purchases modules.199 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Peripheral equipment shall be easily removable from service and either replaced by standby equipment or spare equipment without the loss of System operation. Comprehensive provision of self diagnostic facilities is an essential part of this scope of supply. subassemblies or complete items of equipment from other parties. including fault-tracing and clearance procedures. for the main equipment and all peripheral items.2 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY It is the intention of the Employer to ultimately undertake ‗first line‘ maintenance with assistance from the Contractor being provided through suitable maintenance contracts for problems that cannot be resolved by the Employer's maintenance technicians. any special equipment. The Bidder shall specify.4 SPARE PARTS The maintenance philosophy that will be adopted will generally be for fault finding to card level and module replacement. power supplies and ancillary items 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 9. In addition.Section 6 . Processors.1 GENERAL The System purchased will be required to function for a minimum of fifteen years. if damaged beyond repair. 9. main memory. required to enable first line maintenance to be carried out by the Employer. the Contractor shall obtain statements from those parties confirming that their policy with respect to support of their product(s). as appropriate. SDH equipment and interfaces 6. VDU screens. shall be provided by the Contractor. The requirements for spares and maintenance contracts to meet these objectives are detailed in the following Clauses. equipment shall be designed to facilitate maintenance. communication interfaces and ancillary items 2. One complete 48Vdc charger unit. This objective will be achieved by a combination of a maintenance agreement covering Master Station hardware and software. Down-time must be reduced to a minimum. interfaces and ancillary items 7. UPS modules etc 5.3 DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE As the System is required to operate continuously. details of which shall be provided with the Bid. Processors. the provision of maintenance courses for the Employer's technicians and by the purchase of suitable spares holdings. RTU I/O modules. complies with the requirements detailed in this Clause or take such other steps as may be necessary to ensure that the objectives of this Clause are achieved. discs. Teleprotection signalling units and interfaces Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. or returned to the Contractor for repair. The Contractor shall supply as part of the Contract a set of spares that comprises 5% of the total number of each type of installed replaceable units/modules (with a minimum of one unit of each type) to be supplied. Power Supplies. Diagnostic and test facilities shall be provided. as relevant to his Contract. charger components. battery cells. PAX modules. It is therefore of prime importance that the Contractor shall guarantee the availability of spare parts to facilitate the continued availability and performance of the System for that period of time. Comprehensive maintenance documentation. including tools and instruments. 9. as part of the Works. as an option. LED Video Wall board lamps and ancillary items 4. These spares shall include but not be limited to: 1. The Contractor shall operate a module repair and replacement scheme.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

In order to assist in the ordering of additional spare parts, the Bidder is required to recommend a spares holding to cover the first four years, following the end of the Defects Liability Period, and to provide a cost breakdown. The Contractor shall not have access to spares held by the Employer during the Defects Liability Period. The Bidder shall base the list of recommended spare parts on the above maintenance philosophy. This list shall be submitted as an optional price and shall include a cost breakdown. Prices for the supply of spares shall include all associated charges and shall remain valid for orders placed within the term of the Defects Liability Period. The Employer shall be at liberty to order quantities of spare parts at variance with those listed by the Bidder. The prices shall remain valid for any such variation of quantities, unless stated otherwise in the Bid. The cost of spare parts shall not be used to calculate the cost of any variations to the Contract. The spare parts recommended shall be identical functionally, electrically and mechanically, to the corresponding parts in the equipment supplied under the Contract and shall be suitably packed and clearly marked, ready for reception at the Employer's stores. Any special handling instructions shall be clearly marked on the packages. The Contractor shall supply equipment lists of the recommended spare parts which include the names and addresses of the individual manufacturers of the listed items. The recommended spares holding shall be quoted on a unit basis, as an option, for selection by the Employer at any time up until the end of the Defects Liability Period. The availability of spare parts to the Employer, at a reasonable cost, shall be guaranteed by the Contractor as follows: a) The Contractor shall maintain an adequate stock of spare parts for a minimum period of ten years (or until the end of the equipment's specified life) after the product has been removed from quantity production, declared obsolete or officially removed from sale b) Where a component, which is not under the Contractor's control, has become unavailable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to offer a compatible alternative at reasonable cost c) Design improvements or changes made to a product during its production run shall be carefully assessed such that component interchangeability shall not be affected. This requirement shall apply to equipment manufactured by the Contractor and also to equipment purchased from other suppliers. 9.5 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

A maintenance agreement shall be offered to cover Master Station hardware, system software and all application software maintenance and support. The maintenance agreements shall provide the requirements detailed in the following Clauses. The Bid shall provide the costs of providing such agreements as Optional Works considering mandatory spares offered. The prices shall incorporate escalation formulae to provide a means of adjustment during their period of validity (5 years from the end of the Defects Liability Period). Prices quoted shall include the costs for providing guaranteed attendance within 24 hours of callout. Costs for providing a quicker response shall also be stated. 9.5.1 Scope of Agreements

The Contractor shall fully support all Master Station hardware and software supplied under the Contract for the life of the System or until such support is no longer required by the Employer. The level of support provided shall be defined in the maintenance agreement. The Bidder shall provide details of the maintenance agreement including elements supported by suppliers of proprietary equipment. The details shall show a breakdown of each type of service for each part of the overall Master Station system 9.5.2 Period of the Maintenance Agreement

The maintenance agreement shall come into effect on the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. It shall be extended each year on the anniversary of that date for a further period of 12 months unless and until the Employer terminates the Agreement.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 200 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

9.5.3

Charges for the Maintenance Agreement

During the Defects Liability Period, all the conditions of the maintenance agreement shall apply without additional cost to the Employer. The charge for provision of services under the maintenance agreement shall be calculated from a formula to be stated in the maintenance agreement. This formula shall remain in force for a period of five years commencing from the day after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. The terms of the formula may include local labour and materials indices and currency exchange rates but the formula itself shall not be changed during the five year period. Two months before the expiry date of the current annual maintenance period, the Contractor shall calculate the maintenance charge that will apply for the following year, using labour and materials indices and exchange rates that are current at that time, and may submit an Application for Payment of that amount. The Employer will check the amount claimed and, if satisfied with its correctness, will pay the Contractor the amount due within 28 days of the date of the Application for Payment. The terms of the maintenance agreement may be renegotiated at the expiry of the five year period. 9.5.4 Maintenance Services

The maintenance agreement shall include provision of the services defined below. The charge for these services shall be stated in the maintenance agreement. Where indicated below, the provision of services shall be included within the annual charge, such that no additional maintenance charge shall be incurred by the Employer when they use these services. Costs of any routine maintenance shall be included within the annual charge. 9.5.4.1 Telephone Support The Contractor shall provide verbal telephone support to the Employer personnel during normal the Employer office hours to provide advice on the use of system facilities and to assist with any problems that may arise. This service shall not be subject to a use charge. 9.5.4.2 Remote Access Support The Contractor shall offer, as an option, to provide facilities for remote support and maintenance of the SCADA/EMS System via a dial-in modem link (or equivalent) back to the original supplier of the System or other appropriate organisation. The amount by which the annual maintenance charge would vary for inclusion of this option in the agreement shall be clearly identified in the Schedule of Prices. This facility shall incorporate appropriate measures, to the satisfaction of the Employer, to ensure the System is secure against any unauthorised use of the link. The facility shall also prohibit the initiation of commands via the link port that may interfere with the Employer operations, e.g. prevent the issue of SCADA control commands. It shall be possible to configure which of the System's facilities are prohibited to be used via remote access. 9.5.4.3 Fault Rectification The Contractor shall rectify all faults identified by the Employer. When a fault occurs, the Employer will advise the Contractor of the nature of the fault and confirm the date and time of reporting it. The Contractor shall provide a suitably qualified and experienced maintenance engineer on site within the guaranteed response time stated in the maintenance agreement. The Contractor shall ensure maintenance personnel are available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week for repair of high priority faults. Lower priority faults may be repaired during normal working hours. 9.5.4.4 New Software Releases New software releases may take place during the life of the System to provide solutions to identified problems, or enhancements to System functionality and or performance. The Contractor shall notify the Employer of all such releases of software. The maintenance agreement shall include the issue, installation and testing of new software releases, as necessary, to resolve identified problems and to ensure continued software support by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer (all costs shall be covered by the annual charge).

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 201 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

New software releases that are not essential to resolve identified faults and are not necessary in order for the Contractor to maintain software support may also be available. The Employer shall be entitled to purchase these optional updates at their discretion. The costs of any such upgrades are to be separately negotiated between the Employer and the Contractor. A decision by the Employer not to purchase such upgrades shall not effect the obligation of the Contractor to continue to provide System support under the maintenance agreement. After any new software has been installed on the Purchase equipment, the Contractor's maintenance personnel shall test the software at least as thoroughly as it was tested during Factory Acceptance Testing. 9.5.5 Termination of the Agreement

The Purchase may terminate the maintenance agreement at any time. Such termination must be in writing and will take effect from the expiry date of the current maintenance year. 9.6 PRODUCT CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS

Changes in the design of items of equipment may make items supplied for this contract obsolete and may therefore affect the future spare parts availability. The Contractor is therefore required to have a company commitment to product enhancements in order to avoid obsolescence, while taking advantages of new technology in an evolutionary manner. Design changes and product enhancements should therefore be made such that they are directly compatible with the present items. The Contractor is therefore required to: a) Fully document and forward to the Employer details of product improvements that are made during the marketing period of the equipment, as soon as it is incorporated on the product line. This documentation shall clearly identify changes to be made and reasons for the change. This requirement shall also apply to the Contractor‘s sub-suppliers. b) Notify the Employer 12 months prior to ceasing production of replacement parts (for spares inventory purposes). c) Notify the Employer within 2 months after a design change has been implemented (after expiry of the Defects Liability Period) on equipment supplied for this Contract. 9.7 CONSUMABLES

All consumables such as printer paper, printer toners and cartridges, cartridge tapes, discs, etc., sufficient for one year of normal operation of the System shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the Scope of Work. These items shall be delivered in accordance with an agreed programme, but the initial consignment shall be available to the Employer at the start of the Defects Liability Period. The Bidder shall submit with the Bid a proposed list of consumable items suitable for two years operation of the system. The list shall include itemised prices, valid for purchase in quantities at the discretion of the Employer at any time up to the end of the Defects Liability period. 9.8 COMMISSIONING PERIODS

The Contractor shall be required to provide all necessary spare parts and consumable items up to the time of Handover, including those required for the site commissioning period and for the Reliability Test Period. The Contractor shall note that spares and consumables purchased by the Employer will not be available for use by the Contractor during site acceptance testing and commissioning, or during the trial period. 9.9 TOOLS AND TEST APPARATUS

Specialised tools and test apparatus listed below, that is required for maintenance and fault finding including that used for setting, measuring and maintaining performance levels shall be supplied as part of the scope of works for each of the equipment types or subsystems supplied under the Contract. The types of tools and apparatus shall be defined in the Price Schedules and the Bidder shall state the recommended numbers of each device. 9.9.1 SDH/PDH tester

The SDH/PDH tester shall have the following minimum features:

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 202 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

                   

Transmission test functions such as optical power measurements at 1310nm and 1550nm wavelengths, BER testing, end-to-end error performance etc Already built-in interfaces such as E1 balanced, E1 unbalanced, STM-1/4/16 etc Full PDH support from 1.5Mbps to 140 Mbps including nx64kbps User configurable setup and automated functions Anomaly generation and analysis Line bit rates up to 2.5Gbps Overhead byte capture capability Intrusive, non intrusive and monitor modes capability Automatic protection switching with resolution of 1ms Round trip delay measurements Service disruption measurements Alarm and error resolution better than 100ms Rugged and light weight Touch screen display User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Built-in data storage capability USB connectivity for data transfer to PC/flash disk Reports and print outs Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.2 Datacom tester

The datacom tester shall have the following minimum features:           Support V.24/V.28, X21/V.11, V.35/V.36 and 10/100Mbps Ethernet interfaces DTE/DCE emulation and bidirectional monitoring capability Support data rate up to 10Mbps Self loop testing capability User configurable setup and automated functions Rugged and light weight Large display screen User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.3         Digital multimeter

The digital multimeter shall have the following minimum features: Voltage (ac & dc), current, resistance continuity with beeper, frequency, diode test USB connectivity for data transfer to PC/flash disk Minimum 0.03% dc accuracy Rugged and light weight Large display screen User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.4          Signal generator

The signal generator shall have the following minimum features: Flexible signal generator capable of analogue, digital and mixed signals Real-time sequencing capability for infinite waveform loops and pattern length generation Minimum of 4 channels Minimum of 14 bit resolution Minimum of 1.2 GS/s sampling rate User friendly Rugged and light weight Long battery life for continuous testing Built-in data storage capability

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 203 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

  

Data transfer to PC/flash disk Reports and print outs Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.5 Maintenance laptop computer

The laptop computer shall have the following minimum features:        Minimum dual core Pentium processor Minimum 4Gb RAM Minimum 250 Gb HDD Built-in USB, RS232, ethernet & wireless LAN interfaces Qwerty keyboard and optical mouse Complete with necessary operating and applications software Complete with protective bag and accessories 9.10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

9.10.1 General There shall be a Defects Liability Period that shall apply to the entire Works provided under the contract. The Defects Liability Period for each part of the Works shall commence on the date that the associated Operational Acceptance Certificate is issued and will cover the Works or portion thereof covered by the Certificate. The Contractor shall provide Spares and Maintenance support during this period including the provision of Master Station hardware and software support specified for the Maintenance Agreement. Where any item of equipment has an original supplier‘s warranty that extends beyond the Defects Liability Period then that warranty shall be effective up to its expiry date. 9.10.2 Attendance During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall attend to and clear all defects within a reasonable time of being notified of the defect in writing. All critical faults that have an operational or security impact upon the System shall be attended to within 2 hours of notifying the Contractor of the fault. Less critical faults shall be attended to within 24 hours. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary field staff to enable these targets to be met. If the Contractor does not attend to the defect within the stipulated period (from notification) and thereafter remedy the defect within an agreed period, the conditions of contract shall apply in respect to the 'failure to remedy defects'. 9.10.3 Quality Control The Contractor's actions during the Defects Liability Period shall be subject to quality assurance and the Contractor's Quality Plan and Procedures shall reflect this requirement. The quality control shall ensure full documentation of the following: a) Record of dates of defect notification and attendance b) Full report on the nature of the defect c) Reasons for the defect d) Recommended remedial actions e) Agreement with the Employer on recommended actions, testing by the Contractor to prove efficacy of remedial actions and timetable for implementation f) Results of corrective actions and any associated tests. 9.10.4 Access The Contractor shall comply with and make due allowance for the Employer‘s access control and Permit to Work system when attending to defects.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 204 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

9.10.5 Replacement Parts Where the agreed remedial action is replacement of defective parts, then these shall be replaced within 48 hours of the requirement being identified. The Contractor shall provide, as part of the Scope of Work, a spare parts holding sufficient to ensure that equipment repair times are consistent with the specified, or otherwise approved, availability target figures, for the duration of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor shall supplement the initial spares holding, if omissions or inadequacies become apparent during the Defects Liability Period. The Employer will hold the spare parts for use by the Contractor. All surplus spare parts remaining at the end of the Defects Liability Period shall be retained by the Employer.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 205 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

10. TRAINING 10.1 GENERAL

The Employer considers that a programme of training for all staff expected to be involved with various aspects of the Project is particularly important if the SCADA/EMS System is to be effectively utilised. The Contractor shall run a programme of courses to cover all the Works to be supplied under the Contract, the various grades of personnel involved and at times to suit phases of implementation of the Project. The programming shall ensure that the Employer‘s personnel are fully trained in operational, maintenance and system engineering aspects prior to initial commissioning. The programme shall also be arranged to minimise the time between completion of training and commencement of system commissioning. Training shall include but not be limited to the following areas: a) SCADA/EMS System                SCADA/EMS System Overview Operations Database and Display Maintenance SCADA Applications EMS Applications Other Applications Administration

b) Outstations Outstations Plant Modifications and Interfaces

c) Telecommunication System Telecommunication System Overview Fibre optic communication system Telecommunication management system Digital power line carrier equipment Teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone system

d) UPS and Battery Charger Systems e) Building Services and Diesel Generator The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Employer, a synopsis of all training courses offered at least eight months prior to initial commissioning. Generally courses should be scheduled to take place on Site. However, courses necessary for personnel involved with data base building may take place at the Contractor‘s works. Additionally, where specialised equipment is only available at the supplier‘s works courses may be held at these works. The Employer wishes to introduce a number of their engineers into the project at an early stage. There shall therefore be provision for incorporating the Employer‘s engineers into the SCADA/EMS System integration, database population and display building, and pre-acceptance testing activities at the Contractor‘s works. It is anticipated that this work would involve up to four engineers from the Employer, for training in system administration, SCADA database and display maintenance, EMS database maintenance and EMS applications tuning. The Contractor shall arrange for all travel and accommodation as well as travel visas for the Employer‘s engineers when attending this training at the Contractor‘s works. The Contractor shall provide in his offer for the air fares, hotels, subsistence and local travel for the Employer‘s staff while they are attending this training at the Contractor‘s works, relevant training materials and training notes and training facilities including the use of any test instruments and equipment during the training period.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 206 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

The scope and content of courses should ensure a systematic and comprehensive coverage of all the operational functionality and maintenance requirements identified in both the design and the operations and maintenance documentation for the Works delivered under the Contract. The training shall be to such a level that on completion of the courses. All relevant equipment documentation shall be available during the training courses.3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM COURSES 10. As a minimum the course shall include: a) Hardware and Software Architecture b) Operating Systems and Associated Utilities c) Applications Architecture and Deployment d) Database Systems. the skills the course is intended to develop g) Aims. engineers and maintenance staff.e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 10.e. the courses shall include. depending on the detailed design of the products supplied under the Contract. Pre-recorded video presentations shall not be used as the primary means of training. All training courses. All courses shall consist of a series of lectures. due to the nature of the fault.3.207 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . or equivalent topics. i. particularly for operators. how the skills developed can be used h) Description of course activities i) Description of course documentation. discussions and demonstrations and. i.1 Overview Course The SCADA/EMS Overview course shall include an overview of the functions and facilities of the system and an appreciation of the operational and maintenance aspects of the system. but not be limited to. Access Control and Security f) Data Acquisition g) Alarm and Event Handling h) Supervisory Control i) Historical Data Recording and Reporting Facilities Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. notes and documentation shall be in the English language. Deployment and Maintenance Utilities e) User Interface. the Employer‘s staff shall be able to operate and maintain the all equipment provided under the respective sections of work and in the case of the SCADA/EMS System to supervise (control and monitor) the operation of the electrical system in all operating modes using all facilities. As a minimum. The Contractor is therefore requested to provide a number of different courses to accommodate the requirements of the different skills each group of personnel will need to acquire in the context of the Employer's actual operating environment.2 CONTENT The syllabus of each course shall contain the following types of information: a) Course name b) Duration c) Locations for the training d) Types of staff who would benefit from the course e) Pre-requisite skills of course attendees f) Objectives. 10. the specific topics listed in the following sub-clauses. the Contractor recommends calling out specialist service agencies.Section 6 . ‗hands-on‘ experience of the equipment involved. They shall also be able to maintain and trouble shoot the equipment up to the point where. This shall include all ‗third party products‘ such as operating systems and their associated utilities and diagnostics.

3. As a minimum.208 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Sorting and Filtering h) Supervisory Control i) j) Manual Entry/Hand Dressing EMS Applications k) Common Applications l) Job Management m) Switching Schedules n) Safety Documentation Facilities o) Tagging p) Trending q) Printing and Printer Management r) Historical Data Access and Report Generation s) Log books and Scratch Pads 10.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification j) Printing k) EMS Applications l) Common Applications m) System Status and Management 10.Section 6 .3. these courses shall include: a) Workstation Access and Security b) Navigation of the User Interface c) Network and S/S User Displays d) Network Colouring and Tracing e) Display Data Presentation Conventions f) Real Time and Study Mode Views g) Alarm and Event Presentation. Searching. As a minimum the database courses shall include: a) SCADA Database Architecture b) Database Rules and Naming Conventions c) Data Categories and Attributes d) Data Entry and Modification e) Mapping Data points to Outstation Addresses f) Outstation Data point Addressing Conventions g) Switching Between Databases h) Historical Database Architecture i) j) Historical Database Management Historical Data Archiving and Retrieval k) EMS Database Architecture Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 System Operation Courses The SCADA/EMS operations courses shall equip Operations staff with a detailed knowledge of the system operational functionality and how it may be applied in the day to day operation and management of the network.3 Database and Display Maintenance Courses Database and display maintenance engineers will require a detailed appreciation of the tools for populating and editing the databases and building and amending user graphical displays.

tune them and verify the results. d. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The system administration courses shall provide an introduction to the task of managing the system hardware.3. local area network and the SCADA/EMS applications software.4 LAN management and TCP/IP addressing Operating system administration TELECOMMUNICATION COURSES Training courses to be provided include: a.4 EMS Applications Courses Power systems analysis engineers will require a thorough understanding of the theoretical underpinnings of the EMS applications and how to configure. these courses shall cover. Telecommunication management system. they shall cover: a) Managing the SCADA/EMS applications software b) Building the operational system from source code c) Running diagnostic routines d) Managing user accounts e) System Backup management f) Rebooting servers and workstations g) Managing trace files and crash dumps h) Adding/Changing hardware i) j) 10. As a minimum.5 System Administration Courses The system administrator is the key to the secure and efficient operation of the Master Station. run.209 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . as a minimum the display courses shall cover: a) Display Construction Conventions b) Defining Layers and Levels of Detail c) Using and Amending Graphics Libraries d) Drawing and Editing e) Linking to Dynamic Data f) Defining Display Navigation g) Updating and Distributing Displays 10. Fibre optic communication system.Section 6 . operating system. a) Basic functionality of each application b) The displays associated with each application c) Use of tuning parameters d) Power system model parameters e) Verifying and Interpreting Results 10.3. b. Digital power line carrier equipment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification l) EMS Database Data Entry and Modification m) Data Consistency and Integrity n) Database Verification o) Database Update And. As a minimum. Teleprotection signalling equipment. c.

The telecommunication training courses carried out at manufacturers‘ works shall be conducted in two sessions at different time so to enable the Employer to plan his staffing resources accordingly. Maintenance courses of appropriate content and duration shall be provided for the Employer personnel that cover: a. System hardware and software. SCADA/EMS Courses No of Trainees Duration (days) Location Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. b. d. Cabling requirements. The courses shall provide the attendees with a sufficient understanding of the functionality of each part of the system and its operation and maintenance requirements. c. There shall also be maintenance courses for all auxiliary systems and subsystems supplied under the Contract. data communications and Outstation equipment Test gear Fault diagnosis to module level including the use of online and. System overview and architecture.5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COURSES Personnel who will be responsible for maintaining equipment will require a significantly different type of training to enable them to undertake fault finding to ‗lowest replaceable unit‘ level. b. Telephone system.Section 6 . e. c. offline diagnostic software Preventive maintenance Calibration of equipment Fault finding exercises d. System expansion and upgrade capability. j. Fault finding and trouble shooting. Interfaces and standards supported. if applicable. It is anticipated that these courses will be conducted on the Contractor's premises or at the locations of the subject equipment's manufacture prior to the equipment's delivery.6 COURSE ATTENDEES The Bidder shall provide prices for each of the above courses. g. the UPS System. System operation and configuration. e. f. i. e.210 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Installation. 10. together with the cost per additional attendee for larger numbers. based on the following numbers of personnel per course. As a minimum the contents shall cover: a.g. testing and commissioning techniques. f. h.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification e. Computer. System design/budget calculations. 10. Repair and routine maintenance. The Employer‘s staff will be present during the installation/commissioning period and it is essential that they are fully involved in any on-site corrections/modifications to hardware.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification SCADA/EMS Courses System Overview Course System Operation Courses – Senior Engineers. and fully documented notes shall be available to the Employer no later than 2 months before the commencement of the course.211 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 2 sessions for 5 persons System Operation Courses – 3 sessions for 5 persons Database & Display Maintenance Courses EMS Application Courses System Administration Courses System Maintenance Courses Telecommunication Courses System Overview Course Fibre optic communication system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Telecommunication Management System – 2 sessions for 4 persons Digital PLC equipment system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Teleprotection signalling equipment system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Telephone system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Outstation Courses Outstation Functionality Outstation Architecture Outstation Hardware Outstation Software Maintenance and fault finding Expansion procedures Power Supply Systems Other Equipment NSCC UPS System Building Services Equipment No of Trainees 20 10 15 6 6 4 6 Duration (days) 1 10 5 10 10 10 10 Location Sri Lanka Works Sri Lanka Works Works Works Works 20 8 8 8 8 8 1 10 5 5 3 10 Sri Lanka Works Works Works Works Works 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 Works Works Works Works Works Works Works 2 2 5 5 Works Sri Lanka Attendees of all courses shall be provided with sets of relevant course materials. The Bidder may be required by the Employer to make a video recording of any of the formal Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . The prices for the complete courses quoted in the Bid shall cover all the Works delivered under the Contract. The times at which the various training courses will take place shall be stated.

212 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 Course Duration The courses shall be of sufficient length and pace and include sufficient practice exercises to ensure that the subject matter is covered thoroughly and the trainees are able to demonstrate their understanding of what they have been taught. Additional training on specific topics shall be provided if the required take up of knowledge and skills has not been sufficient to meet the goal of the course. The prices of the training courses shall be detailed in full such that additions/deletions to personnel/courses can be calculated by the Employer without recourse to the Contractor. It is expected that a period of three months at the Contractor‘s works will be necessary for a trainee to gain maximum benefit from this type of training.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification training courses run by the Contractor to be used in the future for ‗in-house‘ refresher training and training additional the Employer personnel. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 10. Each course shall be reviewed on completion to determine if the trainees have achieved an acceptable level of ‗take up‘. The Bidder shall include in their offer an outline proposal in terms of content and duration for the formal part and for the ‗on the job‘ training at the SCADA/EMS supplier‘s premises.6.

They should not include any irrelevant or superfluous information.1 GENERAL The following details the document requirements for the Works covered by the Specification Document. 11. manuals.g. Outstations. shall have a unique document identification number that conforms to an approved numbering scheme. One sample copy of a set of operating manuals supplied for a similar contract shall be provided with the Bid. component lists. The following specific items of documentation shall be included in the Bid: Table 11.4 3.2. the connections to the Master Station. This may be submitted electronically in CDROM.).5 3.3. All Schedules shall be fully completed in all respects and a copy provided in electronic form.6 3. These may be submitted electronically in CDROM. An overview drawing shall be provided that clearly shows the architecture of the SCADA/EMS Master Station.Section 6 .g. System documentation shall comply with the relevant sections of ISO 6592 (or an equivalent national or international standard). all interfaces to other systems and how all items of equipment are interconnected (e. DOCUMENTATION 11. etc. PLC links. Outstations. An overview drawing of the Telecommunication System shall be provided that clearly shows the topology of the SDH system. etc.2. All drawings.5 3..7 3. All information shall be presented in a format that enables the Bid to be assessed and compared with other Bids.2. e. printers. where this is requested. information relating to variants not supplied under this Contract and options that are not potential future extensions to the supplied System.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11. Any additional features offered that have not been requested in this Specification shall be clearly identified in the offer. workstations. size and layout of the NSCC building shall be provided with sufficient detail to enable the proposal to be evaluated and compared to other offers.4.2 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 3. One copy of the Bidder's current QA Manuals and an appropriate sample of a Project Quality Plan shall be supplied with the Bid.2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE BID The Bidder shall provide sufficient information to fully describe their Bid in all aspects and to clearly demonstrate the compliance of their offer with this Specification. Documentation and drawings shall relate solely to the actual equipment supplied. along with an issue or revision number and a record of modification.1 Items to be Provided with the Bidders Offer Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Deliverable Documents SCADA/EMS System Overview SCADA/EMS Master Station Equipment and Applications Telecommunication Overview Fibre optic communication system Telecommunication management system Power line carrier Teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone system Optical budget calculations Specification Reference 2 2 3.213 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the Network Management System and the PAX. Drawings that illustrate the general appearance. The Bidder shall provide clear distinction in their Bid between the main offer and any alternative offer(s) or options that are not included in the Bid Price for the main offer. specifications.

3 2. a traceability assessment that shall provide cross references between each Clause within this Specification (and other pertinent documents) and the clauses.2 below shall be supplied after Award of the Contract.1 General The documents and drawings to be supplied after the award of Contract are specified below.4 2. as part of the Functional Design Specification (FDS). The submissions shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the design to be assessed for compliance with the Specification with respect to design. but not limited to. design documentation and drawings. Detailed Project Implementation Programme Hydro optimization algorithm DOCUMENTATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING THE CONTRACT 11.3. Table 11. The Employer shall make available to the Contractor. Before proceeding with the manufacture of equipment. paragraphs or sections within the FDS prepared by the Contractor that uniquely address each specified requirement. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The documentation listed in. 1 PART I Section 3 11. the electrical network and associated plant including substation plans. upon written request.2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Item 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 11. A further traceability assessment shall also be provided that cross references the clauses.7. A column shall be included to indicate how closely the proposed design meets the specified requirements. manufacture.3 Outstation equipment Deliverable Documents Specification Reference 4 5 6 6 2. installation.1 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems & 48Vdc systems Proposed control room design NSCC Building Conceptual design System sizing calculation System Performance calculation System Availability calculation QA Manuals Sample Quality Plan and Procedures Project references where offered system(s) are in service. The Contractor shall also provide.214 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting information in a timely manner to meet their programme requirements.12 7 17 17. the Contractor shall provide sufficient information to enable the Employer to be assured that the design is proceeding satisfactorily. This information shall be provided via the regular meetings and reports.4 Vol. information in the form of drawings and documents relating to the existing operational transmission SCADA system. including the Functional Design Specification.3. paragraphs or sections within the FDS to the relevant tests within the factory and site test procedures to verify that all aspects of the supplied System are tested against the approved design.4.Section 6 . operation and maintenance. shall be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Employer by the dates and in the numbers and types specified. During the design phase.

17 18 Synopsis of all Training Courses All ‗As Built‘ Documentation 10.8 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4. 2 Quality Plan and Procedures Schedule of Contractor‘s Documents and Drawings Specification of Configuration Data 3 4 5 Civil Works Requirements 6 Power Supply Requirements 2 months after the Effective Date of Award 7 Specification of Communication Requirements 8 9 10 Weights. 11.2 Items of Documentation to be Deliverable during the Contract Item 1 Deliverable Documents Programme of Work Reference 11. 5.3. Schedule and Procedures for Tests on Completion Test Reports 11 11.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 11.Control and Equipment Room layouts Test Plan.2 3 months after the Effective Date of Award Not less than 8 weeks before tests are scheduled to be conducted.4 11.5. Detail any requirements for interfacing to equipment outside of contract supply. Detail for equipment to be supplied.3. Latest Date for Submission 4 weeks from effective Contract start date.3.1 Detail any information or actions required for Contractor‘s work to proceed Detail power supply requirements at sites where equipment is to be installed.6 11. 4 weeks from effective Contract start date.3 2.5.3 4 weeks before delivery of system to site Not more than 12 weeks after test(s) performed 1 months prior to commencement of training 3 months after hand over.8.5 11.4.4 General Requirements Vol. Operation & Maintenance Manuals Detailed Installation Programme Test Plan.1 11. Chapter 4 Section 6 Part C 11. Schedule and Procedures for Factory Acceptance Testing Details of Delivery Arrangements Draft Design. 4 weeks from effective Contract start date.Section 6 .2 12 13 14 15 16 11.5.2 11.1& 11.215 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Dimensions & Environmental Requirements for all Equipment All Functional Design Specification Documents Control Centre Designs.

3. The Contractor shall correct and resubmit drawings and documents that are rejected or returned with comments or corrections.2. climate control-air conditioning) m) Detailed lighting design calculations and layout drawings n) Detailed plumbing design drawings o) Detailed lightning and earthing protection design. fire detection and protection system. 11.2 Specific Requirements for NSCC Building The Contractor shall provide the detailed drawings.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 11. specifications of materials and equipment.3.Section 6 . As the design process proceeds.3. The sequence of submission of the drawings and documents shall be such that all relevant information and data is available to the Employer for examining each document on the date it is received. showing the scheduled date of first submission and expected date of final issue.5 11. beam to girder and beam to column connections k) Detailed electrical drawings that include load design l) Detailed drawings and specifications of each of the services provided (Access control. The design documentation shall consist of the following as a minimum: a) Architectural Drawings b) Foundation Plans with location of piles and columns c) Slab thickness with steel reinforcement d) Slab control joints e) Elevation view of wall sections f) Roof plan and roof framing system g) Concrete masonry details h) Concrete masonry wall expansion joints i) j) Details of foundation connections Beam to beam.216 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3 Schedule of Contractor's Documents and Drawings A Document Schedule shall be submitted to the Employer for approval that lists all the documents and drawings to be submitted by the Contractor. it is inevitable that amendments will occur which will impact upon previously submitted and reviewed documents. It is an essential part of the design phase of the project and the approval procedure that documents and drawings should be updated periodically to reflect those amendments and the increasing depth of detail available. Documents and drawings shall be subject to review and approval by the Employer. 19 Monthly Progress Reports 11. design calculations and a design analysis for the project for item 5 in Table 11.2 Items of Documentation to be Deliverable during the Contract Item Deliverable Documents Reference Latest Date for Submission Each Month commencing end of first complete month following contract start date. The Contractor's Document Schedule shall Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

where appropriate. numbers will be issued to the Contractor for this purpose.Section 6 . The following activities shall be identified: a) Design activities b) Provision of information by the Employer c) Data engineering d) Submission of design documents and drawings for review e) Receipt of final design documents and drawings f) Placing of purchase orders g) Receipt of materials h) Fabrication and manufacture i) j) Submission of test documents for review Testing at manufacturers' premises k) Delivery l) Installation m) Commissioning n) Site testing o) Training p) Delivery of final documentation For software production.217 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Finally.3. Blocks of drawing The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and keeping up-to-date a contract drawing list showing the numbers and titles of each drawing and document and the current status of approval by the Employer. The detailed programme shall be in the form of a PERT or other approved type of chart and shall indicate for each Section and Sub-section of the Works. All documents and drawings shall have a title. revision number and issue record and a graphic scale. When folded. This shall be the programme submitted with the Bid.4 Programme of Work The Contractor shall submit a Programme of Works soon after Award of Contract. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 11. on the PERT chart. All drawings submitted shall be folded to either A3 or A4 size. coding and testing activities for each software module design. A detailed Programme of Work shall be submitted following the site surveys and as part of the Functional Design Specification documentation. The Contractor shall include the Employer's drawing number on all drawings. the design. the drawing title block shall be clearly readable without needing to unfold the drawing. the commencement and completion dates for the principal activities and the critical path for the whole of the Works. The title block and system of serial numbering shall be approved by the Employer. the PERT shall identify the latest dates for supply to the Contractor of data and interface details. The dependencies between tasks and the critical path for software production shall also be identified.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification indicate those drawings and documents due for periodic update and resubmission. together with the anticipated dates. the Programme of Work shall show clearly. document/drawing number. modified and updated as required to correspond to actual Contract start date and any agreed amendments.

11. The Installation Programme shall show all site activities. particularly in relation to the completion of any dependent works. The first report shall be due one month after the Effective Date and monthly thereafter throughout the period of the Contract. of all items shown in the Schedule of Work. The report shall also include a narrative section in which any problems encountered during the month are described.3. indicating where development work is required that is specific to this Contract b) A reliability and availability study (this shall include Failure Modes and Effects Analysis) c) Documentation for existing standard elements/modules within the overall design d) A traceability reference between this Specification and the Functional Design Specification e) A traceability reference between the Functional Design Specification and the Test Procedure documents For ease of handling and review. it is preferred that the FDS be partitioned as follows:     Hardware Functional Design Specification (HFDS) – Master Stations Hardware Functional Design Specification (HFDS) . etc.Section 6 .4. Notwithstanding this requirement. any change that could adversely affect the Installation Programme shall be advised immediately to the Employer. The Contractor shall produce a detailed Installation Programme for each part of the Works. inter-relationships with other contractors. 11. testing.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The programme PERT chart shall be updated monthly to reflect any significant changes that may have occurred during the previous month and to indicate progress to date.218 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 Monthly Progress Report The Contractor shall monitor the Programme of Work on a continuous basis and shall submit a monthly report to the Employer giving the latest status of progress.Outstations Software Functional Design Specification (SFDS) Communications Functional Design Specification (CFDS) The design shall be fully described at a functional level. including delivery of equipment to site. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1 Functional Design Specification The Functional Design Specification (FDS) shall detail the design for the full scope of Work being performed under this Contract. but not be limited to: a) Description of the design in sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.4 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION 11. placing into service. A functional overview of the complete System shall be provided that shows (preferably in diagrammatic form) each functional element in the System and all the interfaces of those elements with each other and with the external environment. expressed as a percentage. training of the Employer personnel. The FDS shall specifically demonstrate how the requirements of this Specification are realised within the Contractor‘s design. based on their range of standard products. The FDS shall include. their impact on the works and programme are identified and the actions taken by the Contract to correct the problems are stated. showing cumulative progress towards scheduled completion. and interfaces to other works. installation. It shall also cover the design of features that are being delivered as part of the Contractor‘s standard product that have not been requested in the Specification. showing deviations with respect to previous programmes and the logical sequence of works. The Monthly Progress Report shall include the latest issue of the Programme of Work PERT chart (or equivalent) and a Monthly Progress Schedule that shall indicate progress made the preceding month.

scan rates. For the SFDS. The communications documentation shall describe the proposed communication links and networks and shall address the following topics for each communication system. The protocols employed by each communication link or network shall be included in the CFDS. loose-leaf file holders.g. e. functional elements will generally be individual programmes and databases with their associated data exchange interface specifications. as applicable. both ‗as installed‘ and ultimate system expansion.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification A complete description shall be provided for each functional element that includes its function.             Communication System Architecture Media requirements Connectivity and routing Modes of Operation Communication System Elements Error Control Protocol Fault Tolerance Communication System Performance Throughput/capability calculations Availability calculations Communication Error Messages & Alarms 11.g. whilst being fully detailed. etc.g. its interfaces to other functional elements and its user interfaces. The design description must address all the requirements of this Specification and provide adequate qualitative and quantitative information to support the design.1 Standard Operating Software The standard operating software documentation will normally consist of the manuals and handbooks supplied by the software producer/publisher or a computer manufacturer. shall be provided for each functional element. 11. number of I/O ports. and for the System as a whole. functional elements will generally equate to items of equipment with their associated signal and power supply interfaces.Section 6 . Master Station LANs. Design measures incorporated to improve System integrity. 11.). operators. data rates.4. Copies of these shall be supplied in a durable hard copy format. where applicable. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. should also be in a form that will permit maintenance staff and programmers to readily obtain an overall appreciation of the operation of the System and individual programs. links to the Outstations and SAS gateways. RAM. links to other systems. The functional elements of the CFDS will include the communication equipment provided under this Contract and its interfaces with other communications systems.4. The Employer shall have the right to make available to third parties documentation supplied as part of this Contract.4. The design capacity (e.g.3 Software Design Documentation The documentation. both ‗as installed‘ and expansion limits. e. and performance criteria (e.). database size. This right would be exercised for the purpose of obtaining software development/amendment services from Contractors other than the supplier.g. display call up time. availability and reliability shall be clearly described. e.2 Specific Requirements for Communication Documentation Where communications equipment and systems are included in the scope of work then the following specific requirements shall apply to the corresponding documentation. In the HFDS.219 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . etc.3.

1 Test Plan and Schedule The Contractor shall submit a Test Plan and Schedule for approval by the Employer prior to the scheduled start date for the first Factory Acceptance Test (FAT). Copies of each shall be supplied bound in durable folders and shall include the following information: a) Overall System description b) Memory allocation and utilisation maps c) Detailed program descriptions of all programs including executive and standard programs with a Pseudo-code (Structured English) listing.5 DOCUMENTATION FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS 11. including suppliers' standard programs. databases and test data to be used. the estimated start and completion dates for each test. 11. written in the English language. The purpose of the Test Plan is to provide an overview of all testing to be carried out on the System. e) Data specification including definitions. etc. The Test Schedule shall show. such that they can readily be understood.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11. then comments shall be included at logical points within the code.5. The Contractor shall keep the Test Schedule up to date.2 Test Procedures A detailed Test Procedure for each system or sub-system test shall be forwarded for approval by the Employer prior to the scheduled start date of each test. It shall describe the approach the Contractor plans to take with regard to factory and site acceptance testing. The purpose of this document is to provide the history of each software module and the final version number in the delivered software such that the Employer can include additional notes as they makes further changes to the design. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5. facilities for simulating external plant. of each level from the top down to individual module d) Program listings of all program code. It shall clearly define the breakdown of the System into separately testable sub-systems. This document shall also include the software procedures followed during the design and testing phase. 11. on a Gantt or other approved type of chart. or alternatively a flow chart. 11. It shall also describe the overall sequence of tests. expected duration. dictionary.220 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Test Plan shall also show any proposed parallel testing activities.4 Design Control Document The design control document shall include the change control status of each software package (down to individual modules).3. These shall have clear and unambiguous descriptive comments. The current Test Schedule shall be submitted each month with the Contractor's Monthly Report while testing activities are in progress. Each procedure or subprogram shall be preceded by a block of comments which describe the operation of that subprogram.Section 6 .4. the planned configuration for each test. showing revised dates as appropriate and the status of each test.2   Applications Software Description of the Contractors standard (existing) software (including software from third party suppliers) Listings and diagrams for all bespoke software (which includes new and customised software specifically for this project) This design document shall comprise two parts. namely.4. thereby providing the means for uniform continuity in the System design and design changes. If any programs are written in low level language. flow and database organisation f) A complete description of all standard software not covered by the above but necessary to gain a full understanding of the system.

11. This shall include all handbooks.6. The aim of this document is to provide a first line introduction and summary description of the System and to provide references to more detailed description of the operation and maintenance of the System contained in the other manuals.3 System Engineer's Manual The System Engineers' Manual shall describe the configurable elements of the System.. lists of any reservations noted during the tests and the manner in which they were corrected. fault-finding and repair. as follows.1 System Manual A System Manual shall describe the System configuration.221 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5.6. i. will be tested and the criteria that will be used to assess the success or failure of the test will be determined. This shall be a detailed point by point description of the actual utilisation of the System facilities from the Operator‘s viewpoint. This shall be a detailed point by point description of the facilities and methods of configuring them from the System Engineer‘s viewpoint.Section 6 . All manuals shall be supplied in durable binders and shall be identified with the title of the Project. of equipment either manufactured or purchased by the Contractor. 11.6. The Maintenance Manual shall provide all the information required for a competent technician to diagnose faults and carry out repairs down to a lowest replaceable unit level. but not be limited to. Each Test Procedure shall include. function. the following: a) Test objectives b) Test conditions and test configuration including support facilities.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The Contractor shall submit the draft Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M manuals) for approval before plant erection commences. The manuals shall be subdivided. interconnection.4 Hardware Manual The Hardware Manual shall describe the construction. the results obtained. location and details of all standard hardware. down to an agreed level. so that they cover the various portions of the equipment supplied. instruction manuals. 11. circuit Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The manuals shall be subject to amendment as required by the Employer. The design principles.6. final versions of drawings etc. the Contractor shall submit a test report that shall be a complete record of the actual tests carried out. 11.3 Test Reports Following the completion of the hardware and software acceptance tests (factory and site).5 Maintenance Manual The Maintenance Manual shall describe routine maintenance requirements.e. 11. facilities and any specific maintenance requirements. 11.6. These manuals shall include complete instructions for operation and maintenance of all hardware and software supplied under this Contract. and they shall be indexed and cross-referenced.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Test Procedure shall clearly indicate how each System element. hardware and software that will be required to run the test c) Test sequence d) Duration of test e) Step by step instructions f) Expected results including the interpretation of test data for tests to be performed g) Acceptance criteria based upon conformance to the Specification h) Standard forms to record test results for evaluation 11.2 Operators' Manual The Operators' Manual shall describe the Operator facilities and use of the System.

sub-unit and plug-in board used in the complete equipment. with component layout details and normal signal levels superimposed. complete with any safety or other restrictions that are placed on these procedures.6. switches and indicating devices shall be indicated in accordance with the inscriptions on the equipment. as applicable. 11. test point values/waveforms and interconnections. tolerance. Components external to a unit or sub-unit. cubicles. but essential to its operation.222 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification operation. The function of all controls. Equipment instruction manuals shall include circuit diagrams for each unit. The manual shall provide the user with the necessary instructions to load the System software. modify and/or reprogram the System and reline and compile the programs. shall be shown on the circuit diagram enclosed in dotted lines and appropriately identified. 11.6. units and sub-units. All component symbols shall be marked with their circuit references and the nominal value of components shall be marked on the circuit diagram.             Communication System Architecture Media requirements Connectivity and routing Modes of Operation Communication System Elements Error Control Protocol Fault Tolerance Communication System Performance Throughput/capability calculations Availability calculations Communication Error Messages & Alarms Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. self-explanatory. manufacturer and the Contractor's circuit reference number. rating. Simple first line fault diagnosis and module replacement procedures based on flow charts shall be included. test procedures and fault analysis shall be included. The programmer's manual shall also describe the testing and debugging processes.6. type number.7 Programmer's Manual The programmer's manual is primarily intended to describe software development/amendment. Equipment drawings shall show the layout of equipment in racks or cubicles and the essential mechanical features of all racks. Complete circuit diagrams. are to be supplied.Section 6 . Component lists shall state the value. readily related to other diagrams and shall include such information as supply voltage values.6 Equipment Manual A log book shall be supplied with each set of equipment giving the manufacturing and testing history of the equipment. The circuit diagram for any one unit shall be completely self-contained. 11. Spare contacts fitted to relays and switches shall be shown on the diagram.8 Communication Documentation The communications documentation shall describe the proposed communication links and networks and shall address the following topics for each communication system.

Category IV . Category I shall mean that the Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works in accordance with respective document. The Contractor may not proceed with the relevant part of the Works. Category III . 11. Category V . drawings and manuals shall be revised.Information noted. All ‗online‘ help files shall also be updated to the ‗As Built‘ condition before issue of the Operational Acceptance Certificate. Drawings and documents in Category II or III shall be revised and re-submitted to the Employer for his approval within 14 working days calculated from the date of receipt by the Contractor of the Employer's comments. Category V shall mean that the Employer has noted the information on the drawing or document.7 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL Five (5) copies of each drawing and document shall be submitted for approval after review by the Employer. revised or deleted. Documents in this category may be equipment wiring diagrams. When folded. The Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works. the Contractor shall not make further alterations without the agreement of the Employer. Category III shall mean that the Contractor must revise the drawing or document and re-submit it to the Employer to reach Category I.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11. Copies of revised pages of the list shall be distributed to the Employer whenever a drawing or document is included. as necessary. the drawing title block shall be clearly readable without needing to unfold the drawing. All revisions to drawings and documents by the Contractor shall be plainly marked together with the date when the changes were made. Category II .returned for modification.Not approved . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the Contractor will be informed of the category into which each drawing or document is to be placed. Once a drawing or document has been approved. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and keeping up-to-date a contract document and drawing list showing the numbers and titles of each drawing and document and the current status of approval by the Employer. manufacture data sheets etc. The Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works subject to the modification noted by the Employer. These categories are as follows: Category I .Approved except as noted. Additional copies of particular drawings or documents shall be supplied by the Contractor in response to specific requests by the Employer. Category IV shall mean that the Employer has noted the information on the drawing or document and that it is a detail not required to be classified into Category I.8 ‘AS BUILT’ DOCUMENTATION All design documents. to reflect the ‗As Built‘ condition of the Works and submitted to the Employer in three copies. that are related to the Contractor‘s detailed design. All drawings submitted shall be folded to either A3 or A4 size.223 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Category II shall mean that the drawing or document shall be modified to the extent noted by the Employer and re-submitted to the Employer to reach Category I. The list shall be included in the monthly report prepared by the Contractor.Design drawings not forming part of the final design.Section 6 .Approved.

0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.224 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. Longitudinal and Cross Section Indicative Control Centre Finishes Schedule Engineering Survey Plan for Proposed Control Centre Sectional Drawings for Proposed Control Centre Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 0 Rev.Section 6 . 0 Rev.Laxapana CEB Hydroelectric Power Complex .2012 220/132kV Network One Line Diagram .NSCC at Sri Jayewardenepura Indicative Ground Floor Plan st Indicative Control Centre 1 Floor Plan nd Indicative Control Centre 2 Floor Plan Indicative Control Centre Front Elevation Indicative Control Centre Section Indicative Control Centre Power Supply System Gabion Wall Chain Link Gate Chain Link Fence Layout Plan. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. DRAWINGS The drawings referred to in the Specification are listed below in Table 12.2016 Sri Lanka map showing Location of sites CEB Hydroelectric Power Complex . 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 12. 0 Rev 0 Rev. 0 Title 220/132kV Network One Line Diagram . 0 Rev. 0 Rev. Table 12-1 List of Drawings Associated with the Specifications Drawing Number TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/HES-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/HES-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/SCA-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-004 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-005 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-006 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/ NSCC-004 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-005 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-006 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-007 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-008 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-009 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-010 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-011 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-012 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-013 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-014 Revision Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.1 and contained in Section C of the Bid Documents. 0 Rev.Mahaweli NSCC SCADA System Architecture Overview of the New Telecommunication Network-2012 Available Fibre Optic Links Proposed SDH Network Topology Proposed Telephone Network Existing Telecommunication System Existing Telephone Network Site Plan .

cleanliness and exposure to dust. For bidding purposes the Bidder shall assume that unless stated otherwise that interposing equipment is required at a substation for all I/O listed in the Schedules. Air Conditioning. The final cost for the outstation works will be against a measured amount of installed material. Ventilation.1 GENERAL REQUIREMEMNTS The Contractor shall conduct comprehensive surveys at each site where work under this Contract is to be carried out. interposing relays.) and any remedial action required. this shall not extend to replacement or retrofitting of auxiliary contacts on switchgear and Current or Voltage Transformers (CTs & VTs). The survey report shall include but not be limited to: 1 2 3 Condition of existing equipment to which the Contract Works must interface or may affect.2 PRELIMINARY SURVEYS Preliminary surveys of a selection of sites have been carried out by the Employer and the details are provided in Part D Appendix 1. The report shall identify where existing equipment is unsuitable or requires modification The environmental conditions and condition of any environmental control (e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 13. It shall be the Contractor‘s responsibility to verify any information that is used in the design and implementation of the works.g. identify those signals that must be provided and those that. 13. The approach when defining these signal lists was to identify a standard set of signals applicable to all plant at each voltage level. the survey shall establish whether the existing line traps. SITE SURVEYS 13. etc. compatible with the new digital PLC equipment and that the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4 EXISTING PLC SYSTEM For existing analogue PLC links which are to be upgraded to digital PLC links. the Contractor shall detail this in the survey report. line matching units including coaxial cables to be retained are in satisfactory condition. The survey report shall detail the work required depending on the age and original specification of each switchboard. In practice this may vary because of the particular plant in question and the survey shall identify such variances. The findings of the survey shall be used by the Contractor in his detailed design and implementation plan. moisture etc. Where such work would be required to implement the signals or controls identified in the signal lists. These surveys are intended as a guide and as a set of preliminary information. repeat relays. could be omitted. transformer etc. 13.3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SIGNAL LISTS FOR OUTSTATIONS A single line diagram of the existing and a signal list for the planned configuration at 2012 has been provided in Part D Appendix 2 for each of the locations. Lighting. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed survey report describing the work and materials required to complete the installation and put the equipment into operation. The Contractor shall be responsible for the plant interface design and the undertaking of any modifications to existing equipment necessary for establishing the plant interfaces for the signals included in the lists. The Bidder shall complete the schedule of unit rates for additional transducers. due to the anticipated problems and difficulties of providing them. access and routing Location of new equipment Planned routing of cables Implementation plan Final list of signals and corresponding transducers and interposing devices to be implemented 4 5 6 7 8 9 The survey report shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. coupling capacitors. However. equipment and devices and calculated in accordance with the unit rates defined in the schedule of rates. 13.Section 6 . Limitations for connection to existing equipment Available space.225 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

In many cases the installation of new equipment will require that existing equipment be removed. Where this equipment is still in service the report shall detail the implementation process that will ensure the continuity of service associated with that equipment during its replacement or the transfer of service. The report shall detail the survey finding and any anticipated duration of power outages required for the installation of the digital PLC equipment. All equipment that is to be removed including equipment that is already out of service and located in the communication rooms where new equipment is to be installed.5 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED The site survey shall determine where each item of Telecommunication. 13.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification coupling bandwidth is correct for re-use.226 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. cabling requirements. termination and any other works necessary for completion and putting into service. routing. Outstation and Power Supply equipment is to be installed. shall be removed by the Contractor and delivered to the Employer‘s stores for subsequent disposal by the Employer.

Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Employer. The applicable standards include but are not limited to those listed below: 14.2 GENERAL STANDARDS IEC BS/Other BS 159 ISO 14000.227 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . IEEE Standards. 1 ISO 9000.3 PROTECTION. screws and nuts Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not required. ISO Standards. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS 14. Fusion welding of steels Non-destructive examination of welds Galvanised wire for telephone and telegraph purposes Chromium plating Packaging Code Bourden tube pressure and vacuum gauges Dimension of temperature detecting elements and corresponding pockets Metallic coatings – Hot dip galvanised coatings on ferrous metals – Determination of the mass per unit area – Gravimetric method Metallic coatings – Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated ferrous products – Requirements Metal and metal oxide coatings – Measurement of coating thickness – Microscopical method Non-magnetic coatings on magnetic substrates – Measurement of coating thickness – Magnetic method Standard Voltage High voltage test technique Environmental Testing Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) Recommended graphical symbols Pollution classification 60038 60060 60068 60529 60617 60815 14. International Telecommunications Union (ITU) Specifications and the General Technical Specification.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 14.Section 6 . 1 BS 3643 BS 4190 BS 4872-1 BS EN 1435 BS 182 BS EN 12540 BS 1133 BS EN 837 BS 2765 ISO 1460 ISO 1461 ISO 1463 ISO 2178 Description Specification for high voltage busbars and busbar connections Environmental Management Systems Quality Management Systems ISO metric screw threads ISO metric black hexagon bolts. METERING AND CONTROL IEC BS/Other EATS50-18 Description Design and Application of Ancillary Electrical Equipment Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1 GENERAL All services and equipment supplied under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Specifications.

5.4 BS/Other Description Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories Electrical relays Dimensions of Mechanical Structures of the 482.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60051 60255 60297 60514 60521 60947 61000 60282 60289 60044 60076 60186 61010 61036 14. control and laboratory use Alternating current static watt-hour meters for active energy (Classes 1 and 2) SCADA/EMS AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 60038 60050 60060 60068 60130 60255 60304 60326 60332 60353 60358 60481 60495 60529 60651 60664 60693 60708 Description IEC Standard voltages International Electro-technical Vocabulary High-voltage Test Techniques Environmental Testing Connectors for frequencies below 3 MHz Measuring relays and protection equipment Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency cables and wires Printed boards Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Line traps for ac power systems Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers Coupling devices for power line carrier systems Single sideband power line carrier terminals Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Sound level meters Insulation co-ordination for equipment within lowvoltage systems Dimensions of optical fibres Low-frequency cables with polyolefin insulation and moisture barrier polyolefin sheath Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6 mm (19") Series Acceptance inspection of Class 2 alternating current watt hour meters Class 0.228 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour meters Low voltage switchgear and control gear Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) High voltage fuses Reactors Instrument transformers Power Transformers Voltage transformers Safety requirements for equipment for measuring.Section 6 .

Part 5-104: Transmission protocols – Companion standard for basic tele-control tasks Telecontrol equipment and systems .Measurement methods and test procedures Optical fibre cables Safety of laser products Teleprotection equipment of power systems RTU centralised and distributed solutions Tele-control equipment and systems – Part 5: Transmission protocols – Section 101: Companion standards for basic tele-control tasks Tele-control equipment and systems – Part 5: Transmission protocols – Section 102: Companion standard for the transmission of integrated totals in electric power systems Tele-control equipment and systems . taking into account non-adiabatic heating effects Safety of Information technology equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Safety standards Electricity metering – Tariff and load control – Particular requirements for electronic ripple control receivers Data Exchange for meter reading. TASE 2 Services and protocol Connectors for optical fibre and cables Calculation of thermally permissible short-circuit currents.Section 6 . tariff and load control –Direct local data exchange Programmable controllers Fibre optic communication subsystem test procedures Optical Amplifier test methods Optical Amplifier IEC 60870-5-102 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-6-503 IEC IEC 60874 60949 IEC IEC IEC IEC 60950 61000 61010 61037 IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 61107 61131 61280 61290 61291 IEC IEC IEC IEC 61300 61334 61753 61850 Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components Distribution automation using distribution line carrier systems Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components performance standard Communication networks and systems in substations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Part 5-103: Transmission protocols – Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment Tele-control equipment and systems .229 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Telecontrol Protocols compatible with ISO standards and ITU recommendations.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 60793 60794 60825 60834 60870 60870-5-101 Description Optical fibres .

2048. Sub STM-0 network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies.1-2008 X Windows 27001/1/2/5/11. 6312. 8448 and 44736 kb/s hierarchical levels Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.708 G.230 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G. G708 & G709).704 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (merged version of G707.Section 6 .707 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.653 G. Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code modulation channels.Glossary of Terms Electricity metering – Data exchange for meter reading.709 G.652 G.731 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. scientific and medical radio-frequency equipment – Electromagnetic disturbance characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre cable Characteristics of a dispersion-shifted singlemode optical fibre cable Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical amplifier devices and subsystems Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544.661 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.712 G. tariff and load control Fibre optic active components and devices Fibre optic active components and devices Safety aspects for xDSL signal on circuits connected to telecommunication networks Industrial. NERC CIP 9075-1/10/13/14 62005 62051 62056 62148 62149 62367 CISPR 11 Description Application Interfaces Application Software Information security Information security Reliability of fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive optical components Electricity metering .702 G.703 G.711 G. Primary PCM multiplex equipment for voice frequencies.706 ITU-T G.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard IEC IEEE ISO/IEC ISO/IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 61970 Parts 1/2/3/4/5 1003.704 ITU-T G.

735 Description Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T ITU-T G.821 ITU-T G. Characteristics of a flexible multiplex in a plesiochronous digital hierarchy environment Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) Timing requirements at the outputs of slave clocks suitable for plesiochronous operation of International links Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network.773 G.772 G.737 ITU-T ITU-T G.823 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.803 G. Second order PCM multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s and using positive/zero/negative justification Protected monitoring points provided on digital transmission systems Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous digital hierarchical (SDH) management information model for the network element.231 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .742 ITU-T ITU-T G. Synchronization layer functions Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks.784 G. The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kb/s hierarchy ITU-T ITU-T G.736 G.813 G.774 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G. Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s and offering synchronous digital access at 384 kb/s and/or 64 kb/s.Section 6 .741 G. Characteristics of an external access equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s and offering synchronous digital access at 384 kb/s and/or 64 kb/s.745 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.732 G. Characteristics of asynchronous digital multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s. General considerations on second order multiplex equipments Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s and using positive justification. Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management.797 G.781 G.783 G.744 G.812 ITU-T G.

2110 M.958 G.3000 M.10 K.3100 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T G.826 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.921 G.11 K.3013 M. constant bit-rate digital paths and connections Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Interworking of SDH network protection architectures Management aspects of the optical transport network element Digital sections based on the 2048 kb/s hierarchy Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fibre cables Digital transmission system on metallic local lines for ISDN basic rate access Connection characteristics Low frequency interference due to unbalance about earth of telecommunication equipment Principles of protection against overvoltages and overcurrents Induced voltages in cables with plastic-insulated conductors Provision of a metallic screen in plastic-sheathed cables Performance limits and objectives for bringinginto-service and maintenance of international SDH paths and multiplex sections Bringing-into-service international multi-operator paths.232 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3016 M.841 G.2130 M.825 Description The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) End-to-end error performance parameters and objectives for international.3020 M.3010 M.2101 ITU-T ITU-T M.874 G.1430 K.13 K.2120 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T M.14 M.957 G.842 G. sections and transmission systems fault detection and localization procedures Operational procedures for the maintenance of the transport network Overview of TMN recommendations Principles for a telecommunication management network Considerations for a telecommunication management network TMN security overview TMN interface specification methodology Generic network information model ITU-T G. sections and transmission systems International multi-operator paths.961 G.831 G.

LAN Cables EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment Emissivity (Industry) Immunity (Industry) Electrical Protection Relays IEEE IEEE EIA EIA EEC EN 1613.V.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T M.464 568 89/336 55022 EN EN BS 14.23 X.C.150 Description CORBA generic network and network element level information model TMN management services and telecommunication managed areas: overview TMN management functions Maximum permissible value for the absolute power level of a signalling pulse Technical features of push-button telephone sets Principles of maintenance testing for public data networks using Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) test loops Outstation data networks Standard for local and metropolitan area networks Private Branch Exchange (PBX) switching Equipment for Voice Applications.3120 M.3200 M. insulation for low frequency cables and wires Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Humidity Test on Terminations a Dynamic Short-circuit Performance of Heat Shrink Joints and Termination Kits components shall conform to High Voltage Test Techniques Guide to the selection of HV cables Specification for PVC insulated cables (non armoured) for electric power and lighting Conductors of insulated cables Impulse Tests on cables and their accessories Partial Discharge Measurements Electric cables .Section 6 .5 50081-2 50082-2 142 AUXILIARY POWER AND CONTROL CABLES IEC BS/Other BS 2484 BS EN 50262 VDE 0278 ESI-09/13 60060 60183 60227 60228 60230 60270 60287 60304 60332 Description Specification for straight concrete and clayware cable covers Metric cable glands For Thermal Short-circuit.Calculation of current rating Standard colours for P.16 Q.3400 Q.233 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 61850 802 RS.

9 INSPECTION AND TESTING IEC 60068 BS/Other Description Environmental testing 14.234 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 .10 ANCILLARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BS/Other Description General requirement machines for rotating electrical IEC 60034 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.8 EARTHING SYSTEMS IEC BS/Other BS 7450 IEEE 80 IEEE 32 Description Code of practice for earthing Guide for safety in substation grounding Neutral grounding devices 14.6 BS/Other Description Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV up to 30 kV Artificial pollution tests on high voltage insulators to be used on A. coding and special purposes Low voltage fuses Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Circuit Breakers for household and similar installations Low voltage switchgear and control gear Residual current circuit breakers 14.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60502 60507 60840 60885 14. systems (applicable to outdoor termination only) Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for rated voltages above 30 kV up to 150 kV Electrical test methods for electric cables LVAC SWITCHFUSE BOARDS IEC BS/Other BS 381 C 60269 60439 60898 60947 61008 Description Specification for colours for identification.C.7 DC BATTERIES AND CHARGERS IEC 60146 60269 60439 60623 60947 IEEE 1184-2006 BS/Other Description Battery chargers Low voltage fuses Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Batteries Low voltage switchgear and control gear 14.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60072 60085 60947 BS/Other Description Rotating electrical machines – Dimensions and Output Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation Low voltage contractors switchgear and control gear: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .235 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 15. unless otherwise stated in the Specific Technical requirements in the contract document. Outstations and Telecommunication equipment will be located in suitably air-conditioned buildings/rooms. However. 15.2 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS Site outdoor operating conditions are as tabled below. The Contractor shall fully detail the environmental suitability. The indoor equipment to be provided under this Contract shall be suitably protected from these elevated levels of temperature and humidity. performance and reliability of the equipment to be supplied.1 INDOOR INSTALLATIONS It is expected that the SCADA/EMS system(s). of days per year of thunder storms 30 500 mm 50 mm 65 mm 150 mm 92% 12% 38% 145 km/h +22C for approximately 6 hours per day +35C +35C +8C +21C Value(s) Up to 2500 meters above sea-level Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 15. the temperature and humidity may rise significantly in the absence or failure of air-conditioning or ventilation (see Climate Conditions). Site Operating Condition Altitude Ambient temperature: Maximum outdoor – shade Maximum outdoor daily average Maximum outdoor yearly average Minimum outdoor yearly average Maximum ground at depth 1 m Relative Humidity: Maximum Minimum Yearly average Maximum wind velocity: Rainfall per year: Maximum Minimum Maximum in one day Yearly average Atmosphere: Average no.236 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

25 m from any point of the Works with all equipment doors closed and covers in place) b) cell phones when operated in the 900 MHz frequency band (or future frequency bands utilised by Third Generation mobile phones) within the same rooms as the equipment (0.5 PRODUCTION OF CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE The Works shall not introduce conducted interference that disturbs its own internal operation or generates interference on the incoming power supply that causes maloperation of sensitive equipment supplied by others.7 EMC STANDARDS The Bidder shall indicate: a) With which. the Works shall be immune from the levels and types of electrostatic discharge (ESD) which can be found in a typical office environment.2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY The Works shall be immune from the effects of: a) 5 W hand held VHF transceivers when operated in the same rooms as the RTU equipment (0. 16. i. 16. The Works shall conform with the requirements in the following Clauses with respect to the above listed phenomena.e.1 GENERAL The electromagnetic environment comprises: a) Conducted emissions and susceptibility b) Radiated emissions and susceptibility c) Conditions leading to electrostatic discharge. if any. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 16. 16.237 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor shall describe in the relevant maintenance manuals any special precautions to be taken to guard against the effects of ESD when the Works are under maintenance.3 PRODUCTION OF RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY Emissions from equipment supplied under the Contract shall be limited to ensure there are no unwanted internal effects on the Works and no interference to the operation of similar equipment (supplied by others) located in the same or adjacent rooms. Directive 92/31/EEC and Directive 93/68/EEC.4 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY The Contractor shall ensure the Works are immune from the effects of the following types and levels of conducted electromagnetic interference: a) Impulse Voltage Withstand b) High Frequency c) Signal lines Common Mode Rejection shall be better than 50 dB at 50 Hz d) Signal lines Series Mode Rejection shall be better than 40 dB at 50 Hz 16. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 16. Directive 89/336/EEC amended by Directive 91/263/EEC.Section 6 . standards relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) the equipment complies and whether type test certification demonstrating compliance with such standards exists b) Degree of compliance with the requirements of the EEC directive on EMC.6 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE During normal operation. 16.25 m from any part of the Works with all equipment doors and covers in place) c) Typical levels of broadcast radio and television signals d) An electromagnetic field with a field strength of 10 V/m measured by the method specified in IEC/BS EN 61000-4-3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 16.

Flow charts. In addition to covering the manufacture of all equipment. If the Subcontractor has a suitable Quality Assurance Scheme complying with the ISO 9000 series of standards. The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance with sound quality and environmental management principles. For the required level of quality assurance to be achieved. all design activities undertaken by Subcontractors will be subject to all the requirements stated within this Section. The Contractor shall submit the Quality Plan revised to include a complete list of all site personnel detailing names. the Contractor shall take responsibility for such items. The Quality Plan shall cover all test and deliverable equipment and software. The Contractor shall provide for approval full details. site installation and commissioning. to agreed time scales. 17. In addition. and when and by which organisation. However. technical and other key staff to be employed at site. installation and commissioning activities. In addition. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT 17. This activity shall be documented in a manner that provides a high degree of assurance that the required level of product quality has been achieved. as necessary. the Contractor shall supplement his Quality Management System with the requirements detailed hereunder where they do not already form part of his standard Quality activities. they will be applied.238 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . of all engineering. supplemented with brief explanatory text are the preferred method of presenting information that identifies the various stages of control. Personnel shall not mobilise to Site prior to approval being given. unless named and proposed in the Bid. and testing. These visits may be in addition to those necessary to undertake product audits. positions and responsibilities complete with an organisation chart. manufacture progress. 17. The Contractor shall ensure that all the requirements detailed hereunder are applied to his Subcontractors such that the Employer and/or his representative can perform the same level of surveillance stated hereunder at the Subcontractors works. the Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing the items upon receipt and ensuring their fitness for purpose. The Plan shall also identify the Employer's approval activities and make due allowance for the time involved in these activities. this control shall encompass hardware and software design activities and. All corrective actions and remedial work shall be carried out at the Contractor's cost. Subcontractors shall not be used except by prior written approval of the Employer. then inspection of records will normally be sufficient to establish compliance.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 17. the Plan shall make provision for the Employer to witness test and final inspection stages at the appropriate Manufacturer's works.3 SUB-CONTRACTORS Where proprietary items are purchased from a Subcontractor. where applicable. Otherwise. 17.1 GENERAL The Contractor is required to control the quality of all equipment within his scope of supply. at mutually agreed times. including curriculum vitae.Section 6 .2 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE The Employer and/or the Employer's Representative reserve the right to visit both the Contractor's and any of their Subcontractors' premises. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the Contractor shall demonstrate that he has a functional and adequately documented Quality Management System formulated to satisfy the requirements of the ISO 9000 series of standards. and in particular shall have management systems which conform to the requirements of the ISO 9000 family of standards for Quality Management and the ISO 14000 family of standards for Environmental Management. inspections and witness tests on equipment or software.4 QUALITY PLAN A final Quality Plan shall be submitted for the Employer's approval within two months of Contract Award. in order that the Employer can gain objective evidence that the level of quality control is adequate to meet the Contract requirements.

Should major deficiencies be found in either the product or in the methods for the control of quality.7 ORGANIZATION Software quality management shall be clearly described by the Contractor. reporting. 17. for at least 5 years following completion of commissioning of the Works and shall be filed in such a manner that retrospective review by the Employer can readily be effected. This shall be carried out by the Contractor to agreed time scales. Records generated to substantiate the attainment of performance and design standards must be retained. facilities. Software Quality 17. 17. These reviews shall be carried out independently of the designer of the particular part under review. manufacture. The SQP shall state the software practices and procedures to ensure conformance with all software requirements of the Contract. batch-produced items may be covered by a Batch Certificate.239 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and correction of software problems and deficiencies. 17. installation and commissioning associated with each element of the Works. coding and testing. All quality records must refer to these numbers. It will be necessary for all major hardware items and assemblies to have unique serial numbers and for all software modules to have version numbers. etc. at the Contractor's own cost.9 REVIEWS The Contractor shall reference or document the procedures to be used for reviews to ensure that the software meets the contract requirements. a System of Quality Record sheets. Normally. and authorities for its execution and all key functions as described in succeeding paragraphs. tools. The Design shall be subject to review prior to release for coding. These audits will review quality records and associated documentation relating to each element of the Works in order to gain assurance that work is being carried out to the required level of quality. The SQP shall also identify and make timely provisions for special needs (controls. Each item of equipment must have a unique Certificate of Inspection and Testing. responsibilities. analysis.Section 6 . The SQP shall also identify the methods to be used for detection. shall be put in place by the Contractor. there shall be one Record Sheet for each piece of equipment (Line Replaceable Unit) or software module.6 QUALITY RECORDS In order to maintain control over the quality of all Works during design and manufacture.5 AUDITS Correct functioning of the Contractor's Quality System will be verified by the application of an internal audit programme at various critical stages in the progress of the Works.) required for its execution. evaluation and rectification of quality related problems during all phases of the contract.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 17. detailing results of inspections and delivered tests. Inspection and Test plans shall be generated for both equipment and software production. by the Contractor. testing. The procedures shall include:      Descriptions of the objectives of each review Identification of key milestones in the software life cycle for reviews Methods for specifying non-scheduled reviews Identification of the function of the personnel involved Provision for the recording of analyses and recommendations for reviews Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. However. The SQP shall identify and describe the organisation. as applicable. providing all serial numbers of equipment are shown and an appendix to the certificate details the acceptance parameter bands within which the controlled parameters have been found to conform.8 PLANNING The Contractor shall prepare a Software Quality Plan (SQP) that meets all quality requirements. The latter shall permit inspection of module definition. skills. then due notice will be given to the Contractor that urgent remedial or corrective action is required. The quality records and associated documentation shall ultimately cover all stages of design. at no extra cost to the Employer. There shall be particular emphasis on the allocation of authorities and responsibilities in respect of the detection. the documents shall be delivered to the Employer. The frequency and depth of ongoing surveillance activities by the Employer and/or the Employer's Representative will be dependent upon the results of initial audits. At the end of this 5year period.

approval by the Employer of the content of test plans. the Contractor shall ensure that procedures exist to identify. test files and hardware used as a tool for software testing to ensure it has been documented.10 The Contractor shall identify all Software Quality measures related to software integration and testing. verified. Provision for controlling and accepting non-conforming software. Specifically. validation and certification have been carried out in accordance with the relevant quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract Identification and review of any software. The procedures shall include a method for: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Provision for defining all necessary re-testing to validate modifications to any item of software. The Contractor shall identify the CM procedures to be applied to software development. test data. These measures shall ensure that an adequate range of procedures are in place and that they are rigorously enforced. The measures shall include:   Software Checks to determine if the software requirements and design have been analysed for testability Review of test documentation to ensure it has been produced in accordance with the requirements of the associated quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract. authorised changes have been incorporated in the design Verification that tests have been carried out in accordance with the requirements of the quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract with particular emphasis on the identification of software tested Review of test records to ensure all witnessing results. CORRECTIVE ACTION        Adoption of a System to report problems and deficiencies to the appropriate management level.12 A Software Configuration Management (CM) Plan shall be produced defining the manner in which the changes to software are controlled and logged during the lifecycle of the project. control and maintain all software design changes. tested in accordance with the relevant quality procedures and requirements of the Contract Maintenance of test-related documentation to allow test repeatability Where appropriate. and only. This shall require the Employer's approval. Review of corrective measures to determine their effectiveness. Provision for ensuring that timely corrective action is taken by reviewing deficiencies and tracking their clearance.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification  Methods to ensure that the recommendations arising from reviews are monitored to ensure that timely corrective action is taken TESTING 17. Analysis of deficiency trends to prevent the development of non-conforming software. specifications and records shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Inspection and Test requirements.Section 6 . Analysis of data and examination of problem and deficiency reports to determine the causes and to propose corrective measures. The results of such validation and verification exercises shall be fully documented.240 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The validation and verification modules and sub-modules shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the relevant quality procedures.11 The Contractor shall reference and document Software Quality procedures that shall include: 17. calibrated. document. with particular emphasis on ensuring that all. CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT      17.

ACCOMMODATION AND ASSISTANCE The Employer shall have the right to appoint a Quality Assurance Representative (QAR) to monitor the Contractor's software quality as applied to this project. The QAR shall be afforded unrestricted opportunity to verify conformance of the software with Contract quality requirements. Ensuring that modifications are properly integrated. The Contractor shall make his support tools available for reasonable use by the QAR for verification purposes. Ensuring that non-conforming software is identified and segregated. The Contractor shall provide the QAR with the accommodation and facilities required for the proper accomplishment of his work. storage and handling of software media.241 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The control of the identification inspection status. registration and updating. Producing build documents at baseline.13 Program and/or module version identification. The QAR shall have the right of access to any area of the Contractor's or their Subcontractor's premises where any part of the Work is being performed. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification           17. If the Contractor demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Employer that the required level of software quality is being achieved during the course of the Contract then this Clause would not normally be invoked. The control of support software. The proper marking. The provision of validated copies. Obtaining approval to implement a modification. and shall provide any assistance required by the QAR for assessing the state of the quality control aspects of the Contract material. Keeping secure masters at separate locations. The Contractor's personnel shall be made available for operation of such support tools as required.

pressure. All equipment shall be designed to prevent accidental contact with live parts. 18. quantities. including those due to faulty synchronising and short circuit. The design shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provisions for the safety of those concerned in the operation and maintenance of electronic equipment and systems.242 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The design shall include all necessary interlocks for the operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with the Employer‘s safety rules and system operation/maintenance practices of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other contracts. Particular attention shall be given to ease of maintenance and fault finding. etc. nuts and screws shall comply with the appropriate international standards for metric threads. insects. and the particular equipment or system specification. The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the works. reptiles. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 18. cleaning.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Equipment manufacturers/suppliers shall take all reasonable precautions to minimise the susceptibility of their equipment to electromagnetic interference produced by other equipment and plant. Where it is necessary to take specific measures on site in order to achieve the desired degree of immunity (e. special earthing or screening arrangements). adjustment or anticipated replacement shall be readily accessible. both with respect to arrangement and detail. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation in all atmospheric conditions prevailing at the sites and during such sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system. Continuity of supply is of prime concern. All equipment shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals. All equipment shall be designed to operate without undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise. The equipment shall be of the manufacturer‘s standard design.3 DESIGN. The material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the highest quality and selected particularly to meet the duties required of them. repairs and maintenance. Test points and components requiring testing. Equipment shall be designed to facilitate inspection. All outdoor apparatus and fittings shall be designed so that water cannot collect at any point. throughout this Contract shall be in the SI-system of units (International System of Units). The equipment shall be designed to operate satisfactorily under all variations of load.g. 18.Section 6 . All equipment shall be designed to minimise the risk of fire and any damage that may be caused in the event of fire. mites. rodents or micro-organisms.2 SYSTEM OF UNITS Technical Data dimensions. STANDARDIZATION AND INTERCHANGEABILITY The works shall be designed to facilitate inspection. and temperature that may be met in normal usage under the variation in climatic conditions given in the Specifications. The equipment offered in this Contract shall have been proven by satisfactory operating experience. maintenance and repair. and of associated equipment. full details of these measures shall be submitted for approval. equipment or system design is to conform to the best current engineering practise. Printed circuit cards shall be clearly labelled and the associated sockets shall be coded in an approved manner to prevent incorrect assembly. All bolts. provided that this design is in accordance with this Specification and particular equipment or system specification. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment that is in tension or subject to impact stresses. Electro-mechanical armature type relays shall not be employed in any sequencing or timing functions.1 GENERAL In complying with the requirements of this Specification. birds. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at the site and under such sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system.

losses and technical performance of the equipment in strict compliance with the Contract Documents and particularly with the provisions of the Scope of Works and Specifications. and physical properties best adapted to their various purposes in accordance with the best engineering practice. If the Contractor desires to use stock material or components not manufactured especially for works under this contract. he shall submit evidence by presentation of respective certificates. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in their respective trades. mites. Tolerances. The materials used for the construction of the plant shall be selected carefully for the purpose intended and with due consideration of site conditions and tropical environment. frequency of operation. fits. 18. composition. designed for frequent operation. Higher grade material shall be used in every case where ordinary material may be insufficient. including grade of class. All works shall be performed and completed in a thorough workmanlike manner and shall follow the best modern practice in the manufacture of high grade equipment.5 EQUIPMENT LIFE Unless otherwise specified in the particular equipment or system specification. Corresponding parts throughout shall be made to gauge and shall be interchangeable. insects. However. All contactors or relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion. as well as for the efficiency. it may be acceptable to meet the design life by the use of a replacement sub-unit using different components but having the same or better (but fully compatible) overall performance. All equipment shall be of rugged & durable construction. that such material or components comply with the requirements stated in the Specifications and to an approved standard and that the quality of such material is adequate for the intended use.243 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . paints. All equipment performing similar duties shall be of the same type and manufacture in order to limit the stock of spare parts required and maintain uniformity of plant and equipment to be installed. birds. 18. rodents or micro-organisms. the Bidder shall state the expected frequency of such replacement or adjustment and the life expectancy. To enable maintenance to take place during the working life of the equipment. and finishes shall conform to the best modern shop practices in the manufacture of finished products of a nature similar to those covered by the Specification. taking into account functions such as duty cycle. the Contractor shall state the period for which production of the equipment is likely to continue and give guarantees regarding the time period for which he will hold spares. All equipment shall conform to the applicable standards as to material. Normal routine and breakdown maintenance shall be assumed and it is accepted that certain consumable components and modules may need periodic replacement or adjustment.6 RELIABILITY Where a quantitative requirement for reliability is specified in a particular specification. Material specifications. The Contractor shall indicate in the respective Technical Schedules the proposed materials and their applicable standards for all major items of the supply. but no particular method of demonstrating it is called for. cubicles and similar enclosed compartments shall be equipped with anti condensation heaters actuated by hygrostat and thermostat to restrict condensation. component ratings and all other factors determining equipment life shall take this into account. to the Employer's satisfaction. the Contractor shall show that the equipment he is offering meets the requirement in one or more of the following ways: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. shall be shown on the appropriate detail drawings submitted to the Employer for approval. All apparatus shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Kiosks. equipment shall be designed for a minimum working life of 15 years in the specified environment and application. etc.Section 6 . design and tests. Where life expectancy is limited by the availability of replacement components. treatments.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP Materials used in the manufacture of the specified equipment shall be of first class quality and of the kind. The Contractor shall guarantee for the quality of all materials. 18. workmanship. Components.

7 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS All mains supplies shall be switched and fused. 48 volts dc for supply of communication and telecontrol equipment Unless otherwise specified or a wider operating range is specified in relevant international standards. Except where prior approval is obtained. Full details of how the ―inservice‖ data was collected and processed should be given.7. Double-pole switches shall be used to break singlephase ac mains supplies. Where approval is given. 18. Such information must be accompanied by details of the environment in which the equipment is used and total operating hours accumulated. then ―inservice‖ failure rates shall be given as above. the Contractor shall state ―inservice‖ failure rates.Section 6 . Where ―in-service‖ data is not available for the equipment offered. for example transformers. 110 volts dc for facia type. the Contractor shall supply details of design changes and show how these could affect reliability. the Contractor shall calculate a reliability assessment based on the reliability figures of the individual components. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the plant provided under this Contract shall operate reliably between eighty percent (80%) of the nominal voltage and 110% of the maximum of the nominal and float voltages. 2. wires external to the equipment shall be colour coded in accordance with the current IEC Recommendations. Where the Contractor includes within his equipment or system specially designed components. he will be required to state the methods he adopts to achieve a reliability consistent with the specified overall reliability of the equipment or system. each phase shall be switched simultaneously. 18. or bought-in items of equipment. and shall verify this calculated reliability against the actual performance in the field over a given trial period.244 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All mains circuits shall be protected only in the phase-lines by fuses of suitable rating or by other suitably approved protective devices. The electricity supplies for auxiliary supply are as follows:       415 volts 3-phase 50 Hz 4-wire 240 volts single phase 50 Hz 110 volts dc for essential indications.2 Direct Current (dc) If electronic equipment or system require the use of local internal batteries approval must be obtained. such as power supply units (PSUs). leak-proof type. alarms and HV circuit breakers closing and tripping supplies.7. could cause loss of a function or malfunction of a particular system. 4. Where the equipment offered is an updated version of equipment already in use. but in addition. The Contractor shall undertake to provide upon request failure distribution data for all components.1 Alternating Current (ac) All mains supplies shall be switched and fused. 18. For multi-phase supplies. batteries used inside equipment shall be of the totally sealed. Double-pole switches shall be used to break singlephase ac mains supplies. The neutral shall be connected by a removable link located near the protective devices. on failure. assemblies and units which. multi-window alarm schemes. 110 volts dc for power operated isolators and earthing switches. For multi-phase supplies. Where the equipment offered is identical to that already in use. each phase shall be switched simultaneously.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 1. All mains transformers shall have an electrostatic screen which shall be earthed. 3.

i. All cubicles shall be fabricated with metal pockets to hold the equipment drawings and termination diagrams.Section 6 . 18.7.8. The general design of racks and cubicles shall be subject to approval.4. Protection circuits incorporated into PSUs shall be such that any overload of the output or short circuit current does not damage any components within the PSU.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Miniature or moulded case circuit breakers. Where fuses are used the Contractor shall ensure that proper discrimination between main and sub-circuits is maintained.3 Power Supply Units (PSUs) PSUs shall be of approved design and such that they do not impose parasitic or harmonic voltages on the station battery system or electronic equipment. account is taken of the circuit time constant. cabinets. unless otherwise approved. Swing frame gates for mounting equipment shall be avoided as far as possible but where essential the wiring to the mounted equipment shall be flexible.4.8 CUBICLES.4 Protection 18. 18.7. be of the high rupturing capacity cartridge type. CABINETS. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded so that accidental contact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is withdrawn. as far as possible.e. They shall be suitably rated for both the continuous and short circuit loadings of the circuits they are protecting under all service and atmospheric conditions stated in the specification and ensure that correct discrimination is maintained between main and sub-circuits. adequately protected and run for a distance along the hinge length of the swing frame to allow the wires to be twisted rather than bent when the gate is swung. Neither racks nor cubicles shall.1 Fuses and Links Carriers and bases for fuses and links shall be in accordance with IEC 269 standard and colour coded to permit identification of the circuit rating. the incoming (supply) circuit shall be connected to the bottom terminals. Means shall be provided to prevent the circuit breakers being inadvertently switched to the ‗OFF‘ position. They shall be of the free standing type. All moulded case circuit breakers shall be provided with an auxiliary contact(s) for remote indication of circuit breaker operation and interlocking purposes. RACKS AND CONTROL PANELS 18. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. shall be designed and tested in accordance with IEC 947 and supplementary requirements of this specification. exceed 2300 mm in height.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18. racks and control panels shall all conform to applicable IEC 297 Standards.7. Cubicles. PSUs shall incorporate over-voltage protection devices to protect the components that comprise the output load. All incoming circuits in which the voltage exceeds 110 V shall be fed through isolation fuses or circuit breakers and/or links. unless otherwise specified.g. Where fuse carriers are mounted vertically. Main supply fuse links shall. be employed for all apparatus.7. The cubicles shall be equipped with lighting fittings of an approved type. e. Where circuit breakers are used in circuits containing inductive loads. operating coils. Circuit breakers shall be mounted in such a manner so as to give easily visible indication of breaker position and shall be grouped and spaced according to their function in order to facilitate identification and easy replacement. Similar racks or cubicles shall. it is essential that they are suitable for satisfactory operation in the circuit in which they are used.245 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . hereafter called circuit breakers. of adequate length.1 General All the apparatus of solid state type shall be mounted on plug-in cards in cubicles. fabricated steel construction. and provided with shelves. 18.

terminal blocks. washers or tags. The gland plates shall be removable and in the case of floor mounted bottom entry cubicles. Fuses and links shall be provided to enable all circuits in a cubicle. Where appropriate. etc) with the labels attached to the fixed portion of the terminal boards. galvanised and painted. secured with integral handles provided with locks and duplicate keys to an approved system. The cubicle doors shall be of the lift-off type. These items shall be located in an approved. labels and door locks. and earth bar with earthing connection. It shall be possible to work on small wiring for maintenance or test purposes without making the cubicle dead. junction boxes. Cubicles and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand twisting without distortion. The cooling air for the cubicles and cabinets must be cleaned and free from dust. Within the cubicles and racks. vermin proof and so designed that condensation shall not affect the insulation of the terminal blocks or cables. to be isolated from the bus wires. All cubicles shall be adequately ventilated to restrict condensation and where necessary shall incorporate anti condensation heaters. Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately from one another along the top or bottom of the cubicle. except a lighting or heating circuit. cable glands and gland plates for small wiring and multi-core cables. position and so arranged that the terminals face the access direction for convenience during maintenance. Fans shall comply with the noise limitations imposed by the international standards. 18. The Bidder shall state the time for which the equipment can remain operational after failure of the forced ventilation system.e. The equipment installed in the cubicle/panels shall be easily accessible.2 Cubicle Wiring Cubicle wiring shall be insulated with polyvinylchloride to IEC 228 standard. Wires shall not be joined or teed between terminal points.246 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . cubicles.8. Where forced ventilation is approved. hand lamps. system control.Section 6 . If the equipment in the cubicles/panels is of the nature to dissipate heat. shall be not less than 200 mm above the base of the cubicle to allow access for applying the cable gland. etc shall be such that cable terminations are arranged suitably for top or bottom cable entry for all cables. Air filters shall be renewable and arranged for ease of replacement. Racks and cubicles shall be complete with all necessary tag blocks. telephone circuits. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Circuits working at different voltages shall be adequately segregated and labelled.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where regulated supplies are made available on panels for operating test instruments. alarm and tripping circuits. and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket of rubber or other approved material to prevent the ingress of dust. easily accessible. terminals shall be provided for connecting the screens of screened twisted pair cables. It shall not be possible to inadvertently short busbars either between themselves or to earth. the cubicles shall be equipped with the proper and approved cooling and ventilation system. wiring. dustproof. special sockets shall be provided on the panel to prevent portable tools. wiring ferrules. Marshalling cubicles shall be complete with all necessary terminal blocks. The lowest mounting point. All filters shall be accessible and easy to clean. In each marshalling cubicle circuits shall be grouped and labelled according to function (i. Forced ventilation shall not be used without approval. All marshalling cubicles shall accept a common key for locking.8. fans shall be duplicated to provide 100 per cent standby capacity and shall initiate remote alarms in the event of failure. The design and construction of all racks. Cubicle doors shall be provided and arranged to lie flat back when open and not restrict access to the apparatus contained within the cubicle. Power supply busbars in cubicles shall be carefully routed and each busbar shall be shrouded.3 Marshalling Cubicles Including SCADA Interface Panels Marshalling cubicles shall be of fabricated steel construction of minimum thickness 2 mm. or other apparatus for which regulated supplies are required. plug-in group or terminal block shall be not less than 400 mm above floor level. 18. etc being plugged into such supply. precautions shall be taken to exclude dust from individual groups of equipment.

wire-clamp connectors.8. Identification labels shall not be affixed to wiring trunk covers nor shall they be affixed to removable or interchangeable covers. Where connections are to be made between multi-core cables and multi-pair telephone type cables. Sinhalese and Tamil on the door of the cubicle. boards being inserted upside down. They should be mounted vertically and set not less than 100 mm apart with a minimum distance of 200 mm between the top or bottom and the gland plates. Other methods of connection such as taper pin connectors. Each item shall have a unique reference for identification and this shall be consistent on local labels. 18.247 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . etc.1 Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks shall be of non-flammable insulating material with a comparative tracking index of not less than 500 in accordance with IEC 112 standard. shall be to specific approval. 18. The design and arrangement of connectors shall be such that incorrect mating cannot occur. IDC headers should employ ejector latches. All cubicles shall have an identification label affixed externally. Terminals for stranded wire conductors shall normally be of the insertion clamp type incorporating captive pressure screws which do not bear directly on the wire but on a serrated clamping plate. Not more than one wire may be terminated at each insertion type terminal. etc. control panels mimic diagrams. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.g. Suitable warning labels shall be provided.8. The design of clamps shall be such that the cable is not compressed sufficiently to cause creep in the insulation. All terminals shall be numbered. the terminal blocks shall comprise an insertion type terminal for the multi-core cable and insulation displacement for the telephone cable joined by withdrawable or ‗U‘ links to facilitate isolation. Components and Terminal Identification All equipment. For multi-core cables.Section 6 .3.4 Equipment. They shall also incorporate means for clamping the incoming cable so that the conductors are relieved of any stress. Covers of transparent insulating material shall be provided on terminal blocks on which connections for circuits at 110 V or higher are terminated.2 Connectors Multi-pole connectors shall be provided with means whereby each free plug or socket can be locked in the match positions. or a board being inserted into the wrong socket. Sufficient terminal blocks shall be provided to allow individual cores to be connected to separate terminals together with a further 20 per cent spare terminals. The use of terminal blocks as junction points for wires that are not required in the associated cubicle shall be avoided. These terminals shall also be provided with facilities for the insertion of test probes on both sides of the link.8.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18. drawings. Where possible. terminal blocks shall be provided with links to isolate individual circuits for maintenance purposes whilst the rest of the apparatus is functioning normally. terminal blocks shall be of the insulation displacement type. The type of insulation displacement connector (IDC) chosen shall be one that grips the insulation or employs a strain relief clamp. they shall be of a type that provides gripping and support for the insulation as well as the conductor. PCB connectors shall incorporate reliable means (e. Where the use of snap on connectors is agreed. Cubicles containing a working voltage in excess of 110 V shall carry a prominent electrical shock symbol and a ―DANGER‖ label in English.3. fibre optic connectors. Terminals other than those described above may be permitted but the type and arrangement of termination shall be to approval. polarising slots) to prevent incorrect mating. For telephone type multi-pair cables. Links shall be provided to isolate individual circuits or groups of apparatus for maintenance purposes whilst the rest of the apparatus is functioning normally. Internal component label lettering shall be not less than 4 mm high and any supplementary detail on the same label shall be differentiated by employing a lettering size of at least 1 mm less than that used for primary information. components and terminal fields shall have suitable identification labels affixed.

Digital indicators shall be to approval. All instruments shall be back-connected and their cases shall be earthed. 18. but generally in compliance with the requirements of IEC 1020. equivalent to 20 times full load current for not more than 0.8. deterioration etc.9. For outdoor applications the degrees of protection shall be to Ingress Protection (IP) 65 or higher. Where the equipment can also be adversely affected by dust within the enclosure. colour and shape of keys and push buttons shall be to approval. junction boxes and distribution boards shall be afforded adequate protection against corrosion. fixing arrangement.Section 6 . the degree of protection shall be to IP 44. marshalling boxes. paintwork. For indoor applications where purpose built accommodation is provided.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All labels and safety signs shall be affixed using screws or bolts with captive nuts. In two-directional circuits.1 Keys and Push Buttons The type. lamps shall have the minimum power consumption. 18.9. Paint colours shall be to the approval of the Employer. this equipment shall be separately housed with a degree of protection of IP 54. Analogue instruments shall be of an approved moving coil type.g. (e. A schedule of proposed labels and safety signs detailing size. Where light emitting diodes (LEDs) are used. this equipment should be separately housed with a degree of protection of IP 52. Where dust can adversely affect equipment within the enclosure. For indoor applications where the equipment is housed in the same building as that enclosing water and steam operated equipment. 18. The display shall not ‗hunt‘ about an average value at a rate that renders it illegible.248 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All paints shall be applied in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer‘s instructions.5 Degrees of Protection Equipment degree of protection shall be provided in accordance with IEC 529 standard.5 seconds through the primary of their corresponding instrument transformers. and shall be of an approved type and size. mechanical damage. equipment.9 CONTROL AND INDICATING DEVICES 18.6 Painting and Finishing All cubicles. All non-locking keys and push-buttons shall be spring loaded and so designed as to avoid inadvertent operation. Digital indicating instruments shall conform to IEC 485. colour and size of lettering shall be submitted for approval during the design phase. erection and commissioning.3 Indicating Lamps Indicating lamps and lamp-holders shall be of approved types. switch. and arranged for ease of replacement and maintenance. with a dead beat mechanism. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned using dry blast cleaning and a suitable anti-rust treatment applied prior to the application of the final protective finish.2 Indicating Instruments All analogue indicating instruments shall conform to IEC 51 standard industrial grade. consistent with good visibility of indication in a well lit room. control and relay rooms in auxiliary plant buildings) the degrees of protection shall be to IP 42. adhesive fixing shall not be used. 18.8. The instruments with associated circuits. To reduce heating and fouling of the control boards. Identification labels shall be securely fixed to steel work and wiring and other items shall not obscure the label. ergonomically suitable for the function that they have to perform. 18. shall not be damaged or have their accuracy impaired by the passage of fault currents. Approved means shall be provided for zero adjustment without dismantling the instrument or removing the instrument from the panel. etc which may have occurred during transportation. wide angle type. position. centre zero instruments or displaced zero instruments shall be employed as approved. The Contractor shall make good using the same coating to the satisfaction of the Employer any deterioration of protective coatings.9. they shall preferably be high output.

All ducts and covers shall be sealed after installation of cables. Cables shall comply with the relevant parts of IEC 60502 and IEC 60811. piping and accessories. Illumination of fascias and legends and all indicating symbols shall be clear and distinct and shall be subject to approval. All multicore control cables having more than 7 cores shall have approximately 20 per cent spare cores. Printed circuit boards shall be tinned and varnished or otherwise protected against corrosion and all connectors (plug or edge type) shall be plated with gold. Any screening and cable segregation necessary to prevent spurious signals being induced between cables shall be shown on the block cable diagrams. They shall be clean and free from flux likely to cause particles to adhere to the board and cause short circuits. 18.9. cable markers. Also for telephone type cables conductors of cross sectional area of 0. indication and monitoring of all plant provided under this Contract. numbered ferrules.4 Plug-in Cards The number of different types of plug-in cards shall be kept to a minimum.10. The design and construction of plug-in cards shall be such that they shall not distort. clips and all fixings. steel wire armoured (aluminium in the case of single core cables) and sheathed with LSF. lugs. Suitable extender cards shall be provided to enable plug-in cards to be tested in circuit. cable ladder racks.2 Cable Types LV power cables shall be 1000 V grade. single core or multicore XLPE insulated. 18.10 SECONDARY WIRING AND CABLES 18. ferrules. shall be subject to approval. In special cases for light current installations. All special tools for withdrawing plug-in cards shall be provided. Methods of mechanical protection. Terminals shall be provided for all cores. cables shall have galvanized steel wire armour with a thermoplastic waterproof over sheath. cleats. fittings. cable schedules and the cable route plans. junction boxes.5 mm2 may be used. glands.10. Printed circuits shall be to approval.6 mm2 may be used.Section 6 . thermoplastic insulation and thermoplastic inner sheath. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to demonstrate that the maximum continuous current carrying capacity of any power cable will not be exceeded after taking installation dependant de-rating factors into account and short circuit currents. single strand annealed copper conductors with a cross sectional area of 1. Plug-in cards shall be spaced such that an electrical short circuit to adjacent cards cannot occur during insertion. All cables provided must comply with the latest applicable IEC standards. The minimum conductor size shall not be less than 2. Where routed outside buildings or enclosures and where no other overall mechanical protection is afforded. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 mm2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The colour of lamps shall be to approval. steel wire armouring and PVC outer serving. other than steel wire armour.249 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor shall undertake all relevant design and engineering of the cable systems for equipment in its scope of supply. Insulation and protective levels for printed circuit modules shall as a minimum be in accordance with IEC 870-3 Class II. and shall submit for review the cable connection schematic diagrams. but not less than two cores for future use. control.1 General The cable installation to be provided shall include all cables required for the supply. cable trays & covers. but generally in accordance with IEC 73 standard. The cards shall be colour coded and also provided with an approved form of interlock to prevent them being inserted in an incorrect shelf position. terminal diagrams. All similar plug-in cards shall be interchangeable. All control and small power wiring and cabling (except fibre optic cables) supplied under this Contract shall have multi-stranded copper conductors complying with the requirements of IEC 60228 and IEC 60228A. cable lists. 18. LV power cables with compacted or compressed type stranded conductors will not be accepted. brackets. The clarity of these fascias and legends shall not be impaired by the incident or transmitted light. The installation shall be complete with all cable terminations.

These measures shall be subject to approval. The screen single core cables shall be earthed at one end only. 61034 and be anti-vermin and anti-termite impregnated. Cables shall be marked at each end of the run with a marker consisting of a label attached to the cable with two straps. The layout of all cables shall be arranged to have adequate clearance from other services. Each cable shall be identified by means of indelibly marked identification labels fixed adjacent to the cable gland at each end of the cable. number and configuration required for each tray plus additional cables. The trays shall be of adequate strength and size to carry in one layer. in excess of those installed. Glands appropriate for use with Steel Wire Armoured (SWA) type cables are to be provided and arrangements for multicore SWA type cables are to be taken into account in the switchboards. The outer LSF sheaths of cables shall have reduced flame propagation characteristics in accordance with IEC 60331. and the cable support system. The labels shall be made of material which is resistant to the effects of corrosion. Wherever cables pass through floors. All sheaths shall be free from defects and impervious to water. Cable cores. Where this is not possible. walls or other partitions a suitable method of sealing shall be used. the cables shall be securely fastened at intervals of not more than 1 m with clips. termites and also mechanical damage. Where run on trays or racking. Termination and Identification All cables shall be installed above ground level or in trenches. All cabling and wiring shall be flame retardant Low Smoke & Fumes (LSF) type complying with IEC-332 Part 3 and during combustion shall emit no halogen gases and produce minimal smoke.250 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Cables shall be neatly laid throughout and in such a manner as to avoid any undue sagging of cables. All cables shall be installed and terminated in accordance with the manufacturer‘s recommendations. the weight. supported on trays and racks. Three single core cables forming one three-phase circuit shall be installed in trefoil formation. The emergency equipment shall be connected with fire-resistant cables. the cables shall be clamped together at intervals not exceeding 1 metre. twins. 60754. Where SWA cable is not used then provision must be made to protect the cable from damage due to physical abuse and attack from vermin. Cables that are likely to be exposed to sunlight during operation and maintenance shall have ultra-violet safe insulation. Sufficient slack shall be provided near the ends of the cable runs to allow for disturbance during maintenance or repair. 18. Precautions shall be taken to ensure physical contact does not take place anywhere throughout the run. Cables running inside buildings or concrete trenches shall be laid on trays. Running equipment cables along the same route as power cables shall be avoided. Equipment that is required for emergency use shall be cabled using routes that are different to. the routes used for normal running equipment. vermin. Cable cores shall be terminated without the addition of separate tails. or in the case of telephone cables with cable ties. moisture. Cabling and wiring shall be designed and the installation arranged to minimize the risk of fire and damage. All cables shall be mechanically protected throughout the installed route. Nonferrous glands shall be used for single-core cables. UV radiation. the cables shall be segregated as fully as possible. or segregated from. straps or saddles.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where twin or quad make-up is required in any cable.10. the cores shall be uniformly twisted and the lays arranged such that cross talk is reduced to a minimum. All cables shall be glanded at both ends with glands of type/material suitable for the application. In order to maintain this formation. This sealing shall consist of one-hour fire resisting materials such that a maximum of 100°C is Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Individually screened pairs or overall screened multicore cables shall be provided where it is necessary to provide immunity from interference and reduce the effect of induced extraneous voltages.3 Cable Laying. quads and individually screened multi-pairs shall be colour coded. Cables shall generally be routed to avoid hot or fire-risk areas and to minimize the risk of damage from any source. not less than 25% by weight and dimensions. where considered necessary shall also incorporate a sunshade to protect the installation from the damaging effects of UV radiation. Each core of a multi-core cable shall be readily identified by a number impressed into the insulation every 100 mm.Section 6 .

Equipment shall be designed so that the armouring of all incoming and outgoing cable and can be connected together externally. connected through any field junction boxes. or areas with water spray fire protection. racks.1 General Earthing of electronic equipment is required to reduce the effects of interference and for the safety of operation and maintenance staff.3 Cable Screens and Armouring The design of equipment shall be such that cable screens and cable armouring are kept electrically separate throughout the equipment installation so as to avoid the introduction of earth loops and minimise interference pickup. enclosures. 18. Cubicles.11 EARTHING 18. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. shall be equipped with a ‗clean‘ instrument earth comprising an insulated copper earth bar for the connection of cable screens. Seals in damp areas. desks etc. Connection of the instrument earth to the site earth shall be by separate conductor to the equipment safety earth.2 Safety Earthing All non-current carrying metallic parts of plant. shall be earthed by connection to the earth bar in an approved manner and all earthing terminals and connections shall be of adequate dimensions.Section 6 . the door hinges will not be accepted as a means of earthing this part of the equipment. 18. 18.11. but shall be electrically isolated from the enclosure. All ‗clean‘ instrument earth bars shall be clearly labelled as such.11. Protective screens around insulated cables shall be insulated from field instruments. smoke and fumes through each partition. a stud type terminal of diameter not less than 12 mm or a tapped boss of equivalent size shall be provided on the outside of each cabinet or structure for the purpose of making the connection to a convenient local earth point. The cable armour shall be connected to the site earth at a single point. When apparatus or instruments are accommodated on panel. components.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification maintained on the cold side of the seal with 1000°C applied to the hot side. Cable armouring shall not be used as a protective screen. equipment. etc. cubicle doors or swinging frames.251 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . flexible cable or braid shall be used for earthing these items. All seals shall be vermin and termite proof. and be continuous up to the earthing point in the destination cubicle or desk. Where there is a conflict between these two. shall be waterproof. Except where otherwise approved.11. personal safety shall always take precedence. The whole installation shall be arranged to prevent the spread of fire.

New Software ‗New Software‘ means any software that is developed or modified to provide facilities required for this project. are not required to meet the design or coding requirements of this Specification. includes operating systems. and the Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of all hardware and software supplied. 19. and embedded software on proprietary equipment such as network interface cards and printers. including third party software items. standard software for data acquisition.252 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . instrumentation or the process being monitored and/or controlled. as stated in this Specification: Words used in this Specification to describe categories of software shall have the meanings defined below. whether such facilities are explicitly specified or not. ‗Software‘ shall mean all coded instructions and data that are processed by a computer or other processor controlled device. for example. the Contractor shall warrant that such items are suitable for the purpose for which they are supplied. Existing Software ‗Existing Software‘ means any existing software forming part of the Contractor's standard product that has been proven in use at several sites over a period of at least one year. However.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19.2 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Standard third party software that was originally designed for purposes unrelated to this project. into a single integrated package that meets the requirements of this Specification. This. such as operating systems. This waiver shall not apply to any third party software that has been modified in any way by the Contractor or his subcontractors. All software provided shall meet the following requirements. display and control. It does not include any software that requires development or modification to meet the requirements of this Specification.Section 6 . Software For the purposes of this Specification. or to cause the software to function according to project requirements. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 19. Entry of this data shall not require any alteration to program coding. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Configuration and Source Data ‗Configuration and Source Data‘ includes any software configuration tables or data entered to define the characteristics of plant. compilers. Such modification shall be subject to the design control and quality assurance provisions of this Specification. programme development and management utilities.1      GENERAL Functionality Performance Reliability and availability Quality assurance standards SCADA/EMS applications shall comply to Common Information Model (CIM) and Generic Data Interface (GID) standards as defined by IEC 61970.

3 CODE AND DATA STANDARDS 19. 19. The mechanisms shall operate automatically and shall include periodic cyclic checks. Verification and Testing The level of software validation.253 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3. 19. verification and testing to be applied shall be clearly identified by the Contractor.4 APPLICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE This Section defines how the Contractor's quality assurance procedures shall apply to the different categories of software. Real-time and calculated data shall be held within the system database in a manner that makes them readily accessible to all programs that require this information. but such distribution of data storage shall be transparent to the user. for example containing the real-time data.1 New Software All new software (if applicable) shall be produced in accordance with the software quality assurance procedures described in this Specification. The Employer reserves the right to audit the quality control procedures used by the Contractor for the production of new software. plant records.4.2 Existing Software It is recognised that existing software may not have been developed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.4. and to notify and correct errors. 19. where possible. They shall make documentation for that software available for inspection during the Bid evaluation period..4 Software Validation. Where the software is of a proprietary nature and not of the Bidder's design.3 Configuration Data The Contractor shall establish quality control procedures to ensure that configuration data is in accordance with Clause 17 and any subsequent updates to such data are correctly entered into the SCADA/EMS system.2 Database Structure In order to ensure the integrity of all data held by the System.3.1 Programming Languages The SCADA/EMS system and all new software shall be written in a standard high-level language that is suitable for implementation of real-time systems.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19. 19. there shall effectively be one master System Database in which each item of data is stored only once. 19. and it is not intended that quality assurance procedures should be applied retrospectively. The System Database may comprise a number of databases. The Bidder shall provide details of all programming languages used.3 Program and Data Security The software design shall ensure the integrity and safety of all code and data at all times so that.4.Section 6 . 19. geographical data. the Bidder shall provide evidence of their experience with the software and its performance in similar applications. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. they cannot become corrupted due to interrupted transfers or inadvertently over-written.4. etc. Mechanisms shall be provided to ensure consistency between the master system database and any online or backup copies.3. 19. The System Database shall be structured in such a way as to simplify maintenance of data and programs and it shall not be necessary for the user to enter the same data into the System more than once. Database protection at both field and record levels shall be provided to prevent inadvertent corruption of the database. for example.

1 General The following requirements shall apply to all. reviewed and approved in accordance with the approved SDM.6 Detailed Design For each new software function defined in the FDS.5. They shall also implement procedures for controlling all changes to issued software and documents.5 SCADA/EMS SOFTWARE 19. proprietary application software provided by the Contractor and their subcontractor that forms the complete SCADA/EMS System and its associated ancillary systems. 19.3 System Development Methodology All software development shall be carried out in accordance with a recognised System Development Methodology (SDM).5. as specified in Section 4 ‗Documentation‘. The Contractor shall not purchase any specialised hardware for this Contract nor commence the production of any software until the FDS has been approved. The Contractor shall provide a traceability reference with the FDS. which shall be subject to the Contractor's quality control procedures. The Employer will not be held liable for any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of changes to work carried out before approval of the FDS.5 Functional Design Specification For each function to be realised using software. 19. 19.5. 19.2 Software Life Cycle Quality assurance controls and verification shall be applied to each phase of the software system life cycle. The detailed design shall include data flow diagrams.5.4 Documentation Documentation for each phase of software development shall be produced.254 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . These procedures shall ensure that work is only carried out on the latest version of all software and documents. The FDS shall be produced in accordance with the approved system development methodology and shall be submitted for review.5.4. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the Contractor shall prepare a formal written Functional Design Specification (FDS) fully describing:     The functionality that will be provided The methods and algorithms used to realise the functionality Details of the user interface Details of the data inputs and outputs of the function The FDS shall not include the coding for any function unless the inclusion of segments of code would be useful to describe the functionality of a particular function. 19. 19.5.Section 6 . module interface definitions. program structure charts.5 Change and Issue Control The Contractor shall implement procedures for controlling the issue of all software and related documents. Documentation shall be an integral part of each phase and not a separate activity. The Contractor shall keep backup copies of all issued software. structured English or pseudo code specification of module logic and such other documentation as is specified in the approved SDM.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19. The FDS shall state which functions will be implemented with existing software and which functions require the development of new software or modification of existing software. the Contractor shall prepare a detailed design document that shall describe how the function is to be implemented.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.6

OPERATING SYSTEMS

19.6.1 General Each computer system shall be provided with a real-time, multi-user, multitasking operating system that provides a suitable environment for executing the software intended to be utilised on each system, especially for real-time functions. UNIX or LINUX solutions are preferred rather than WINDOWS. If WINDOWS solutions are offered the Bidder shall describe in detail the specific means of mitigation of risks to reliability and security. It is preferred that each processing base unit, e.g. workstations, servers, front-end processors, shall use the same operating system and the same version/upgrade of that operating system. The number of different operating systems shall be kept to a minimum and, preferably only one operating system should be used for all computers. The Contractor or their subcontractors shall have made no customisation to the supplied operating system(s). A priority system of resource allocation shall allow both real-time and other tasks, such as system configuration and maintenance, to execute in the same environment while maintaining absolute priority for real-time tasks. A memory protection system shall prevent any task from writing into a memory partition that is allocated for the exclusive use of any other task. Facilities shall be provided to monitor the correct release of memory when tasks terminate and no longer require the memory allocated to them. The operating system shall fully support the hardware, both in its initial configuration and in any expanded configuration that the Employer may purchase from the Contractor, and shall provide software control of all functions of the hardware. 19.6.2 Security The Operating System shall support multiple users simultaneously exercising its resources and the resources of the computer system (e.g. disk drives, etc). Identification and password security shall be implemented for each user and a file protection scheme supported. Access by any user to any file, package or system facility shall not be granted unless the user is known to the system and has the required authorisation level for the operation they wishes to perform. The following access authorisation levels are required for files:     Execute only Read only Read/write/update Modify the file definition (e.g. name, password, etc).

19.6.3 System Utilities The operating system shall include the following utilities as a minimum:         An intelligent file backup utility that will only backup files that have been modified since the previous backup was made A copy utility to copy files from one medium to the same or a different medium A utility to dump an image of an entire hard disk, e.g. to another hard disk or tape, and to restore such images back to a hard disk A utility to undelete files that have been previously deleted A utility to check the integrity of a disk, to diagnose any problems and lock out any faulty areas of a disk A utility to de-fragment all the files on a disk A utility to view the contents of a file, either in ASCII text or hexadecimal format, without changing the contents of the file A directory sort utility, enabling the directory to be displayed with the listing sorted in ascending or descending order of file name, file size or file date

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 255 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

  

A sort/merge utility that can sort or merge a number of files of any size according to one or more sort keys Facilities to dump nominated areas of memory and the CPU registers to disk, particularly for investigation after a task crash All utilities shall include context sensitive help.

19.6.4 Text Editor At least one text editor shall be supplied with the operation system and the following facilities are required for all text editors provided: Windowed and full screen operation of the facilities defined below            The ability to edit files formatted for input to all language translators provided, files formatted for printing and free text Horizontal scrolling facilities to allow editing of files with line lengths that are longer than the screen width The ability to edit files that are larger than the amount of free memory available to the editor The ability to work on a copy of a file without affecting the original The ability to locate text containing a specified string of characters, and the next occurrence thereof, including the optional use of wildcards The ability to search for, insert or delete variable length strings of data The ability to move or copy an identifiable string of data from one part of a file to another part The ability to move or copy an identifiable string of data from one part of a file to a specified location in a different file The ability to merge text from several files The ability to display text either as ASCII characters or in hexadecimal representation, or in both formats on the same screen Context sensitive help

19.6.5 Software Configuration and Maintenance Facilities Facilities shall also be provided for the maintenance of the System software, whether or not the source code is provided with System. 19.6.5.1 Diagnostics and Fault Monitoring

A complete package of diagnostic programs shall be provided with the System that will allow testing of all system devices, including inter processor links and communications with RTUs, to determine whether or not a problem exists and to isolate a problem to a certain area in the device. Both online (self diagnostic) and offline diagnostics shall be provided. Facilities shall be provided to run diagnostics on all relevant subsystems of the SCADA/EMS System. 19.6.5.2 Error Detection and Reporting

Malfunctions to be reported shall include excessive program execution time, communications errors and identification of faults in each hardware device provided. Any malfunction shall cause a message to be generated in clear English text and brought to the attention of the operator, so that remedial action can be taken. It is not acceptable to merely generate an error number that must be looked-up in a manual or elsewhere. Facilities shall be provided to display the status of all flags and devices on demand.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 256 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.6.5.3

Online Performance Measurement

An online performance measurement and analysis tool shall be provided to check system operation and to enable tuning and optimisation of the system as a whole. This tool shall measure overall CPU utilisation and identify the resources used by individual users and tasks. 19.6.5.4 Telemetry Communications Statistics

The system shall continuously calculate and update statistics on telemetry scans and errors, and provide facilities for this information to be displayed on request. The following information shall be provided for each outstation (RTU or SCS) and for the total of all outstations on each data line: a) b) No response Invalid response The number of times an outstation failed to respond to a request from the Master Station The number of invalid replies received from an outstation in response to a request from the Master Station, tabulated by error type (e.g. incorrect message length, CRC error, address error, etc.) Total number of scans (valid and invalid) carried out during the reference period

c)

Number of scans

The above information shall be accumulated as follows:       Current hour Previous hour Current day Previous day Current month Previous month

In each case, the 'current' figures shall be updated continuously. At the end of each hour, day and month period respectively, the 'current' figures shall be transferred to the 'previous' figures and the 'current' figures shall be reset to zero. An historical record of communications statistics shall be maintained by the system complete with a long term archiving facility. 19.6.5.5 Software Maintenance Facilities shall be provided for generating the System‘s executable code from source code. These facilities shall be the same as the facilities used at the Contractor‘s factory or completely compatible with them. It is anticipated that these facilities will be used by the Contractor onsite to build and integrate any software fixes or updates received from the factory, or prepared onsite, into the System. Any modifications prepared onsite shall be managed under the overall software quality procedures. It is not intended that these facilities be used routinely by the Employer but they are required in order to safe guard the Employer against the loss of software support, for any reason, from the Contractor. In that case these facilities would permit the Employer or others, to effect any necessary software maintenance, modification or addition. 19.6.5.5.1     Language Translators

The following facilities are required for all language translators (compilers and interpreters) provided: Separate compilation/assembly of subprograms Clear statements to be produced, in plain English, of error conditions that are encountered during the translation process and execution Optionally produced source listings Optionally produced cross reference listing, providing an alphabetical listing of all program variables showing where in the program each variable is defined and used

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 257 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

 

Optional trace and debug facilities in accordance with the requirements of Clause 19.7.9 Optional code optimisation to produce code for normal or fast execution. Source code processed and object code produced in each case shall be compatible, for example, a subprogram compiled for fast execution shall correctly link to a subprogram compiled for normal execution A ‗make‘ facility that shall check the date and time when each source code file for a specified program was last modified against the date and time when the associated object code file was created, and automatically recompile all source files that are more recent than the associated object file A ‗build‘ facility that shall recompile all source code files for a particular program regardless of the relative date/time of source and object files. Linker

19.6.5.5.2

The linker shall be able to accept one or more object modules produced by an assembler or compiler, resolve symbol and procedure references between them and produce an executable image. If more than one language translator is provided then the linker shall be capable of linking object modules produced by any or all language translators into a single executable program. The linker shall optionally be able to produce a storage map of all linked modules, including library modules, and a tree-structured map showing the calling structure. 19.6.5.5.3 Program Maintenance Libraries

Program maintenance library facilities shall be able to create and update program libraries of source and object programs and provide the following facilities:        Support for any number of source or object program libraries Facilities for the creation, deletion and copying of individual libraries Facilities to add source or object modules to a specified library Facilities to delete source or object modules from a specified library Facilities to extract a source or object module from a specified library, modify it and re-insert it in the library Facilities to extract a source or object module from a specified library and insert it in another library A facility to display a directory listing of individual libraries, showing the name and version number of each member and the date it was last modified Trace and Debug Facilities

19.6.5.5.4

Trace and debug facilities suitable for debugging programs written in any of the languages used on this project shall be provided with the System. Both source code and machine code debugging shall be supported as described below. Source Code Debugging Source code debugging facilities shall be able to set, remove and locate breakpoints in the source code of any of the languages provided. While the program is halted at a breakpoint, the following facilities shall be available and displayed for selection:      Search for variable length text strings in the source code Display values of program variables, that are identified to the debugger by using their source code variable names, in decimal, binary or hexadecimal format Change the values identified as in (b) above Clear breakpoints and optionally set new ones Run the program to the next breakpoint or program termination and return control to the debugger

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 258 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

   

Run the program one source code line at a time Skip over lines of source code and whole subprograms without tracing through them Display the call stack, showing by name the hierarchy of subprogram calls that brought the program to the current instruction Context sensitive help

Machine Code Debugging Machine code debugging facilities shall be able to set, remove and locate breakpoints in the machine code produced from any of the language translators provided. While the program is halted at a breakpoint, the following facilities shall be available and displayed for selection:               19.7 Search for variable length binary or hexadecimal strings in the object code Display the values of nominated memory locations in binary, fixed point decimal, floating point decimal or hexadecimal format Change the contents of a nominated memory location by entering a new value in binary, decimal or hexadecimal format Clear breakpoints and optionally set new ones Run the program to the next breakpoint or program termination and return control to the debugger Display the contents of all registers and flags whenever a set breakpoint operates or the program is halted Run the program one machine code instruction at a time Display the call stack, showing the hierarchy of subprogram calls which brought the user to the current instruction Display and optionally change the contents of CPU registers Assemble instructions entered as assembler mnemonics at a specified location in memory Disassemble machine code at specified locations in memory Jump to a specified memory location and execute the code there, and run to the next breakpoint or program termination Convert numbers between binary, fixed point decimal, floating point decimal and hexadecimal formats Context sensitive help PATENT AND COPYRIGHT

19.7.1 Patent Rights The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims of infringement of any patent, registered design, copyright, trade mark or trade name or other intellectual property right provided that all of the following conditions are satisfied: The claim or proceedings arise out of the design, construction, manufacture or use of the Works or any Plant supplied by the Contractor The right was protected at the date of award of the Contract in the Contractor's country or the country in which the Plant is to be manufactured or erected The infringement or allegation of infringement was not caused by any use of the Works otherwise than for the purpose indicated by or reasonably to be inferred from the Specification The infringement or allegation of infringement was not caused by the use of any Plant in association or combination with any plant not supplied by the Contractor, unless such association or combination was disclosed to the Contractor prior to the date of the Bid

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 259 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.7.2 Claims in Respect of Patent Rights The Contractor shall be promptly notified of any claim under this Clause 19.7 made against the Employer. The Contractor may, at their own cost, conduct negotiations for the settlement of such claim and any litigation that may arise from that claim. The Employer shall not make any admission that might be prejudicial to the Contractor unless the Contractor has failed to take over the conduct of the negotiations or litigation within a reasonable time after having been so requested. The Contractor may not, however, conduct such negotiations or litigation before they have given the Employer such reasonable security as the Employer may require. The security shall be for an amount that is an assessment of the compensation, damages, expenses and costs for which the Employer may become liable and are the subject of the indemnity under Clause 19.7.1. The Employer shall, at the request of the Contractor, provide all available assistance for the purpose of contesting any such claim or action and shall be repaid all reasonable costs incurred in so doing. 19.7.3 Backup Copies of Software The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer shall have the right to make backup copies of all software and firmware supplied under the Contract for their own use without in any way relieving the Contractor of his obligations. 19.7.4 Right To Modify The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer shall have the right to modify any of the software supplied under the Contract without in any way relieving the Contractor of their obligations. 19.8 LICENCES

The bidder shall provide full details of the licence requirements for each item of software included in the system. The details shall include any restrictions in number of users or platforms on which the software is installed. In general licences are required for all users of the system when fully expanded and these shall be valid indefinitely. Users shall include all those with access via equipment provided under this contract including the office PCs.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 260 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

20. CIVIL WORKS 20.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

20.1.1 Civil Engineering, Building works and Services Standards and Codes of Practice The works shall be executed in accordance with the latest version of the following standards and codes of practices commonly used in Sri Lanka. However, the Contractor may use equivalent standards and codes of practice subject to the approval of the Employer. : BS 308 BS 5950 BS 1192 BS 5628 BS 5720 BS 5588 BS 8300 & Part M NBS BS 5930 BS 5964 BS 6031 BS 6399 CP 3 CP 102 BS 5400 Part 5 BS 5390, 5618 part 3 CP 143 BS 8004 BS 8110 SLS 522 BS 1474 BS 476 Part 8 ISO 898-1 ISO 630 BS/DIN EN 10027-1 BS 4449 BS 4483 BS 4466 Engineering drawing practice The use of structural steel in building Construction drawing practice Code of Practice of the structural use of masonry Code or Practice for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings Code of Practice for fire precautions in the design of buildings Disabled access Code of practice for Site Investigations Methods for setting out and measurement of buildings: permissible measuring deviations Code of Practice of Earthworks Code of Practice for dead and imposed loads Code of basic data for the design of buildings Waterproofing of buildings. Composite construction in structural steel and Concrete Walling Sheet roof and wall coverings Foundations The structural use of concrete Water for Concreting Aluminium Sections Fire Resisting Doors Bolts & Nuts Hot rolled structural steel sections Designation system for steels Characterization of waste Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete. Specification

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 261 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER DRAINAGE WORK PRELIMINARY WORKS 20. The Employer may at his discretion alter or specify new tolerances as necessary.October 2001 Specification for WATER SUPPLY. The Contractor shall survey the site to obtain the following. Establishment of site boundaries and reduced site datum level. The Contractor shall inform the Employer within 24 hours whenever a new setting-out peg is established or an existing one destroyed. Methods of testing hardened concrete for other than strength Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in construction. The tolerances shall be ruled BS 5606 and BS 5964. SCA/4 – (Volume I) ICTAD Publication No. type testing. Generalities and definitions Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas. bridges and access roads to and over the site. Code of practice for dead and imposed loads Specification for BUILDING WORKS (Volume I) 3rd Revision – July 2004 Specification for BUILDING WORKS – Volume 2. SCA/3/2 Revised Edition 20. Method for preparation of test specimens BS 5481 BS 6651 BS 4660 BS EN 752 BS EN 124 BS 6297 BS 1722 BS 4102 BS 6399 ICTAD Publication No. SCA/4 – (Volume II) ICTAD Publication No. Design requirements. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. and shall regularly furnish the Employer with layout plans showing all current setting-out and survey stations. marking. the Contractor must make his own site surveys to collect all the information to prepare layout drawings. The Contractor shall keep duplicate copies of all his field books and survey calculations written in the English language for inspection by the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification BS 1881 BS 6319 Testing concrete. (1) (2) (3) Location of datum of setting out and levelling. quality control Code of practice for design and installation of small sewage treatment works and cesspools Specification for fences Specification for steel wire for fences Loading for buildings.2 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe and fittings for gravity sewers Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning Specification for unplasticized PVC underground drain pipe and fittings Drain and sewer systems outside buildings.2.1 Site Survey After the award of the contract. irrespective of any checking by the Employer. Position and condition of any approaches.262 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting-out. including highest recorded flood level (from local knowledge).Section 6 .

British Standard 1377. 20.2 Removing existing equipment. handling. transporting and handing over shall be done by the contractor as instructed by the Employer Any damages or losses shall be rectify by the contractor at his own cost. No variation in contract price will be made due to any variation in the bearing capacity leading to modification of foundation design at the final design stage.4.Section 6 . The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work. Drainage pattern of the area The Contractor shall survey the site of the Control Centre location to obtain details of the above items and shall prepare a site survey plan at a scale of 1: 500 showing the survey results and the proposed layout of the new works. All unwanted materials.2.4 Site formation and up keeping 20. Removing.2. All unwanted materials. 20. The Employer will issue a copy of a survey recently carried out to the Bidder for information.2.2. But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to existing road construction and to existing surfaces. But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damages to the other structures.2. Special attention shall be paid to the Ground water table and chemical composition of the ground water and soil in the area. 20. If top layer of soil is not suitable for the construction it shall be removed or stabilised as recommended by the investigator. trees and hedges which are not specifically noted on the drawings or in the contract for preservation shall be uprooted and burnt or otherwise disposed of.4. structural details etc.3. dismantling steel structures Equipments and support steel structures. shall be removed from the employer‘s premises. undergrowth.2. Appropriate laboratory tests shall be carried out on all soil and ground water samples to an extent approved by the Employer.2.3 Site Clearance 20.2 Soil Investigations A sub soil Investigation has been arranged by the Employer and a copy of the investigation report will be made available to the Bidder The safe bearing capacity of the sub-strata may be modified at his final design stage when the full site survey and investigation have been completed and the final layout.3. buildings and other facilities in the area which do not need to be demolished. All tests shall be in accordance with an approved standard.3.1 Cutting and removing trees & shrubs The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work.3 Demolishing & removing of existing masonry/concrete structures Un wanted foundations shall be demolished or up-rooted. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify correctness by making his own site surveys prior to preparing layout drawings. Employer should provide 3 hard copies and a soft copy. Holes left by uprooting shall be promptly filled with suitable material and compacted. e.263 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 The whole of the excavations shall be carried out to the widths. shall be removed from the employer‘s premises.1.1 Cutting and filling earth Excavation 20. etc. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 20. agreed.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (4) (5) Existing site levels on a 5 meters grid. The plan shall be sent to the Employer for his approval. 20. which are to be removed shall remove carefully and handed over to the Kotugoda stores. Bushes. debris. lengths and depths shown on the approved drawings and in accordance with BS CP-8004 and BS 6031. debris. No unlicensed or indiscriminate digging will be permitted. etc.2. dismantling. and resultant contours at a meter vertical interval.g. After completion of the work contractor should do a complete detail survey of the including all the parts completed to the date of handing over.

brickwork or other materials shall be placed or built until the surfaces are properly drained. which could be affected by water in excavations. 20. The Bidder is to allow in his Bid for the costs of pumping. each layer watered when necessary and well rammed or otherwise Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . so as not to inconvenience users of adjacent properties or sites. if approved by the Employer.2. In foundation bottom 150mm layer of excavation in thickness shall be left undisturbed and subsequently removed only when the concrete is about to be placed in order that softening or deterioration of the surfaces of the bottom of the excavated area by exposure may be avoided as far as possible. rubbish and offensive matter.2 De-watering All excavation works are to be kept dry and clean.264 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Other excavated material shall be back filled where required or deposited where directed anywhere on site.100 40-70 25-45 8 . 20. subject to the Employer‘s approval. No concrete.22 0 . Concrete shall not be deposited thereon until the bottom has been inspected and approved by the Employer. Material to be used as fill or backfill shall be well graded granular material and shall have a following grading curve.2. They must ensure that the de-watering of excavations can continue during the placing of concrete or the execution of any other works. be used by the Contractor in the construction Works. in order that work is not affected or interfered with by water entering the excavations.1. including rock. which may be encountered. and shall allow for the use of types of plant most suited for excavation in any location and at any time.10 µ % PASSING Filling for trenches. The Contractor shall at all times keep the site free from all surplus materials. SIEVE SIZE 75mm 37. excavations and levelling of the site shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 250 mm un compacted thickness. Surplus materials shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. The bottom of all excavated areas shall be trimmed. masonry. Arrangements made for dealing with water in excavations shall be approved by the Employer. The Contractor is to provide all strutting and shoring necessary for the safe execution of the Works.3 Filling and Reinstatement If it is required to fill the land to level the formation level contractor shall get approved the filling material and method of construction before the commencement of the work.1. The Contractor shall allow for risk meeting while excavating through any sort of soil.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Contractor may excavate by any method considered suitable. de-watering or other methods of dealing with the water during and after excavation. Water from pumping or other dewatering methods shall be properly drained away from the site or disposed of by tankers. levelled and well rammed. Adequate precautions must be taken against washing out of cement and concrete or to prevent the work being disturbed in any way.4.5mm 10mm 5mm 600 µm 75 µm Note The material shall have a PI < 6 100 85. Materials from the excavation may.

raked and stabilised as protection from erosion to the approval of the Employer.British Standard Code of Practice BS 6031.4.1. If any slips occur in the excavations. bunds. If approved.Section 6 . The tendered price is deemed to include for this. banks or filling during the execution of the Works or during the period of maintenance form any cause whatsoever.2 Explosives Explosives may only be used when specified or approved by the Employer. the intervening space shall be brought up to the proper level in plain concrete at the Contractor‘s expense. which formed either by cutting or filling. their use shall comply with the following: (1) All local by-laws and regulations. free from mud. to divert and protect the site in both the short and long-term form flash floods. imported filling shall consist of pervious naturally occurring material. The written approval of the Employer shall be obtained for each location or series of locations where the Contractor wishes to use more than 5 kg of explosives in one blast. peat.2. culverts. All top surfaces of earthwork shall be finished off level and regular and the sides of cuttings and embankments shall be properly trimmed to the detailed slopes. The Contractor is to allow for embankments and cutting slopes to be well forked. The soil stability of such slops etc. and with such materials as approved by the Employer. Unless otherwise described. Explosives shall be handled only by currently licensed shot fires. in the opinion of the Employer is not sufficiently strong to carry the loads which will be imposed on it. and precautions taken to protect the earthworks from deterioration under adverse weather conditions.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification compacted to within 95% of the maximum dry density obtained by the use of a Proctor Standard Compaction Test. (3) Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by the manufacturers. 20. Any fill material used within 500 mm of concrete structures cement bound materials shall have a soluble sulphate content not exceeding 2. detailing and performance of the earthworks and drainage: Earthworks . clay. etc.4. Filling shall be imported only from approved areas. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4 Stability of Fill and Embankment The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of embankments. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no unauthorised issue or improper use of explosives brought on the Site. (4) When blasting is carried out the Contractor shall ensure.5 g per litter when tested in accordance with BS 1377. shall be ensured..265 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor shall make good all settlement of filling that may occur up to the end of the period of defects liability at his own expense. 20. Embankments shall not be formed over inclined ground surfaces without previously forming the founding surface. Such approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under the Conditions of Contract. the Contractor shall execute the necessary remedial work in such manner. at the Contractor‘s expense. Any formation encountered in the excavations which. to prevent the dispersal or material. shall be excavated to an adequate load bearing stratum and replaced with mass concrete.2. All equipment for determination of the density of filled areas shall be supplied by the Contractor. directed or permitted. Where excavations whether in rock or other material. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer. on which the fill material will be placed. The Contractor shall construct where necessary open ditches. by adherence to proper safety distances and by the use of heavy blasting mats where necessary. vegetable or injurious matter and water soluble salts harmful to copper and other metals. Wherever applicable the recommendations contained in the following codes of practice shall be followed in calculations. (2) The Contractor shall store explosives in a licensed store or magazine provided with a separate compartment for detonators. special precautions shall be taken to protect the concrete or cement bound materials to the approval of the Employer. silt. to a benched profile. are made to a greater depth than detailed.

1 Control and power cable trenches & ducts The Contractor is responsible for all civil works required for cable runs between switchgear and building in concrete cable trenches.5 Cable Trenches & Ducts 20. dust. 20. Concrete cable trenches shall be adequately sloped and adequate capacity of drainage system shall be provided to soak water.2.2. Conduits provided shall be sized to suite the cables provided.4. a cleaning rod shall be drawn through each duct and a No.2. animals or property on or off the Site.3 Cable Pits Cable pits shall be provided at interval not exceeding 100 meters and also at the bends of all cable ducts.266 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2. All other main cable trenches shall have additional capacity of 30% future use. All cable ducts shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients between cable pits. 8 gauge galvanised iron-fishing wire drawn in after the rod. Elsewhere the ducts shall be laid on and surrounded with approved granular material of 150mm minimum bed thickness and 300 mm minimum cover. Trench covers outside buildings shall be of reinforced concrete designed for he maximum likely imposed loads appropriate to their location. Special care shall be taken when blasting in wet ground to ensure that individual explosions are reduced to such a size as to preclude damage to any buildings or structures. as directed.2 Concrete Beds and Casings Concrete beds and casings to cable ducts and under roads.5. 20. Cable ducts may be pitch fibber. Stone chipping shall be laid and lightly compacted to a minimum finished thickness of 100 mm.3 Earth retaining structures Retaining structures or turfing to be done to side slopes as specified in BS 6031. 20. Cable pits shall be sized according to their depth. Cable entries into buildings shall be through ducts or in concrete cable trenches. to provide sufficient working space Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. hard standing areas or where they would otherwise be at risk shall be laid in ducts. Cable entries into buildings shall be sealed to prevent the entry of any water. and treated with an approved total weed killer. Cable pits may be constructed of bricks.4.4 Anti Termite soil treatment Anti termite treatment with more than 10 years guaranty shall be done for the control building area including 3m to either side of the building 20.5. A 100% additional capacity shall be installed for future use and the whole surrounded in a minimum of 150 mm C15 concrete. concrete blocks. plastic or other material approved by the Employer and obtained from an approved manufacturer.40 mm. car parking areas. 20. using suitable materials.4. Cable entry to the control building shall be provided for future requirements. PVC. Main cable trenches shall be rack types with sufficient working space. After the cable ducts have been completed.Section 6 . Expansion joints shall be provided in suitable lengths.. buildings. 20. 20. The ends of the ducts shall be plugged with a wooden plug and the fishing-wires left in the ducts. vermin. in-situ concrete or precast concrete chamber rings and cover slabs.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification that no damage is caused to persons.6 Surface chipping Stone chipping used for surfacing are to be clean hard crushed stone graded from 16 . The formation in areas where stone chipping are to be used shall be well compacted to the approval of the Employer.5 Land escaping & tree planting Suitable trees shall be planted in available vacant areas where necessary grassing to be done to protect erosion.5. Power cable which pass under roads.2.2. debris and other obstructions during and after laying.2. etc. floors and foundations shall be of lean concrete and of 150mm minimum thickness.2. All ducts shall be kept clear from earth. In each case.4. used in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions. the material shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of this Specification.

Rates shall include for all necessary crossings shifting existing any obstructions etc. The test shall be carried out in a laboratory shall be approved by the Employer.267 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The trial design mix proportions shall be approved if the average strength of a set of 9 cubes tested at 2 28 days exceeded the specified characteristic compressive strength by current margin less 3. If possible. it may be taken as having the smaller of the values given by (1) or (2). and then the Contractor shall comply with the paragraph on preliminary test cubes and the two following paragraphs. Preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the proposed mixes as follows: For each grade a set of 6 cubes shall be made from each of 3 consecutive batches. They shall not be used to satisfy the 28 days preliminary test cube strength requirements. If the proposals not be approved by the Employer. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Grade of concrete Title of particular trial mix. cured.6. The ratio by weight of all the constituents of the concrete. Pre-cast concrete marker posts shall be provided along cable runs at 5 meters centres and changes in direction. Full details of the proposed laboratory for testing. Where precast concrete rings are used they shall be surrounded with concrete 150 mm thick. The expected compacting factor and slump. At least four weeks before commencing any Concreting in the Works.6.1 Concrete Work Concrete Trial Mixes: 20. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6 Concrete Work. Pre-cast concrete cable protection covers & PVC marker tape shall be provided over the full width and length of cables in sand filled trenches. the Contractor shall make trial mixes using samples of aggregates and cements typical of those to be used. The results of the seven-day cube tests shall be used to given an indication for future use of the strengths likely to be achieved at 28 days. When constructed of block work.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification and access for maintenance. they shall be rendered internally with sand/cement mortar finished with smooth vertical surfaces. Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of seven days and three at an age of 28 days. the Concreting plant and the means of transport to be employed in the Works shall be used to make the trial mixes and to transport them a representative distance.2. For each of these batches 3 cubes shall be made and one tested at 7 days and 2 at 28 days to determine the likely effect of error in dispensing. transported and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. stored.1. The current margin for each particular type of concrete mix should be determined.2. 20. Foundations & Piling Work 20.1 The Contractor shall submit not less than 3 weeks before the commencement of manufacture of preliminary trial design mixes the following information to the Employer in respect of each grade of concrete. A clean dry mixer shall be used to make the trial mixes and the first batch shall be discarded.Section 6 . The Contractor shall also confirm his proposed testing regime and acceptance criteria for the Preliminary Trial Mixes. Galvanised malleable iron steps are to be provided in all cable pits over one meter deep and built in as work proceeds. The grading of the aggregates. Full details of the proposed site quality control. Power cables shall be laid on and surrounded with sand fill in unlined trenches. The cubes shall be made. If it is proposed to use an admixture in the mix then for each grade of concrete a batch shall be made with a double dose of the additive.5 N/mm .2. Rates shall include for all necessary crossings shifting existing any obstructions etc.

2. Cement shall be of recent manufacture and shall be used within a period of 3 months from production. as agreed by the Employer but in no circumstances shall water be added in transit.400 kg/m unless otherwise approved by the Employer. (2) 1. 10 or 15. which batched off the Site. the margin for the initial mix design should 2 be taken as two-thirds of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7. a smaller 2 margin but not less than 7. The proportioning of mixes for durability will be primarily controlled through the specified limits on free Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. when the required characteristic strength approaches the maximum possible strength of concrete made with a particular aggregate.2 Materials Cements 20.75 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. The concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to the aggregates. The concrete shall be carried in purpose made agitators operating continuously.6.1.6. but not less than 1/3 of the 2 characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7. At each test no cube strength shall fall below the appropriate minimum specified in the Contractor‘s designs. Portland cement. Moderate sulphate resistant cement as per ASTM C 150. water shall be added under supervision. Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his approval full details of the mixes he proposes to use. may be used only with the agreement of the Employer and comply with all requirements of the Contract.64 time the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar supervision. The Employer shall if he so desires be present at all preliminary tests.268 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It shall always be in the range of 350 . of trial mix procedures set out herein. Type I.5 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (1) 1. or truck mixers. truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328 part 3. shall in general be used for all concrete work in foundations and plinths and in concrete structures covered by soil. Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall be altered without the prior approval of the Employer except that the Contractor shall adjust the proportions of the mix as required to take account of permitted variations in the materials.5 N/mm may have to be permitted for the initial mix design. Type V. When truck-mixed concrete is used. to the Employer‘s satisfaction.2.2. 20.6. The Contractor shall inform the Employer of his intention to carry out such tests and the time and place of the tests at least 24 hours before they take place. but not less than 1/6 of the characteristic strength for 2 concrete of grade 7.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12 months by the same plant under similar supervision. 20. may be used at places not exposed to chemical aggressiveness. 10 or 15.1 The type of cement to be used shall depend on the constructional circumstances and on the prevailing local conditions. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer. Total cement contents in the mix shall be limited to avoid excessive risk of thermal and shrinkage 3 cracking. However. type 2. This margin should be used as the current margin only until sufficient data are available to satisfy (1) or (2) above.Section 6 . which must be based on the satisfactory results of these preliminary tests. or 15 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. whereas Portland cement. or 7.2 Ready-Mixed Concrete Ready-mixed concrete as defined in BS 5328. The time of such introduction shall be recorded on the delivery note together with the weight of the constituents of each mix. 20 or 15.2. unless a longer time is agreed by the Employer. either at the Site or at the central batching plant. may be used only after the Employer‘s explicit written approval to replace the type V cement. Such approval shall be subject to the execution. Where there are insufficient data to satisfy (1) or (2) above. with their anticipated average strength. or 3.

the Contractor shall furnish the following data.2m these proportions shall not exceed 10%. 20. bearing the name of the brand and manufacturer and the number of the consignment. The cement shall be delivered to site packed in sealed bags or proper containers. The W/C ratio shall always lie in the range of 0. of which there shall be 20 to the ton.6.2. The Bidder shall indicate on the schedule C the brand name. If delivered in bulk an approved type of cement silo shall be used. from the cement stored on. Each consignment of cement shall be brought to the site in sufficient time to allow any tests to be carried out before the cement is used.2.6% of the weigh of cement. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for deliveries to be made sufficiently frequently to ensure freshness and in sufficient quantities to ensure that there is no suspension or interruption of the concreting work at any time. delivery arrangements shall be to the Employer‘s approval and each delivery must be accompanied by a manufacturer‘s test certificate. (1) Petrological group of rock Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . Appropriate use shall be made of approved admixtures to simultaneously meet the requirements for W/C ratio and workability. The approximate weight of the cement shall be legibly marked on each bag. Before supplying cement to Site or receiving ready-mixed concrete. The Contractor may use cement delivered in bulk. obtain for him the manufacturer‘s test certificate for any consignment as soon as possible after delivery. Each consignment shall be stacked separately so as to permit easy access for inspection and a record shall be kept so that each consignment may be identified. ground granulated blast furnace slag as per BS 6699 or EN 197 or micro-silica may be incorporated in the mix. the Bidder/Contractor shall submit to CEB. or delivered to the site.3 Test Certificates and Samples All cement shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with the requirements of the appropriate specification. Proportions of slag shall normally not exceed 60%. the Employer reserves the right to take samples and order any additional / retests in accordance with BS EN 196-7 : 1992. In mix designs with an emphasis on durability. 20. The Contractor shall not use cement varying from that used in the preparation of trial mixes until any further trial mixes required by the Employer have been made and tested and shown to comply with the specification. the manufacturer's statement of Specification and test certificate together with date of manufacture of any cement to be used.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification W/C ratio. The above restriction shall be waived if the proposed aggregate is proved without doubt to be nonreactive.6. BS 4450 and ASTMC 186. for items thicker than 1. under supervision. The Contractor shall not place the order for cement before the Employer‘s approval is obtained. The floor of the building shall be at least 150 mm off the ground and an air space shall be left between the floor and bottom layer of bags. For every 50 tones of cement delivered to site and whenever required by the Employer the Contractor shall take samples. when required by the Employer. Storage shall be arranged so that the cement is used in order to delivery.4 Aggregates Before the Employer can approve any aggregate source. BS EN 196-6. All cement shall be obtained form the same source for any particular part of a structure.269 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .36-0. The cement shall be tested to determine the total alkali content in accordance with ASTM C114-69 (Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement) or BS 4550: Part 2 The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall be calculated from the formula given in BS 5328 part 4 The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall not exceed 0. manufacture and source of the cement which he proposes to use in the Works and the method of delivery. Cement in bags shall be unloaded under cover and stored in a well-ventilated and weatherproof building used exclusively for this purpose. The Contractor shall. those of micro-silica shall not exceed 8%.45. The Contractor shall test such samples as specified in this document.

The weight of the clay and fine silt fraction (smaller than ASTM sieve No. irrespective of the origin of the chloride. (5) (6) Where quarries with aggregate from bedrock. Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until.32% by weight of cement in the mix. in the opinion of the Employer. such as in BS 812. The soundness of all aggregates shall be proved by a sodium sulphate test in accordance with ASTM C88-73.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) Rock type within the group Shape Surface texture Silt content Grading curves Specific gravity Impact value Water absorption Soundness Salt content Alkali reactivity The fine and coarse aggregates shall comply with BS 882. The sources for all aggregates shall be approved by the Employer. 200) shall not exceed 5% by weight of coarse aggregates or 10% by weight for fine aggregates. The apparent specific gravity of aggregates as determined by an approved test.1% by weight of chlorides (as NaCl) and coarse aggregate more than 0. Should these figures be exceeded the aggregate may still be considered acceptable in this respect provided the total sodium chloride concentration is not greater than 0. The aggregates shall be stored at mixer positions in such a manner that intermingling of different sizes and types of aggregates is prevented. Rigorous initial physical inspection is essential.03%.Section 6 . especially limestone of the Dolomite type. and shall be tested in accordance with BS 812.270 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate shall not exceed 5% as measured in accordance with BS 812 or similar standard.5. Los angles abrasion shall not exceed 37%. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. it has drained sufficiently to ensure proper control of the water/cement ratio. The Chemical Requirements for aggregates shall be: (1) (2) (3) Fine and coarse aggregates shall not be potentially reactive with alkalis. The stockpiles are to be protected from rubbish or windblown dust. Physical Requirements for aggregates shall be as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) The weight of voided shells in fine aggregate shall not exceed 5%. salt. from which the loss over 5 cycles shall not exceed 10% for fine aggregates or 12% for coarse aggregates. the rock shall be checked for surface alteration to hardpan. Such rocks are also prone to other undesirable characteristics including pockets of clay. Fine and coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 0. shall not be less than 2. This may affect the surface for well over a meter depth and result in salt concentrations near the surface. chalk or other friable material. Fine aggregate shall contain no more than 0. Heaps of fine aggregate shall be capable of draining freely.5% by weight of acid soluble sulphates (as S03).

The machines shall have a large water storage tank with a gauge or that a predetermined quantity of water can be injected direct into the mixer drum.6.1 Sampling and testing The Employer shall have the right to request the Contractor. The total water in the mix shall not exceed the amount used in the trial mix. to draw samples of aggregates from stockpiles on the Site or any other location to be indicated by the Employer. mortar and grout shall be clean. The Contractor shall allow for the whole range of tests to be carried out.2. at any time. The Contractor‘s designs and drawings shall show clearly the characteristic strengths. and permissible deviation proposed for each grade of concrete to be used. due account must be taken of the water contained in the aggregates.6.6 Admixtures Admixtures shall not be used without the approval of the Employer.2.6.5 Water The water used for making concrete.6. good workability and high strength. 20. The amount of water shall be sufficient to ensure through hydration.2. At least 7 weeks before concrete construction is programmed to commence the Contractor shall submit for approval all the details of concrete mix designs for each proposed grade of concrete.4. 20. Such testing shall include those tests form BS 812 as are considered useful by the Employer for comparison with the results of the initial set of tests but the Contractor shall allow for the full range to carried out.6. Testing is to be carried out at an independent laboratory approved by the Employer or else on the site in the presence of the Employer‘s where approved by the. In computing the quantity of water to be added.7 Plant The concreting plant shall be suitably in type. The Contractor shall carry out frequent tests to the satisfaction of the Employer to check the relationship of the strength of concrete cured under site conditions to that cured under laboratory conditions.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.6.271 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The water should comply with the requirements of SLS 522. 20. The plant shall be maintained regularly and stand by plant shall be available to avoid any delay in the progress of the works.2.9 Mixing All concrete except where specifically permitted by the Employer in writing shall be mixed in weigh batch mixing machines. vegetable or organic matter or any other dexterous substance in suspension or solution. The mix water shall be continually monitored for salt content and the concrete mix designed accordingly to limit total salt content. The strength requirements for each grade of concrete proposed in the design shall be proven by means of preliminary trial tests as specified in BS 5328 and BS 1881. The dry concrete ingredients shall be mixed until a uniform colour is obtained after the addition of the water the concrete shall be mixed for a further 4 minutes or until a uniform colour is achieved. fresh and free from injurious amounts of soil. For routine sampling and testing from an approved source the rate shall be sample per 50 cubic meter of aggregate to be used or sample per month whichever is greater. For each new source of aggregate and for each class of aggregate to be used sampling and testing shall be done at the rate of six samples and set of test for each new source and each new class.2. capacity and design for its purpose. The minimum cement content and the maximum free water-cement ratio shall be in accordance with BS 8110 and BS 5328.8 Concrete Strength Requirements All concrete mixes shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 5328 and BS 8110 as designated on drawings approved by the Employer. 20.2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The performance of the plant and its disposition shall be to the satisfaction of the Employer. All sampling and testing shall be in accordance with BS 812 or to American standards when no appropriate BS exist. Before the use of any admixture can be approved the Contractor must prove by trial mix procedures that the concrete will in no way be adversely affected even when twice the recommended dose is batched. No concrete construction may be commenced until this data is approved by the Employer.Section 6 . 20.

the Contractor shall carry out a series of workability tests on the preliminary trial mixes required elsewhere in this Section.2.2. after which it shall be used as the standard for that grade. The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position and in such a manner as to avoid segregation displacement of the reinforcement. alignment and suitability of the containing surfaces. concrete shall not be placed unless the Employer is present or he has previously examined and approved the positioning. the cleanliness. free from honeycombing. The Employer shall be given 24 hours notice in order that he may check the work. Except where otherwise directed. Where chutes are used to convey the concrete. surface crazing or excessive dusting. if necessary. 20. fixing and condition of the reinforcement and of any other items to be embedded. The mould shall be filled in the presence of the Employer with concrete of the same mix and batch from which the preliminary test cubes are made and shall be compacted in the same manner with the same equipment as are proposed for the Works. be repeated with modified mixes until the appearance of the concrete after striking the mould is acceptable to the Employer. or such other procedure as approved by the Employer. Upon arrival at the place of deposition the concrete truck driver must present to the Employer a chit from the concrete batcher stating (a) the grade of concrete.10 Workability The concrete shall be of such consistency that it can be readily worked into the corners and angles of the framework and around reinforcement without segregation of the materials or bleeding of free water at the surface. segregation or loss of ingredients.5 meters except with the approval of the Employer. within one hour of mixing.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The contractor shall take all precautions to the satisfaction of the Employer to protect the concrete from the injurious effects of the elements. in the opinion of the Employer. formwork or other embedded items. Concrete shall not be allowed to fall freely more than 1. The formwork shall comply with the requirements of this Specification for formwork. their slopes shall not be such as to cause segregation and suitable spouts or baffles should be provided to obviate segregation during discharge.6. other embedded items and formwork. When in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours. in the Specification or as directed by the Employer. (b) the workability (c) the aggregate size (d) type of cement and (e) time of batching of the concrete. In addition the Contractor shall supply for each of the grades of concrete a section of framework complete with reinforcement fixed in position and generally representative of the sections commonly to be employed in the Works. which is uniform. approval shall again be obtained from the Employer. to prevent segregation damage and distortion of the reinforcement. are inferior to the standards laid down in later clauses in this section. immediately before the placing of concrete. caused by impact. The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on approved drawings. In order to satisfy the Employer that adequate for the requirements of the Specification. or less as directed by the Employer Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be clean and free from standing water.6. Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the area between construction joints. When specific workability is called for a check it shall be maintained by measuring slump at the rate of one test for each 10 cubic meters of concrete or three tests for each day of concreting. On striking the framework it shall present a face.11 Transportation The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the Works by means that shall be approved by the Employer and which shall prevent adulteration. Placing shall be continuous between specified or approved construction joints. 20. The capacity of this trial section of formwork shall be at least half a batch of concrete but in any case not less than 1/4 cubic meter. If concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval being given. and ensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing.272 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Where pneumatic placers are used the velocity of discharge shall be regulated by suitable baffles or hoppers where necessary. This procedure shall. All small concrete pours shall normally be carried out in the late afternoon unless otherwise permitted by Employer. and the adequacy and condition of plant. The samples to be tested shall be obtained from the batches used for the preliminary test cubes. These tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881. and which shall not.Section 6 .

13 Construction Joints Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints.12 Compaction 0 0 The concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the layer. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Horizontal joints above sprays or openings. They shall be inserted at such distances apart or applied in such a manner as will ensure that the concrete being placed. Sufficient vibrators in serviceable conditions shall be on site so that spare equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns. no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours. contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided. or displace the reinforcement or other embedded items. Care shall be taken to prevent offsetting of the joint and to ensure water-tightness.6. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer. It shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer when the time shall be within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to the mix and within 20 minutes of discharge from the agitator. Unless otherwise directed by the Employer. All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass.Section 6 . Over-vibration. against the joint. Vibrators shall not keep damage to formwork or other parts of the structure. approved power driven vibrators of the immersion type shall be used.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification depending upon the mix. it shall be compacted with the assistance of vibrators. when deposited. this discontinuity shall form a construction joint. It shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign matter and laitance and washed with Water immediately before placing the fresh concrete. Construction joints are to be made only along a horizontal or vertical plane except that in the case of inclined or curved members they shall be at right angles to the principal axis. Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 1 and 10 hours after compaction. type of cement and weather conditions. surface laitance or leakage through formwork.2.2. which has set. Except where otherwise agreed by the Employer.000 cycles per minute and external vibrators not less than 3.273 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . causing segregation. Where vibrators of the immersion type are used. the whole surface shall be thoroughly roughened. Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10. When work is resumed adjacent to a surface. Floors joints in the floor system are to be located at or near the quarter points of the span in slabs and beams. When not indicated on the drawings the following generally rule shall apply: Joints in columns are to be made at the underside of floor members and at floor levels. The joints shall in every way satisfy the requirement of the Employer.000 cycles per minute. which shall be well compacted. Walls Vertical joints away from corners. Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. except where otherwise instructed. 20. shall be avoided. Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids. and be fully detailed on drawings prior to submission for approval. Haunches and column capital are to be considered as part of and continuous with the floor or roof. Whenever the placing of the concrete is discontinued other than at the exposed faces. Successive layers of the same lift shall be thoroughly worked together.6. Vibrators shall penetrate the fully depth of the layer and where concrete is placed over previously placed concrete not more than 4 hours old the vibrators shall enter and revibrate that layer to ensure that successive layers are well knitted together. shall have a temperature of not less than 5 C and not more than 32 C. When trucking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation. Concrete. the position and arrangement of which shall be indicated on the drawings and approved by the Employer. so far as is practicable. 20. concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compact depth not exceeding 450 mm where internal vibrators are used or 300 mm in all other cases. without displacing them. It shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork and around reinforcement and other embedded items.

274 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . which shall consist essentially of 66% of 200 penetrating bitumen blended hot with 14% light creosote oil and. drying winds.6. before any Concreting work commences. 20. filled and pointed with a resilient liquid polysulphide polymer sealant to the manufacturers instructions.2. they shall be held securely horizontal and perpendicular to the joint during Concreting. rain or running water. upon the sequence of placing concrete and the positions of vertical and horizontal joints. Where the fibber board is exposed it shall be cutback for a depth of at least 2 cm from the chambered edge.1 meter in width may be left at 6 meters intervals. prior to the commencement of Concreting. Expansion joints shall be filled with bitumen impregnated fibber board to full depth and width. when cold. shrinkage gaps of up to 0. the curing membrane shall be applied immediately after removing the formwork. the shrinkage gaps shall not be concreted until concrete on all sides is at least 7 days old.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. a cement wash shall be applied to the existing concrete faces. Immediately before new concrete is poured.2. The Contractor shall put forward his proposals for curing concrete to the Employer for approval. Plastic caps used in expansion joints shall be rigid and securely fixed to the dowel to prevent the ingress of concrete during casting of the slab. On vertical surfaces. All dimensions must be shown on Drawings prior to submission for approval. Where dowel bars are indicated on the Drawings forming part of a joint. or other approved compound. The temperature of curing water shall 0 be same as the concrete + 5 C. cold.Section 6 . 20. The protection shall be applied as soon as practicable after completion of placing by a method to be approved by the Employer. Where necessary the reinforcement in existing concrete shall be exposed. General concrete shall be wet-cured for at least 7 days with a further 4 days of dry protection. 20. slabs in excess of 6 meters in length and/or width and wall exceeding 6 meters in length shall not be poured in one operation and subsequent adjacent bays shall not be concreted within 7 days. The infilling will be permitted to use as permanent formwork only for second casting. In general. As an alternative to alternate bay construction.6. Dowel bars shall be plain mild steel bars conforming to BS 4449.15 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing Existing concrete shall be broken out as described or directed and scrabbled to form a suitable key for the new concrete.17 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather In hot weather the Contractor shall present for the Employer‘s approval his proposals for dealing with the following problems: (1) (2) (3) (4) Reduced workability Excessive Plastic shrinkage Rapid strength gain but possible low final strength Rapid drying-out of concrete Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. They shall be straight and coated with approved bond breaking compound. Expansion joints shall be fully detailed on construction drawings before submission for approval.16 Curing Concrete shall be protected during the first stages of hardening from the harmful effects of sunshine. brought to the consistency of paint by the addition of 20% solvent naphtha. No concrete shall be allowed to become alternately wet and dry. cleaned and bent to its correct shape. The 2 maximum area of any pour shall be 100 m . In the light of experience the Employer may consider the above pour size limits to be excessive and will have the authority to reduce them.6. The packing used within the cap shall be an inert.2. New reinforcement shall be securely wired to the existing.6. whether shown or not on the drawings. compressible material.14 Construction Bays The Contractor shall agree with the Employer.2.

Concrete batched off-site shall be transported to site by truck mixer. With the approval of the Employer admixtures may be employed to retard setting time or enhance workability. No concrete shall be batched until formwork is ready and all reinforcement fixed in place approved by the Employer. All testing facilities on site shall be calibrated at regular intervals in the presence of the Employer. test and give his opinion on such materials. Half of them shall be cured under site conditions in order to ascertain the relationship between site-cured samples and lab-cured samples. and the temperature of every batch of concrete shall be recorded as it is deposited at the work place. the aggregates and 80% of the required water may be batched off-site with the cement and remaining water being added on site not more than 15 minutes before the pour commences. against which the concrete is to be placed. 20.17.6. 20. If the proposals are not approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with facilities for materials testing on Site. and surface finishing. do not meet with his approval shall not be used in the work.2.6. Due to rapid stiffening in hot weather all clean-up operations such as application of resin cure membranes and dust reducers. The facilities may be those normally used by the Contractor.3 Curing All concrete shall be covered for at least 14 days after placing and kept continuously wet for the initial 7 0 days.2.2. and whenever deemed necessary by the Employer. Alternatively. the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below. Air temperature shall be measured every two hours.17.17.1 Mixing Aggregate stockpiles shall be shielded from the direct rays of the sun or cooled by spraying with water. shall be shielded from the rays of the absorption by the surfaces of water from the fresh concrete.2 Placing Placing shall not commence until sufficient standby pumps and vibrators are on site to cope with breakdowns. three samples shall be taken Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. For the first 10 days that a particular grade of concrete is produced. Air shall not be permitted to circulate between concrete and curing materials. 20.275 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Employer shall have the right to order that any materials which. The area of each concrete pour frontage shall be kept to a minimum and suitable means shall be provided to avid premature stiffening of concrete placed in contact with hot dry surfaces. The number of slump tests shall initially be twice that normally required.6.Section 6 .6. including reinforcement. Testing methods are to be in accordance with the relevant BS or ASTM standard except as approved or requested by the Employer. the materials which rejected by the Employer shall be immediately removed from the Site by the Contractor. or induce early bleeding etc.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. 20.2. or where there is a lapse of two weeks or more between successive pours of the same grade of concrete.17. Where necessary the surfaces. the Contractor shall double the number of test cubes made.2. and water tanks and pipes shall be insulated to ensure that the temperature of concrete when deposited 0 shall not exceed 32 C. Concrete transporters shall be kept as cool as practicable.5 Works Test Cubes Before commencing any Concreting work the Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed testing regime for the Works concrete.4 Testing Initially.6. shall follow closely behind final tamping. In hot weather concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 300 mm and internal mechanical vibrators shall be used. The Contractor shall have the right to sample.17. The mixer rotating only after it arrives on site. The temperature of curing water shall be within 5 C of that of the concrete. etc. If after this.

When this is not forthcoming the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below. stored and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. 200x200x120mm thick. which . Concrete temperature is to be recorded at the arrival of concrete at Site. Testing of concrete delivered to or mixed at site shall include:  One set of at least six (6) test cubes for every 20 m or every daily pour of concrete or as directed by the Employer. 75mm diameter and 75 mm long. and – if requested . (2) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic strength minus. for water penetration testing (to DIN 1048) 4 Nos. of their grade and of all tests cubes. with the provision that at least one sample shall be taken on each day that concrete of that grade is used.the last two cubes of each set may be tested in case of failure of a cube.276 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 3 N/mm for concrete of grade C20 and above 2 2 2 2 2 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. After the initial 10 days. 2 N/mm for concrete of grade C15 and below (i. The laboratory must provide evidence that its equipment and procedures comply with BS EN 10002 and BS 1881.The calibration test reports of testing machines and details of the qualifications of all laboratory staff shall be submit for approval if requested by the Employer. from which at 28 days 3 Nos. shall be taken for water absorption testing (to BS 1881) 3 Nos. Reports of all tests made shall be supplied direct from the laboratory to the Employer within 24 hours of the cubes being tested. 3 3 - The cubes shall be made. one being tested at 7 days and the remaining two at 28 days. The rules of compliance for Works cubes are different to those for Trial Mixes.    Slump tests are to be executed for every truck load supplied during concreting and as per the Employer's instructions. provided concreting is proceeding.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification on each day and three cubes shall be made from each sample.may be carried out through the concrete supplier: Rapid test for chlorides Rapid test for sulphates A Trial panel. 20. cubes. the Bidder/Contractor shall prepare the following for durability testing. The tests shall be carried out in a testing laboratory approved by the Employer.17. 150 mm.after approval of the Employer .Section 6 .) characteristic strength = 20 N/mm ). Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Employer at weekly intervals or upon request by the Employer.2. Three cubes shall be made from each sample. cores and other specimens taken from them. blocks. The Employer on site shall have the authority to stop all further concrete work until acceptable test results are forthcoming. Compliance with the characteristic strength shall be assumed if the conditions given in both (1) and (2) are met: (1) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds the specified characteristic strength by 3 N/mm for concrete of grade C20 and above (i.6. Bimonthly or for every 750 m of concrete cast. Cores.e. The compression strength tests shall be carried out after seven (7) days for the first two cubes of each set. Two shall be tested at 7 days and the other at 28 days. for rapid chloride permeability testing (to AASHTO T-277) /curing of samples shall be as close to the current Site practice as possible. Up-to-date records shall be kept by the Contractor at the Works of positions in the Works of all batches of concrete.6 Compliance of Works Test Cubes with Specification When submitting proposed testing regimes the Contractor shall also detail his proposed acceptance criteria for the Employer‘s approval. and after 28 days for the second two cubes of the set.e. samples of designed mixed shall be taken at the reduced rate given in Table bellow.) characteristic strength = 15 N/mm ). cured.

The forms shall conform accurately to the required shape. cylindrical core specimens shall be cut from the hardened concrete in the Works for the purpose of examination and testing. Such action is subject to the Employer‘s satisfaction and approval. the specimens shall be made available for examination of the Employer. The materials and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be approved by the Employer. Prior to the preparation for testing. The Employer shall approve the cutting equipment and the method of doing the work. 20. Where compliance of cement content is assessed from the results of analysis tests on fresh concrete. Any holes left after the removal of ties shall be filled unless otherwise directed by the Employer with concrete or mortar of approved composition. the cement content shall not be less than 95% of the specified minimum or more than 105% of the specified maximum. The Employer also makes recourse to such non-destructive means of testing as ultrasonic pulsing and Schmidt rebound hammers. subject to the tolerance specified and to the standards of finish of hardened concrete as specified later this Section. The top of the shuttering shall be suitably covered to prevent entry of excess grout. If the specified requirements have not been met the Contractor shall propose such remedial action as may be required. When concrete is to be vibrated. All formwork for pits. Compliance criteria remain the same irrespective of varying rates of sampling of the same grade concrete in different structures. The Contractor‘s proposed method for the construction and fixing of the formwork for bolthole pockets shall be submitted to the Employer for approval before construction.2.6. materials used for curing. in the opinion of the Employer. it is a sample will be considered not to comply with the specified requirements. the concrete fails to meet the specified requirements in other respects. If no satisfactory remedial measures are proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer then the Employer shall order the removal of all work not complying with the Specification at the Contractor‘s expense.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 2 N/mm for concrete of grade C15 and below. position and level. Testing of the core shall be in accordance with approved standards.277 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Employer may request the Contractor to provide sample panels of formwork for approval. As and where directed by the Employer. The use of mould oil or other material to facilitate this shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. the cement content shall not be less than 90% of the specified minimum or more than 110% of the specified maximum. 2 The quantity of concrete represented by any group of four consecutive test results shall include the batches from which the first and last samples were taken together with all intervening batches. When a test result fails to comply with [2). etc. ducts and holding down boltholes must be so constructed that it can be easily collapsed to facilitate withdrawal after the initial set of the concrete. The whole or part of the ties shall be capable of being removed so that no part remaining embedded in the concrete shall be nearer the surface of the concrete than the specified thickness of cover to the reinforcement. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the concrete in that part of the Works of which. only the particular batch from which the sample was taken shall be at risk. special care shall be taken to maintain the stability of the formwork and the tightness of the joints during vibrating operations. All forms shall be removed without damage to the concrete. Where a minimum or maximum cement content of a designed mix is specified and compliance is assessed by observation of the bathing or from auto graphic record. If the strength of the specimen is less than the appropriate specified minimum crushing strength or if. at the Contractor‘s expense.18 Formwork Forms shall be so designed and constructed that the concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly compacted. Before proceeding with similar work the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his approval details of action proposed to ensure future concrete to be placed in the Works would comply with the Specification.Section 6 .

who may require the Contractor to carry out a test pour. brickwork or other approved material as directed. (4) Type F. The use of internal metal ties shall not be allowed. Plastering of defective concrete. sheet metal or any other suitable material. plywood or metal panels may be used if they are free from defects likely to detract from the general appearance of the finished surface. the formwork shall be face with plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6. which shall be free of board marks. In the absence of cube test results the minimum periods before striking form work for concrete made with ordinary Portland cement shall be according to the table 6. Whenever possible joints between sheets shall be arranged to coincide with architectural feature.3 This finish is for surfaces prominently exposed to view where good appearance and alignment are of special importance. but fines. which will prevent the loss of grout when the concrete is vibrated. except that in the case of minor porosity in the surface the Employer may approve a surface treatment by rubbing down with cement and sand mortar of the same richness as in the concrete. The formwork may be struck when the concrete has in the opinion of the Employer attained a compressive strength of not less 2 than 10 N/mm or twice the stress to which it will then be subjected whichever is the greater. (3) Type F. Unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel panels will not be permitted for Type F.3 finish. Joints between the board and panels shall be horizontal and vertical unless otherwise directed.Section 6 .1 (1) Type F. The sheets shall be arranged in an approved uniform pattern.278 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Solid timber must not be used for forming holding down boltholes. Permanent forms shall be constructed of slabs or blocks of precast concrete. The time at which the formwork is struck shall be Contractor‘s responsibility. (2) Type F. polystyrene or other method approved by the Employer. Formwork shall be constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed without disturbing the soffit forms and if props are to be left in place when the soffit forms are removed these props shall not be disturbed during the striking. The joints shall be arranged and fitted so that no blemish or mark is imparted to the finished surface. All joints between panels shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise directed. which are permanently exposed to view but where the highest standard of finish is not required. sills.18.1 Formed Finishes for Concrete This finish is for surfaces against which backfill or further concrete will be placed. surface discoloration and other minor defects shall be remedied by methods approved by the Employer.2. To achieve this finish. Formwork shall consist of sawn boards. natural stone. Suitable joints shall be provided between sheets to maintain accurate alignment in the plane of the sheets. The Employer may at his discretion order the defects to be cut out and made good. Any defective concrete finish will be rejected.4 This finish is identical to Type F. using the proposed bolthole former. Alternatively. window heads or drainage in direction of the surface. expanded metal. as a means of making good will not be permitted. Bolthole former may be made of plywood. This finish shall be such as to require no general filling of surface pitting.3 except that internal metal ties are permitted. The Employer shall be informed in advance when the Contractor intends to strike any formwork. 20. This treatment shall be made immediately after removing the formwork.2 finish shall be faced with wrought and thickened board with square edges arranged in a uniform pattern.6 of BS 8110.2 This finish is for surfaces. They shall be fixed to the structure by approved means and the joints between them shall be made tight with mortar or other means of preventing leakage. Forms to provide a Type F. Such slabs or blocks shall have an exposed surface of the quality shown on the Drawing sand as specified. The Contractor shall state precisely on his plans which of the type of finished described hereunder he intends to use in the various locations.

2 This is a floated finish for surfaces of beds and slabs to received mastic paving or block or tile paving where a hard smooth steel-trowel led surface is not required. 0 0 Mild steel shall be bent at temperatures in the range 5 C to 100 C. exposed surfaces of engine and plant foundations and in the vicinity of holding down bolt chases.Section 6 .2. The Contractor shall arrange for bending equipment suitable for bending both mild steel and intermediate grade bars. 20.2.18. beds.2 (1) Type U. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.19 Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be one of the following: (1) (2) (3) (4) High Yield steel bars complying with BS 4449 (or 4482) or Hot rolled or cold deformed bars complying with BS 4449. by an approved method. Mild steel and high tensile steel are to be stored separately.2 and U. oil.279 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor shall provide any chairs or other subsidiary reinforcement necessary to keep the reinforcement in its correct position. Reinforcement shall be stored clear of the ground on sufficient supports to prevent distortion of 0the bars. grease. The finishing operations shall consist of levelling and screeding the concrete to produce a uniform plane or ridged surface. The surface shall be troweled under firm pressure and left free from trowel marks.3 Surface Treatments Where concrete is to be treated with sodium silicate or a similar dust preventive coating this must be carried out within 14 days of the Concreting of the foundation and be applied in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions. subsequent stages of construction.3. Bars greater than 32 mm diameter will not generally be used. loose rust.18.6. paint or any material which may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement. mortar earth. (2) Type U. The concrete cover over such subsidiary reinforcement shall not be less than that over the reinforcement generally. bonded concrete. 20. Reinforcement may be bent on site.6. surface bed and slabs to receive thin flexible sheet and tile paving bedded in adhesive and seatings for bearing plates and the like where the metal is in direct contact with the concrete. (3) Type U.1 Uniformed Finishes to Concrete This is a screeded finish for surfaces of roads or of foundations.2. The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced by being walked upon during the placing of the concrete or other operation. Care shall be taken that the concrete is worked no more than is necessary to produce a uniform surface free from screed marks. Floating shall be done by hand or machine. It is also the first stage for finished Type U. mill scale. Steel reinforcing bars shall be kept clean and shall be free from pitting. Welded steel mesh reinforcement complying with BS 4483 or similar approved. surplus concrete being struck off by straight edge immediately after compaction.6. The shapes of the bends and lengths must comply as specified on the Drawings and Bending Schedules as approved by the Employer. or approved by the Employer. One tension test and one bond test shall be made for each lot of 50 tones of less supplied for the permanent Works. The Contractor shall supply the Employer with a certificate for each consignment from the steel manufacturers showing that the steel meets the requirements of the Specification. High tensile steel shall only be heated or welded when the manufacturer given written guarantees as to its subsequent performance. or which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. topes of walls. or alternatively off the site.3 This is a hard smooth steel-trowel led finish for surfaces of concrete paving. Troweling shall not commence until the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess laitance from being worked to the surface.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. copings and other members exposed to weathering. topping or cement mortar beds to receive paving and on exposed surfaces or paving where superior finish is not required. slabs and structural members to be covered by backfill.

g. cranks and other shapes of reinforcement shall be to the dimensions specified.6.6. Minimum compressive and flexural strengths of the non-shrink grouts shall be as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Unless otherwise stated on the Bending Schedules all bars shown will be dimensioned in accordance with the national or international standard to be approved by the Employer. flats. Concrete cover to all reinforcement (including stirrups) shall be as specified in BS 8110 and BS 8004.21 Prevention of Corrosion below Ground The Contractor is to ascertain whether or not the sub-strata contain any corrosive qualities. Bending of reinforcement shall be carried out round a former having a diameter of at least four times the diameter of the bar. e. They shall not impair the finish on the concrete no cause the formwork to deform locally.2. The Contractor shall provide fully dimensioned bending Schedules giving the location and bending of every bar shown on the drawings. 20.2. Before plant grouting commences the Contractor shall check that the proposed methods and materials are acceptable.6. only an additive approved by the Employer is to be incorporated in the concrete mix in the proportions according to the manufacturer‘s recommendations. which will have a deleterious effect on reinforced concrete. the Contractor shall submit full details to the Employer for his approval. Adjoining sheets of mesh shall overlap by at least 300 mm. washer plates.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Mesh reinforcement shall be fixed flat in the works over the whole of the areas indicated on the approved drawings. They shall be rigid. Bends. non-gaseous grouts. which shall be either cementitious or epoxy grouts. anchor angle. Drawing showing the foundation bolt arrangement shall be approved by the Employer and sent to site with the foundation bolt assemblies and template in good time for being built into the foundations.e. 20. and that no special resin additives or similar are necessary. British Standard 4466.22 Grouting of structural steel works and plant No grouting shall commence without the written approval of the Employer. Fabric reinforcement shall be delivered to site only in flat sheets. an increase in volume due to oxidation) shall not be allowed. may be used. otherwise all bars shall be truly straight.Section 6 . Areas of fabric reinforcement shall be net with no allowance included for laps or waste. The bending dimensions shall comply with BS 4466 unless otherwise specified on the bending schedules. the cover should never be less than the diameter of the main bar or nominal maximum size of the aggregate. The Employer shall have the right to select at any time samples of steel reinforcement for testing in accordance with the relevant approved standard. At least 12 weeks before and grouting is due to commence.2.20 Foundation Bolts The foundations bolts shall be mild steel or High strength steel of an approved manufacture and shall be fitted with tubes. If such conditions are evident. 20. 20.2. Cover blocks used for the correct positioning of reinforcement shall be of a type approved by the Employer. Grouts deriving their non-shrink properties from metal oxidising (i. Reinforcing bars shall be tied together at every intersection using 16 SWG soft pliable annealed steel wires.280 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . In addition. Loose small pieces of fabric shall only be used where they are essential for fitting into small confined parts of the Works.6. double nuts etc. Steel templates shall be used to position the anchor bolts.23 Grout under Base Plates Only non-shrink. inert and capable of supporting the reinforcement in its correct position with the required cover without deforming. Immediately prior to Concreting all reinforcement shall be wire brushed to remove all wind-blown contaminates such as salt.

1054.1 General Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to― Specifications for Bored and Cast in Situ Reinforced Concrete Piles ―. The exposed edge of the grout or concrete shall be chamfered or bull nosed with a steel trowel where so indicated on the drawings.6. Colombo-07.24.6. The formwork shall to be struck without the approval of the Employer.24. The hessian shall be wetted at least twice in each 24 hours. the Contractor shall complete the grouting under the steelwork and/or plant base plates. On receiving confirmation from the Employer that the final alignment check has been completed. On the site from which the grout is to be poured forms shall be at least 150 mm high in order to provide a head to placing. the cubes size shall be 100 mm. Design work shall be certified by a qualified person(s) and information and calculations relevant shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer Earthwork as well as all concrete and reinforced concrete work shall be as specified under the relevant items. The static analysis/pile design shall normally be in accordance with DIN EN 1536. 20.281 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Part 3 (epoxies). published by the Institution of Construction Training and Development (ICTAD) Sri Lanka. BS or the American Standards ACI. All cements are to be in accordance with either DIN 1164. 4014 and 4026.first Edition April 1977 ( ICTAD Publication No. The clearance space between the formwork and the base plate shall normally be 75 mm but exact clearance shall be decided on the site for each operation. DIN 1045. or BS 8004.ICTAD/DEV/16 ). 123. ensuring that the grout completely fills the space and that it is thoroughly compacted and free from air pockets. Grout or concrete shall be cured by covering with moist hessian for a period of five days. Cement to be used for concrete piles shall be selected according to the recommendations of the soil investigations report. 'Moderately Sulphate Resistant Cement' (MSRC-type II to ASTM-C150) based on the recommendations of the Geotechnical authority and approved by the Employer. shall be used. DIN EN 196.) This Article applies to the foundation design/static analysis in view of necessary piling works. and normally this will to be given within 24 hours of grouting. 1055.6. BS 8110 and other applicable DIN or British Standard. ( This publication can be purchased at the Institute located at ―Sawsiripaya‖. Edge formwork shall be fixed around each base plate generally to the level of the top of the plate unless specified to the contrary by the Employer. Any grouting that in the opinion of the Employer is defective shall be cut out and replaced at the Contractor‘s expense.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Type of grout Consistency Compressive strength N/mm 7 days 28 days 65 >80 2 Flexural strength N/mm 7 days 8 25 2 28 days 10 >25 Cementitious Epoxy Flowable High flow 45 80 Compressive strength shall be in accordance with BS 1881. or under certain conditions. Exposed surfaces of grout and concrete beneath items of plant shall be prepared and given two coats of oil and alkali resistant coating.24 Foundations and Piling Work 20.Section 6 .2.2 Materials All materials to be used for the piling works shall meet the requirements as specified below.2. Sulphate resistant Type Cement (SRC). and the flexural strength shall be tested in accordance with BS 4551. ASTM C150. Part 116 and BS 6319. Wijerama Mawatha. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Piling works shall be based on the findings of the soil investigations and/or information given in writing by the Employer. 20. Grout or concrete shall not be placed when the air temperature or the 0 temperature of the concrete is lower than 5 C. Piles shall be designed for the required design loading (uplift. compression and horizontal loads) in line with the approved foundation design.2.

In vertical direction. from the main pile and thus obtain sound and uniform concrete. All installation procedures shall be subject to the Employer 's approval. cut off level. a detailed description of the equipment. Piles shall be installed accurately in their required locations. where casing removal by vibrator will affect the existing services/buildings. length. DIN 4014. length of permanent casing and details of any obstructions encountered. penetration into bearing strata. providing a concrete cover of 75 mm. Permanently installed shells shall be cut off at the pile cut-off level.2. Each cast-in-situ pile shall be filled with quality concrete up to at least 60 cm above the cut-off level of the pile to allow for complete removal of slush and other foreign matters etc.24. cast-in-situ (bored) piles with temporary casing method as per DIN EN 1536.6. The records shall give detailed information on the type. DIN 1054. The description shall include equipment specifications. top concrete level. depth from piling plat form level to toe.2. Other materials shall only be used upon explicit approval of the Employer.24. Concreting of each pile shall be a continuous operation and no (cold) joints shall be permitted. the reinforcement has to be placed. the Employer may approve the rotation method for casing removal. length of temporary casing.4 Execution of Work Generally. 20. loading capacities. Other methods of casing removal shall not be permitted. location. and the concrete in the head of the pile shall be carefully broken away from the reinforcement which shall then be cleaned Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. BS 2004 and BS 8004 will be permitted for execution.24. Immediately after drilling.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. ensuring a minimum concrete cover of 75 mm.Section 6 . likewise during drilling above the ground-water table. The Bidder/Contractor shall submit to the Employer before start of piling works. The heads of concrete piles shall be incorporated with in-situ concrete pile caps. piling platform level related to zero level. In such cases.3 Reinforcement Only deformed high tensile steel shall be applied. Casing shall extend to a sufficient depth below the stiff/solid strata to adequately seal off the unstable soil material. Casing pipes shall not be deepened by means of jetting. Each pile shall be installed to the correct lengths as shown on the drawings or when the pile reaches the socket in the recommended bearing strata.0 m above the ground water table when filled boring tools are extracted. and the pile has to be cast. Records shall be submitted in duplicate to the Employer every following working day by 09 00 HRS. except in some cases/piles. additional water has to be filled up during the drilling. piles shall not vary more than one (1) percent from the perpendicular. date driven. or as directed by the Employer. materials and procedures that will be used for the piling work. diameter. Concreting is to be done through tremie-pipes or equivalent devices to prevent segregation. and test apparatus. pile shall not deviate more than 75mm in any direction at piling platform level. 20. Spacers to be used shall be of the concrete type only. Pouring concrete into the pile shall be carried out using the tremie pipe method as well as the concrete pump. Daily records of each pile shall be produced by the Bidder/Contractor.6. protective devices. The hydrostatic head pressure shall be at least 1.6. Pouring concrete into pile shall only be stopped once complete removal of slush and other foreign matter has been ensured. detailed installation procedures test procedures. including catalogue data manufacturer's published specifications. In plan. In the vicinity of underground water. as well as references concerning previously completed piling work. temporary casing pipes shall penetrate ahead of the removal of soil. and the pile has to be cast. The continuous flow of concrete shall be ensured by using pumps or other suitable means to be approved by the Employer. Temporary casing shall be removed by vibration method.5 Drilling Operation Where required.2. etc. the reinforcement has to be placed.282 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Immediately after the drilling. Installation procedures shall be such that adjacent piles shall not heave or move laterally. date of casting volume of concrete consumed.

24.5 m below the lowest water level anticipated. At least two load cycles have to be made during type testing.0 m below ground surface.6.2. 20. which he intends to use for execution of all the piles. the first reaching from 0% to 100%. Load steps shall be worked out in line with the latest guide lines of the ICTAD. Load steps shall normally not exceed 25% of the design load. 20. permanent casings shall be provided. 20.5 m below ground level.0 m below finished ground surface.2.6 Permanent Casings For soils in areas classified as category 5 according to BRE Digest 363.24. Loads shall be applied in the direction of the resultant force acting on the pile. This procedure shall be applicable for areas not affected by tidal effects.24.8. with a minimum of 2 tests for each pile type. The results of the tests shall be submitted in a format for approval by the Employer. Type test piles shall not be utilised within the works and shall be treated in such a way that they do not obstruct the further works. Type tests (preliminary pile tests) are to be loaded to either 250% of the anticipated design load. or to the ultimate bearing load.1 Loading Details for Pile Tests The Bidder/Contractor shall execute the test piles using the same equipment. b) Piling Foundation Routine Test (Working Pile Test) The Bidder/Contractor shall perform routine tests on at least 2% of the working piles. For areas affected by tidal effects. DIN 4014 and DIN 4026 as well as ISSMFE recommendation on "Axial pile loading tests". At least two load cycles have to be carried out.2. casing will be extended to become 3. Other (working) piles shall not be installed until the load tests have been conducted and the results evaluated. The piles shall be considered as acceptable in case the obtained load-settlement/heave. The following types of tests are to be considered: a) Piling Type Tests (Preliminary Pile Test) Prior to piling commencement the Bidder/Contractor shall install two test piles of each type of pile proposed. the first reaching from 0% to 100% and the second . Should the ground water table be at 2. The pile shall be cut off at the specified level and the concrete surface must be horizontal. The top portion of the pile reinforcement shall be protected with PVC pipes.after off-loading to 150% of the design load.6. The permanent casing length shall be 2. static loading. Part 1.24.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification and straighten as shown on the Drawings or as directed.6. casings shall project 0. The loading tests of piles shall be in accordance with the procedure outlined in DIN 1054. polythene sheet wrapping or equivalent means to prevent damages to the epoxy coating of the reinforcement when trimming the pile heads. and the second . For routine tests (working pile tests) a loading to 150% of the design load is required.7 Basics for Test Piles The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the suitability of the pile foundation selected. plane and free from all loose aggregate. The test piles should be of the same length and same type as the piles proposed for the project.to 250% of the design load.283 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 .2.after off-loading .6.8 20.diagrams do not indicate movements beyond permissible limits as per Bidding Documents or the relevant Standards. whereby following load steps/cycles shall normally be applied: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

284 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the following information:       Layout of test equipment and description Pile identification.25 S ≤ 0.25 S ≤ 0. diameter and length Sketch of soil conditions and ground water location Complete records of level.25 S ≤ 0.25 S ≤ 0.25 OFF LOADING OFF LOADING S ≤ 0.Section 6 .25 S ≤ 0. 1h.25 S ≤ 0. 8'. settlements shall be recorded after 30".25 S ≤ 0. or until 2 hours have elapsed. among others. Movement of the pile head shall be less than 0. with a precision of 1/100 mm. On every increment.25 S ≤ 0.24. preferably in tabulation Graphs of load and settlement/heave versus time Graphs of settlement/heave versus load Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.8. 2'.25 S ≤ 0. horizontal movements have to be measured by two dial gauges only.2 Test Reports Reports on pile testing shall be submitted to the Employer and shall contain. load cell and dial gauge readings against date and time throughout the test. 15'. 30'. 20.25 mm within that hour.6.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table of Test Conditions OAD (%) 0 25 50 75 100 50 0 0 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 200 150 100 50 0 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 15 min 15 min 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 24 hr 15 min 15 min 15 min 15 min 1 hr S ≤ 0. whichever occurs first. before the application of the new load increment.2.25 S ≤ 0.25 OFF LOADING OFF LOADING OFF LOADING OFF LOADING TIME SETTLEMENT CONDITION Vertical movements have to be measured by means of at least three dial gauges. 4'.

Driving tolerances shall not be more than one per cent out of plump and not more than 5 cm out of place. th Evaluation/Conclusion The settlement of preliminary piles shall not exceed 1/10 of the pile diameter after final test load is applied. warped. Piles shall not be driven until the excavation has been completed to the grade required for footings or pile caps. In case. In case.Section 6 .2. A record of the driving of all piles shall be kept by the Bidder/Contractor. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The records shall show the pile type. as well as sample graphs indicating defects or doubts on the integrity of the pile. Debris from pile cut-offs and damaged piles shall not be buried in required fill under slabs at grade or in required embankments.6. and the main reinforcement bent to form an anchorage into the concrete of the pile cap. which will hold the pile firmly in position and in axial alignment with the hammer.24. In case. to the elevation required. safe design load shall be scaled down and accordingly. closed by a removable steel shoe at its bottom end.1 Driving of Piles Pre-Cast Driven Piles Driven piles shall be executed as per DIN 4026. the Bidder/Contractor must revise the pile layout at that location and in addition. location. If any driven pile shall have been raised by the subsequent driving of any adjacent pile or by any cause. The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of location of each pile and the grade of the off-cut. to the required depth into the ground.9. two more piles shall be selected and tested near the failed location. damaged or imperfect in any way shall be removed and discarded. the Bidder/Contractor must investigate the matter and accordingly.9 20. Care must be taken in breaking out concrete that no damage is done to the lower section Driven Cast-In-Situ Piles Driven Cast-In -Situ Piles are created by driving a temporary tubular steel casing. Any piles that are split. Driving of each pile shall be continuous without intermission until the pile has been driven to refusal or to total penetration for the last ten blows not exceeding the design penetration unless otherwise approved by the Employer. penetration for driving stages and the results of any tests.2. and a signed copy submitted to the Employer daily.6. and Residual settlement shall not exceed 6mm after final test load had been applied. The refusal shall be with HILEY formula or any other dynamic formula subject to the approval of the Employer. The soil is thus both displaced and compacted and the void for the pile created. the Bidder/Contractor may scale down the safe design load. the concrete heads of the piles are to be stripped off. the binders removed. buckled. pile must be redesigned. The settlement of Working Pile shall satisfy the following two conditions: • • Total settlement shall not exceed 12mm. but shall be disposed by the Bidder/Contractor off the Site of the work. Alternatively. length. the pile shows higher settlement.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification   Remarks concerning any unusual occurrences during the loading of the pile Test reports on integrity testing of piles shall include clear sample diagrams of acceptable signals for comparison purpose. the raised pile shall be re-driven to its original penetration and resistance. 20. Driving shall be done with fixed leads. Pile driving will not be allowed before the Employer receives from the Bidder/Contractor the following reports and calculations for approval: • • • Calculation of refusal Proposal for the minimum penetrated depth of the piles through the ground Complete information about the driving and the hammers to be used. the pile shows higher settlement. pile layout of the concerned area/ building shall be revised. Piles shall be driven in the exact locations shown on the drawings to be submitted by the Bidder/Contractor and approved by the Employer or as may be directed by the Employer.24. Reinforcing and concreting for the pile shall be done in line with the guidelines for cast in situ bored piles and the casing shall eventually be withdrawn. After driving. and the pile layout shall be revised with the modified pile capacity.285 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the additional tests also do not show satisfactory results.

Weight and fall of the hammer/ram and the number of blows for each 25 mm of penetration shall be recorded. 20. Hammer blows shall only be applied along the line of the pile axis and the impact surface shall be perpendicular to the pile axis. Driving of each casing shall be a continuous. the Bidder/Contractor shall propose remedial actions or design adjustments accordingly. Set.5 Driving sequence and risen piles The sequence of pile driving shall minimise any possible detrimental effect on other piles in the vicinity. No concrete is to be placed once the bottom of the casing has been lifted above the top of the concrete. If any pile has been displaced or indicates a higher than permissible uplift.6.9. flexible hose.3 Driving of Casings Casings shall be driven at adequate spacing to prevent damages to piles. Dynamic evaluation and analysis shall be provided where requested by the Employer. i. Vibrating casing extractors must only be used if their application has been accepted in the method statement. the reinforcement cage shall be installed. which have recently been cast and thus still contain un-set concrete. tremie-pipe or by bucket. Sufficient information shall be provided on the efficiency and energy of the driving equipment.9.9.286 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Concreting shall be facilitated by pump.24.24.2. The length of driven piles shall be at least as per the design schedule.6. not interrupted operation.4 Set Set limits shall be defined based on the working load.24. helmet..e.6 Extraction of casing Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted.2.2. etc. Once the casing has been driven to the design depth.2 Material Details Casings shall be free from distortion and shall be strong enough to be driven without damage.9. Reinforcement details shall be as for bored cast in situ piles. as per the approved method statement.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.6.24. the achieved penetration during driving and the temporary compression after completion of driving shall be measured and recorded for each pile.6. The set shall be recorded either as the number of blows resulting in a penetration of 25 mm or the penetration in millimetres achieved by imposing 10 blows. Any change in pile lengths shall immediately be brought to the Employer attention. The permissible uplift of any pile due to the driving of other piles shall be limited to 3 mm. factor of safety soil condition and driving equipment. When the casing is being extracted. Regular measurements (at least in weekly intervals) shall ensure that no adjacent piles have been effected detrimentally during piling work. Concrete shall be topped up as necessary while the casing is extracted until the required head of concrete to complete the pile in a sound and proper manner has been provided. it has to be ensured that the casing is finally driven to the specified design depth and driving resistance. a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the casing to ensure that pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated.Section 6 . After unavoidable interruptions during driving. If the design capacity cannot be reached. as well as the "Set".24. load tests have to prove the design capacity of such piles. The shoe shall provide a watertight joint with the casing during driving. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2. shall be in good condition. Shoes to be used (and later remaining in the ground) shall be made from sufficiently strong and durable material.2. During measurement of the "set". 20. 20.9. Concrete quality and consistency shall be provided in line with guidelines for cast in situ piles. 20.6. exposed parts of the casing shall not be damaged or deformed and the dolly.

2.24. equipment‘s to be protected lie within areas 0 bounded by lines drawn from the earth wire at 30 to the vertical in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the earth wire. pin type joints between clamps and supports.2 Materials. Down conductors shall be distributed around the outside walls of the building with a maximum distance of 20m and all main metal parts near the down conductors shall be connected there to. Air terminations: Earth terminations: against corrosion Ground rods: Tinned copper 8mm diameter Copper 8mm diameter with lead coating minimum 1. The necessary stays. the integrity of all driven piles (100%) is to be checked successfully by means of sonic pile testing equipment.287 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The results of the tests shall be submitted for approval by the Employer.3. at least. fittings and anchors shall be provided under this Contract including. 20.3. No part of the roofs shall be further away than 10m from the nearest horizontal protective conductor. An air termination network shall be installed on the surfaces of the roofs.) over roadways for breaker or transformer removal.Section 6 . 20. or stranded galvanised steel wires of not less than 7/3.1 Copper Copper and copper alloys shall comply with the British Standards and approved standard relevant to the form and use for which the material is intended. All connections and joints shall be installed mechanically and electrically effective (clamped.6.2. In addition. if required. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. vent pipes railings. be provided with test joints in such positions that periodic testing is easily possible. and after installation of the working piles.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Approved earthed screens. Earth wires shall be held in clamps with free. one ring of ground conductors shall be installed and interconnected. For every building. gutters. flying stays and additional masts to ensure clearance of not less than 9144 mm (30 ft.1 Lightning Protection for Buildings A complete lightning protection system for the buildings shall be constructed in compliance with BS 6651.7 Basics for Pile Testing after Driving The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the suitability of the pile foundation selected as detailed for bored piles above. Connections shall be made of copper strip of 30mm x 5mm cross-section between the overhead earthed screen wire and the main earthling system at each support. The layout of the earth wires shall be such that generally. Connections shall be provided for the terminations of the earth wires of the overhead lines including bimetal connectors where necessary.5mm cross section and connected to provide low impedance paths to earth. Each down conductor shall.2mm thick as protection Tinned copper weld or stainless steel 3000x30mm diameter Potential equalizing bars: tinned copper 500x50x5mm All support and connections shall be made of best suitable materials.9. and steel constructions etc. The screens shall be of stranded hard drawn copper wires of not less than 35sq. Salient points of the structure such as air conditioning installations. 20. screwed or welded) to suit the local climatic conditions. Copper components shall be placed so that neither in no case shall they come in direct contact with aluminium nor shall it be possible for water or consideration to pass off copper on to aluminium. 20.mm total cross section.3. shall be provided to protect the equipment from direct lightning strikes. shall be connected to the network.

drains shall be subjected to an air test. All drainage design.4. Glazed ware shall be of best quality type and manufacturer shall be approved by the Employer. Drinking fountain outlets shall be clearly labelled. materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with approved standards and Codes of Practice. which. Overflow pipes shall be taken from the tops of cisterns and set to discharge in a prominent position. space and ladder shall be provided for maintenance of overhead tank. shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. After completion. Pipe to header tank shall not be less than 25 mm bore and pipes to wash basins and WCs shall be not less than 15 more bore. shall be provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fittings.2 Water Pipes PVC pipes shall generally be used throughout of an approved type.4 Waste Water Sewerage System 20. in which a pressure equal to 150 mm of water is to be applied for a period of five minutes without dropping below 125mm head. All fittings shall be individually isolated with a stopcock in the water supply pipe. shaded from direct sunlight shall be provided. Taps and all visible metal fittings shall be chromium plated. sink. or equivalent standard. Fittings shall be securely fixed in an approved manner. Pipes to wash hand basins and WC cisterns shall be 15 mm bore and supply pipes to header tanks 25 mm bore. 20. 20. A. Any defects revealed shall be made good at the Contractor‘s expense. Each basin and sink is to be provided with water. Cistern supporting brackets shall be screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards. PVC pipes provided should be black unplasticised PVC complying with BS 4660 or 5481.4. Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to the relevant ICTAD specification.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. which shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. An overhead tank with a capacity of 2.Section 6 .1 Water supply system The Contractor will be responsible for the provision and installation of a water supply serving the buildings.4.4. heavy-duty quality. basin etc. or alternatively. Water Supply and drainage system and the distribution network shall be designed by a qualified person and relevant drawings shall be submitted to the approval of the Employer The Contractor shall provide public water service An underground tank (2 m ) with proper insect tight venting & automatically controlled pump main stopcock shall be constructed to raise the water to a shaded roof tank Every tank or cistern shall be provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fitting. Concrete beds and casings to drain pipes under roads shall be of week concrete and of 150mm minimum thickness. They shall be secured to the structure.0 cubic meters.. They shall be provided with 35mm bottle traps with brass cleaning eye and lining soldered on. all sanitary fittings shall be left in a clean and proper condition.4. Elsewhere the pipes and ducts shall be laid on and surrounded with approved granular material. Every cistern.288 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. similar PVC fittings. 20. On completion of the works.1 Drain Pipes 3 Drainpipes shall be PVC pipes and fittings of approved manufacture and shall be jointed with sleeves or sockets. Overflow pipes from WC cisterns shall be 20 mm bore.3 Sanitary Fittings Wash hand basins shall be supported on cantilever brackets cut and pinned to the walls or screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards.4 WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE SYSTEM 20.4. Plastic piping and fittings shall be permitted where adequately protected or where risk of impact is small.

maintenance cost and volume of sludge produced by the plant should be as low as possible.4. area with non-vehicular access to be medium duty. a soak away pit shall be covered by a concrete slab. The design shall be to recognised standards such as BS 6297 and approved by the Employer. (ii) (iii) (iv) Running cost.4.4. The tank shall have separate fresh air inlet and outlet pipes and be provided with access openings. (i) Design.Section 6 . shall be constructed in an agreed position. Maximum limits of standard of effluent discharge shall be complied with the standards specified by the ―National Environmental Protection Act of 1985 as amended by Act of 1988‖. 20. depending on the type of subsoil.4.4. to a soak away pit or either through evapour-transpiration beds or up flow filter. Effluent from the treatment plant shall be discharged to the nearby Ela with the limits to comply with accepted standards. either evapour-transpiration beds or uniflow filters shall be provided. 20. debris. The effluent from the tank shall discharge. where main drainage is not available. for effluent disposal from the tank. Supply and Install a suitable compact treatment plant for the treatment of the above Influent. maximum BOD & COD. to ensure that every length can be rodded effectively in the event of a blockage. etc. The noise levels are required to be maintained as follows during the construction stage and operational stage.4.1 Sewerage Treatment Plant General It is required to treat the Black & Grey water from toilets and waste water from NSCC building to CEA Standards. (v) (vi) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Treatment Plant shall be designed to suit the average. The system should be such that the number of electrical pumps and other electrical equipment used should be a minimum to reduce power cost.2 Manholes Manholes shall be generally in accordance with BS EN 752.4. The proposed system should be able to operate on both automatic & manual modes.3 Septic Tank & soakage pit The septic tank. A grease trap will be provided (by others) for the kitchen waste before discharging in to the collection system.4 20.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. Great care shall be exercised in setting out and determining the level of the drains. (a) At boundary of the land during the construction stage – at or below 60 dB(A) during the day (between 0600hrs to 1800hrs) and at or below 50dB(A) during night (between 1800hrs to 0600hrs). with access through a manhole cover. superfluous cement and other obstructions during and after lying and shall be provided with eyes. Galvanised malleable cast iron step irons are to be provided and built in as work proceeds.4. inspection covers. where a soak away will not function efficiently.289 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All drains shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients as described. In impermeable type soil.4. All drains shall be kept clear from earth. Manhole covers shall comply with BS EN 124 and in roadways or heavily loaded areas shall be heavy duty. The system shall be properly ventilated by continuing the soil pipe above the highest branch upwards above roof level.

for each tank.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (b) At boundary of the Premises during the operational stage – at or below 55 dB(A) during the day (between 0600hrs to 1800hrs) and at or below 45dB(A) during night (between 1800hrs to 0600hrs). Sizing of pumps with their characteristic curves indicating how the pumps were selected. Annual estimated running cost including the breakdown of such cost. The bidder shall also furnish with the bid any other terms and condition applicable for the operation and maintenance of the plant for 5 years which shall be compatible with the requirement given above. The Bidder shall indicate the modes of failure which are likely to take place under the environment in which the proposed works will perform including the performance under extreme events and how they have been taken into consideration in the design. In order to overcome an accidental failures additional equipment necessary for the continuously operation of the treatment plant should be kept as spare. Give length. The application for such Licence shall required to be submitted to the relevant Authority one month prior to commencement of the operation of the industry. the oxygenation capacity of the aerators and how they were selected should be indicated. breadth and height. repairs and spare parts. (f) Method of Sludge disposal and this process shall require to be looked after by the people who will undertake the maintenance & operation.Section 6 . (viii) The following details should be submitted along with the proposal (a) Design Assumptions and sufficient hydraulic calculations to demonstrate how the tank sizing was done. The details of previous experience of similar nature and testimonials from the respective Employers regarding their current performances. The bidder shall furnish the yearly cost of operation and maintenance of the plant and monitoring of plant performance for a period of 05 years after the free operation and maintenance period of one year. detention time. The Employer shall bear the cost of electricity. Attach relevant catalogues. (b) (c) (d) (e) (g) (h) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Attached relevant catalogues. and water and provide accommodation to the Contractor‘s operator. The yearly cost shall include the cost of chemicals. labour cost of removal and disposal of sludge outside the premises at suitable location and any other incidental expenses. velocity etc. If aerators are used. (vii) An Environmental Protection Licence shall require to be obtained for the proposed system to carry out operation in accordance with section 23(A) of the National Environmental Act No.290 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 47 of 1980 and its amendments.

spares and other materials and equipment.4. The system may be discharged to natural watercourses or to soak ways as approved.1 Surface water drainage system General Embankments and cuttings shall have drainage facilities at their top or bottom.4.4 Tests on Completion The selected Contractor shall carryout all the required tests as directed by the Employer to obtain the approval of the relevant authorities before handing over of the plant to the client. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE OF ROADS 20. A surface water drainage system covering the switchyard shall be installed. 20. 20.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.2. Open ditch for storm water 1/200 Other drainage systems 1/400 The minimum velocity shall exceed 0. special attention must be given to the travelling of vehicles delivering plant.1 General The Contractor shall ensure that the roads are levelled graded.4.2 The bidder shall give due consideration in pricing that the Client may at his discretion delete the scope of work for 5 years operation and maintenance work before or after the award of the Contract. The sectional shapes have to be determined by the water carrying requirements and must have the most favourable hydraulic qualities so as to remove the drain water in a proper manner without settlements. vegetable or other injurious matter. and surfaced with Macadam or concrete to ensure that the finished road is suitable for the maximum foreseeable imposed loads expected from vehicles transporting the various items of plant and electrical equipment.75 m/sec. 20. Surface water from roofs of buildings shall be drained to down pipes connected with the site drainage system. 20. normally provided for this nature of work.5. The formation level shall be formed with uniform cross-falls of about 1 in 300 in the same direction as the natural drainage path of the surrounding Area Provision shall be made for the disposal of surface water from roads.4.Section 6 . In detailing the layout of the roads and parking areas.4. 20. wood.291 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Bituminous Wearing courses shall be suitable for the extreme soil condition in the area and shall comply with an authoritative and approved standard appropriate to the locality of the work. with a factor of safety of 1. Sealing grit will be applied as required. Broken stones and aggregates shall consist of hard crushed natural stone or gravel of approved sizes. stores.4.4.4.4.5. The details and grading of the aggregate and the binder contents shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.5.3 Guarantee A minimum five years guarantee period for the equipment and maintenance of effluent quality from the plant to the required standard (after commissioning of the plant) is required. rubbish. It is to be ensured by the contractor that the surface water discharge does not cause any damage to the properties through which such water is discharge up to natural water courses as approved.5 20. Material for the hard-core shall consist of natural stone broken to pass a 100-mm ring.2 Gradient Drains shall have the following minimum gradient.4. properly compacted with appropriate rollers. The number of runs and out falls and pipe sizing must be sufficient to cope with the severest precipitation.4. It shall be free from dust. Manholes shall be provided at each place where changes in direction take place and at not greater than 80 m canters.4.

Road shall properly graded.2 Sub-Base After the formation has been properly made. Access roads shall be either concrete or bituminous wearing surface roads.3 Prime Coat 2 For the prime coat 0. They shall be reinforced to the approval of the Employer.5.5. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5. The reinforcement shall be in the middle of the covers with 25mm cover to the edges.2 Road carriage way 20. All drains.1 Preparation of Formation The upper 300-mm of the formation shall be of suitable soil. The formation shall be rolled to an even and uniform surface.2 Access road and structures Access roads are the roads within the switchyard area. inspected and passed by the Employer before any road work is started. to define the limits for vehicular access.5 Roadsides In-situ concrete kerbs or pre-cast concrete kerbs set on a concrete bed are to be laid on each side of the roads. cable ducts and other necessary work below road formation level shall be completed. compacted and surfaced.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. Concrete paving slabs shall comply with a relevant approved standard.3 Approach road The contractor shall construct or upgrade the approach to site that is the road from the main road to the gate of the site to allow heavy vehicles to site. 20.5.2. which shall be parallel to the finished surface of the road or path.2. 20. Trench covers shall be a minimum of 50 mm thick and provided with handles or holes for lifting purposes. 20. Trench covers shall comply with the relevant standard as approved. Where concrete covers are required for trenches crossing roads.5. Roads shall be surfaced with concrete or macadam as approved by the Employer. The Contractor‘s proposed site layouts shall allow for 5 m wide vehicular access to the control building and electrical equipment. for installation and subsequent maintenance. 20.2.1 Structures for approach roads.5.3. 20.3.2. Structures for approach roads (culverts.2. 20.5 lit/m liquid bitumen shall be sprayed on in accordance with the best practice fitting to the locality of the work. sewers. gravel or rock or mixtures thereof shall be laid in accordance with standards to give a finished thickness of at least 200 mm or as described or directed. The minimum flat form width shall be 7m and road shall surface with macadam or concrete. All the cable trenches crossings canal crossings road side constructions shall be considered.4 Bituminous Surface Two layer of bituminous surfacing of 75 mm overall thick